Most - Often - Needed

1949
Television
Servicing In ormation

Complied by

M. N. BEITMAN

VOLUME TV -3 SUPREME PUBLICATIONS

$3 CHICAGO
En
z
0
ic4
0
a)
ra4
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

FOREWORD

This new 1949 Television manual includes

factory data on popular and interesting sets
of the more important manufacturers. The
material included has been selected with care,
so that it will not only give specific in-
structions on the service of receivers covered,
but will also serve as a course of study in
modern television. You will note that various
techniques of servicing are presented under
different receiver descriptions and the receiver
circuits incorporated in this manual are so
varied as to give you a complete cross section
of modern television receivers. Sets of other
makes not included may be almost identical to
units covered by this manual, while identical
tuners have been used by several manufacturers
in a great many models.
'Our sincere thanks is extended to the tele-
vision set manufacturers whose products are
described in this manual. It is the cooperation
and courtesy of these firms that made possible
the publication of this manual.

M. N. Beitman
July 1, 1949
Chicago.

Copyright, 1949, by
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS.
Chicago, Illinois

All rights reserved,

including the right
to reproduce or quote
the contents of this
book, or any portion
thereof, in any form.
2
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Table of Contents

Manufacturer Set Number Pages

Admiral Corp., Chassis 30A1, 30B1, 30C1, 30D1, 4H1 . . 5 to 18

(See page 5 for detailed list of models)

Bendix Radio, Models 235M1, 235B1, 325M8 19 to 26

Du Mont Laboratories, Model RA -105 27 to 64A

Garod Electronics Corp., Models lOTZI, lOTZ3, lOTZ4,

12TZ1, 12TZ3, 12TZ4, 12TZ6, 15TZ6 .
. . . 65A to 68
General -Electric, Model 809 69 to 74
General -Electric, Models 805, 806, and 807 75 to 76
General -Electric, Model 814 (810, 811) 77 to 92
The Hallicrafters Co., Models T-64, 509, 510 . . . 93 to 98
The Magnavox Co., CT -214, CT -218, CT -221 99 to 110
Motorola, Models VT105, V191106, VT107 (TS-9,A,B,C,D) 111 to 130

Philco Corp., Models 49-1040, 49-1076, 49-1077,

49-1240, 49-1278, 49-1279, 49-1280 131 to 150
R.C.A. Victor, Models 8T241, 8T243, 8T244 . . . . 151 to 1&P
Sentinel Radio Corp., Models 400 -TV, 405-TVM . . . 161 to 162
Sentinel Radio Corp., Models 401, 402, 406 . . . . 163 to 168
Stewart -Warner Corp., Models AVT1, AVC1, AVC2
(Code 9054-A, -B, -C) . . 169 to 177A

Zenith Radio Corp., Chassis 28F20, -Z, 28F21, 28F22,

Models 28T925, 28T960, 28T961, 28T962, 28T963 .177 to 193A
. .

3
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO 23, ILLINOIS
3727 W. 13th STREET
Aug -Often -Needed Supreme
RADIO DIAGRAM MANUALS
Repair quickly all new 1949 sets as well as
O 1949 older radios. This big volume contains clear-
VOLUME 9 ly printed, large schematics, needed align-
Price $2.50 ment data, replacement parts lists, voltage
values, and information on stage gain, loca-
tion of trimmers, and dial stringing, for almost all new 1949
sets. A worthy companion to the eight previous volumes
used by over -130,000 shrewd radio servicemen. Large size:
1 inches. Manual style binding. Only $2.50, postpaid.
DIAGRAMS FOR PREVIOUS YEARS
Speed up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster,
better, easier, save money and time, use these SUPREME
most -often -needed diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low
cost (only $2 for most volumes) you are assured of having
for every job needed diagrams and other essential repair data
on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service. Clearly printed
circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful service hints
are the facts you need. Average volume has 194 pages, large
size 81Ax11 inches. Manual style binding.
O 1948 0 1947 0 1946 0 1942
VOLUME 7 VOLUME 6 VOLUME 5
VOLUME 8
$2.00 $2.00 $2.00 $2.00
D 1941 rj 1940 0 1939 1 92 6- 1 93 8
VOLUME 4 VOLUME 3 VOLUME 2 VOLUME 1
$2.00 $2.00 $2.00 Price $2.50
INDEX for the above manuals.. .250
0 1948 TELEVISION SERVICING
New, giant volume of practical televi-
sion factory data covers every popular
make. Includes Admiral. Belmont. Du
Mont, Farnsworth, G.E.. Hallicrafters,
Motorola, Philco, RCA, Sonora,
Stromberg-Carlson, and other models.
Gives description of circuits, pages of
test patterns, response curves, align-
ment facts, oscilloscope waveforms,
voltage charts. service hints, many di-
agrams in the form of extra -large
double -spread blueprints, test points,
everything to bring you up to date
and make you expert in T -V repairs.
Large size: 8J4x11 inches, manual style binding,
flexible covers, price only $3,
O 1947 F.M. and TELEVISION Manual
Manual of instructions for trouble -shooting,
repairing, and alignment of all popular 1947
F.M. and Television sets. Covers every pop-
ular make; includes F.M. tuners. AM -FM
combinations, and all types of T -V receivers.
This is the material you need to adjust and
fix any modern F.M. and T -V set. Data on
192 large pages, 8%511 inches. Sturdy.
manual style binding.
Your price, only $2.
E-] How to Modernize Radios
Cash in by improving and modernizing all out
of date radio sets and cabinet's. Practical job -
sheets with schematics and phdtographs make
the work easy.
Size 811x11 in. Price only
0 Simplified Radio Servicing by
Comparison Method
Repair radios in minutes instead of hours.
Revolutionary different COMPARISON tech-
nique permits you to do expert work on all
radio sets. Most repairs can be made without
test equipment or with only a volt -ohmmeter. Many simple,
point-to-point, cross-reference, circuit suggestions locate the
faults instantly. Plan copyrighted. Covers every radio set-
new and old models. This new servicing technique presented
in handy manual form, size 8Mx 1 I inches, 84 pages. Over
1,000 practical service hints. 26 large, trouble -shooting blue-
prints. Charts for circuit analysis. 114 tests using a 50 re-
sistor. Developed by M. N. Reitman. New edition.
Special price, at your jobbers or postpaid I.
0 STEWART-WARNER Manual . . . 500
O ARVIN DIAGRAM Manual 500
O GENERAL -ELECTRIC Manual
64 pages of popular circuits. 5),x8i inches 500
0 RADIO MATHEMATICS
Introduces and explains practical arithmetic
and simple algebra in connection with units,
color code, meter ,scales. Ohm's Law, AC,
ohmmeter testing, wattage rating, series and
parallel, capacity, inductance, mixed circuits,
vacuum tubes, curves, the decibel, etc., and
has numerous examples. Easy
250
to follow. Only
0 ADVANCED RADIO SERVICING
Use these 30 lectures in giant manual form to learn advanced
methods, hints, tips, and suggestions. Take advantage of
M. N. Beitman's 19 years of radio experience as presented
in these easy -to -follow, illustrated lectures. Every servicing
topic of importance. including F.M. and television. $3.
30 lectures, large size: 81/2'xl 1 inches, only
O POST-WAR RECORD CHANGERS
Service expertly all modern (1945-1948) record changers.
Includes every popular make. Just follow simplified factory
instructions to make needed adjustments and repairs. Hun-
dreds of photographs and exploded views. Large size: 8;4)(11
inches. 144 fact -filled pages. $1.50
Postpaid only
O PRE-WAR RECORD PLAYERS. .. .$1.50
O Practical Radio & Electronics Course
Here is your complete home study course of 53 lessons de-
signed to train any beginner to be an expert in radio and
electronics. Giant, 8Mx11 inches. 3% lb. volume, includes
all lessons, instructor's notes, test questions; $3.95
postpaid, only
0 RADIO SERVICING COURSE -BOOK
Here is your practical radio course of 22
easy -to -follow lessons. Wonderful for serv-
icemen who need more help. Review funda-
mentals, learn new servicing tricks, all I,,
about signal tracing, oscilloscopes, record-
ing, P.A., test equipment, and T -V. Just
like a $100.00 correspondence course.
Everything in radio servicing. With self -
testing questions and index. New 1949 edition.
Large size: 8%x11 inches Price postpaid, only $2.50
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
30A1, 3001, 30C1, 3001 and 4H1 CHASSIS
This SECTION applies to the following models:
4H15S or SN 4H137S or SN 4H167S or SN 30Al2
4H16S or SN 4H145S or SN 30A13 30B15S or SN
4H17S or SN 4H146S or SN 30A14 30B16S or SN
4H18S or SN 4H147S or SN 30A15 30B17S or SN
4H19S or SN 4H155S or SN 30A16 30C15S or SN
4H115S or SN 4H156S or SN 30C16S or SN
4H116S or SN 4H157S or SN 8C11 30C17S or SN
4H117S or SN 4H165S or SN
30A 14SA 8C12
4H126S or SN 4H166S or SN
30A15SA 8C13
NOTE: Some models (not listed above) in the "4H," "30B" and "30C"
series use other chassis numbers.
DIPOLE AUDIO I.F. RATIO SPEAKER
ANT. H.F. AUDIO AUDIO
OSC. AMP. DE7. AMP. -114. OUTPUT

L
-1114.
(2 STAGES) (AUDIO)
V201-2 V203 V204 V205

VIDEO I.F. VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO

R.F. AMP. MIXER AMP. DET.-D.C. CR.
AMP. -s.- OUTPUT TUBE
F (4 STAGES)
V301-4
RESTORER
V305 V306 V307

SYNC. SYNC. SYNC. HOR. HOR. HOR.

AMP. SEP. INV. SYNC OSC. ,-144 CSC.
DISCR. CONTROL
V401 V402 V403A V404 V405 V406

DIFFER- HOR. HOR. DAMPER

-E NT IATOR DISCHARGE OUTPUT V409
R425,C416 V4038 V407
Functional Block Diagram.

INTEGRATOR VERT. VERT. 9KV.

.11111. OSC. HOP OUTPUT POWER
R441, -2r3 SUPPLY
C428-9,30 V4I0 V411 V408

TUBE LOCATIONS TUNER

A1582
TUNER
94C9-2
TUNER
94C8-2

This power supply used

in "4H1" Telev.-Radio-
This power supply
used in 8C11, 8C12,
8C13 combinations and
is 0 i'96°1
0 64602
6J6
V903
000 00
613,46

V801
64G5

V802 V803
664 64G5

V101
6J6

V102
Phono combinations only. in all straight televi-
sion models. .6466 464U6
0 5512
OR OR
6A65
.6465 I

94C8 2 TUNER,
5511 1

OV302 A1582
A1582 TUNER,
6AU6 GAO I OR 9409-2 TUNER
0v 00301 I
USED HERE.

6AL5
V203 6AU6 ottl
0"6 V202
64U6
V402
V406 ar
V41005- HOW LIN.

7 V 40 0
V404
183GT
04081
064L50
/8016

RED WHITE WITH BLACK

ANOTHER 11336T/8016 (V412) HERE TRACERS a YELLOW TRACERS
IN 30DI CHASSIS.

* 30D1 chassis uses 6AG5 only. 30A1, 30B1, 30C1 chassis uses 6AG5 or 6AU6. Tubes not
directly interchangeable; see "Production Changes", paragraph 15, page 1-8.
t* 16" picture tube not mounted on chassis; mounted in separate assembly. Different 12"
pictures tubes used in 30C1 chassis.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
K AN DE
CONNECTOR
CAUTION
CLIP TEST LEAD TO
CHASSIS AND INSERT
, INTO ANODE WELL
CONNECTOR, TO DIS-
C CHARGE TUBE BEFORE
HANDLING
Fig. 5-14. Receiver Chassis, Top View Showing 10" or 12" Picture Tube
Models with 16" picture tube (30D1 chassis) have picture tube in separate assembly.
ION TRAP ADJUSTMENT
The double magnet ion trap (used with types 10BP4
and 12BP4 picture tubes) should be located with the
black (sleeve) magnet toward the tube base.
Alternate 12" picture tubes use a single magnet ion
trap, or no ion trap. The 16" picture tube also uses a
single magnet ion trap.
If no ion trap is required, do not use one. For
tubes with the single magnet ion trap, the blue (sleeve)
end of the magnet should be located at the left side of
the tube, viewing back of the chassis. The ion trap is ad-
justed by viewing its effect on a picture, pattern or
raster. Move the trap assembly back and forth with a
slight rotary motion. Adjust for brightest raster on
the screen. Reduce the brightness control until the
raster is barely visible. Adjust the focus control for
clearest trace lines and readjust the ion trap for maxi-
mum brightness. The final adjustment should be made
with the brightness control at the maximum position
at which good trace line focus can be maintained.
FOCUS COIL ADJUSTMENT
If the picture is not centered on the screen (Figures
5-15 and 5-16), it may be corrected by adjusting the
screws holding the focus coil assembly (see Figure
5-14 or 5-20). Should the focus coil require exces-
sive tilting to obtain proper centering, it may be
necessary to slightly orient (reposition) the deflection
6 yoke bracket.
HORIZONTAL
LINEARITY
L902
CENTERING
ADJUSTMENT
ION TRAP
M304
YOKE
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
When carrying out this adjustment, extreme care
should be exercised so that no abnormal pressure is
exerted on the neck of the picture tube.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
If picture appears tilted (Figure 5-17), loosen ad-
justment on top of deflection yoke and turn the yoke
for correct orientation and then tighten the adjustment.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY
ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjust height (Figures 5-18 and 5-19) control R449
(Figure 5-20) to just fill picture tube mask.
b. Adjust vertical linearity (Figure 5-21) control R455
(Figure 5-20) for best vertical linearity. Distance
AB should then equal DE; BC should equal CD
(Figure 5-23).
c. Alternate readjustment of these controls may be
necessary to obtain best vertical linearity. This is
due to control interaction.
WIDTH AND HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjust horizontal drive control R429 (Figure 5-20)
for best linearity. Distances FG should then equal
HK; GC should equal CH (Figure 5-23). Hori-
zontal drive control R429 should be as far clock-
wise as possible, consistent with good linearity.
b. If horizontal non -linearity (Figure 5-22) cannot be
corrected by horizontal drive control adjustment,
further adjustment can be obtained by means of
horizontal linearity control L402 (Figure 5-14).
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

30

al

AmmumsmallIMMIlowswwww

Fig. 5-15. Picture Too High or Too Low; Fig. 5-19. Too Much Height; Adjust HEIGHT
Adjust Mechanical Position of Focus Coil
Control

CENTERING 9KV LEAD

ADJUSTMENTS

ION TRAP
M304

300 -OHM i
BALANCED 9KV POWER SUPPLY
INPUT

L401 110V A C
RECEPTACLE
Fig. 5-16: Picture Too Far to Right or Left: M203
M301
Adjust Mechanical Position of Focus Coil V306 V307 V405 V406 WIDTH
(6AU6) (6K6GT1 (6J6) (6V6GT) CONTROL
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
LOW VOLTAGE GABLE
POWER SUPPLY
GABLE R455 R449 T401 R429 110V AC
LINE
4.
4:0 ...ill M303

VERT LIN. HEIGHT HOR LOCK

74.69 HOR. DRIVE

Fig. 5-20.Receiver Chassis Showing Rear Panel Adjustment Controls

For All Sets.
NOTE: Picture tube mounting arrangement for 10" and 12" picture tubes
only shown above. The 16" picture tube is not mounted on chassis.
Later production uses single cable arrangement for High and Low
Voltage Power Supply connections.

Fig. 5-17. Picture Tilted; Adjust Electromagnetic

Deflection Coil

Fig. 5-21. Non -Linear Vertically; Adjust

VERT. LIN. Control
Fig. 5-18. Lack of Height; Adjust HEIGHT
Control 7
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
(L402 has the greatest effect on the center of the
pattern.)
c. Alternate readjustment of these controls may be
necessary to obtain best horizontal linearity. This
is due to control interaction.
d. Adjust width (Figure 5 Na and 5-24b) control
L401 (Figure 5-20) until the best pattern just fills
the picture tube mask.
e. Center as per paragraph on "Focus Coil Adjust-
ment".
With correct horizontal and vertical linearity and
correct size adjustment, the circles in the test pattern
should appear round. The test patterns used by dif-
ferent stations vary. For example, the outer circle may
be cut off at A and E while points F and K are at the Fig. 5-24a. Too Much Width
edges of the picture tube mask (Figure 5-23). The four
small circles in the corners of the pattern illustrated
are not always used.

Fig. 5-24b. Insufficient Width

Fig. 5-22. Non -Linear Horizontally; Adjust
HOR. DRIVE Control
If more than one station is on the air when making
linearity, size and centering adjustments; check receiver
adjustment on all stations. This is necessary since all
TV stations are not perfectly linear at all times.
Tube aging may make horizontal linearity adjust-
ment impossible. In some instances this difficulty may
be overcome by changing the tap on damping resistor
R435 (located inside the 2nd anode supply shield).
After changing the tap on R435, readjust horizontal
linearity, horizontal drive and width controls as per
instructions. If correct horizontal linearity (and
width) cannot be obtained, refer to the trouble -shoot-
ing chart.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
If it is difficult to hold the picture in horizontal sync
(see Figure 5-5), proceed as follows:
a. Turn horizontal hold control R421A
on the front of the chassis to the extreme counter-
clockwise position.
b. Turn the horizontal lock T401 (Figure 5-20)
clockwise until the pattern falls out of synchron-
ization.
c. Then turn the horizontal lock counter -clockwise
until the pattern just falls back into synchronization.
d. Turn the horizontal hold control fully clockwise
and turn the channel switch to the next highest
channel, and then back to the original channel.
The test pattern should return in synchronization.
Should the pattern be broken up, slowly turn the
horizontal hold control counter -clockwise until the
picture just falls into synchronization. It should
not be necessary to rotate this control more than
25% to obtain synchronization and

H K

ot
E I

8 Fig. 5-23. Correct Width and Horizontal

Linearity
Figure 5-5. Horizontal movement;
adjust HORIZONTAL control.
 '..
-o -o uu
i,
-o
0 0
0
.,
>," o ..2
g
.. 4.
AA

-T,
g -5
CA
..c
> C) A
0
o
-.-
-z
c
SISSAHO ACI MOAB m
Ill
5
5 go
61 '
44
.5 .2
'5 re
0.-5
0 ,1:.,.,
2, o
g
u
-0 ...
o ...-.'
>0
ock
. . . ..
g
,.
xc "01
0
kl g
,f: +: ,.5:, .5
717075.11
L t.o"
7-... 8-,
V. v
g NI
.5
AA -"
el
{')
4.;
-'
I-.
at rc.)
------
>
"*.
`g
g
clla.) 01
:fel
a.,
vi
000 o .0 0 0°-
ii -0 -0 "0 7r -A ,...,
-
4
t
NI 7;;) Al
4)2-74
9, 6 .7
04 a)
o .._ 0 ,..., 0 7" 0 0. °A
5 ca.
8oo
. .3
ti >.
'd
.
uu Z ...' 2 "14' -5 '''' 2,4 g t',3
0° 0° 6,(3
, u" 000 VIZ 0
-
Q
0 .
0. c. a. 4, 5 ....., 16
,, ..-0- ...1
' -g g
vs
1- .4, >4.. 5 ;Ts'
st<tt..16t..7,... 0 4.4 > e4 00
iil zW al
0 a -4 .....°
4; 6 <60'1 0
0.0 OA tlo >, 2 . u 74 -o 00 0.
-
F.
,
-,..,

., ...,
; EE 0..CeE50..a E-p255 0
.-r 000
=dam
. .o .o 0 0. -'0 OtiNcj 11 .1
:1
00
Cg 1... 5 UUU-S g .. ,,.., ...g g
re
,,, 0-
u r. 11
FXF
r. LI 0
D
4...
o F
222 frg
2: t eg
,..,
. ON ON f.) e re','
11"2
++
i, 4.)
4, .7,. -0 ...y
E-,
o ct:Ii)
o ,o o4 UVUy 1.1
CI (3 .; 09. .- ...
.--4 g00on;
o° 2
0, 0.I 4)

,,./
2 20
u,

L.- .
2
ii,., 1...
g r, ..
4, .00000,-,
-5
E--.
000 000
:3; 4.",
N
Liel iii -5 iT :; o i, ,.. 00 4) co 5 3,.. u u u acs 000 '-' O. -0
t 3 1-. . t,. cr. a. Cr el ...-, = g
ra.0 t -eu g y°g
,
.t..1
00 bo ,.; .. u 5 EL,' ,4
In . 2 °' '''' g co 9 78
Goo 4.I
0/0di-t>..,u
4.1
i. ''.. ... 4-' `.
6.) ...N4
5
bp 0 00
0.)
0
C.)
5 4,
d. . V- ,0 N CO 0 7-g oo
Alv.w
2o ue p.,
E -F, 2,r;
ct 0.1 ...,
0.
4.e
Oa
.-CA u 80t ?.f,., a¢ < < -.L.<
0" oco
c'i
tto
era;Tz 1 ac
2 22 -`c.'1)u
. 0 1°' ',he
,...j
, r," , Erc:
, .5bo, ......s
1,-;
s..., g11 -0ci
`02, ,"
2 ,'
,,i o
.711. 10)
4 00
E
8, -4 8 .
0G- '
D. >,
74 .2, %d 0 0 1"
...4)222:38&ig' t4 0 :0 4
cd 5 g c..0.,g,n -'=.5. , F.
40 13
to co
CD "CI 11 i B E ,-,,
4, 0) 0,
tt, as E
E -2 8
ti."8 a.' ' .sli .. u LI es' u 8(58,4. lutt.4 2,--0-0.1- (:,,.a. .2 8 tiW d_.
I'M I-I00055v-,
o
o ..-.
000
-0 3 " " " B.944 2 .., 0 u ... _ 0 . o 0 .2 ,_b, =
..o
,,,- oi..,- 7O
-...-......
8 Et 5t 4rN t3
Z 23
0
e.. 0)
4,
0 gn !9, g R Z Z 1. if ,_,c° g ° 0 :-% 1,1 .1' re.471iigFrerr't 2ieet a
,...,
" tg
k 1-4 .. -0 0 2 a r,, 2 zi ,,:(.) E ti fn< -2 2 ,i (7) >' C. 5 5 tz-A
-,- r.
5u e, 0
i t, E,' g.
-5a 1 U 0 >
II'a
I ,11,
1 in
S U L5E"ry.,_,EF'2,EL."
..' Li .'61 ,i' gg Z Ilod .,W 3CA CA, -1.00 .9 ,. 14# Si
1400 'OA W -t, Jo OW 31-'93N ir :310µ
Z
0 -o -g
.4.. -o t; , t A..0ii -" C, II 74
7-*
2
u.
...t., t
,..1

11'
.......

-
-....
[,=,,
...0-,..z SISSA113 AO MOVIA
O
22
,; ,.s.,-,71 -,,,,,
0 eV q 1 .,..1 ..,.te u .e.p_g,
y, r.,:,* -.,-., 5 2 b0 re a.) L., 0. 0. ;. gym
2 u. U I. U .-0
..r. .-F, r',' 43t
0)
:1 ..-to 5U
. 5 - 5 5 -71, .5 41 t 03
u o '5' 41 .?, 1.4
01
0
o -0 -0 T, -.
dub g ,, 0 0,r, tr.
0-. r,1
0 0)..,
il -4 0kr
3 c -u.

....4.)
LI
....
4/
5
N -0 ''' ..,:,
O 0 0 :--) 5 .5
mu 0 4 _p 0 ::t
-5
i :Fj 8 .f, 2 C7)
6.1 5
,t < JA
E rr,
vj. I-
,---n-
0
an 1:42, 0 f:
c: ?.
'
TA I -J 11.:
-2, t tn. CI 0
0 er ., s., `4 id
0 'Lg m'o 0 - 2 a. 0 F. -es
Z o
.1,3
8' " o E .'i N B A rq,.;_., - tI 0, < r. &--)
.4. go ..-J2P .11.., c4 = g 0 V. u -ci
¢ ..-. 0-5-0.....3.0 b I"t,§" Z .?.. l' .G. u a) , 4< < <<< 0
0 -5 -ti
5

5
td
8 g 1-1
0 cr 2 es
:-6. -0 0 ed
td,.u r,.:4
v. . e. -' iso - cc
4.)
LI Ltt
0.) z ..__,
5
I+
.t9,
Ok 0
,
4 bo6
la
4 gi
g .:
0 g
0 tC
E
0 .4
too ?,, m u
`."'
co .:7....-. 1-4
4 o -i `02, 4 Im"
.1
NI
° kg 11
...I
E. -et I " R 5 Tr ZA/ 0 E g 54,g0
g..r.u;',10 .., E' It ;, N'
._ -.70 -- he 2 o. .n.5
ce
ur -1 4
.3 a3 ,a, .200 0 72 r.
ca:rs ,.... 2 ,,o
'4 's
lia > id
la .--. X
4 4-h4 co '''
--. 0 J u 4t
Z
0
...i 1,ii u0 0 H
1-
7.;C
w
O. t i
'a'
° V3 'LI
g."4:1 =I
t t '5', 0
ti 7.3
_I: .1 ' ' 05 ... `c,; 0 +., t: azt-b0.
0 ."a
,.,,
gl) t; zal 1 .&.0.6-.,, g 2 si
i'"a 0 .....°P
0-<
5
4r
-00
co
4..

li N,.,,O1 ;-°11 ox
2 '6
-o t'.
, 0 .2'-'i
to 7,, Is
U ..:1
8-58
4)
a.
,.r.,

C.) ° 5-o
ir `r:li 0........-o,0,,,,
0
o7,.;
1_750.
.0> z E., 4.1
" 4-,
0 x ee,..73E .00 ;
,
lal , 6
.

oc
a.
0
2

O a5
0 4);

5 5 .1
g,
5
-c
,71-.° l' ,-f.. . g -zh:rdg x g..?11...;.4.5 ,,,,,), -0 %.4 a. 1- ux 1..) ,,_ 1
o .c,. 4., zg a
-1.3
.--0 , _,-, 4-7-, __,-, ,., g s, .--,B.
.r... il. ...r
0
0800.1...iO4 0$0vOcAO0
a.`"o005.
1-; 1-.., ...0
03
g z tog-00g). 2 .,6, c - ..- h,c74. Y:,
0 - -
'0 4t) < 't tj
uS
01 g T. so so --. --. --N N N en N.
.>4 < ,s2 ,,,f
'a ...,,, Jr,e,000.0),0(00,0 -
..0.,g. 00.i.,4,0,,, I. t 5 -a u 4., >,., -5 '7'-'01 le)
,
12,
--1
gg0 P..
5 ,iii ' . ?.I3 .0 ... ....._
A.I
0.. I= c ..- r.... N't ,I fq c,.1 N r, en E-. -c o
56), goc-o5vg7.4X;1. e. ti 5 ' 2 v 5 -' co ..-0 0...4,-JHE---1-,1-q- '.8 0 ),
A v) F. + `;'
... -1
2o.,;
1r=4[ -q -.9g v°115"
ci

ci E ..4 .2 7;
-6 a;
-
74 U-0
Cd 4.) a0
:-Fg
X 't .4
E--. t u 152.-f,i
1)a, " 9r.
X .:14 2 Et%
.; .;., g E.
it
a¢
s....,....
N
<<<1.,,
TI- trN ,.0
..<<< 4,0,
I, .0
W e0
:7t Q 4
OO
8 co E
4fr
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
IF AMPLIFIER AND TRAP ALIGNMENT
For sets with 94C8-2 (turret type) tuner only.
Allow about 15 minutes for receiver and test equipment Connect signal generator high side to tube shield of 6J6
to warm up. oscillator -mixer tube. Be sure to insulate tube shield from
chassis. Connect signal generator low side to chassis close
Disconnect antenna from receiver. to 6J6 tube base.
Set Channel Selector to channel 13 or other unassigned Set Contrast control for -3 volts (read at arm of con-
high channel (to prevent signal interference during IF trol). Retain this setting for all IF and trap adjustments.
alignment). Use VTVM on lowest scale. (3 volts DC preferred.)
Note: A 20,000 ohm -per -volt meter can also be used.
Connnect RC filter of 10,000 ohm resistor and 330
Use a NON-METALLIC alignment screwdriver.
mmfd. condenser in series from point "X" to chassis.
See figure 2-2. Leave connected for all steps in this Refer to figure 2-1 and 2-2 for alignment adjustment and
alignment. test point locations.
Signal Gen.
Step Frequency Connect Test Connections and Adjust
(MC) VTVM to Instructions
1 *21.25 High side to junction of resistor Use lowest signal generator out- **A1 and A2 for
and condenser of RC filter con- put Tor adequate meter indication, minimum.
nected to "X" (video detector then gradually increase generator
V305 circuit); common to chas- output as VTVM reading de-
sis. See figure 2-2. creases.
2 *21.25 t High side to "Y", common to While peaking, keep reducing sig- A3, A4 and A5 for
chassis. nal generator output so VTVM maximum.
reading is approx. 1.5 volts.
3 *21.25 High side to "Z" (ratio detector Use 3 volt zero center scale if A6 for zero reading
V203 circuit). Common to "V" in available. between a positive
late ratio detector V203 circuit; and negative peak.
common to chassis in early V203
circuit.
4 *27.25 High side to junction of resistor Use lowest signal generator out- A7 for minimum.
and condenser of RC filter con- put for adequate meter indication,
nected to "X" (video detector then gradually increase generator
V305 circuit); common to chas- output as VTVM reading de-
sis. See figure 2-2. creases.
5 *19.75 r. PI
A8 for minimum.
6 25.0 While peaking, keep reducing sig- A9 for maximum.
nal generator output so VTVM
reading is approximately 1 volt.
7 21.8 11 rp
**A10 for maxi-
mum.
8 22.3 rr
All for maximum.
PI IP.
9 25.25 Al2 for maximum.
10 23.5 rr
A13 for maximum.
f Test Point "Y" is positive side of electrolytic C212 in late detector (V203) circuit; "Y" is negative side in early detector circuit
See Fig. 2-1.
* Before proceeding, be sure to check the signal generator used in alignment against a crystal calibrator or other frequency stand-
ard for absolute frequency calibration required for this operation.
** See Figures 2-6 and 2-7 for alternate locations of Al and A10.

OVER-ALL VIDEO IF RESPONSE CURVE CHECK Important

(Using sweep generator and Oscilloscope)
1.Disconnect signal generator and VTVM (if used in
previous alignment).
2. Connect oscilloscope between point "X" and chassis
ground through a decoupling filter (see figure 2-2).
To avoid distortion of the response curve, keep
the sweep generator and marker generator outputs
at a very minimum. Marker pip (25.75 MC) should
be just kept barely visible. Setting sweep generator
output for VTVM reading from .5 to volt DC 1

Keep leads away from receiver.
3. Connect sweep generator high side to point "W" on
tuner, low side to chassis ground. Set sweep gener-
ator to sweep the video IF pass band (19 to 29 MC).
4. Loosely couple marker generator high side to the
sweep generator lead connected to point "W" on
tuner, low side to chassis ground.
10
'(measured from decoupling network at point "X"
and chassis, figure 2-2) will avoid distortion of re-
sponse curve.
5. Check curve obtained against the ideal over-all
video IF amplifier response curve shown in figure
2-3, also check trap and video IF carrier points by
means of marker generator. It is important that
Marker pips be in the proper location on the re-
sponse curve as shown in figure 2-3. Correct loca-
tion of 25.75 MC marker, should be 6db below
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
peak (50% point on slope of curve). With correct INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL ADJUSTMENT USING
trap adjustments, markers at 27.25 MC, 21.25 MC
and 19.75 MC points should not be visible generally. TELEVISION SIGNAL
Consistent with proper band -width and correct loca- (Can be performed in some sets with-
out removal of chassis from cabinet)
tion of markers, the response curve should have
maximum amplitude and flat top appearance. a. Allow 15 minutes for set to warm up. Remove
If necessary to correct band -width and flat top Channel and Sharp Tuning knobs. Remove chan-
appearance, retouch (stagger tune) A10, All, Al2 nel -indicating escutcheon if set has removable es-
and/or A13 as required. cutcheon, otherwise remove chassis to reach oscilla-
For retouching traps A1, A2, A7 and/or A8, it tor slugs. With slight pressure, pull escutcheon away
will be necessary to use signal generator and VT- from cabinet and slide the escutcheon and spring to
the left or to the top, and pry the right side away
VM, and repeat steps under "IF Amplifier and from the cabinet.
Trap Alignment". b. Set channel switch on station with test pattern or
AUDIO IF ALIGNMENT CHECK program with sound. Set Contrast control for nor-
(Using sweep generator and oscilloscope) mal picture.
1. Disconnect signal generator and VTVM; if used in Al
previous alignment.
2. Connect oscilloscope between point "Z" and chassis
ground (see figure 2-1). Keeps leads away from
receiver.
3. Connect sweep generator high side to point "W" on Al0
tuner, low side to chassis ground. Set sweep gener-
ator to sweep the audio IF pass band (20.25 to
22.25 MC). NOTE: If sweep generator does not TUNER 94C8-2
have sufficient output for oscilloscope trace, con-
nect between grid No. of V201 to chassis, thru
1
(ID
FLAT OF SELECTOR SHAFT
200 mmfd. condenser. FACING COIL FOR CHANNEL 3. "H"
4. Loosely couple marker generator high side to the FRONT
TURRET
sweep generator high side, low side to chassis SHAFT A17
ground. SPRING API "C"
O
Important
To avoid distortion of the response curve, keep
RETAINING
PLATE votailyre
sweep generator and marker generator outputs at a 111N.No.,11,
very minimum. Marker pips should be kept just 2
Figure 2-8. Front View of 94C8-2 Tuner With Sharp
barely visible. Tuning Rotor Inside Chassis.
5. Observe ratio detector response (figure 2-4). Since
the sweep signal is fed through the entire audio IF
system for this "check, mis-alignment of the audio
IF's will affect this curve. This provides an over- c. Set Sharp Tuning control at electrical center:
all audio IF response check. The shape of the For tuners with sharp tuning rotor assembled
curve should be such as to provide a minimum
vertical voltage slope of 50 KC to each side of the inside of tuner chassis (see figure 2-8), rotate Sharp
21.25 MC marker (cross over point). Maximum Tuning control counter -clockwise until rotor en-
size and linearity of the straight portion of the gages stop screw "S" and oscillator slug (A17) can
curve is ideal. The non -symmetrical form of the be reached through cut-out "H" in tuner front. In
ratio detector response curve at the high frequency some tuners it will be necessary to back screw "S"
end is normal with the type of ratio detector circuit out a few turns to slightly increase rotation of rotor
used in later production. Note that the ratio detec- until oscillator slug is accessible.
tor circuit used in early production gives a sym- For tuners with sharp tuning rotor assembled
metrical "S" pattern (dotted line in Figure 2-4). outside of tuner chassis (see figure 2-9), rotate
Check for linearity between the markers indicated Sharp Tuning control approximately 150° or half
on the curve. The response curves obtained may rotation as shown in Figure 2-9.
appear inverted and/or reversed (end for end) d. Insert NON-METALLIC screwdriver (%8" blade)
depending on the sweep generator and oscilloscope in the 3/8" hole ("H") in tuner at right of Sharp
used. Tuning control. Tune oscillator slug for best sound.
6. If correct response is not obtained, repeat align- Do this carefully as only a slight rotation of slug
ment steps for slugs A3, A4, A5 and A6 under may be required.
"IF Amplifier and Trap Alignment".
21.45 MC
O o®: 0 :A 0 21.25 MC AUDIO MARKER NOT If
VISIBLE DUE TO TRAPS
CHASSIS 21.25 NC 15.15 MC
GROUND TAP 502, RESPONSE POINT 21.25 MC
TRAP

SHIELD
330 MMFD
/ IOKIL CHASSIS
GROUND
VTVM
OR
SCOPE
2515 NC

21.05 MC

Figure 2-2. VTVM or Scope Figure 2-3. Overall Video IF Response Curve. Figure 2-4. Alternate Ratio 1 1
Connections. Detector Response Curves.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
RF AND MIXER ALIGNMENT
For sets with 94C8-2 (turret type) tuner only.
See "Connections for 4H1 Models" RF carriers). To avoid distortion of the response
Disconnect antenna from receiver. curve, keep marker generator output at a mini-
mum, marker pips just barely visible.
Before starting alignment, allow about 15 minutes
for receiver and test equipment to warm up. Connect oscilloscope through 10,000 ohm resistor
to point "W" (Figure 2-6). Keep oscilloscope
Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals. leads away from chassis.
Loosely couple marker generator to antenna ter- Set Contrast control to -1.5 volts (read at arm
minal (to obtain marker pips of video and sound of control).
Marker Gen. Sweep Gen.
Step Freq. (MC) Frequency Adjust

Check for curve resembling RF response curve shown in figure 2-5.

*205.25 Sweeping If necessary, adjust A14, A15 and A16 (Figure 2-6) as required. Con -
1 **209.75 Channel 12 sistent with proper band width and correct marker location, response
curve should have maximum amplitude and flat top appearance.
2 211.25 13
215.75

3
199.25 11 Check each channel for curve resembling RF response curve shown
203.75
in figure 2-5. In general, the adjustment performed in step 1 is suf-
4 193.25 10
ficient to give satisfactory response curves on all channels. However,
197.75 if reasonable alignment is not obtained on a particular channel, (a)
187.25
check to see that coils have not been intermixed, or (b) try replacing
5 9 the pair of coils for that particular channel, or (c) repeat step 1 for
191.75
the weak channel as a compromise adjustment to favor this particular
6 181.25 8 channel. If a compromise adjustment is made, other channels should
185.75
be checked to make certain that they have not been appreciably af-
175.25 7
fected.
7
179.75

8
83.25
87.75
6 I_ - MARKER.
DIP SHOULD NOT SOUND CARRIER

9 77.25 5 EXCEED 30% OF

MARKER.
81.75 TOTAL HEIGHT.
VIDEO CARRIER

10 67.25 4
71.75

11 61.25 3
65.75 Full skirt of curve will not be visible unless
generator sweep width extends beyond 10 MC.
12 55.25 2
59.75 Figure 2-5. RF Response Curve.

* Picture Carrier Frequency (MC) ** Sound Carrier Frequency (MC)

21.8 MC (1) A10 A.101 UPPER

MAX. 21.25 MC MIN.Ai
SLUG) )0'
(LOWER SLUG) 21.8 MC
Al TUNED THRU UPPER MAX.
21.25 MC SLUG.
MIN.
ii
A18 I A18 A15
A15 1'
)
4)8J6 6AG5 4) 6J6 6AG5

A14 A14

A16 w A16
12 Figure 2.6. Top View of 94C8-2 Tuner.
Figure 2-7. Top View of 94C8-2 Tuner, showing
Alternate Al and A10 Arrangement.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Al?H
FRONT
TURRET
SHAFT
SPRINC
FLAT OF SELECTOR
SHAFT FACING COIL
FOR CHANNEL 3.
Figure 2-9. Front View of 94C8-2 Tuner With Sharp
Tuning Rotor Outside Chassis.
OVER-ALL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT (A18)
Over-all oscillator adjustment should only be neces-
sary when tubes or other components in. the oscillator
ADDITIONAL TROUBLE -SHOOTING DATA
FREQUENCY DRIFT IN 94C8-2 TUNERS
High ambient temperatures encountered under cer-
tain operating conditions may result in excessive oscil-
lator frequency drift in some 94C8-2 tuners. Under
such conditions, frequent readjustment of the Sharp
Tuning Control may be necessary. In some cases, oscil-
lator drift may even go beyond the normal tuning range
of the Sharp Tuning Control.
This condition is most probable in 30D1 (16")
chassis due to higher operating temperatures in this
model.
When excessive oscillator frequency drift is encoun-
tered in a 94C8-2 tuner, the following part change will
usually correct this condition:
Replace old part, C109 (10 mmfd., -300 temp. coef.,
ceramic) with new part C109, #65B6-33 (10 mmfd.,
-750 temp. coef., ceramic).
In some sets, condenser C109 is accessible by remov-
ing the cover plate located on the side of the chassis
Dan, next to the tuner. Condenser C109 is connected
between terminal #2 on the turret contact block and
ground.
Replacement of C109 will require realignment of
Overall Oscillator Adjustment (A18) and then indi-
vidual channel oscillator adjustments.
LOSS OF HORIZONTAL SYNC
(In Early Production 30A1 only)
Loss of horizontal sync in early 30A1 receivers hasselecting a matched pair from stock resistors.
in many cases been due to dielectric leakage or break-
down of coupling condensers V407 or V408 (100
mmfd.), used in V403A plate and cathode circuits.
Early sets used a 100 mmfd. ceramic condenser, which
was replaced in later production by a 100 mmfd., 10%,
mica condenser, part #65B5-17, to correct this trouble.
circuit have been replaced. (When replacing the oscil-
lator -mixer tube (6J6), it is recommended that several
tubes be tried to select one which causes least frequency
shift.)
This over-all adjustment can be made using a VTVM
and signal generator, or using a television signal.
a. Remove chassis from cabinet.
b. Set selector to channel 13 or other high channel.
c. When using a signal generator, follow steps (a),
(b), (c), (d) under "Individual Channel Adjust-
ments Using Signal Generator and VTVM", then
adjust A18 (Figure 2-6) for zero VTVM reading
between a positive and a negative peak.
OR
c. When using a television signal, follow steps (b) and
(c) under "Individual Channel Adjustment Using
Television Signal", then adjust A18 (Figure 2-6)
for best sound and clearly defined picture.
d. Recheck adjustment of individual channels and
touch-up (A17) if necessary.
AUDIO BUZZ (Chassis 30B1, 30C1 or 30D1 only)
In some localities audio or station buzz may be
apparent on some channels.
Early production 30B1, 30C1 or 30D1 chassis have
the 6.3 volt heater lead from the TV tuner (94C8-2)
connected to pin 4 of V401 (6BA6). Changing the
TV tuner heater connection to pin 7 of V411 (6K6GT)
will eliminate this trouble in most cases.
PULLING AT TOP OF PICTURE
In some television receivers, pulling shows up across
the top of the picture or pattern and extends approxi-
mately one inch down from the top. Vertical lines in
the picture or pattern will pull to the right or left.
This trouble is caused by vertical synchronizing
pulses "riding through" the horizontal sync discrimi-
nator circuit and momentarily upsetting the horizontal
oscillator. Since vertical sync pulses occur at the frame
frequency (during the vertical blanking period), the
pulling exists immediately after the. vertical blanking
period and shows up only in the top portion of the
picture.
The low frequency response of the horizontal sync
discriminator can be reduced to overcome this problem.
It is recommended that resistors R413 and R414 be
changed from 470,000 ohms each to 180,000 ohms each
(180,000 ohms, 1/2 watt, part number 60B8-184).
CAUTION: With R413 and R414 reduced in value,
the circuit becomes critical to tolerance variations.
Tolerance on R413 and R414 must be within 5 per cent
of each other. This tolerance limit can be met by
After changing the resistor values of R413 and R414,
the horizontal oscillator must be readjusted as described.
13
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
SERVICING BY WAVEFORM ANALYSIS
After a circuit defect has been localized to the video
or sweep sections of a television receiver (see trouble-
shooting chart), localization to a single stage can be
accomplished by use of the test points (figure 5-25)
and waveforms shown in figures 5-26 to 5-52. Voltage
or resistance measurements can then be used to locate
the defective part in a conventional manner.
The waveforms shown for the first ten test points
(figures 5-26 to 5-44) are obtained only with a video
RF signal input to the receiver. Since the remainder of
the waveforms shown are taken from the sweep circuits
of the receiver, a video RF signal input is not necessary
for these tests (TP11 to TP18).
Two separate waveforms are shown for the first nine
test points. Two different oscilloscope sweep fre-
quencies were used in order to show up the vertical and
horizontal pulses at each test point (both cannot be
locked in at the same sweep frequency due to the great
difference in, and non -integral relationship of, the ver-
tical and horizontal pulse frequencies).
The peak -to -peak voltages indicated for the various
test points were measured by calibrating the oscillo-
scope used to observe the waveforms. Such peak -to -
peak voltage measurements provide a check on the
voltage gain per stage. For example: the peak -to -peak
voltage readings at test points TP1 and TP2 are 1 and
9 volts, respectively. A voltage gain of 9 is indicated
for the video amplifier stage V306 (6AU6).
The contrast control of the television receiver is set
for a peak -to -peak reading of one volt at TP1 as a mat-
ter of convenience in measuring stage gain and provid-
ing a standard of comparison.
A change in waveform may be noticed at the first
four test points when the receiver is switched to a dif-
ferent television station. This is true since some varia-
tions in the transmitted waveform are tolerated at the
television transmitter. All waveforms and peak -to -peak
voltage readings are subject to modification due to the
response of the oscilloscope used for test. Due to parts
and manufacturing tolorances, variations in peak -to -
peak voltages between television receivers are a normal
condition. Hence, when using waveforms and peak -to -
peak voltage readings for quick trouble shooting, these
variations should be kept in mind to avoid erroneous
conclusions.
WARNING
Care should be exercised when taking measurements
on the horizontal output stage. No connections should
be made to the plate of the V407 (6BG6G) or to any
connections on the rectifier tube (1B3GT/8016) as
the high voltages at these points are dangerous.

TEST POINT LOCATIONS

V305 \
O 0 0 TPT452.,__TP4 PIN 5

TP2 V306

V401
O TP6
PIN

I-
z V402 TPI7
PIN 2
O TP15
V406

V403 TP16 PIN 5

GIP\
TP7
PIN 5

V4I1 TP9 TP8

PIN 5
TP12 V410 V 409
PIN 3 TP18 For
TP10 V404 TP14 30D1 Chassis
PIN 5
TP11
PIN 4 TP18
PIN 2
TP13 PIN 84
PIN 7

14 Fig. 5-25. Test Point Locations

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

TP1
Input to Video Amplifier
Pin 1 of V306 (6AU6)

FIG. 5-26 VERTICAL PULSE

1 Volt PP FIG. 5-27 HORIZONTAL PULSE
I Volt PP

TP2
Output of Video Amplifier
Junction of L308 and L309

FIG. 5-28 VERTICAL PULSE

9 Volts PP FIG. 5 _1 HORIZONTAL PULSE
9 Volts PP

TP3
Output of Video Output
Junction of L310,
L311 and C323

FIG. 5-30 VERTICAL PULSE

28 Volts PP FIG. 5-31 HORIZONTAL PULSE
28 Volts PP

TP4
Cathode of D.C. Restorer
Pin 5 of V305 (6AL5)

FIG. 5-32 VERTICAL PULSE

20 Volts PP FIG. 5-33 HORIZONTAL PULSE
18 Volts PP

TP5
Plate of D.C. Restorer
Pin 2 of V305 (6AL5)

FIG. 5-34 VERTICAL PULSE

6.8 Volts PP FIG. 5.35 HORIZONTAL PULSE
5 Volts PP

TP6
Output of Sync. Amplifier
Pin 5 of V401 (6BA6)

FIG. 5-36 VERTICAL PULSE FIG. 5-37 HORIZONTAL PULSE

25 Volts PP 15 Volts PP
15
 'AST s! agelloA !Vt,t0 PUB COVI ;o Suulas anpp Teluozpoti
uotrlaunf indi `s!ssEtp ICIOf u0 ti9m Aaen 'pm adeqs pue apn9idtuv 91
(917A5) 6017A J° g "!d (.LDLNS9) 11£01'A JO Z u!d zit° ,crvzi .9Tio jo uopaunf
aaduisu jo apopeD a2artps1a '201-1 JO 339d aolepuaaajpu jo 2ndln0
dd s31°A zs 8Ld1 dd 831°A 08 dd s110A OS 9Ld1
is -s .91.1 ISs '91d Lldl os-s -91.1
I (199A9) 901'A Jo 5 u!d (S1V9) 17017A J° 5 u!d (51V9) 17017A J° L u!d
.3S0 'JOH JO pp9 .39a ilAs .1oFi jo 3potpup 's!CI *DI/AS .J°H J° aluid
dd s11°A ZS S Ldl dd SIPA OZ dd slloA 0£
WC '91d 917-C '9I3 zt-C '913
(1.99)19) 1IVA JO f u!d (194NS9) OIt7A Jo Z u!d (.1.94NS9) 0.117A Pt' I'M
inchno re39.zaA jo amid '3S0 mpaaA jo .350 Pa!laaA o1 Indu/
dd s11°A 017f Zldl dd s11°A 09 L Ldl dd 531°A f*
917-C '913 51,-5 'Did 117-5 'DM Oldl
dd 531°A 01 dd s11°A 9'1
HS'Ifld 1VINOZIHOH 'DIA HSI/Id IVDI.1.21HA zt-s '913
aicpssaaae Ion si nnod sp.') nna.na
2unea2alut aoj pasn si aluidnoa II
4zto `It1721 40i7vH jo uonaunf
InDa!D 2upua2alui o1 indui
J 6d1
dd 521°A /1 dd s11°A bT
HS711d IVINOZI110H Ifr-5 'DIA 3S1fld 1VDILIIRA 017-5 'pH
(1.04NS9) Vf017A Jo 5 I'M
aapanui .awls jo lnchno
8d1
dd "1°A 04 dd 511°A 04
3S111d 1VINIOZPIOH 6f-5 'DIA RS'Ind 1VDI1213A 95-5 '9Id
(911V9) Z0'A 3° 5 u!d
aoleardas -DuAs jo Indmo
Ldl
SH3A130321 NOISIAMML 61761 CMCI33N-NaLIO-1LSOPI
 M513
111111 NI 02(0 40 MN
LON LAWS
11101111
1100 NS 1M1LE WIEMIA 1/212AT7 1/212AT7 6BA6 6BA6 6AL5 4HI RADIO TUNER Mite t 80
110 12110 1111 COPM1TEI III. Fit 251u -AO DO III
6AL5 EARLY CIRCUIT
5
II EilLT SITE LIDS V6011
0511111101
01011 11101 1602 v603
11011 12202111
0604
PIN En on
2203
4 AO GOO OJ
L--.
t
CONNECTOR
1011. Fw M511
NI .00101 1 1

99 °9
III
y
I
emu 1

'tip!! 1 Mt 1FLA VO
611. M203
5111
102
III

CIII
0105

r '
0,20 51611
111 I
11514
11011 FEW
711111

00000
1111 Of SHUT

t: COM
0*
C105
1101 C10 NOO ItifSOO
Nt
1111
t_g1 on
.015 Mil
2111
SW602
JO 8 06 OA
L IIOS
271 91

Flom
- I
L105 I

!IL A5.0 515111

01101

01.11
CIIO i'L/of17
000
11
22A

I
2°5199
M511
SECTION L Sf101 1 1110 6K6GT
SW1101 500,, LSE mid 1 111 10110 OHIO M602
;10500 6SC7 V512 111117 111 11E1 OF MO
1201
0 CSI[
Mt 110151110.C515
0
D
X01
01 2511
.11
O 0
711107 $01221 51171110 $111111 1+11 I
COILS. 1111 & LION, FIR MUM 1151111. RF SECTION TV AUDIO SECTION (I.F.) 201 IM
Sot lat 111""" 2511 ''1.11431
OM 5

1511
M516
0a 0.
11711 ME 11061 FM 4701

v, -\ . TUNER 94G8 -24(94A8-2) 011110 0101121 MOOR m203 51513 1100 1521
VOA
le,v, 6AG5 \\ 6AU6 6AU6 IC 9 8 9
i'l
I
5201
If.
v101
0111
6J6 is! ASO IF MO ASO If 6AL5/II Ill 1 ou1101
os Mr. ISM '"
.01
511
1520
00
V201 Ir 1201 2202 0203 %EU
4101 1101 - M512
Soo Om maks ' 5
C104 NC mu
2102
*J0 513
4.7110 0513
110111 VIII OF 11011
03 III! AL
ATM Ye
111011
2,111_1_ tin Ott&
1110015 7
F 0
11 K co
O 0
I T 71.0310
=10
SSO -4116
lot
INTERLOC
V5I3
L1011 I 3'41
1 0 0105
C1111
1500 5 1
1221
11500
0170 AUDIO 00101 MO AO
I

110111 111
1101 10 AIM
2111C
1115 0111 12011201
1130
C202
jNN
211

1500
%SI;
0225
-.0D 2011 515
617
1,11: 6K6GT O 0 0
Ill oillt 0201
1215
11 1
INO
IN NI 10 0 111E1
I I 11111 0110111
Lir 31
11
I 1 0110 _Tt01gL _FHA_, Lyat LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

" Hit11.1111
30 1 10.1417
52C
Md.-1" rillt 1,71 LNS
311 I * BEFORE REPLACING
2512
5U4G
I

1012511
cns, OF 1511 61116 NOT USED IN 3001. 4,105 VIDEO SECTION 5E1 PAGE 111 FOR DATA 00 le 'FINKS, 0514
0113 IMO SUR *6AU6 * 1301
*6AU6 10.1302-
1303 AND 16*130D11 CIRCUIT DIFFERENCES.
CAUT1011,111011 V01:165E ON CONE of
IEC16111

-01 L114
E1
* 6AG5
Ei .!
0 r- ,, I60.174. DO NOT GROUND.
IN I CRC * 6AG5 11 511 I
6AU6 6AL5 6AU6 6K6GT
15111150 If MosOMIF '5

I'___i-t
1305 210 110E0 11 I 00 I I
4111 111011 IMO KT 1 14 11 510111 11050 411 1,210001411
S-3
1111
3-5
54017
711110
''j7
TO 1111, 1114 1 112 6,41: 5 0302 II i IC v303 Al III 0 9304 1303 0306 ,A

la .NWtl F
X fI b i1
7`
12
_ - 00 Los 2 C5I7k

II 30101161 OF 1 C101
00 470210
C124
11011711

1111 C0t5 II T1510 51 .05

II 51111 MOTH. !30
101 500
HOAK 1121
10 1110211 1000 1325 40110
III 7 Of 1111 5120
X 10011
ME 0000110 MOO
1301 C 120-I
0111111 250447

1321 1911211
1022 110112itss
6304 ISIS
111 1111111.
151 111

_ 001 cONTIAILIZIA 0307 WHVOLTAGEPOWERSUPPLY

11101 251 111 1150
031
ISA
1541 11530 1113 15101
01 12131, SU POEN
5U40
MICIUN
1513 v301
SWEEP SECTION 11356T/8016
51
11* 9011111
SEE PAGE 18 U0111111 0405 CII1 1031 MI 12" NW Om
111 AIR
III TOM II loll 11
0.11111111 "1. r. Nil, 1 FOR 30111 CIRCUIT- SN
10311 01111

CAT
%It
3 11 53
6SN7GT o44$ 6K6GT 71 -6BA6 6AU6 I/26SN7GT 6AL5 6J6
011 52
11.111
202c VIM OUTPUT
.5f. 6V6GT I/26SN7GT 68G6G 20011
'?;'
150
1404 11. 01L51 114 CIN NI SIM MC III 05C CORI 11427/ 1001 000 002 0410 NO 01520410E NI 001111001111140
V410
!II:IC V411
" 04036 1401
0101
L/402 0401 04 5 0406 III 5V4G FE- ----
1-101 11142 4415 -1
11.11
5101 .S1
I
1451
510 MOM I
0111121101
I

COI I C1021
200
10-°
'1101 NN
11403A 100
CIII
01110111.
14001
1504
3150

1/25 0111
01038 ."' 0407
0409
1°°7-±
5

Cl2
1403A
0111 120 1/11 01
1111 IOU SSA
1- 011 121 .... 01
NII MOM I

AID 510 111 TOTAL M

COILS 01101 1121 00 L_ MUCtal
5421 MS C430 C135
1402
21111
CMS 1.401.0
kg
C112
02 410V 0120 5504 on I
1701 ?,
.002a Go= hos,. 032121
5151 22154 C1054 Io 2101 0
1405
.05 4261
TOTAL
50 11101
0114 1420

71140
511 110 2.2 MC 101

19110 4110
11111 1111 110111201101
LOCK
Ill 1151
00
I__

221 14211
A455
0420 0 04 L 2117 1351
01 MI TM 12171
1110 CAM. 1151 51
140" too N out net 102
201100 1.11 I1 1111 1411
'71;:rL ONj .1140Z 1415
51
elr MI. .05

C111
10.1C
TO 111 4 IF 2111
1001: r(151, FOC 35 'Arm 1.0,
01110101 NINE
L I-711 11 11 5111, 1111
511(1 1511

1.51 11 1111

Figure 1-21. Schematic Diagram for 4H1 Radio Tuner Chassis, and 3081, 30C1, or 30D1 Television Chassis. (For all "4H" R adio-Phono-Television combinations with 10", 12" and 16" picture tubes.)

Television (only) type sets, and models 8C11, 8C12, Some production changes are given in the text.
1 7A
and 8C13 combinations, essentially correspond to Circuit changes for different 12" tubes are tabulated on page 18.
sections of this schematic, but are not the same
in all respects. Circuit differences for 30D1 chassis (using 16" picture tube)
are shown on page 18 of the text.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
VOLTAGE DATA
For combination models, 4H1 Radio Tuner 111011I VIEW OF SOCKE 1 LOCK, HOR. LIN., and WIDTH settings.)
must be connected to power supply unless a F 0 B
jumper or adapter plug (part number 98A- O 0 0 Channel selector on channel 2. (Channel 1 for sets with A1582 Tuner,
30-4) is inserted in the radio tuner power Figure 1.13).
supply socket M512 to complete the B+
circuit. See adjoining illustration. Ck OA CAUTION: Pulsed high voltages are present on the cap of V407
Line voltage, 117 Volts, AC. (6BG6G) tube, and on the filament terminals and cap of V408 (or V412
Voltages measured with a vacuum tube volt- O o in 30D1) 163/8016 tube. NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO
meter, between tube socket terminals and TAKE MEASUREMENTS FROM THESE POINTS.
chassis, unless otherwise indicated. Picture tube 2nd anode voltage can be measured at the high voltage
Antenna disconnected from television receiver. cap of picture tube (V308) and should be taken only with a high voltage
All front controls except Contrast set at approximately half rotation; instrument such as a kilovoltmeter. Voltage for 2nd anode of 10" or 12"
Contrast set at minimum (all the way to the left). tube is approximately 9KV, for 16" tubes, 12KV. Proper filament voltage
All rear panel controls, except HOR. LOCK, HOR. LIN., and check of V408 (and V412) 1B3/8016 tube may be made by observing
filament brilliancy as compared with that obtained with a 1.5 volt dry
WIDTH, set at approximately half rotation. (Do not disturb HOE. cell battery.

V302 100 WITH 6AG5

75 WITH 6AU6
V 304 V305
6.3AC 150 6.3 AC 6AU6 6AL5
6AG5 6.3 6.3
OR 0 150
0
150
V303 AC
6AU6 0.3 0.35 6AG5 0.75
.3 WITH 6A65 0
.3 WITH 6AG5 OR A-0.2
0 WITH 6AU6 -6 0 WITH 6AU6 6AU6 °V306
150
V401 o
6AU6
V 201
0 6.3AC
6.3 AC 15° 3.6 0 68A6 150

° V301 0 245 -1.6

6AU6 135 0.3 6AG5 t195
0
0
6.3AC
0.5
135
0.3 V 203 130
1150
6.3AC 6AL5 240
0 135
V202 4.7AC "90 V405 105
180
-7.6
0
6AU6 6J6
0.5A 1135 6.3 85
FRONT 135 £0.02 170 t135 AC 25t
OF O
170
CHASSIS Loin ** 0.2
6.3
-8 o
V402 -4.5 AC 2.7 t ey(360GT7
6AU6 5.4
0
t-7.0 -4.5 -20
- 9.5 235
300 t t
V411 V403 V406
V410 6SN7 t 260
290 175140
6K6GT 6 V6GT
6SN7GT GT 200
285 t 10 6.3 1170
245 72 4.5 t 13.5 AC
t90 280
3 285 t 0 0 235t V407
4 245 -25 6BG6G
1-28 120 t
5
96 '191 V404 V409
8 7 300 0 t
4.5
6AL5 5V4G 360
0
6.3AC 6.3 AC
420
A Indicates contact potential which may vary widely. ** Zero volts in chassis with late V203 circuit. -0.5 volts
f Indicates 30D1 voltages. (contactpotential) in chassis, with early ratio detector V203.
POWER SUPPLY (COMBINATION "4H"
-94C8-2 TUNER MODELS ONLY) c

94G9-2 TUNER 370

V102 V101 41111E'
5U4G
V501 6K6 6K6
6J6 6AG5 AC
70
V5I3 V512
Voltages 380
0 175 0 17,5 0
0 6.3AC taken V803 V802 V801 AC
380
6.3 0 0 6C4 6AG5 6BH6 0 0 0
AC from top, 300 200 6.3 0 5U4G 225 225
200 tubes 6.3 200 AC
AC
6.3
AC
V5I4
AC
O 230 0 230
0 200 removed. o 0 240
200
200
c42ve
0
"*. -2.5 Volts, Measured With Tubes In Sockets
-3 V0118, Measured With)
Tubes In Sockets. 6SC7 0 54
Figure 1-17. Voltage Charts. BOTTOM VIEW V5Il

POWER SUPPLY FOR 8C11, 8C12, EIC13 & w=T'L,";=ig "

STRAIGHT TV ONLY
11.5 6.3 SAC V903 -8
6.3 I 2 135 -4 0 6.16
-0. 360 -e
14 8 200 t240 -4
42 110
140 225AC
0 140
0 -
110
6.3 AC
V204 V 205 225AC 6.3 AC 5 140
6SJ7 6Y6G V502 0 V901
AC 380
5Y3GT V902 6J6
80 V308 6J6 0 30
V501 6.3 AC 130
5U4G 385 AC
38 SAC -t Indicates 30D1 voltage. -A1582 TUNER
17
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
DIFFERENT 12" PICTURE TUBES USED IN 30C1 CHASSIS
Different 12" picture tubes (listed below) have been used in tabulated below and shown in figures 1-20 and 1-21:
the 30C1 chassis. The tube used in a particular chassis is indi- IMPORTANT: When replacing a 12" picture tube with
cated by the "WIRED FOR " stamp on the rear of the another type, be sure to check existing chassis wiring and if
chassis. (In some chassis, this stamp was not applied.) The required, make the necessary changes as listed in the tabulation
various tube types used require different chassis wiring and ion below. Also, mark rear of chassis accordingly if a different
traps. Data on circuit requirements for the different tubes is picture tube is used.
NOTE: All brands of 12LP4 and 12BP4 tubes can be used without circuit change in sets wired for 12TP4.

Tube Ion Trap * R439 is R329 is C448 is 2nd Anode Connector

Dual Type *3900 ohm, 2 W. 3000 ohm, 15 W. Not used Use male con -
12BP4 94B6 (60B20-392) Wire wound (61A1-9) nector, 88A16-1
**12LP4 Same as above Same as above Same as above See note ** below Same as above
12TP4 Same as above Same as above Same as above See note f below Same as above
Not used. Remove Use male con -

Single Type
94A15-2
94A15 -2
Not used. RemoveUse
from chassis.

from chassis. See note 5 below See note }below

nector, 88A16-1
female con -
nector, 88A16-3

*R439 resistor is connected across the yellow and green leads chassis "Wired for 12LP4-IC". Chassis wired for 12LP4
from the focus coil L403. with coating are stamped "Wired for 12LP4-0C".
**Some brands of type 12LP4 tubes do not have the outer }Add condenser C448 (500 mmfd., 10,000 volt) to the second
conductive coating which functions as a second anode supply anode supply filter circuit. See schematic.
filter condenser. Type 12LP4 tubes WHICH DO NOT Locate C448 inside the second anode supply housing. Mount
HAVE the outer conductive coating require the addition of it on the perforated side, between the 1B3/8016 and 6BG6
C448 (500 mmfd., 10,000 volt; part number 65A11-1) to the tubes. Connect a wire lead from the remaining ungrounded
second anode power supply filter circuit, same as for type end of C448 to the tie point connecting the second anode
12TP4 tube. To add C448, see note t below; also see schem- lead to the corona ring under the 1B3/8016 tube socket.
atic for circuit location of C448. Type 12LP4 tubes WHICH
HAVE the outer conductive coating are directly interchange- §Add R342 (12,000 ohm, 2 W; part number 60B20-123) in
able with the 12BP4 tube. Chassis wired for 12LP4 tube parallel with R329. R329 (3000 ohm, 15 watt) is the front
without the outer conductive coating are stamped at rear of wire wound resistor on the under side of the chassis pan.

CIRCUIT DIFFERENCES BETWEEN 30D1 CHASSIS and 3061, 30C1 CHASSIS

(Use illustrations below with Figure 1-21.)
RED

1406B 1406A
ROWN N ITEM
AC
OUTLET
M206 M203 L
1s201
M406
M2080.21 M409

'I7V.AC LINE
M408
K
INTERLOCK Figure 1-23. Deflection Yoke Figure 1-24. Deflection Yoke
Connector (early type). Pin Connector (late type). Pin
Figure 1-22. 117V, AC Interlock View M407, Bottom View View M407, Bottom View
Circuit (30D1). M406. M406.

TO 2ND. ANODE
183/8016 C445 1B 3/8016 AOF PICTURE TUBE

NOTE: R465 is 12,000 ohms RECTIFIER V408 500 R466 V412 1 RECTIFIER
0413
in later sets. See paragraph 4706
21, page 1-8. 3
466 R469
(NEC C441
3
6BG6G 1405
2400
C446 500 500
TO PIN 2 C4 NOR OUTPUT
OF V403B 001
V407
Figure 1-25. Focus Coil 2 R467
4.444A.
Connector. Pin View M408, 4
41 5 V4GT M406 R? E,WHITE
Bottom View M409. V409 T406A
.-aC441
470 iSt .5 L404
DANNER 4 C°C4231
56 HORIZONTAL
TO
hi 203
HEATERS

R427
C420 7 f1 L._ DEFLECTIONYORE
PIN 1 01
05 1CIVIDTH V 406
66011
17 CONT. C426
8431 WHITE! ,

L
T406B
100
5" M4
0
VERTICAL
L405 N
5 DEFLECTION HOR. LIN
8429 0'
TORE e 0
25R
RED ABS TOTAL C442 C443 11438111211 FOCUS 36 R472 2.71 M
COILS ONLY
TO 6 25
R456
AND TO R4I6
T 402 R410 8471
L406
2.76 2.16 FOCUS COIL
C405C
.44 Al
Figure 1-26. Vertic.al Deflec- M409,A M408 -41-
4,-TO R456
18 tion Yoke Circuit (30D1). TO 6451

Figure 1-27. 2nd Anode Supply Circuit for 30D1; use with Figure 1-21.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

73endje7i'adio
AND TELEVISION
MODELS 235M1 235B1 and 325M8
The following are the voltages that can be expected at the various test points
listed.
Note: All voltage readings are taken at minimum contrast which occurs at full
counterclockwise position of control.

TEST POINT VOLTAGE REMARKS

Boosted B+ pin #3, V21 + 275 to + 325V DC

pin #3, V23 + 230 to + 290 V DC

+ 165V Bus lug 3, R87 + 140 to + 190 V DC

Hor. Center

B- terminal "E" - 115 to - 145 V DC

RF Bias terminal "S" - 18 to - 25 V DC

IF Bias terminal "Q" - 7 to - 9 V DC

Hor. Drive pin #5, V19 (6BG6) 55 to 75 V Use Scope

or pin #6
of V18 or V19 (7A5) Peak to Peak

Vert. Drive junction C94 & C95 20 to 25 V Use Scope

Peak to Peak
ANTENNA WAVETRAP ADJUSTMENT
A wavetrap consisting of a series resonant circuit for each side of the balanced
antenna line is mounted near the chassis antenna receptacle for the purpose of elim-
inating any undesired signal in the IF band (30 to 40 MC). To avoid blocking any
signal in the low television band, this trap is usually set for the FM band (88 to
108 MC) when there is no interfering IF signal. It is possible for the wavetrap to
be adjusted to block the audio signal of one of the low band television channels,
which results in obtaining a good picture but no sound. If such a condition exists,
adjust trimmers to a position 4 to 5 turns out from maximum clockwise position. This
is the point of minimum capacitance and the trap is then harmlessly set in the FM
band.
When a signal, such as a police call, causes interference in the IF band, adjust
trimmers C141 and C142 of the wavetrap as follows:

a. Set both trimmers fully clockwise (maximum capacitance).

b. Turn capacitor C141 counterclockwise 1/4 turn, and then turn capacitor
C142 counterclockwise 1/4 turn.

c Follow procedure of "b" until interference disappears.

19
N MA, MB, MC,AND MD CHASSIS CODES
The following chart provides the chassis differences between the four chassis codes MA, MB, MC, and MD. Refer
O to the Schematic Diagram, Fig. 6, which is based on the code MD chassis. Both RF and main chassis are coded
by a large block letter within a square stamped in ink on each chassis. The IF-RF chassis code is usually.
found near V12, and on the main chassis the code letter is stamped on the rear apron. The component revisions
effected by the various changes are listed in the second left hand column. Under the right hand columns head-
ed MA MB, MC, and MD are listed the revisions as applied to each chassis code. Refer to Preliminary Service
Manual for chassis codes A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, and M.
Main Chassis & IF -10- Chassis Codes
Chassis Description (Chassis Differences) MA MB MC MD

Main Chassis includes Resistor R74, 1.8K 1W, connected in plate

circuit of VISA. Yes No No No

Main Value of Resistor R65, +10% 1W, in plate circuit of V15A. 1.8K 3.3K 3.3K 3.3K

Main Chassis includes Capacitor C135, .02 mfd 400V, connected in

plate circuit of VISA. No Yes Yes Yes

Main Chassis includes Resistor R95, 22K +10% 1/2W, connected in

plate circuit of VISA. No Yes Yes Yes

IF-RF Chassis includes Coil L21 connected to pins #5 and #6 of V9. Yes Yes No No

IF-RF Chassis includes Coil L26 connected to pins #5 and #6 of tube V10 V10 V9 V9
Ip
IF-RF Chassis includes Coil L19 connected to pins #5 and #6 of tube V4 V4 V10, VIO
co
IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R66, 100 ohms 1/2W, connected to
terminal 2 of Transformer T3 and pin #1 of V4. Yes Yes No No

IF-RF Chassis includes transformer T3 connected to plate circuit of

a a b b
tube
a. Grid circuit of VII
b. Plate circuit of V4.
Chassis includes Capacitor C50 a a b b
IF-RF
a. 10 mmf 500V, connected to pin #5 of V4.
b. 27 mmf +10% 500V,connected to terminal 1 of T3 and
ground.
a b . b
IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R22, 56K +10% 1/2W a

a. Connected to pin #1 of V5 and ground.

b. Connected to terminal 1 of T3 and ground.
IF-RF Chassis includes Capacitor C133, 2.7 mmf connected between
pins #5 and #6 of V4. No No Yes Yes

Chassis includes Coil L22 connected in grid circuit of tube VIO V10 VII VII
IF-RF
IF-RF Chassis includes sound take -off Transformer T9 in grid circuit of V10. No No Yes Yes
 IMO
CO
00 'I '£A 3o ijnaajo aleTd (34 palaauuoa 'MZ/T NOE
al
Z 7. ..,,X Fax oN ON
' 6ZTH aolsjsall 2ujAuedwooau pue lujod isai AI saPBT3BI sIss840 AU -AI
RI
MI'S MI'S MZ*8 MZ*8 "(Mg/I %ST sw4°) 6A 3° T# utd of palaauuoa ttu aolsjsall jo an IBA AU -AI
&.41 fc.11
P4 _;..
6'SE 6-SE L'St. L'SE .(saIDA3"aw) 17Z1 PBB OUT sTjoo Jo Aauanbaaj luawa TIV ,3H -:II
0 M M6E M6E AZI mu -(mz/T suio) IlA Jo T# utd oi palaauuoa Tsu aolsjsall Jo anT BA ..4U -AI
41 saA saA oN ON 'TIA I° 9# pue S# surd
C4cs' 01 palaauuoa 4 MZ/I %0I7 MZ*8 '2,9U 1°1sIBaU saPBI°BI sIssB4D AU -AI
It MZI MZI M6E 716E '(NZ/T
0
114
swqo) LTA jo ljnoaja pja2 uj palaauuoa gtu aolsjsall jo anT eA AU -AI
01 M91 MOT OZZ ON -(mz/T suitio) ijnoajo sujq AI uj palaauuoa Etll aolsjsall Jo an IBA AU -AI
1114
r00
'6A I° 9# uji pue BA Jo 9# utd oi q
104 'EEU PBB 8A JO 9# utd of .B
1114 q q E u :palaauuoa 'AkZ/T swqo OZZ. 'ZEH loisjsall sapnTouj sjsseto Au -AT
14 .0TA JO o# utd pus 6A jo 9# utd -q
Ed 'sal pus ono Jo uojaaunF pue OTA J° 9# utd 'u
0 q q e e :ol palaauuoa 'MZ/I swqo OZZ 'LEH I°1Bfsall sPBI3BT sIsBB4D AU -AI
ell -4.T1 pue 6E).1 Jo uojaaunr pue TTA jo 9# utd -q
w0il
'6A JO 9# u!d 'u
q q e e :01 palaauuoa 'Aliz/T swqo OZZ, 'EET) loisjsau sapnTauj sjsseqo AH-dT
CI 4punoa0 01 'TA Jo 9# utd 'q
G4 launo12 ol Lcg pus sal Jo uojlaunc 4u
CI q q e u :01 palaauuoa '=ww
a TOO' 'OZTD J°1I3BduD BPBT3BI sIsse40 All -AI
4.1 oN oN saA sax .punoaA pue 'TA Jo 9# utd cal palaauuoa
P4
'Jwiu 089 't90 PuB 'Iww OOLZ 'E93 sI°1I3BdeD sPBIDBI BIBBB90 AU -AI
114
14 -HA Jo 9# utd pus OTA Jo 9# utd uaamiag q
04 42,N Pus 0z13 Jo uojlaunc 'R
G4 q q e e
:ol palaauuoa 'MZ/I swqo OZZ 'SDI J°1sIsal1 saPBIDBI sIssB40 AU -AI
OZZ OZZ 000T 000T .(a/T suitio) ljnaaja AI uj palaauuoa 9tH aolsjsall Jo an IBA AU -AI
oN oN saA saA TTA Jo 9# utd
E4 01 palaauuoa 'MZ/T Bw4° 000T '8E14 "lsIsaU saPBIDBI sIBBB43 AU -AI
CO an DK FIN VW
C)
(saduadaThq sissvto) uoillOiDsda s:lssilto
sapoD stssplo gg-4I N s:issvio uvilT
:g
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
235M1, 235B1, 325M8

C4c755,f Cocks
Chassis Description (Chassis Differences)
MR, Ma Ale, /11.0

IF-RF Value of Resistor R56 connected to pin #4 of V12 (ohms 1/2W). 220K 47K

Main Chassis includes socket and tube V18 (6AL5) with the
accompanying components: Resistor R68, 2.2 meg +10% 1/2W,
and Capacitor C134, .05 mfd 600V. No Yes

Main Value of Capacitor C88 connected to terminal "N". 680 .05

mmf mfd

Main Chassis includes Capacitor C134, .05 mfd 600V, connected be-
tween terminal 7 of Transformer T7 and pin #7 of tube V18
(6AL5). No Yes

Main Value of Resistor 8120 (ohms 1/2W) 12K 22K

IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R16, 100 ohms 1/2W, connected to NO (MD)
terminal "R". Yes Yes(MC)

IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R10: a a (MC)

33K 1/2W,connected to pin #5 of V2.
a.
b. 220K 1/2W,connected to ground and junction of R12 and R13. b0 1 0

IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R3, 6.2K +5% 1/2Wiconnected: a a (Mc)

a. In parallel with Coil L2 and C9.
b (MD
b. To Switches Si and S2 moveable arm terminals.
IF-RF Chassis includes Resistor R4, 47 ohms 1/2W, connected between ',is (MD
pin #7 of VI and ground. No No (MC

IF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

FOR CODE MC AND MD CHASSIS

Briefly, the detailed procedure may.be analyzed as follows: connect the high
side of the signal generator to IF Test.Input (see Fig. 5) and the grounded side of
the generator is connected directly to receiver chassis ground. The first adjust-
ment is made at 34.5 megacycles, adjusting L29 for maximum output with the vacuum
tube voltmeter connected between terminals "G" and "E" on the terminal strip of the
IF sub -chassis assembly. The input signal should be adjusted to produce a 1-1/2 to
2-1/2 volt reading on the VTVM. The signal generator is then adjusted to 32.9 MC
and L14, and L23 adjusted to produce the maximum output voltage.

The signal generator is then adjusted to 31.625 MC and L26 adjusted to produce
a maximum voltage at "G" and "E". If L54 is adjusted near the minimum point, it may
be very difficult to obtain a satisfactory reading between "G" and "E" when adjust-
ing L26. This again is not important, for L26 will be rechecked and adjusted when
the voltmeter is connected to the output of the sound discriminator. With L26
peaked roughly to 31.625 MC, adjust L54 to produce a minimum voltage between terminals
"G"and "E". Then connect the VTVM from terminal "A" to chassis and peak L26, L54,
L28, L27 and L16 to 31.625 MC. The signal input level should be adjusted to maintain
a maximum of 4 volts from "A" to chassis at all times, to prevent limiting. These
adjustments should be repeated several times to be sure that all coils are peaked
at exactly the same frequency. If they are badly out of adjustment, it is advisable

22 to return the VTVM to terminals "G" and "E" and check L54 to be sure that it is
adjusted to produce a minimum voltage at exactly this same frequency.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
235M1,235B1,325M8

Oscillation within the receiver circuits may be detected by an excessive and

unstable voltage output at terminals "G" and "E" exceeding 5 or 6 volts as a minimum
and very often exceeding 10 volts. To be sure the set is not oscillating and adjust-
ments made to produce this oscillation rather than eliminate it, vary the signal
generator input and notice if the voltage output varies correspondingly with the
signal input. If it does not, some circuit must be oscillating.

After L29, L14, L23, L26, L54., L27, L28, and L16 have all been adjusted as
outlined above, change the VTVM to terminal "B" and chassis and turn signal generator
completely off. Note reading on VTVM. (Antenna input should be shorted to prevent
any signal pickup through the RF stage.) Turn signal generator on and adjust L17
to produce the same voltage on the VTVM noted when no signal was applied. This
point should occur approximately in the center (zero voltage) of the voltmeter
reading, as it passes sharply from a positive to a negative voltage. Adjustment
of L17 to this zero voltage should also produce a minimum of background noise and
best tone quality from an FM signal of 31.625 MC center frequency.

The VTVM should be connected from "A" to ground when making the final adjust-
ment on L26, since L54 has been adjusted to minimum response with the VTVM con-
nected from "G" to "E". If L26 requires considerable adjustment in order to peak it,
check L54 again with the VTVM connected between "G" and "E". This voltage should
be a minimum after L26 is peaked to a maximum. Now adjust the signal generator to
35.9 MC, and adjust L24 for maximum output with the VTVM connected from "G" to "E".
Change the signal generator frequency to 37.625 MC and adjust L19 for maximum volt-
age between "G" and "E". If L22 is correctly adjusted for minimum response, it may
be impossible to obtain a satisfactory reading at "G" and "E" for adjustment of L19.
Therefore, L22 should he detuned slightly, but he very careful not to detune it any
great, amount, for it must he tuned finally to an absolute minimum, and if its adjust-
ment is changed greatly after L19 is peaked, the initial adjustment of L19 will be
altered. In other words, adjust L19 for maximum output with L22 adjusted to as near
a minimum output as is possible to obtain a satisfactory reading between "G" and "E".

119 should he rechecked to be sure that it is at maximum response and L22 at

minimum.

Alignment of the mixer output stage L14 may he accomplished roughly by applying
the signal to the mixer tube V3. But since access to this tube is rather difficult
with the picture tube in place, it is suggested that the signal he applied to the
antenna input directly. However, if any difficulty is encountered in adjustments,
indicating that it is badly out of adjustment or that oscillation is taking place in
the RF stage, then go back to V3 and apply the signal generator output to the tube
shield of this tube in a similar manner as was done throughout the previous IF align-
ment. Erratic meter readings may he caused by the signal generator not being firmly
grounded to the TV chassis especially when the generator is connected to the antenna
input terminals. A good ground connection must be maintained between the signal gen-
erator and the TV chassis at all times. With the signal generator applied to the
antenna output, adjust its frequency to 32.9 MC and adjust L14 and recheck L23 for
maximum voltage output on VTVM connected from .cr to "E". Return the signal generator
setting to 35.9 MC and recheck L24 and L20 for maximum output. Normally no difficulty
should he encountered in feeding an IF signal through from the antenna terminals into
the IF; but in case the antenna wavetraps (C141, C142, L50 and L51) are turned to the
particular frequency one is attempting to apply to the IF, a very strong signal may
be necessary unless the antenna plug is pulled out of the RF chassis and the signal
generator input applied directly to the chassis jack. Even though the signal gen-
erator output is unbalanced to ground, this will make no difference as far as IF
alignment is concerned, but it should be balanced when making RF adjustments.
23
N .0 .0 .0 .0 .0

0" r 0. 0 0'

len sZn SIONIRIZA cl. YOH 11401311

C0

LT,
310 SZO An NO
SO SSD
4131.04181 DSO 8 3'6

O
.1; N
O
1,1
amzT /4,
2 r
334
C)

X
to
0
CA 0
0
0
0

-n 0) CT vt
N CP
cn
X
C
CZ,

C/3
wr
.0)
C) -NA r.)4
(71
N
N rN
C/3 3W 41 41
Ut
C) m
X r C/3
C-3 (A
W N
74 X 1r)
334
K 0)r ON
0
0 4 N- CA
CA Ul Qr ) C)
X 1 0
0 CO
CO
,8CsT.0.- T6 IT7Z) C
L46
0
74 vERT CENTER
r
HORIZONTAL
N K
HON CENTER CD 0 0
O N) 6 "n
LRREOUPICE LOCK DRIVE
C)
41 0 RS?
co
 R.F. OSCILLATOR MIXER SOUND F SOUND LIMITER DISCRIMINATOR, DELAYED AGO
6J6 6J6 6J6 +200V +160V 6 AG5
I

6AU6
VI i ST. AUDIO
V2 V3 V4 V5 678
300.n. V6
ANT r- 14-T 4. -C) L 15
B+
at.+20 V
030
T10:0 TI AUDIO OUTPUT
T000 I1con 31.625 MC. 6Y6 -G TABLE
T1000 V7 MODEL
CI 0143 -C3-6 68 T2
021
1! 04(2 1125 ONLY
0142 15 27 220K
2.2 R12 DISCRIM
RI 10K
RII ALIGN
50 015 016 680
N41 1

JI 3 VOLUME
R 28R 2 R64
4
121040 120207K
SOUND
5006 -CT
I MEG. ALIGN 4 220 8
0 126
.00 L16 g . r
6
7
=
C
680
3
7241\\I TONE69821'9

R F BIAS 5 rnl_ 18 TONE CONTROL

i 57 58 044
R19 C22 C 121 1 57 CLOSED FOR 'BASE I , T 004
226 FINE TUNING
F 220 3RD.60 51. E R 67 1000 T 58 CLOSED FOR 'TREBLE
T REBLE I
C313
8.2KIF ----7 VIDEO 57658 OPEN F014.74ORMAL" G.

.F.
TEST
INPUT V10 64C 7 TEST
T
4 TH. LE
L2
N.F.

L4
B 6405
L29
v I2
I

1020VIDEOL 31
ROB
47K
.004 R 30
220
2W
157 I.F.
6405
31.625 MC
MIN
ti C60
015
L22
37.625 MC
51_1 14.5
MC. - DET
2
R59
6200
PICTURE TUBE
V8
`67 a I: 2W

_ _ _L _ __J 1111! ILY:9 1013P4

08 III C9 HI c tE III1: 023 4 0:4 III 026 HI 6 013
III 41 III III R54
118 2 R53 068 14700
186
VII VIO V9 C119 R50 0122
4
V8
1000
4
V2
34
V3
3 4
VI
R 58 I 68 C5 37.625 MC
1000
18K
86
L34 L35 L36 -
=072 C76- 32.9 MC R49 12144
1000 000- 1000co,!%= 220 R.F. BIAS

073 50 075 ISO 077 150 0124 I R57

0046 T,s0570 1000 186
RF B IF SU8 CHASSIS

L37 L39 L38 I.F.BIAS

C83 085= 0129-
1000 1000 1000
084ISO C128 ISO SYNC. SEP RAMP. SYNC. CLIPPER
C82 RISS R70 R75 2 MEG. + 295V
ISO 11000CB9
= 7 2
6SN7-GT
VI4
1/2 6507-GT
VISA
WA, sows
VERT OUTPUT VERT. YOKE
1
100K 6.8MEG. HE 1GHT -1)274' R86 100 R87 200
I/2 6507 GT VERT. CENTER HOR. CENTER
R73 VERT. OSC.-DISCH v168 21 FOCUS
1 MEG. 1/2 6SN7--GT COIL
VISA L44
0 083 990 G Z47
GLAMPER 4700 C966 56 .n.
FOCUS
6AL5 IW 250 R132
MFD
VI8 10t/ 5606
P.
+I 60V R134
841
7500 I MEG (R.F. A.F.)
R76 1277 R78 0690
5661E6 226 8200 8200 L42 80 AA
H.V. RECTIFIIE°Rw kiF0
C 46A 0131
15MFD I B3 -G7 = RAE
R 250V - 0690
6 R95 C90 C91 C92 82 I - 350V V20 +1650 SO
22K MFD
5 0 II

300V
WW1, T0021.005 CAP
4 R131
R68 SYNC. PHASE HOR. OSC.-DISCH VERT. LINEARITY 78 ONSLEI ONLY
2.2 MEG. 1/2 6SN7-GT 1/2 6557-GT 4708
R107 12137
L4
097 089
V174 V176 2 2 MEG 2.2 MEG. 9 CI 56 4.7K 6.30 G
010813 25-270 T7 R93 2 Z L47
0134 R103 sa.n.
G

.05 NOR. LOCK -RANGE

3 R88 470
HOR. 15011 11
HOLD (CHOKE 5 V22 Ro
COLOR R94 6801( 035 CONSOLE 59
1001( 11102 2W 10 0117 C118
CODE 6800 2812 qd ION VOL
1155 2 6000 MFD
BLUE 1118 NTROL
33011 CONTRAST R2O3R)
BK BLACK 1462 NOR. OUTPUT 150
8R BROWN 120K 6006G
GREEN VI9 AGC
0106 5
RICII AMPLIFIER
0 ORANGE R99 560
B RED 1806
18014 a % 8104 II9143 1/2 6 SN7-GT
W 1506 27K V 15B CII6A COVER
SLATE WOrlw 0105 INTERLOCK
2700 FUSE RI22 0468 50MFD
VIOLET 8.20 BOMFD 450V
WHITE 01080 IN $2005 +
HOR. LIN oo ..g6,49,130
Schematic Diagram for YELLOW -C 694 clr R100 25-270 R113
.0w.
01160 B
T5 MFD 1 Ink HOR. MEG
L46 a 14000 T_ OOMFD 023
450V
chassis codes MA, MB, -4004 DRIVE 117V 60.0
-150V -
R 116 10K
MC, and MD. Refer to + 295V REGENERATIVE RECTIFIERS
DAMPER 604-GT
Page 20 for chassis 604-GT
V21
differences.

Fig. 6 - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, BENDIX MODELS 235MI, 23581, AND 325M8 25A
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PRACTICAL TROUBLE SHOOTING HINTS
Bendix Television Models 235M1, 235B1, 325M8
If R16 and R17, plate circuit of mixer tube V2, are burned, check RF oscillator
operation before replacing these resistors.

If response is peaked on high frequency side, as viewed with an oscilloscope,

check coils L10 and L11.
If container of electrolytic capacitor C46 shows disfiguration, look.for B+
(-200 volts) to he shorted at some point to the chassis before attempting to
replace this capacitor.

If the picture indicates a non-linear vertical sweep, examine the lugs on

electrolytic capacitor C69 to be sure of good contact.

If IF tubes keep burning out, check IF bias with VTVM to determine if its
potential is not more positive than -1.5 volts. If bias is more positive,
examine all bias circuit components and IF coupling capacitors. Check also
voltage from chassis ground to B- to determine if it is less negative than
-115 volts, which would cause the IF bias to be more positive.

If the center tap of the volume control is shorted to chassis, the sound and
picture will be distorted and the picture may, possibly, be eliminated when
the volume control is rotated.

If the sound is weak and distorted, check V7 cathode by-pass electrolytic

capacitor C45.

If there is evidence of speaker rattle, the cause may be the shielded audio
lead touching speaker cone.

Hum in picture and sound may be caused by the lead of coil L39 (filament choke)
shorting to pin #6, tube V6 (RF bias).

Insufficient vertical size could be caused by R83, plate circuit of V16B, in-
creasing in value.

Lack of vertical sweep could be caused by:

a. Loose or broken knife disconnects in vertical yoke leads.

b. Defective V16 tube (6SN7GT).

c. Defective transformer T4 or T5.

d. Defective vertical yoke winding.

e. Open wiring to potentiometers located on front panel.

No Raster: Examine tube V20 (1B3). If the filament is lit, then it is safe to
assume the horizontal sweep circuits are functioning and the trouble can be in
the picture tube, picture tube circuits, video amplifier, or AGC circuit.
A picture tube (V13) that draws too much 2nd anode current will cause a re-
duction of the high voltage (10KV). The voltage difference between cathode,
pin #11 of V13, and grid, pin #2 of V13, should not be less than 15 volts
when Brilliance control is set at maximum, or there will be a reduction in
the high voltage.
25
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
235M1,235B1,325M8
If the raster fails to disappear when the Brilliance control is in the minimum
(counterclockwise) position, check:

a. The voltage between grid, pin #2, and cathode, pin #11, of V13 should
be approximately 70 volts. If the reading is less, then examine the
associated circuit and B- (-150 volts).
b. If B- and B+ voltages appear normal, then shorting out resistor R112
connected to Brilliance potentiometer may correct the voltage condition
between grid and cathode of V13.

c. If the grid to cathode voltage is above 70 volts, the picture tube should
be replaced.

If C108C (horizontal drive trimmer) is turned so far clockwise that it is ex-

tremely tight (maximum capacity point) and left in this position, the horizon-
tal output tube or tubes and associated plate circuits will slowly burn.

If unstable sync is noted:

a. Turn C108A and C108B (horizontal frequency and lock raftge trimmers)
counterclockwise one half turn to a full turn.

b. Use substitution method to check for leakage in capacitor C110 connected

between terminals 4 and 9 of the high voltage transformer.

The following are the voltages that can be expected at the various test points
listed.

Note: All voltage readings are taken.at minimum contrast which occurs at full
counterclockwise position of control.

TEST POINT VOLTAGE REMARKS

Boosted B+ pin #3, V21 + 275 to + 325V DC

pin #3, V23 + 230 to + 290 V DC

+ 165V Bus lug 3, R87 + 140 to + 190 V DC

Hor. Center

B- terminal "E" - 115 to - 145 V DC

RF Bias terminal "S" - 18 to - 25 V DC

IF Bias terminal "Q" - 7 to - 9 V DC

Hor. Drive pin #5, V19 (6BG6) 55 to 75 V Use Scope

or pin #6
of V18 or V19 (7A5) Peak to Peak

Vert. Drive junction C94 & C95 20 to 25 V Use Scope

Peak to Peak

If sound cuts on and off or takes 3 to 15 minutes to reach proper level, re -

26 place coil L18 connected to terminal 5 of discriminator transformer Ti.

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Du MONT TELESET
Model RA105
DESCRIPTION OF SET Two chassis incorporating the necessary circuits for F.M.
and T.V. reception are used in all models of the RA -105. These
The Model RA -105 Teleset is produced in the following are referred to in this manual as the Receiver Main Chassis
styles: (Fig. 1) and the Flyback Power Supply (Fig. 2). In the
PICTURE Colony Model a separate chassis ( Fig. 3) for reception of
CABINET SERVICES TUBE SPEAKER A.M. is used. An automatic record changer is included in this
model.
Stratford (Table top) FM & TV 15 inch 6 inch
An external record player may be used with the Stratford,
Westbury (Console) FM & TV 15 inch 12 inch Westbury and Whitehall if so desired. A jack at the rear of
Whitehall (Console) FM & TV 15 inch 12 inch the main receiver chassis, and the Phono position of the Ser-
Colony (Console) AM, FM, 15 inch 12 inch vice Selector Switch makes this possible.
TV & Phono

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3

DESCRIPTION OF CIRCUITS
Reference Fig. 4 Block Diagram also Schematic Diagram
RF TUNING ASSEMBLY
The RF Tuner used in all post-war Du Mont Telesets con-
stitutes an assembly identified as the Inputuner. The circuits
are developed around a three gang variable inductor called
the "Mallory -Ware Inductuner". This inductor consists of
L102A, L102B and LIO2C on the Schematic diagram.
This Inputuner is a continuous type tuner covering the
range of frequencies from 44 MC to 216MC. This range covers
the twelve television channels, the standard FM band plus
other short wave facilities in this range.
The input impedance of this tuner is approximately 73
ohms, therefore, coaxial transmission line such as RG-59/U
should be used with Du Mont Telesets.
The transmission line is capacitively coupled to the input
circuit through C101. Inductance L106 in parallel with the
antenna input provides a high pass, radio frequency filter to
suppress broadcast band or other low frequency cross modu-
lation interference which may arise when the Teleset is located
in an extremely intense field of a local AM broadcast station
or other radiator.
The plates of the 6J6 RF Amplifier (V101) are coupled
to the grid of the 6AK5 mixer tube (V102) by means of a six
megacycle wide broad -band coupling network. The variable
series coil combinations consisting of L101-L102A and L105-
L102B tune to the desired signal frequency in conjunction
with the associated tube capacities and the coupling network
consisting of C105, C106 and C107. Resistors R110 and R104
reduce the "Q" of the respective coils considerably in order for
the coupling network to maintain the very wide pass band.
The VHF oscillator utilizes one section of the twin triode
6J6 ( V103) in a modified Colpitts Oscillator circuit. The
feedback voltage from the plate to the grid of the oscillator
tube is accomplished by means of the interelectrode capacity
of the vacuum tube. The oscillator frequency is adjusted by
movement of the tap on the coil L102C which short circuits
a portion of the coil.
The oscillator output is coupled to the grid of the mixer
tube V102 by means of capacitor C112. Both the incoming
signal and the oscillator voltages are fed into the grid of the
mixer tube V102. The plate of V102 feeds into the first video
IF transformer.
©1949 Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories
27
 SOUND I.F. SECTION AUDIO SECTION
V214
SALT-GT
TUNING
PNONO
INDICATOR
FROM AN TUNER
PICTURE Arlo SOUND SECTION (COLONY)

V2I0 V211 V2I2 V2I3 V2I5 V2I6 7

6.6 6.6 64U6 RAL5 6006 6V6 LOUD
F TUNER LI SOUND
It! SOUND ZIP SOUND 352 SOUND SOUND 29P SOUND S.R.
UNIT I.F .F., LIMITER DISCRIM. AMP. AMP
V103
6J6
V. OSG.

PICTURE SECTION
V209
A.G. C. LINE V206-6
SATE I/2-12AU7
AMP.
RESTORER
GRID -nlvf

V101 V102 V201 V202 V203 V204 V205 0206-A V207

6J6 SASS 6.5 6.5 SAGS SACS I/ 2-I2AU7 626-GT VIDEO
MIXER r VIDEO 25.2 VIDEO SU VIDEO VIDEO DET. ME VIDEO 202 VIDEO 3E2 VIDEO
R. f. AMP
AMP. AMP. AMR

PICTURE Ano SYNCH. SECTION

VERT.
0000
COMPOSITE SYNC. V. SYNC. V. SAW SECTION
SECTION 7914, 0000
SECTION
RED T20 GRID
GREEN
T202
V220 -A V220-6
I/ 2-6SN7 I/ 2- 6SN7
VERT. VERT, SAW
BUFFER GENERATOR V405

RORIE.
N.46
DAMPING
0217 H SYNC. SECTION
SYNC.
CLIPPER
PIN I
..0kA
P. 5
r,/
GRID
/ MORI, SWEEP
V208
I5AP4
DU MONT
PLATE
TELETRON
V2I0 V2I9 V40 A V402 V403 V10.
SACS 666-GT/G I/ 2.7 6.6-0 IBS-GT/BOIS 193-.G6 IGN VOLTAG
SYNC RORIE MON12. SAW MORIZ. V. RECT H.V. RECT.

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

MSGR.
- OSC. P AMP DOUBLER DOUBLER

V222
SUDS
V224
L. VOLT V006
RECT.
6.7 6%4 HORIZ. SWEEP -I-
V101-9 REACTANC
TUBE NEG. VOLT. MODEL RA -I05 TELESET
1/ 2- 12.7 SUPPLY HIGH VOLTAGE SECTION
RELAY DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM
CONTROL
TUBE
V223 0.107
5U4G 6%4
L. VOLT NEG. VOLT
RECT SUPPLY
ALLEN R. DU MONT LABORATORIES, INC
TELESET SERVICE CONTROL DEPT.
PASSAIC, N.J., U.S. A.
USE OF DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM tendon. The reason it Isar so iden ified is that certain d i. Picture normal but no sound. Tuning indicator 7, Sound normal. Picture out of sync both horizon.
has in Inn circuits could affect b th picture and sync. tund°. normally to. tuning. Location: Audio Am tally and vertically. P0. Composite Sync Section.
The purpose of this block diagram is to assist the Following is a list of trouhlm withMe section i piffle. Section, Nom: In the case of the Colony, the AM 11. Sound normal.Picture
Picture out of Sync horizontally.
serviceman. especially the inexperienced man, in rapidly .
width they normally would occu Only one trouble mit tar Mono would not work either. Location: Horizontal Sync Station, Figure 4
localizing troubles onetime is anticipated. 1. Sound normal. No picture, but rum b synchron 9. No Raster. Sound normal. LOilii0IP: Horizontal
I.No picture and no soun or weak pia And Wed. (See Fig 071. Picture Section. Sweep .cad Hi Voltage section.
The large, or wet. blocks, have been designated
wait sound. Location: Pica. and Sound Stain. S. Sound normal. No rineure, resat is not sombre. ID No Sound. No Raster, Tuning Indicator &es
=ceding end function of the Telenet that be 2. Picture norm, has. no sound. Tuning Whams, ited. Lmation, Pict add Sync Section. nog glow. Location: Low Voltage Section.
Hoed if defect occurs In that section. For example, does not function as channel is and. Lnediesu Sound 6. Snood normaure L Picture rolls werticolly. Locaiinu I. Sound normal. Horizontal bright line on face
One section Ism been referred to as the Picture and Sync IF Section. Vertical Sync Section. of CRT. Location: Verii.1 Saw Section.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
When properly tuned to a channel, the heterodyning action
between the incoming signal and the locally generated oscilla-
tion in the mixer, will produce the sound and the video IF sig-
nals. These signals will be present in the plate circuit of the
6AK5 mixer.
The gain of the mixer stage is controlled by the A.G.C. volt-
age applied to the grid circuit. This control voltage is fed
back from the AGC circuit located on the Main Chassis.
VIDEO IF AMPLIFIERS
The video IF strip used in the RA -105 Telesets consists of
three stages of amplification incorporating 6AG5 tubes. The
serviceman who has worked on the Du Mont RA -103 Telesets
will notice a very definite similarity between this IF amplifier
strip and that used in the RA -103.
One item that should be noted by the serviceman is the
means used for controlling the gain of the IF strip. The con-
trast control is no longer located in the grid circuits of the
first two video IF stages. Instead of the manually operated
contrast control, a control voltage is developed in an automatic
gain control circuit (to be discussed later) and fed back to
the grid circuits of the first two IF stages and the mixer.
The 21.9 Mc sound IF signal is taken off at the grid of the
2nd video IF and fed to the primary of the first sound IF
transformer Z201.
Located between the 2nd video IF and the 3rd video IF are
two parallel resonant circuits that merit some discussion. The
combination of L210 and C208 form a parallel resonant cir-
cuit at a frequency of 21.9 Mc. This circuit offers high at-
tenuation to 21.9 Mc which is the frequency of the sound
accompanying the picture being received. Thus, signals of this
frequency are prevented from getting to the picture tube and
causing interference.
The parallel combination of L209 and C209 is resonant at
a frequency of 27.9 Mc. The purpose of this "trap" is to pre-
vent the sound of the lower adjacent channel from getting
through to the picture tube and causing interference.
All the adjustments in the video IF strip are variable induc-
tances except for C213. This variable capacitor is used to con-
trol the bandwidth of the coupling network with which it is
used.
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL
One of the features of the Du Mont Model RA -105 Teleset
is the use of an Automatic Gain Control circuit. This AGC
circuit automatically controls the gain of the first two video
IF stages plus the gain of the mixer stage.
One half of a 6AL5, (V204) and a 6AT6, (V209) are the
tubes used in this circuit.
The video IF signal is applied to the plate (pin #2) of the
6AL5 (V204).
During the positive half cycle of the video IF signal this
tube will conduct on the sync pulses. The voltage developed
at the cathode is coupled to the grid of V209 through an RC
filter. This filter will tend to smooth out the pulsating signal
so that the voltage applied to the control grid is essentially
a DC voltage. The amplitude of this voltage will change with
any change in amplitude of the incoming signal. The polarity
of this signal is positive. This DC voltage is used to control
the gain of the triode section of V209.
The signal from the plate of the horizontal oscillator V219
is also fed to the grid circuit of V209.
This signal from the plate of the 6K6 is essentially a square
wave at a frequency of 15,750 cps.
This horizontal signal is amplified by the triode section of
the 6AT6. The gain of this triode depends on the bias voltage
which is supplied from the half of the 6AL5.
The horizontal signal in the plate circuit of V209 is coupled
from the plate of the triode to the diode plate in the same
tube. This signal is then rectified by the diode section, and a
negative voltage is available across R246 and R247 to ground.
A filter consisting of R244 and C226 remove any variations
so that the signal fed back to the 1st and 2nd video IF stages
is essentially a smooth DC.
When the signal presented to the antenna tends to increase,
the DC developed in the AGC diode becomes more positive.
This increases the gain of the triode section of V209. Thus,
the signal in the plate circuit of this stage is increased and
the negative AGC voltage is also increased, thereby reducing
the gain of the mixer and video IF amplifiers.
This AGC voltage is fed to the grid of the mixer through
the filter consisting of R245 and C227.
VIDEO DETECTOR AND VIDEO AMPLIFIERS
The output from the 3rd video IF is fed to one half of
V204, the video detector. The other half of this tube is used
in the AGC circuit.
The waveform of the voltage observed at pin #7 is essen-
tially as shown in Fig. 5 (exact waveforms can be seen in the
Service Section of this manual). Since the sync pulses are ex-
tending in a negative direction, the polarity of this signal is
said to be "black negative". This means that the portion of
the signal corresponding to the "blacks" in the picture is in the
negative direction.
Coils L213 and L214 are used to improve the high frequency
response of this circuit.
Coil L220 and C215 are used to prevent any video IF from
appearing at the grid of the first video amp.
The video signal is now amplified by the first video ampli-
fier V205 using a 6AG5. As shown in Figure 6, the polarity
has been reversed by the action of the amplifier. Since the
"blacks" are extending in a positive direction, the signal is said
to be "black" positive.
Figure 5. Video Signal at Pin #7 (plate) of V204
Since direct coupling was used between the video detector
and 1st video amplifier, no provisions were needed to take
care of the low frequency response. In this stage, a 10 mfd.
capacitor is used as the screen bypass capacitor to provide good
low frequency response. Plate compensation for low frequency
response is provided by the use of R224 and C214 -B.
L215 is used to improve the high frequency response of this
circuit.
The parallel combination of L216, R280 and C216 forms
a resonant circuit at 4.5 Mc. This circuit is called a "grain
29

MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Figure 6. Video Signal at pin #5 (plate) V205
1st video amplifier
trap". The purpose of this trap is to prevent the 4.5 Mc "beat"
frequency between the picture IF frequency and sound IF
frequency from getting through to the picture tube.
Although V206 -A is identified as the 2nd video amplifier,
no gain is realized by this stage. The circuit used here is called
a Cathode Follower. The signal is applied to the control grid
as usual, but it is taken out at the cathode. The plate is at
AC ground potential. This is accomplished by connecting a 10
mfd. capacitor, C220 -B to ground from the plate.
The contrast control is located in the Cathode circuit of this
stage. The action of this control is to adjust the amplitude of
the signal being applied to the control grid of V207 and
subsequently to the grid of the Cathode Ray Tube.
Observation of waveforms in this stage indicate there is no
reversal of polarity between the signal applied to the grid and
that taken out at the Cathode. (Fig. 7.) This is characteristic
of Cathode Followers. The amplitude of the signal observed at
the cathode is lower than that at the grid.
The third video amplifier V207 uses a 6K6. The screen
grid of this stage is also heavily by-passed using a 10 mfd.
450V capacitor to provide good low frequency response.
Figure 7. Signal observed at cathode of V206 -A.
2nd Video amp.
*L217 is a series peaking coil and L218 is a shunt peaking
coil, both of which are used to improve the high frequency
response of this circuit.
The video signal is amplified and inverted by this stage and consisting of R304, C271, R305, and C272. This circuit is called
applied to the grid of the Cathode Ray tube as shown in Fig.
*L217 has been deleted in later models. pulse from the sequence of pulses that occurs at the end of
30
Emr.
8. Note the polarity is "black negative". This indicates that
the dark or black portions of the signal cause the grid to be
driven negative, reducing the current in the beam of the CRT
and thus reducing the intensity on the screen. The white por-
tions of the signal drive the grid less negative increasing the
beam current and thus brightening the picture.
A DC restorer circuit incorporating the second half of
V206 -B the 12AU7 is used in the grid circuit of the 15AP4
Teletron. This circuit rectifies the video signal and reinserts
its DC component at this point.
Figure 8. Signal Observed at Grid of CRT
SYNC CLIPPER
The video signal is fed from the plate circuit of the first
video amplifier to the grid of the Sync Clipper V217. The pur-
pose of this stage is to remove the composite sync signal
from the video signal by means of a clipping action. This
clipping action is acomplished by using low screen voltage
and low plate voltage.
Figures 9 and 9A shows the effect of passing the video sig-
nal through the Sync Clipper.
Figure 9 is essentially the waveform that is applied to the
grid of the sync clipper. The sync signals that are necessary for
synchronization of the sweep circuits are those signals shown
above the black level.
Figure 9A is called the composite sync signal because it is
composed of horizontal sync pulses plus the sequence of
pulses that occur at the end of a field ( bottom of the pic-
ture). This sequence consists of 6 equalizing pulses, followed
by the vertical sync pulse interval which is comparable to 6
equalizing pulses turned upside down, then followed by 6
more equalizing pulses, after which the horizontal sync pulses
again appear.
There is actually no 60 cycle signal present in this wave-
form as shown, since the frequency of the equalizing pulses
and the pulses used in the vertical sync pulse interval is
31,500 cps.
However, this sequence occurs every 1/60 of a second. The
integrator, located in the plate circuit of the vertical buffer,
will derive a 60 cycle positive pulse from this composite
sync. This positive pulse will be used to synchronize the Ver-
tical Saw Generator.
VERTICAL BUFFER
The purpose of the vertical buffer stage V220A is to amplify
the composite sync signal fed to it from the Sync Clipper
V217. In the plate circuit of the vertical buffer is a circuit
an integrator and its purpose is to derive a single 60 cycle
a field. The action of this circuit is readily seen by the wave-
forms observed and presented in the Service Section.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAX. CARRIER -
VOLTAGE
BLACK -
EQUALIZING VERT. SYNCH.
PULSE PULSE
INTERVAL INTERVAL
WHITE -
ZERO CARRIER
PICTURE
NOR. BLANKING
BOTTOM OF PICTURE
Figure 9. Composite Video Signal at Grid of Sync Clipper.
Figure 9A. Composite Synchronizing Signals at Plate of Sync Clipper.
VERTICAL SAW GENERATOR
The Vertical Saw Generator utilizes one half of a 6SN7
identified as V220 -B. This blocking tube oscillator circuit is
non -conducting during the time corresponding to the vertical
trace and conducting heavily during the vertical retrace time.
The free running frequency of this circuit is controlled by
C273, R307 and the vertical hold control R308. Normally, the
free running frequency is adjusted lower than 60 cycles. This
permits proper synchronization when the vertical sync pulse
from the integrator circuit is inserted.
During the period corresponding to the vertical trace time
when V220 -B is non -conducting, capacitor C275 located in the
plate circuit is charged through resistors R309, R310 and
R311 to form the vertical sawtooth voltage. When V220 -B
conducts heavily, capacitor C275 discharges through the plate
cathode circuit of V220 -B and R311. The heavy discharge cur-
rent flowing through R311 develops a negative spike across
this resistor.
The waveform produced by this action in the plate circuit
of V220 -B is ideal for use in the vertical deflection circuit. As
will be seen in the Service Section of this manual, it consists
of a sawtooth voltage during, the trace time and a negative
pulse during the retrace time.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER
This voltage is applied to the grid circuit of the vertical
deflection amplifier V221, a 6SN7 with both halves in parallel.
In this stage the sweep signal is amplified and inverted in
polarity.
Transformer T202 matches the impedance of the deflection
yoke coils to the tube to obtain maximum transfer of energy.
Since this is essentially an output transformer, high current
and low voltage are desirable in the secondary. For this reason
the voltage on the secondary is much lower than that on the
primary.
HORIZONTAL SAW FORMING CIRCUITS
The horizontal saw voltage is developed by the joint oper-
ation of the horizontal oscillator V219 and the horizontal saw
maker stage V401 -A (located on the power supply chassis.)
The horizontal oscillator is a continuous wave oscillator
operating at a frequency of 15,750 cycles per second. The cir-
HORIZONTAL SYNCH. PULSES
EQUALIZING
PULSE
INTERVAL
AA
VERTICAL BLANKING
TIME TOP OF PICTURE
cuit used is an electron coupled oscillator, wherein the cath-
ode, control grid and screen grid ( acting as the plate) form
the triode oscillator. The circuit is essentially a Hartley Os-
cillator, with the free running ( not synchronized) frequency
determined primarily by the constants of the transformer
Z205. ( Synchronization will be discussed later.)
The Oscillator voltage developed in the grid circuit is of
sufficient amplitude to overdrive this tube. The waveform of
the signal. that appears at the plate of the 6K6 approaches
that of a square wave.
This signal is fed through a cable to the Flyback Power
Supply Chassis. The waveform of this voltage undergoes a
complete change as it is passed through a differentiator cir-
cuit consisting of capacitor C401 and resistor R401. (See
WAVEFORM OBSERVATIONS in Service Section).
The differentiator circuit output consists of positive and
negative pulses. A bias voltage at the grid of the horizontal
saw maker is developed by grid rectification of these pulses.
This bias is sufficient to keep the tube operating beyond
cut-off during the time corresponding to the horizontal trace.
This allows capacitor C413 located in the plate circuit of
V401A to charge through resistors R403, R404 and R405.
The positive pulses from the differentiator overcome the
cut-off bias and cause the tube to conduct heavily during the
retrace time. This allows C413 to discharge rapidly through
R404, R405 and the plate cathode circuit of V401A.
Since R404 and R405 are connected between C413 and
AC ground the voltage waveform will not only have a saw -
tooth form, but during the retrace time will consist of a
negative pulse. The amplitude of this pulse if determined by
the setting of the horizontal drive control.
HORIZONTAL SYNC CIRCUITS
The method used to synchronize the horizontal oscillator
is a form of Automatic Frequency Control.
The Sync circuits utilize a 6AC7 reactance tube and a 6AL5
Sync Discriminator circuit.
The purpose of the sync discriminator is to compare the lo-
cally generated 15,750 cps sine wave with the incoming hori-
zontal sync pulses. If the locally generated signal is out of
31
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
phase with the sync signal from the transmitter, then a DC
voltage will be fed to the 6AC7 reactance tube. Upon receipt
of this signal, the 6AC7 will act to correct the frequency of
the horizontal oscillator.
The 6AC7 reactance tube is connected across the oscillator
transformer and will cause the frequency of the horizontal os-
cillator to change if the DC voltage at its ( 6AC7) control
grid is varied. This is possible because the coupling between
the green lead of Z205 and the cathode of V224 consists of a
phase shifting network (C286 and R326) that causes an ap-
proximate 90° phase difference to exist between the plate
voltage and plate current of the 6AC7, thus causing the tube
to act like a reactance.
The 15,750 cps sine wave is coupled from the oscillator cir-
cuit through transformer Z205 to the two cathodes of the
6AL5 discriminator circuit. With no station being received,
the sine wave at each cathode with respect to ground is of
equal amplitude but 180° out of phase with each other.
Resistors R296 and R297 are connected between the plates
of this tube, and the center point of these resistors is returned
to the center tap on transformer Z205. Thus, as each section
of the 6AL5 conducts the voltage developed across the above
resistors will be of equal amplitude but opposite polarity with
respect to ground. Therefore, the DC output voltage of this
circuit will be zero. This output is coupled from Pin #7 of
V218 through a filter to the grid of the reactance tube V224.
As long as no change in the DC is fed to the reactance tube,
the frequency of the oscillator will not be affected.
The Sync signal is applied from the plate of the Sync Clip-
per V217 to the center tap ( white lead) of Z205. Applying
the signal to the center tap means that the polaritY of the
pulse at either end of the winding will be the same ( in this
case it will be negative.)
With the frequency control (top of can) and phase ad-
justment (bottom of can) properly set ( see section on Adjust-
ments) the waveform on pin #1 (V218) will be approximate.
ly that seen in Fig. 10 and the voltage on pin #5 (V218 ) will
be approximately that seen in Fig. 11.
Figure 10
With the signals at the two cathodes as shown, both tubes
will still conduct the same amount and the DC voltage aria -
don at pin #7 of V218 will be approximately zero.
However, if the locally generated signal tends to drift out
of phase with the sync pulses, then the pulse will change posi-
tion on the sine wave so that one half of the diode will con-
duct more than the other. This will develop a DC voltage at
Pin #7, the plate of the 6AL5 with respect to ground. This
voltage fed to the grid of the 6AC7 will cause the reactance
tube to correct the frequerwy of the horizontal oscillator.
32
Figure 11
The polarity of the discriminator output voltage depends
upon which half of the 6AL5 conducts greatest. This, in turn,
is a function of the direction (high or low) that the frequency
of the local oscillator drifts.
HORIZONTAL SWEEP AMPLIFIER
The saw voltage developed in the plate circuit of the hori-
zontal saw maker is coupled to the grid of the horizontal
sweep amplifier V402.
The purpose of this stage, utilizing a 6BG6, is to provide
sufficient current of the proper waveform to the horizontal
deflection coils. This is necessary to scan the CRT horizontally.
The output of this stage is transformer coupled to the hori-
zontal deflection coils. This transformer ( T-401) matches
the impedance of the deflection coils to the 6BG6, but it is
also used in producing the high positive voltage used on the
CRT.
A 5V4G rectifier tube is connected across the secondary of
T-401 and is used as a damper tube. It is used to dampen
any oscillation that may occur during the flyback time. When
the tube conducts, it will charge capacitor C409 directly and
C408 through L402.
This voltage thus developed and filtered by C408, C409 and
L402 is in series with the B+ voltage that is applied to the
horizontal saw maker and the horizontal sweep amplifier. This
voltage derived from the energy in the output circuit pro-
vides additional voltage for the horizontal saw maker and
the horizontal sweep amplifier.
Resistor R413 connected across V405 is used to provide
good horizontal linearity.
The effect of the width and linearity controls will be cov-
ered in the Section on ADJUSTMENTS.
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
This circuit uses two 1B3-GT/8016 in what may be called
a pulsed cascade doubler. The high voltage output is devel-
oped across C407 and C410 to ground.
Two separate filament windings are used for these tubes.
The voltage is developed when the magnetic field sur-
rounding the horizontal deflection coil collapses at the end
of a scanning line. This causes a positive pulse to appear at
the 6BG6 plate which is stepped up by the autotransformer
action of the transformer primary. This voltage is rectified
by the two 1B3's filtered and then applied to the Teletron. In
this doubler circuit the output voltage is approximately 12,000
V. DC.
NEGATIVE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
A pair of 6X4 miniature rectifier tubes are used in a full
wave rectifier circuit. A simplified schematic for this circuit
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
RECTIFIER
V406
6X4
TO PIN 4
5U40
T 203
RED
BLK. 115Y
115 1
RED
TO PIN 6
5U40
GEL
6.31.
ARR.
(LOCATED ON
MAIN CHASSIS)
is shown in Fig. 12. The tubes are located on the power sup-
ply chassis and the 115V AC is obtained from two taps, off
center on the low voltage power transformer located on the
main chassis.
The purpose of this circuit is to make available additional
voltage to provide a greater horizontal sweep amplitude. This
is accomplished by returning the grid -cathode circuit of the
horizontal sweep amplifier and horizontal saw maker to this
circuit. Since the effective plate voltage is that measured be-
tween plate and cathode, this will provide a greater difference
in potential between these elements. (On some of the early
models, the grid -cathode circuit of the horizontal saw maker
is returned to ground instead of to the negative voltage
supply.)
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The low voltage power supply located on the main chassis
utilizes two 5U4G rectifiers in a conventional full wave cir-
cuit.
A condenser input filter is used with a single series choke
L219.
The 117 volt AC is applied to the primary of the power
transformer T203 from the Flyback Power Supply Chassis.
The 4 amp. fuse is located on the power supply chassis.
RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
A time delay circuit is used to prevent the application of
high surge voltages to the input capacitors C281 and C282 in
the low voltage power supply filter.
This circuit consists of relay K201, and the Relay Control
tube V401 -B, one half of a 12AU7. The relay is located on
the Main Chassis whereas the tube is located on Power Supply
Chassis .
The 12AU7 section is connected up as a diode. The cathode
is returned to the negative voltage supply through resistor
R416. A 10 ohm resistor is connected in series with the fila-
ment to ground.
The plate of the 12AU7 is wired through the connectors
J402 and P202 and the cable between the power supply and
Main Chassis to one side of the coil on K201. The other side
of this coil goes to ground through the cable between J204
and P604.
TO GRID- CATHODE CIRCUIT OF
6BG6 NOR. SWEEP AMP
R4I5
250., 5W
TO R416
.0 41 I C 411-8
TO 70
175Y 175Y
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC NEGATIVE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
DU MONT MODEL RA -I05 TELESET
ALLEN R DU MONT LABORATORIES INC
PASSAIC, N. J., U.S. A.
Figure 12.
The contacts on the relay are located between the filaments
of the 5U4G rectifiers and the junction of R318 and C281.
Thus, if the contacts are open no voltage is applied to the
filter input.
When the set is turned on, these contacts are open as the
relay is not energized. The 10 ohm resistor in series with the
12AU7 filament delays the heating of this filament. This
allows sufficient time for the filaments of the other tubes
in the Teleset to come up to operating temperature. At the
end of approximately 15 seconds, the 12AU7 cathode will
emit. Since the cathode of the 12AU7 is connected to the nega-
tive supply and the plate goes to ground; the tube will
conduct.
The current flowing through the relay will energize it, close
the contacts and apply the positive voltage to the filter. Since
all the tubes in the receiver are warmed up they will draw
current, thus reducing the surge voltage applied to the input
condensers.
SOUND IF AMPLIFIERS
The 21.9 Mc Sound IF Signal is fed from' the grid circuit
of the 2nd video IF stage to Z201 the input transformer to
the sound IF strip.
Three stages, using 6AU6's comprise the sound IF strip.
The first two stages are straight amplifiers while the third
stage functions not only as an amplifier but also as a limiter.
Inasmuch as the discriminator circuit used here will detect
amplitude variations as well as frequency variations the signal
presented to the discriminator should be of constant ampli-
tude. The purpose of the limiter is to clip the signal of any
amplitude variation so the signal presented to the discrimina-
tor will be of constant amplitude varying only in frequency.
When using the Teleset on FM an AVC voltage is fed
back to the grid of the mixer from the grid of V212.
To assist in tuning the receiver a tuning indicator V214
is connected across the output of the discriminator. The audio
signal out of the discriminator is applied to the service selector
switch.
33
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
SERVICE SECTION
INTER -CHASSIS CABLING
The inter -chassis cabling of the RA -105 Telesets should
present no particular problem to the Serviceman as long as he
Y
I
Figure 14. Flyback Power Supply, socket identification.
R TUBE BASE
Figure 15. Teletron Assembly Plug and Socket Identification.
34
is careful in handling the plugs during removal from their
respective sockets.
To assist in the identification of the plugs and connectors
used in this cabling, the following figures are presented. The
circuits brought to the pins of these connectors and sockets
are designated on the various schematics.
The AM Tuner connectors are not shown here because the
AM Tuner socket is specifically identified on the Main Chassis
schematic.
Figure 16. Main Chassis. Plug and socket identification.
COMPONENT LOCATION
The following illustrations are presented to assist the ser-
viceman in the location of specific components. All the small
parts are not identified on these illustrations. In seeking un-
identified parts, the serviceman should look for those parts
associated wtih the desired components.
Improvements in future production runs may obsolete cer-
tain parts. In some cases these improvements may cause the
addition of other components. The serviceman should take
this into consideration when looking for components.
 6CZ'411,........111111011101011101M
692-8
/ 1£2-8 Z22-8
L£2-8 V22-8 682-8
4
0275
C273---__
C 266 ----.__
C 267 C247
C269 C249
C27I C248
C 272-, JIIir....- C250
illiir...- C245
C230
C251
C268 C242
C288 C240
C289 C 238
C290 C235
C224
C287

C253
C256

C286 C263 C244 C237 C226 C201 C259

C284 C213 C228 C205 C227 C258

t, t
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

**.**********
**************^,******0000
0004,00000410*00.000.00**000
A.M UNER 000008000000001600040*0000
******00000000000******0041
000***0000000**04,0000.00.40
6 SOCKET *000000*111001.0******04,0410110
1100004110000010006.0000011000
0041000000001100000100000***
00,01100041411004100000000000
004110100,000***10000****0000
110100000000041040.00***00,Etfe
000000000000041***0000,11,40
***0000004100*****041000441100
4.0**11000*****0001.100
(011000,11015000**000001141,04+0
*PVT 0011141001100411110011,00*********0
1ilk**0000***000000411110004100110
4144000******000**00.050,00000
****100410****00001114,0004100011
410 tpiER 011000,0001,00114100********0041
011101100*********00004,00041410
404/000000041111001110000004,1,0411
0009*******00001,0010***000,0
000,600404,00000******0001.0
1.0**000016000010404000000000
11410410001/141004640000001064.1100410
101100011.01141104,4000*********0000
04,0110041000********00000004,
000001114,000410411100*** **0041100
E2 O*000004.1114004,4101,00.0000410**
04100041,0000***001,01004000000
******************00000000.
00000410000041111114.0410*********
00000************000W0000
asimi*OO*00004,10004,0004,011105

Va v -CRT a241 SENSITIVITY

eliiimereee
otipossoisesete 0404000000
2 46'0009040000000046004000
im00100000900.
0000 00000000
00100046000001000
8
1100- 000000000000M
R25
A.G. c214 0265
08
C220)
a ri

211
;
-4
C.
All t4040;.40
m

g
00000.
0004,64,
*
410 OM'
00
si
000.0
i001000
v00410
0.000
SOO 00000000
0001000.00

Figure 19. Main Chassis, top view.

37
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

II 5
175,Acrtoit
a

I! e
i

ell

.-1
I

Figure 20. Flyback Power Supply, bottom view.

38
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

*
*

Figure 24. AM Tuner, Top View.

ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROLS
LOCATION OF CONTROLS For location of non -operational adjustments on top of
To facilitate locating the various controls on the RA -105 Main Chassis, refer to Fig. 19.
Telesets, these illustrations are presented. For location of the width control switch, refer to Fig. 14.

Figure 25. Main Chassis.

Front Panel Operational Controls

39
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Figure 26. Main Chassis.

Non -operational Controls at rear.

$
- I
"
HORIZONTAL CONTROLS

Correct picture width 123/4 inches.

Control Part Effect

Horizontal positioning R331 Positions picture in the

horizontal direction.

Horizontal phase Z205 Adjusts phasing to obtain

equal blanking on
each side of the
picture.

Horizontal frequency Z205 Adjusts frequency of

horizontal Oscillator
for proper
synchronization.

Horizontal size L401 Controls the horizontal

size of the picture and
linearity of the right
hand side.

Horizontal size switch 5401 Controls the overall size

Figure 27. Power Supply Chassis.
of the picture ( three
positions ).

Horizontal linearity L402 Controls the linearity of

the center of the Horizontal phasing adjustment
picture.
Reduce the horizontal size until both edges of the picture
Horizontal drive R405 Controls the size and are in view. Turn up the brightness control and reduce the
linearity of the left contrast so that the normally blanked borders of the raster
side of the picture. are visible. Adjust the phasing control so that the normally
blanked border on one side is equal in width to that on the
PROCEDURES FOR MAKING HORIZONTAL other side.
ADJUSTMENTS
Size and Linearity Adjustments
Horizontal frequency adjustment
The horizontal size of the picture is controlled by the hori-
Rotate the horizontal frequency control until the picture zontal size switch S401 plus the horizontal size control. For
falls out of sync. Adjust the control to bring the picture back large changes in size use the horizontal size switch. For small
into sync and note the point at which this occurs. Repeat the changes in horizontal size use the horizontal size control.
above but in direction opposite to that just described. The
correct setting is halfway between the two points where the If any non -linearity in the horizontal direction is observed,
picture falls into sync. the horizontal drive and horizontal linearity controls should

40 be readjusted.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
VERTICAL CONTROLS
Correct picture height 91/2 inches
Schematic
Control Designation Effect
Vertical positioning R317 Positions picture in the
vertical direction
Vertical positioning 5203 Permits greater vertical
switch
positioning of raster.
Vertical hold
R308 Adjusts frequency of
Vertical Saw
Generator for proper
synchronization.
Vertical size R310 Controls vertical size of
picture. Varies the
time constant of the
saw forming circuit.
Vertical linearity R314 Spreads out or contracts
the top half of the
raster. Electrically
varies the operating
point of the Vertical
deflection amplifier by
adjusting its bias
voltage.
PROCEDURES FOR MAKING VERTICAL ADJUSTMENTS
Proper adjustment of Vertical hold control
Rotate hold control until picture falls out of sync. Adjust
control to bring picture back into sync and note point where
this occurs. Rotate hold control until picture goes out of
sync in direction opposite to that just described. Adjust con-
trol and note point where picture falls into sync. Correct set-
ting is between the two points where picture falls into sync.
If any non -linearity in the vertical direction is observed,
readjustment of the vertical linearity and vertical size controls
will have to be made.
Procedure for adjustment in the Shop
Disconnect antenna from the Teleset. Connect VTVM across
C226 to ground. Rotate R25I completely counter -clockwise.
At this setting the meter will read approximately 1 Volt. Ro-
tate control slowly clockwise. It will be noticed that this AGC
Voltage will be constant over part of the range of this pot and
will, near mid range, begin to increase fairly abruptly. The
AGC voltage should be set at the point at which the abrupt
increase begins.
Procedure for Adjustment in the Field
Disconnect antenna. Turn up the contrast control fully and
adjust the brightness control so that a raster can be seen. Ro-
tate R251 completely counter -clockwise. At this position a con-
siderable amount of "noise" will be visible on the face of the
CRT. Rotate the control clockwise slowly. It will be noticed
that over a portion of the range, the amount of noise is not
affected. This is comparable to the condition in the shop,
where over the same range of the control, the meter reading
is not affected. As the control is further adjusted, it will be
noticed that a point is found when the noise starts to decrease
and beyond this point decreases very rapidly. The correct set-
ting for the control is immediately before the point where the
affect upon the noise is observed.
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF
CATHODE RAY TUBE
In the event the Teletron becomes defective, a recommended
procedure for the removal and replacement of same is depicted
in the following series of illustrations.
Step No. 1. Fig. 28. Remove the back panel by removing the
9 screws. Be careful that the base of the tube is not hit during
this step.

MISCELLANEOUS ADJUSTMENTS
The following control should be adjusted only when Tele-
tron is changed.
Control
CRT Cutoff
Designation
R241
Effect
Adjusts the correct cut 4,1111 -
off point of the CRT.
Figure 28
Procedure for Adjusting
Rotate contrast control completely CCW. Connect DC volt- Step No. 2. Fig. 29. Removing the Flyback Power Supply
meter between arm of brightness control and ground. Adjust Chassis. Remove the two plugs from the sockets on the Fly-
brightness control until meter reads 45 volts. Adjust R241 the back Power Supply. Remove the high voltage lead from the
CRT cutoff control until the illumination on screen just disap- cathode ray tube by grasping the connector between the fin-
pears. gers and gently remove. Do not pull on the high voltage lead.
Remove the two cap screws that fasten the Flyback Power
AGC Threshold Adjustment Supply to the cabinet. This will free the chassis and it may
be removed as shown below by withdrawing to the rear.
Control Designation Effect Step No. 3. Fig. 30. Removing the Main Chassis. Remove all
AGC R251 Adjusts the bias on the knobs from the front of the cabinet. Disconnect the speaker.
6AT6 to cut-off. Remove the socket from the base of the cathode ray tube. Re -
This control should be readjusted if it becomes necessary to
replace the 6AT6 AGC tube.
41
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Step No. 5. Fig. 32. Removal of Cathode Ray Tube Assembly
from cabinet. This step should be undertaken by two men.
The assembly should be grasped as shown below and carefully
removed by sliding to the rear.

Figure 29
move the socket from the deflection yoke plug. Remove the
tuning indicator from its clip. Remove the 4 cap screws that
fasten the Main Chassis to the cabinet. The chassis may now Figure 32
be removed by raising slightly and withdrawing to the rear.
Step No. 6. Fig. 33. The tube should be placed face down
on the work bench. Obviously there should be no tools or
other objects under the face of the tube. In this position the
face of the tube will not touch the bench as it is supported by
the assembly frame.

Figure 30
Step No. 4. Fig. 31. Disengaging the Cathode Ray Tube As-
sembly from its track. The removal of two phillips-head mach-
ine screws will free the assembly from the track and permit
the removal of same.

Figure 33

Step No. 7. Fig. 34. Removal of Deflection Yoke and Focus

Coil Assembly. This assembly may be removed by removing
the three nuts that hold the assembly in place. Care should be
taken when removing this assembly that no force is exerted
on the neck of the tube.

Step No. 8. Remove the assembly to which the Deflection

Yoke and Focus Coil Assembly was fastened. This is accom-
1' plished by removing the two bolts that fasten this piece to the
upright angle irons and disengaging the three side bands by
Figure 31

42 unscrewing the machine screws.

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Figure 34
Step No. 9. Fig. 35. Removing the tube. With the help of
an assistant, tilt the assembly towards you. The tube should
then be tilted in its assembly by pressure from underneath. The
tilt should be enough to allow the gloved hands to reach un-
derneath, grasp the face and gently remove the tube.
Figure 35
REPLACING THE C.R.T.
Step No. 1. With the face of the frame on a flat table as in
Fig. 35, place the new tube into the assembly. The tube should
be so oriented that the high voltage cap is located between the
two angle iron rails.
Step No. 2. Fig. 37. Replace the assembly to which the rails
and the side clamps were fastened.
Figure 36. Inside of assembly showing front C.R.T. cushion.
Figure 37.
Step No. 3. Fig. 38. (Note the protective covering around
neck of tube.) Using a square as shown in this figure, the
angle between the face of the tube and the rails should be
90°. This is important.
The clamps should now be fastened to the piece mentioned
in step No. 2 and should be tightened by tightening the mach-
ine screws. While tightening these screws, the rails should be
maintained at the 90 degree angle with the face. Care should
be taken when tightening these clamps that the face of the
tube is not forced against thk metal front of the assembly.
After the clamps have been tightened evenly and the tube
is properly centered in the rear collar, the four rail bolts
should be tightened.
Step No. 4. Replacing the Yoke and Focus Assembly. (Orient
assembly so the plug is at left when viewed from the rear of
the cabinet.)
43
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
This step is the reverse of step No. 7 on removal. Care
should be taken that the neck is not damaged when this step
is made.
The remaining steps are the reverse of those starting with
Fig. 5 of the removal procedure.

I`

Figure 38.

WAVEFORM OBSERVATIONS
The trained television serviceman, with the aid of an os-
cilloscope, can reduce the time necessary to locate trouble in a
television receiver by the investigation of questionable circuits
and interpreting the wave shapes observed.

The waveforms presented on these pages were observed at

the points indicated and under the conditions described herein.
In observing these waveforms, the receiver was broken down
into a number of sections. As will be seen later in the section
on Trouble Shooting, this practice is a definite aid in localiza-
tion of troubles.
The equipment used was a Du Mont 208-B Oscillograph, Figure 39. DuMont 208-B Oscillograph and 264-A Voltage Calibrator
and a Du Mont Type 264-A Voltage Calibrator. The calibra- adjusted for observation of horizontal frequency voltages.
tor was used to measure the amplitude of the observed signal.
RG-59/U co -axial cable was used for the necessary test leads.
This equipment is shown in Fig. 39.
NOTE: In all cases, the line voltage was adjusted to 117
volts, A.C. All observations were made from the "Point of
Observation" to ground.
Fig. 39, illustrates the correct settings of the sweep frequency
controls on the Oscillograph when observing signals whose
frequency is 15,750 cps (Horizontal frequency ).
Fig. 39A, illustrates the correct settings of the sweep fre-
quency controls on the Oscillograph when observing signals
whose frequency is 60 cps ( Vertical frequency).

At each of the figures representing the waveforms observed

in the video detector and video amplifier circuits the word
"line" or "field" appears.
Figure 39A. DuMont 208-8 Oscillograph adjusted for vertical

44 or field frequency.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
The word "line" indicates that the waveform shown repre-
sents the signal necessary to reproduce the information in a
horizontal scanning line as transmitted by the television sta-
tion. The scanning line constitutes an excursion of the electron
beam in the CRT. This excursion starts at the left side of the
CRT, progresses at a constant rate until it reaches the right
side of the CRT and then rapidly returns to the left side. 525
of these lines are used in completely scanning a scene.
The frequency of occurrence of these "lines" is 15,750 cps.
Obviously, for the "line" waveforms, the horizontal settings
of the oscilloscope should be used.
The word "field" indicates that the waveform presented Figure 42
represents approximately 2621/2 scanning lines. The term Pin No. 1. V205 (Grid 6AG5
"field" is sometimes defined as the scanning of half the picture 1st video amp.) (Field) IV p -p.
area. To further clarify this definition, consider the picture
area to be separated into 525 horizontal lines or strips. The
electron beam, starting at the top of the picture, progresses
towards the bottom at a 60 cycle rate, but at the same time the
horizontal scanning lines at 15,750 cycles per second are being
formed. The field represents every other line from top to bot-
tom of the picture.
When observing the waveforms where the word "field" ap-
pears, use the vertical settings on the oscilloscope.

Figure 43
Same point as Fig. 42 (Line)
1V p -p.

Fig. 42 and 43. Note that the waveform has been reduced
somewhat in amplitude after passing through the coupling cir-
cuit.

Figure 40
Pin No. 7 V204
(Video detector plate)
(Field) 1.4V p -p.

Fig. 40. The amplitude of this signal is determined by the

operation of the AGC Circuit. The amplitude is, therefore, es-
sentially constant for all channels. Since the sync pulses are
in a negative direction, the polarity of the signal is black nega-
tive.

Figure 44
Pin No. 5 V205 (Plate 6AG5
1st video amp.) (Field) 16V p -p.

Figure 41
Same point as Fig. 40. (Line)
1.4V p -p.

Fig. 41. The waveform shown here represents a single hori-

zontal line of video information. This oscilloscope does not Figure 45
present a true picture of this waveform. The reason is that Same point as Fig. 44
the response of the 208-B is quite low compared to what it
should be to reproduce the horizontal blanking and sync
pulses.
(Line) 16V p -p.

45
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Fig. 44 and 45. Notice that the polarity of the signal has
been reversed. Since the sync pulses extend in a positive direc-
tion, the signal may be referred to as "black positive". The
gain of this stage, obtained by dividing the amplitude of this
waveform by the amplitude of the signal on the grid, is ap-
proximately 16.

Figure 49
Same point as Fig. 48 (Line)
1011 p -p.

Figure 46
Pin No. 3 V206A (Cathode 2nd
video amp. V212AU7) 10v p -p.

Figure 50
Pin No. 3 V207 (Plate 3rd
video amp. 6K6) 47V p -p.

Figure 47
Same point as Fig. 46 (Line)
101/ p -p.

Fig. 46 and 47. Note here that the polarity of the signal
is still black positive indicating no reversal of polarity through
the tube. This condition is true of all Cathode Followers. Note
also that a decrease in amplitude occurs. The gain of this
stage is, therefore, less than 1. It is approximately .6 in this
case.
Fig. 48 and 49. The amplitude of this signal depends upon
the setting of the contrast control. At maximum contrast, the
amplitude will be the same as that observed at the cathode
of the 2nd video amplifier.
Figure 51
Same point as Fig. 50 (Line)
47V p -p.
Fig. 50 and 51. Again the amplitude depends on the setting
of the contrast control. The contrast control is set at maximum
for these measurements. Note also the signal is amplified and
inverted. The gain of this stage is approximately 5.
NOTE: At the grid of the CRT the signal is essentially the
same as that measured at the plate of the third video amplifier.

Figure 48
Pin No. 5 V207
Figure 52
(Grid 3rd video amplifier)

46
Junction of L215 -R223 plate circuit
101/ p -p.
of V205, 1st video amplifier
(Vertical) 16V p -p.
 AS l-S AEL-V
A0P-8 ASS -11 (iospJaA) (iadd!p suhs
(JeHnq lospien 50V9 9101d) LIZA S 'ON u!d
LN59 0101d) 'YOZZA S '01§1 u!d 9S am6!1
6S 3.1116N
'68Z11 sso.tar clop ayl ;o asneaaq pasranap Apqglls sr Irti2!s
alp jo aprulldure alp 3uirod sirtp le Imp a3oNi '55 pile
Jaddiria auAs
atp Jo alrid atp 3s paAJasqo sum sr aturs ay3 Aurpuassa s! pus d -d ALL
uI auAs aitsodunaa Dip Jo 3543 sr tuJojanum spa -85 .2!1 (101uosPoH) PC '6N so Mod awns
SS sai6id
A61-8 A61-1/
(Jews] los!sisA LN59 PPM
VOLLA 4 '01,/ u!d
gg amSH
110s!PoA) (50V9
seeldgs suAs p!,0) LLZ L *0/.1 u!d
vg oms8m
-adoasowaso alp uo daams alaiia 09 2u!sn
uomas slip ur aprui suoprAzasqo Hy -silna3p 2utz!uoimuAs
Irapian atp u! paniasqo aiam stusojanens guirmoHol ata
SINT10:13AYM.
ONIZINOUHDNA.S 1VDIIIIaA 30 NOILdIIIDS3CI
.95 .21.4 ur uaos se auAs alirsodtuoa alp jo 1.red sir spa,
-asind auAs muorizoq alp jo 3ea3 Sr nuojanum spa .L5 Sirj
d -d Agg (losuozpoH)
saddlla auAs atp pa; sr Jamidure oappt 3s.ig alp
cog Ilm so mod sums Jo 3!na.na a3rld atp ur paniasqo reufqs spa, 5 Pus ZS .2!3
Ls sunISH
d -d A91 (101uosPoll)
ZS 13H so su!od suing
ES *mem
Tenialul asind auAs iraman atp Bupnp inaao
lsyl sasind pasodunaa sp uomod auAs muozpoq alp moiaq
saooqs Irq3 wilds spa, *auAs allsoduraa atp s! aJaq UAW 111303
-aAVAA 3111 Igt72!s oap!A ay3 Wag DUAS alrirsodtuoa ay dm JO
ZAOUTal 03 Si a2r3s sadd!D auA8 Dip jo asodind ata .95 .2ir3 S141110.13AV& DNAS LLISOdWOD JO NOLLdnIDS3C1
9113A130321 NOISIAMMIL 6161 C2C33N-N2LIO-ILSOIM
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Fig. 59. In order to observe the same amount of detail as
seen in the illustration, the horizontal gain control on the
scope should be so adjusted as to spread out the waveform.
Note how the waveform rises in amplitude during the vertical
sync pulse interval.
Figure 60
Junction R304 -R305 plate
circuit of V220A. 55V p -p.
Fig. 60. The circuit consisting of R304, C271, R305, and C272
in the plate circuit of V220A is called an integrator circuit.
The purpose of this circuit is to develop a single pulse at 60
cps, for synchronizing the vertical saw generator. This pulse
is developed when the sequence of pulses that occur at the
end of a field is applied to this circuit. The left-hand side of
the pulse (as seen in the diagram) is produced by the charg-
ing of C271 through R304. This voltage builds up across C271
only during the Vertical Sync pulse interval. This occurs be-
cause the width of the positive portion of the cycle is wider
than the negative portion. In the illustration, the stepping up
of the voltage across C271 can be readily seen at the left side
of the pulse. The waveform of the horizontal signals is such
that a small charge is taken on C271 during the positive pulse
and then completely discharged during the negative portion.
Thus no accumulation of charge takes place during the hori-
zontal or equalizing pulses.
Figure 61
Junction R305 -R306 plate circuit
of V220A. 35V p -p.
Figure 62
48 Junction 8306 and red lead of
T201. 32V p -p.
Fig. 61. After passing through the second section of the in-
tegrator, the waveform is smoothed out. Notice.also that the
amplitude has decreased considerably.
Fig. 62. The "pip" seen in the leading edge (left side of the
pulse) is from the vertical saw generator. Adjusting the verti-
cal hold control will affect its position.
DESCRIPTION OF VERTICAL SWEEP SECTION
WAVEFORMS
All observations were made in this section using 60 cycle
sweep on the oscilloscope. Controls adjusted for normal size
picture 91/2 inches high.
Figure 63
Pin No. 1 V2208 (Grid 65N7
vertical saw generator)
A -24V B -50V
Fig. 63. This waveform is typical of the type that is present
in the grid circuit of a blocking oscillator. The curved portion
of this waveform is formed by capacitor C273 discharging
through R307, and R308 the vertical hold control. The free
running frequency of the oscillator is determined by the rate
of this discharge. The curve actually represents the instant-
aneous value of grid voltage. Throughout the time indicated
by the slope, the tube is beyond cutoff. When this grid voltage
either reduces to a value below cutoff or is driven below cut-
off by the sync pulse, the tube goes into oscillation and con-
ducts heavily as indicated by the positive pulse at the end of
the slope.
Figure 64
Pin No. 2 V2208 (Plate vertical
saw generator)
A-1011 8-110V
Fig. 64. This waveform represents the signal that is devel-
oped in the plate circuit of the vertical saw generator. The saw
tooth portion is developed when capacitor C275 is charged
through R309, R310 and R311. The capacitor charges when
the tube is beyond cutoff. The negative spike occurs when
C275 discharges through R311. This discharge occurs when
the tube conducts heavily.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Figure 68
Figure 65 Green lead, secondary of vertical
Junction C275, C276, R309. output transformer, 1202.
A -16V B -50V A -60V B -35V

Fig. 65. Note that the amplitude is apparently reduced to
approximately half of the original. The spike is reduced to
approximately half the amplitude measured in Fig. 64. The
saw portion apparently gains a few volts.
DESCRIPTION OF HORIZONTAL SWEEP WAVEFORMS
All observations were made in this section using the oscillo-
scope settings for horizontal frequency. Adjustments set for
normal size picture unless otherwise noted. Width of picture
is 123/4 inches.

Figure 66
Pin No. 1 V221 (Grid 65N7
vertical deflection amplifier) Figure 69
Pin No. 5 V219
A -16V B-5CV (Grid 6K6 horizontal oscillator)
126V p -p
Fig. 66. This waveform is essentially the same as that meas- Fig. 69. This sine wave at a frequency of 15,750 cps is pro-
ured at the junction of C275, C276 and R309. (Fig. 65.) duced by the oscillator.

Figure 67
Pin No. 2 (Plate vertical deflection
amplifier)
A-83CV B-12CV
Fig. 67. Note that the amplitude is increased considerably
and the signal is inverted in polarity. The gain of this stage is
approximately 15.
Fig. 68. Note that there is no reversal of polarity through
the transformer. The signal has been reduced to approximately
1/10 of the voltage across the primary. The high frequency
signals superimposed on the saw portion are from the horizon-
tal circuits.
Figure 70
Pin No. 3 V219 (Plate horizontal
oscillator) 200V p -p.
Fig. 70. The sine wave developed at the grid overdrives this
tube. Therefore, this signal at the plate approaches a square
waveform.
Fig. 71. R401 and C401 constitute a circuit known as a dif-
ferentiator. This circuit will produce a signal in its output
when a change in the applied voltage occurs. Thus, during the
sharp rise and fall of the applied signal, a positive and nega-
tive pulse, as shown by this figure, will appear.
49
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Figure 75
Figure 71
Junction C401, C402, R401. Same point as Fig. 73. Drive
A -34V B -43V control set at maximum clockwise
position.
HORIZONTAL SWEEP WAVEFORMS A -35V B -25V

Figs. 74 and 75. These waveforms are shown, to assist the

serviceman to determine whether or not the drive control is
working properly.

Figure 72
Pin No. 2 V401A (Grid 12AU7
horizontal saw maker)
A -34V B -43V

Fig. 72. This waveform is practically identical to that ob-

served at Fig. 71. Figure 76
Pin No. 5 V402 (Grid 6BG6
horizontal sweep amplifier)
A -38V B-27

Fig. 76. This waveform is essentially the same as that ob-

served at Fig. 73. The amplitude, however, is slightly lower.

Figure 73
Pin No. 1 V401A (Plate horizontal
saw maker)
A -39V B -30V

Fig. 73. This waveform is that of the sawtooth voltage de-

veloped by charging capacitor C413 through resistors R403,
R404 and R405. The saw is produced when V401A is held
beyond cut off and the negative pulse is produced when C413
is discharged through V401A, R404 and R405.
Figure 77
Radiation adjacent to flyback
transformer.

Fig. 77. This waveform was observed by holding the oscil-

loscope lead adjacent to the underside of the flyback trans-
former. This signal is radiated by the transformer.
DESCRIPTION OF HORIZONTAL SYNC SECTION
WAVEFORMS
All observations were made in this section using the os-
Figure 74 cilloscope settings for horizontal. The circuits will be upset
when the measurements are taken. It will be necessary to re-

50 Same point as Fig. 73. Drive

control set at maximum counter-
clockwise position. 186V p -p.
adjust the frequency and phase controls with the leads at-
tached to obtain these waveforms.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Figure 78 Figure 81
Pin No. 1 V218 (Cathode
6AL5 sync discriminator) Same point as Fig. 80. Signal
A -5V B -5V observed when not tuned to a
channel. 5V-p-p.
Fig. 78. This signal was observed with the Teleset tuned
to a channel. The sync pulse is inserted at the correct point TROUBLE SHOOTING
on the sine wave.

05 MONT
15,0,4 OU MONT
TEL ET RON 2088
OSCILLOSCOPE
WEN VOLT SE NETER,

Figure 79
Same point as Fig. 78.
Signal observed when not tuned
to a channel.
5V-p-p.
Figure 82.
Fig. 79. With the Teleset not tuned to a channel only the
sine wave from the oscillator will be seen. TEST EQUIPMENT

As to test equipment, Fig. 82 illustrates a test bench with a

Figure 80
Pin No. 5 V218 (Cathode 6AL5
sync discriminator).
A -5.8V B -2V
Fig. 80. This waveform is similar to that of Fig. 78. How-
ever, with the oscilloscope leads attached, it is difficult to ad-
just the controls to obtain the desired pattern. Note also that
the pulse is located on the slope of the sine wave opposite
that of Fig. 78.
Fig. 81. This waveform is similar to that of Fig. 79. How-
ever, the sine wave at this point is 180 degrees out of phase
with the sine wave seen at Fig. 79 with respect to ground.
set of test equipment that is being used to service the RA -101
and the RA -105 Telesets.
The 15 -inch tube is permanently mounted, making it un-
necessary to remove the tube from the cabinet of the defective
Teleset. Special extension cables are used so the various inter -
chassis connections can be made.
The test equipment shown represents an optimum select:on
that is needed for servicing.
The equipment and their uses follow:
DU MONT 208 B OSCILLOGRAPH
Very helpful in localizing troubles to a definite stage once
the section in which the trouble exists has been determined. It
is also necessary for visual alignment of the IF stages.
Although not designed for the observation of high fre-
quency signals, it is very good as an all round oscillograph.
Most of the type troubles that could occur can be located by
the use of this instrument. If, however, an oscillograph that
can reproduce a more accurate version of the high frequency
pulses is desired, the Du Mont type 224 (3" tube) or 241 (5"
tube) are excellent.
DU MONT 264A VOLTAGE CALIBRATOR
Since the amplitude of the waveform under observation is
very important, this calibrator is needed with the oscillograph
for such measurements.

51
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
RF SIGNAL GENERATOR
This generator serves two purposes. It can be used to deter-
mine stage gains of the video or sound IF strips or the front
end of the receiver. It is also used as a marker generator with
the sweep generator when aligning the teleset.
SWEEP GENERATOR
This generator is used in the alignment of the Teleset.
ELECTRONIC VOLTMETER
A very important item in making voltage and resistance
measurements. Especially valuable in making voltage measure-
ments in high impedance circuits.
HIGH VOLTAGE METER
Usfd for measuring the high voltage that is applied to the
accelerating anode of the CRT.
SERVICING PROCEDURE
To establish a procedure for servicing the RA -105 Teleset,
the receiver has been broken down into a number of sections.
The sections are as follows:
1. Picture and sound section.
2. Sound IF section.
3. Audio section.
4. Picture and sync section. See Fig. 4
5. Picture section.
6. Composite sync section.
7. Vertical sync section.
8. Horizontal sync section.
9. Vertical saw section.
10. Horizontal sweep and high voltage section.
11. Low voltage power supply section.
The method of using this block diagram for localizing
troubles is described on the diagram proper.
A logical procedure that may be followed in servicing this
Teleset follows:
1. Observe all indications of faulty operation.
2. Based on the observations made in step No. 1, the trouble
should be localized to one of the sections previously noted.
3. The trouble should be further localized to the defective
stage by means of signal tracing with an oscilloscope. ( See
Waveform Observation Section.)
4. Once the trouble has been localized to a definite stage,
replace the tube with a tube that has been working in the
same type circuit.
5. If the trouble is not remedied by step No. 4, then voltage
and resistance measurements should be made in order to lo-
cate the defective part.
6. If step No. 5 does not reveal any discrepancy, a defective
component, whose type of defect will not noticeably affect the
voltage and resistance readings should be looked for. For ex-
ample, an open by-pass condenser or a coil with shorted turns.
In following step No. 3 as noted above, considerable care
should be taken when observing waveforms. Not only should
the waveshape be noted, but the peak to peak amplitude
should be measured. This is where a calibrator is needed.
The importance of waveform ineasurements in a TV re-
ceiver cannot be overemphasized. The serviceman should
study the use of his oscilloscope in order that he can obtain
the maximum possible results from its application.
52
Occasionally a receiver may come into the shop with the
complaint that the picture quality is poor. It may be that the
high frequency response is poor, as indicated by poor repro-
duction of the wedges on the test pattern.
One of the first things that most servicemen would try is to
align the receiver. Before attempting alignment, the service-
man should carefully check the receiver to be certain that
misalignment is the cause of the defect.
One quick way to check the alignment is to examine the
overall response of the video IF strip. This can be accom-
plished by feeding a sweep generator signal into the mixer
and observing the response with an oscilloscope at the output
of the detector. The observed response should be compared to
that recommended by the manufacturer. (See alignment sec-
tion).
Obviously any great deviation from the observed response
will indicate the need for alignment.
If the response is satisfactory, then the peaking coils in the
video amplifier section should be investigated.
If the above mentioned items check OK, then the response
of the front end of the receiver should be investigated.
RECORDS
One practice that is followed by some shops, and which is
recommended for general use, is the recording of various
troubles encountered in specific receivers.
This practice could be readily applied to the RA -105 Tele-
set. For example, a chart could be made up to cover all
troubles found in the RA -105. This chart could include several
headings as follows:
Frequency of
Indications Defective Section Defective Part Occurrence
Following is an example of the recording of information for
a certain trouble.
Frequency of
Indications Defective Section Defective Part Occurrence
Picture rolls Vertical Synch Open Cathode 1 (7/11)
Resistor R303
Vertically
Information of this type is a definite help to a new man as
he can refer to the chart and in many cases will locate the
trouble in a much faster time than if he completely checked
the receiver.
REPLACEMENT OF PARTS
The serviceman should understand that lead placement is
very important in high frequency circuits. Thus, during the
replacement of defective parts, the wiring should always be
returned to its original layout. Any replaced parts should also
be placed in the same physical location and orientation as the
original.
TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES
Following is a list of procedures that can be followed in lo-
cating trouble in the Teleset.
It should be understood that only one trouble is assumed
to be happening at a time. Thus, under the heading "Indica-
tions", only the indication presented describes the fault. For
example, if the statement reads "Picture but no Sound", it is to
be assumed that everything else is working OK.
See Figure 4.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
1. PICTURE AND SOUND SECTION
INDICATIONS
1. No picture and no sound, or
weak picture and low sound out-
put.
2. Picture and sound fades out,
retuning receiver brings them back
in.
3. Picture jumps as the Teleset is
tuned. Sound is noisy at the same
time.
INDICATIONS
Picture normal. No sound or
weak sound. Trouble isolated to
this stage because the tuning in-
dicator does not function normally
as the Teleset is tuned.
PROCEDURE
1. Check installation.
2. Replace tubes.
3. Use R. F. generator and signal trace these circuits.
4. Take voltage and resistance readings.
Replace C114 in the Inputuner. Be sure to replace with a type N-030 as specified
on the schematic diagram.
The inductuner ( adjustable coils) requires cleaning.
Procedure for cleaning follows:
1. Remove the Inductuner cover in a clean, dust free location.
2. Using a small soft brush, clean the wire, end rings and bottom track of all
three coils.
3. Lubricate the wire, end rings and bottom track of all three coils with Lubriplate
type 105. Use the Lubriplate sparingly.
4. Rotate the Inductuner completely through its range several times to insure
a smooth film of lubricant over all the contact surfaces.
5. Replace cover and tighten screws.
CAUTION: No lubrication other than Lubriplate type 105 should be used.
Note
If you should run into trouble with the Inputuner section
that you cannot locate, it is recommended that the Inputuner
be returned to us for repair.
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF THE INPUTUNER
1. Unsolder the four leads coming out of the Inputuner to
the receiver chassis. Do not cut the leads; keep them full
length. Denote the color coding of the wires and terminals
from which the wires were removed.
2. Unsolder the Inputuner cable leads at the antenna ter-
minals. Remove the clamp that holds this transmission line
to the chassis.
3. Remove the three screws which fasten the Inputuner to
the chassis.
4. Lift the Inputuner from the chassis.
5. To put in the new Inputuner, reverse the steps above.
2. SOUND IF SECTION
PROCEDURE
1. Test or replace tubes in this section.
2. Signal trace the stages in this section using an RF generator, a crystal probe
and an oscilloscope. The crystal probe will have to be used in making measurements
within this section.
3. Check voltage and resistance measurements at defective stage.
4. If No. 3 reveals no difficulty, check for an open capacitor or partially shorted
transformer.
5. Check the alignment.
53
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
3. AUDIO SECTION
INDICATIONS PROCEDURE
normal. No sound or
Picture 1. Replace tubes.
weak sound. Trouble isolated to
this section because the tuning in- 2. Tune to a station. With oscilloscope, signal trace these circuits.
dicator functions normally as the
Teleset is tuned. Also, on the Col- 3. At defective stage check voltage and resistance measurements.
ony, there is no sound or weak
sound output when using the
d player or AM radio.

4. PICTURE AND SYNC SECTION

INDICATIONS PROCEDURE

1. Check setting of A.G.C. threshold control. It is possible that gas current in the
6AT6 will make re -adjustment necessary.
2. Replace tubes.
3. Using an oscilloscope and probe detector, signal trace these circuits. The Teleset
should be tuned to the strongest station and the A.G.C. control turned completely
counter -clockwise during this procedure.
4. Take voltage and resistance measurements at defective stage as located in item
No. 3.

1. Fig. 83. Unsynchronized raster.

Sound normal, but no picture or
sync.

2. Picture completely blanked 1. Replace 6AT6 AGC tube and readjust the AGC control. If this does not correct
out on strong stations. On the
weakest stations, picture is pres-
the fault, proceed as follows with the antenna removed.
ent and synchronized but there is
excessive "snow" or "noise". On 2. Using a voltmeter, run through AGC adjustment to determine if action is
the other stations of intermediate normal (See Section on adjustments)
strength, the picture will not syn-
chronize. These indications resem- 3. If reading remains constant as control is varied check C226 for a short.
ble what can occur in some loca-
tions using an RA -103 Teleset with 4. If reading varies normally, check grid circuits of the AGC controlled stages.
the contrast on full.
5. If at step No. 3 C226 is okay, observe waveform at pin No. 1 of V209. This
waveform should be approximately the same as Fig. 84.
6. Observe the waveform at pins No. 7 and 5 of V209. With the A.G.C. control
properly adjusted no waveform should be present at pin No. 7 or pin No. 5.
7. Rotate A.G.C. control completely clockwise. Observe waveforms at pin No. 7
and pin No. 5. These should be approximately the same as Fig. 85 and Fig. 86.
8. Take voltage and resistance readings at portion of circuit where the waveforms
are incorrect. If waveforms appear normal, check all voltage and resistance measure-
ments of this circuit.

Fig. 84. Pin No. 1 V209 Fig. 85. Pin No. 7 V209 Fig. 86. Pin No. 5 V209
(Horizontal) P -P -2V. (Horizontal) P -P -6V. (Horizontal) P -P -6V.

54
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
5. PICTURE SECTION

INDICATIONS PROCEDURE

1. Replace tubes.

2. Tune to a TV station. Signal trace section with an oscilloscope. (See Wave-

form Observation Section).

3. Check E and R measurements.

4. If No. 3 does not reveal discrepancy, look for open coupling capacitor.
1. Fig. 87. Synchronized raster
but no picture.

2. Picture quality poor. Check C221, (coupling capacitor between plate of V207 and grid of CRT) for
Brightness control works
short.
backward.

3. Picture too bright. Cannot POSSIBLE DEFECT

properly decrease brightness. Defective CRT. (Grid -cathode shorted).
Shorted (Cathode of CRT to ground).

6. COMPOSITE SYNC SECTION

INDICATIONS PROCEDURE

1. Replace V217.

2. Observe waveforms.

3. Make necessary voltage and resistance measurements.

4. Check C263.

Fig. 88. Picture out of sync

both horizontally and
vertically.

55
 anirn u4 paszarau! anrq moi co; hatianbaq
9S
3uauoduma anpaajap 343 Axoi 003 sr Aauanbarj 343 H tiu!uum i3e1i loagJeA
't6 '64
IEuuou urq3 rannoi 'prim
aq 3snur anoqr 343 jo auo jo amen 343 42noua moj palm! pr
aq 3ouura pur 42!4 003 s! Aauanbarj 2u!uunr H
'80£11
pur LO£11 'CLZD 313 ND ro3ETluso ffuppoiq jea!3.33n alp ;o
4narp pug 343 arapsanu! 'saw onn3 anoqe alp 40 .1344a uj
aigcsin
arr .13430 alp anoqr auo sarnlap:I alajdtuoa oni3 uaqm aq won& 943 jo op!puoa
aurarlxa arolu V -atup auo re nia!n. tr! S3ILIEJ3 JIELI auo pur auo Ajaretupcorddr 3.3r '46!y ooi itauenbeg
3r343 sarea!pur aingq sp.u, ns.c4 003 9 Kauanbar; Vu!uunr aar; alp `Airenutus arm 8u!uum3 ow} ion4.10A
06 '6!d
-apj a3ajduma auo Sag 03 ajq!ssod Sou 9 3! pug 'arn24 spp 03 JEIIIW1S are EHD alp
uo suoprapu! 343 'j013003 pjoq jrapran alp 30 luaunsnfpr Aq ji .2!I aloN
.142111 003 9 Aauanbarj Su!uunr am 343 'Aijrnurtu
arn3a!d alaiduma auo 334 03 apj!ssod Sou 9 3! pur 'arn24 943 tprordde IAD 343
suolreamu! 343 lorluoa ploy '1'831133A 343 jo luaunsn!pr Aq ji -06 '2i3 aloN "1
-sapAa 09 03 q2noua asop pals/4pr aq louura
romps() 2uppoiq rea!araA ay Jo Aauanbarj 2u!uunr 33.1j 343 aq Amu 31900r3 34J AiloawaA seal ommd
'68 '6!i
(mojaq an) -J03EJaua9 Airs Tr39.13A alp u! aq AMU 3Dajap 1011V *to.,
1.1 0.111/ ORVAlk 111
343 'appor3 alp asop9p 30U saop arnpaaord anoqr arp ji
01
I Zi I
( uopaas uo!renrasqo rurojanm aas) SUJJOJDAVAa 313310 £
uouaas sp.p u! aqn3 343 areidau
Ior3aoa ploq TE341.13A ISTI!py I
SNOIIYDIONI
NO1133S DNAS 11,311213A 'L
SII3A130311 NOISIATIML 6,61 CI3133N-NaL10-.1.130PI
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
INDICATIONS
1. Fig. 92. No Horizontal Sync
Fig. 93. After frequency control
has been adjusted.
2. lop of picture tries to tear
out. Ignition noise causes tearing
out of the picture.
3. Several pictures appear side
by side. Not possible to obtain a
single picture regardless of
zontal frequency adjustment.
INDICATIONS
1. Fig. 94. No Vertical Sweep.
2. Insufficient Vertical Size.
3. Poor Vertical linearity. Adjust-
ment of linearity control has no
effect.
8. HORIZONTAL SYNC SECTION
PROCEDURE
1. Adjust the horizontal frequency control, until a complete picture is seen on the
screen. The entire picture will move sideways as shown at Fig. 93.
2. Replace 6AC7 and then the 6AL5.
3. Observe waveforms. (See Waveform Observation Section).
4. Check Voltage and resistance measurements.
If the above check reveal no discrepancy proceed as follows:
1. Connect a high impedance voltmeter from grid to ground
at the 6AC7 reactance tube. Try to manually synchronize the
horizontal oscillator by carefully adjusting the horizontal
frequency control. If the correction voltage is being applied to
the grid of the reactance tube, the meter pointer will swing
one way as the frequency shifts in one direction and the op-
posite way as the frequency shifts in the other direction. The
magnitude of this variation in voltage will be at least three
volts in each direction.
If this variation is present, then the reactance tube circuit is
defective.
If not, then the same check should be made at pin No. 7,
of the sync discriminator. The results of the test at this point
will reveal whether or not the defective circuit is the sync
discriminator, or the filter circuit between the discriminator
and the reactance tube.
Replace C288. ( The .1 ufd capacitor at junction of R324 and R325. Capacitor is
open.)
Check transformer Z205 for broken slug. Check C268 and R299.
hori-
9. VERTICAL SAW SECTION
PROCEDURE
Check the following items in the order given:
1. Tubes.
2. Waveforms.
3. Voltage and resistance measurements.
If the fault is not located after the regular procedure, check the deflection yoke.
Use procedure as above.
In addition to procedure check C285C and C265A for open.
Check C285C for possible short or leakage.
57
 ssutoei asaqs wosj qmot antn of uaas aq min austif apbssui to saipaau if.srqs 'pautturxa
Xiasop ss stimu3 arts ispar astou Suustq v sasnra vuo.so3 stqi *ways ustmi ours? of VU0403

as
asnr, min aSrsion On v sr aJr sow strum/ plata etals Xtiv yurot Janos acts livq os inia.tv,
aq uospas stqs us Sot.saptos Xur op os Xsyssaoau -aiellsso4 sr jjan sr stssrqa maw
acts mod/ iCrair aq pproqs sprat amyl 'sprat If1114f1 arstoa qb'tq aqs ft! spuaq 4.srqs ou
aq proqs alaqi (2up4v) vuosoo suarta4 11411140dIai X4911 S1 spvaj to 2tussasp aqs 'pf4ns
'onto(' aqs lo uotpas a8rsion q8tct aqs us ssuauo4uso, Las Sut.irplaA uve1/11
IrDip alp JO UOR.70d alcieuopsanb u! nuatuainsuaul a3uels!sas pug aggnon wry
70PA Pug V-TOPA jos3m.3.r!7 alp u! SIIIJOjaAEA1 ataaSCIO
anjgn 1.14.3.303 .10j cOjia pug soya 'ioku vamp
ZOPA Pug TOPA a3uIcialI
joaluoa az!s pug 431!nts 40J31109 azp 3srtfpy az!s Insuozpoy suopginsui
-.pp ;sal uo ;no petpuuss lamsaw
-clad° ug JO; cjyll lamp tialp `paJ.Toa 915 maurasn!pr jI .4pneu!' losucasloy sued ioaA
mumps mow uo pew 13u!mogs
16 6!I so apposs awns .96 .13!g
.anocre ss atuuS
Apiomp!suos pasnpas s! azp
losuozpoy asp asoN daaPAS 104505.
-pay ays u! JOAO Plod S6 13!A *y
.undo Jo; &no pug 80j srcupsdra 'pato
WI 14 9,1310 3umurPJ 9143 aAJascl0 *5
-sluatua.insuaux a3uels!sai pug 92E3f0A asjey j,
suriojanekt anzasqo .c
'PAS '9319 `Z.I1VZI '90119 aJuIdalI "Z
apuiclaTI I luluJou s! punos ,iapos aN L
31111033011d SNOLLVDIONI
NOUNS 39V110A HOIH aNY d33MS 1V1NOZ1110H
9213A130371 NOISIAITILL 61P6I CMC3314-1413.L.40-aLSORT
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
11. LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY SECTION

INDICATIONS PROCEDURE

No Raster, no picture and no 1. Check to see if the filaments of the tubes are lit. If not, check the fuse and the
sound. Tuning indicator fails to A.C. connections.
glow. 2. If the tubes are lit then replace the 12AU7 relay control tube in the Flyback
Power supply chassis.
3. Check relay K201.
4. Check resistors R415, R416 and R4I7.

ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
The alignment of a Television receiver is a procedure that 1111111,1.0""""

must be followed very carefully in order that the end result

is comparable to that obtained when aligned at the factory.
Before attempting to align, the serviceman must be sure that
alignment is required.
If there is any doubt in the serviceman's mind regarding the
need for alignmtnt, a quick check can be made by viewing the
overall response of the video IF strip. This is accomplished by
performing step No. 9 in the alignment procedure.

EQUIPMENT NEEDED
SWEEP GENERATOR
This generator should be capable of putting out a band of
frequencies from about 20 to 30 megacycles. Some means for
identifying the frequency of various parts of the response
curve must be available. To effect this, the sweep generator
must either have an internal marker circuit or an external RF
generator to perform the same function, will have to be used.
In the alignment table under the heading "Type of Input
Signal Required", the description "Wobb and unmodulated
RF signal" means that both the sweep generator output (wob-
bulator) and the unmodulated RF generator are to be fed into
the point designated. It should be understood that both these
units will have to be used if the sweep generator does not
have an internal marker generator. (Fig. 97.)
If, however, the sweep generator has an internal marker
01011111w
Fig. 97. Alignment using sweep generator with external
marker generator.
Fig. 98. Alignment using sweep generator with self-contained
marker generator.
generator, (Fig. 98) only the output from this one unit need
be fed into the designated point.
OSCILLOSCOPE
An oscilloscope is used as a means of visually indicating the
response of the stage or stages under observation.
All of this equipment must be securely grounded to the re-
ceiver being aligned. This grounding can be accomplished by
using a metal top bench, preferably copper. If such a bench
is not available, these units should be bonded together by the
use of heavy metal braid between the chassis. Ordinary wire
is not enough to effectively place all units at the same po-
tential.
Once the equipment is set in place, the generators and re-
ceiver should be allowed to run at least 15 minutes before
starting to align.
Additional equipment necessary for alignment is what is
referred to as a 6AK5 adapter tube. This is simply a 6AK5
with a fine wire soldered to pin No. 1. It may be necessary
to fasten this wire to the side of the tube with scotch tape to
prevent it shortening against the bottom of the shield. This
tube is used to permit feeding the generator output into the
grid of the mixer stage without disturbing the inputuner.
In the procedure, reference is made to the use of a "Probe
Detector". This device is merely a crystal rectifier with the
necessary filter. (Fig. 99). Its purpose is to permit the ob-
servation of the response of a single stage when viewed ahead
of the video detector.

59
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT TABLE

Feed Output leads Adjust to

Type of Input Connect Generator Connect Output directly into Conform to
Step No. To Adjust Signal Required Leads Across Leads A Oscillograph or response. Remarks
into Oscillograph Curve
via Probe Detector Shown in

C213 C213 adjusts curve for

Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid) double peak.
1. L211 unmodulated R.F. V203 and V205 and Direct Fig. 100 L211 and L212 adjusts
signal. chassis chassis markers.
L212 L209 should be shorted
to ground.

2. R251 AGC Set for 3.2V. At junction

of R246 and C226.

3. L210 Mod. signal Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid) Direct None Adjust both for minimum
Z201 (top) at 21.9 mc. V201 and V205 and output.
chassis chassis
4. L209 Mod. signal Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid) Direct None Adjust for
at 27.9 mc. V201 and V205 and minimum output.
chassis chassis
5. L207
Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid) Direct Fig. 101
L208
unmodulated R.F. V202 and V205 and
signal. chassis chassis

6. L204
Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 5 (plate) Probe Detector Fig. 102
L206
unmodulated R.F. V201 and V202 and
signal. chassis chassis
To check
1st, 2nd Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid)
7.
and 3rd unmodulated R.F. V201 and V205 and Direct Fig. 103 If necessary readjust
Video IF signal. chassis chassis L204 and L206
stages
Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) * Pin 5 (plate)
8. L201 unmodulated R.F. V102 and V201 and Probe Detector Fig. 104 Grid of V202 should be
L203 signal. chassis chassis grounded.
Check Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 1 (grid)
overall Direct Fig. 105 If necessary readjust
9. Video IF unmodulated R.F. V102 and V205 and L206, L204.
stages signal. chassis chassis

SOUND IF ALIGNMENT TABLE

Z203 Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 5 (plate) Probe Detector

1.
unmodulated R.F. V211 and V212 and Fig. 106 Adjust for a symmetrical
signal at 21.9 mc. chassis chassis response.

2. Z202 Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) Pin 5 (plate) Probe Detector Adjust for a symmetrical
unmodulated R.F. V210 and V212 and Fig. 107
signal at 21.9 mc. chassis chassis response.

Adjust for a symmetrical

Z201 Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) * Pin 5 (plate) response. (If AGC is set
3. bottom unmodulated R.F. V201 and V212 and Probe Detector Fig. 108 too high the 1st video IF
coil signal at 21.9 mc. chassis chassis tube will cut off, resulting
in no signal.

Z204 Center the 21.9 mc

top coil Wobb and Pin 1 (grid) junction of marker on S response
4. (sec.) unmodulated R.F. V201 and R274 and Direct Fig. 109 curve with secondary
bottom signal at 21.9 mc. chassis and C250 control. Then adjust for
coil (pr.) maximum response with
primary control.
GRAIN TRAP ADJUSTMENT

Modulated R.F. Pin 1 (grid) At grid, pin 2 Adjust for minimum

1. L216 at 4.5 mc. V205 and CRT Probe Detector output. (Contrast control
chassis at maximum setting.)

*Use 6AK5 adaptor. Connect hot lead of generator to the wire on Pin No. 1.
After completing the alignment, be sure to properly adjust the AGC control.

60
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
1534
TO CRYSTAL 220"
PLAT 1/2 W
F OUTPUT

220"
I/2W
10K_ .0010 001 yf
RF INPUT

0 0 GND.
TO
GND.

PROBE DETECTOR

Figure 99

Figure 100 Figure 102. Frequencies shown above are in re-

verse order, which merely indicates that the response
was observed when sweep generator was sweeping
from high to low end.

Figure 101 Figure 103

CAUTION
When removing or replacing picture tube in owner's home, be sure that only
authorized service personnel are present in the room. Serious injury may result
from flying glass if CRT should shatter.

Do not leave CRT in any spot where it may fall or be struck.

61
 :*
3e
n;
a
9
F.
y
3I

I.

3
PO

tir

3 m:4 0
 NOLLISOd 35101/100104131N1100 3NN/1%3 NI tl01011 1111/0
ON3 /NOVI NO BONS NOMA 03/031A Sr NMONS (IONS) 140.1.1AWS
L
lI
434Nd
`1
-I
110110 e 43
0111V/130.
ii300 elr31 0tI3Z v
0311103dS 3SIMI43/110 S531140 V.01 51101S/53N 710 '0
031410345 3S1MV3N10 SS31N11 0VVV40b10111 3VV 3301VA 110110V4r0 11V '1
3 1. 0 N
0 E-

o
m
14
10
>
cc
o
it 41
O
ODD
O
rya a I I I I
>
MV NE> >
O 00
0
"ilC
N...1Ww0
ie
Ir.
at
0
O lGl
%
- > P.
0 14 14j 8 ro
" ' 4 I.F. 4 4 4 O
.. r. ti
O
> t >
g
>
M
z 44
00
T - .. IA A N4 44 44 GC
/et
4
0 2
-'a'
riCC
..,.i...1,4..:2;4
'4.44..4. 0
--_-_--
o
Z'
oOr.
,
m
2 4
4.
II Eg
5
> N
0
e
.0 0 P c o c 5
- - - -
<4 .g. ...;
gg4
O
O
-- -- --
u4
yV
HII
0 15
. .
P.
O
P
co
...,1
P .= >c 5 .0 3" .'
00 00 Jr Or or r ,:rg
..,g
o
E" O
C
io fa P.,
v;g
ag 2
P. P.
0 4: w 2
al
-
td
a m...=
4 04
4
A4
4 V :
4; sg
tf
- ft C
..
O
>0
.,.
gi.E4
4 :
O % % 0,1
..r
VI
1 113
I ', ,4,
,...
e4
..W
01
0.:
c
.1 c
k1
0
se
rG
sr
F. "
O
O
ti
Ne
YS >
0/./ es
0 et
0 *
0 kV
0 0
0 t.
0 2, h O.-, o
0a eo r
o .o o
o r
o
SN
V 2
> P' P. > 1E -4
. P. P. P. Pr. E . >1 > >
Ng
1
X a 0Cog
a 0
 C104 6105 C106 C109
15 MMFD 3-12 MMFD 6-N12MMFDPO I5MMFD
NPO'-5% NPO NPO 5%
m 130 V. D.C. BLUE (TO 1.201 ON
V102 MAIN CHASSIS)
RI10 6AK5
VI0I
6J6 I2K
I/2W L105 R104
0 0 12K
1/2W 1 C110
©0 R102
10K
r R105 470MMFD
Z INPUT- 73-r, IMEG T600V ±20%
C101 I/2W
470MMFD
0 2W

cRD- 59-U
35V R106
,±20% C116
CI03 470 100K R107
R101
470 MMFD 1/2W 330K
MMFD 350V1 1/2W
ANT. L106 20 600 V C 109
I/2W 120% --F 1:20%. 470 MMFD
35%
r
I
350V 20%
6.3V A
BLACK -YELLOW

C102 YELLOW
RED A.G.C.
470 MMFD 5
350V t20% LL
MAORY 3 1--\ R108
1 GANG 1

V_ .INDUCTUNER 10K
2W 0
la
MODEL RA -105 TELESET cc 225 V.D.0 RED -BLACK
1 si I
t CI12
1.0 MMFD V103
NOTES,
R.F TUNER CHASSIS 20% - 6J6 0
COMPOSITION CII3
I. RESISTOR AND CAPACITOR TOLERANCES ARE L103 ,0. I UO2-C 470 MMFD
l:10% UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED e. .
0 0 600V 20%
2. ALL CAPACITORS CERAMIC UNLESS 1

1
....
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
pc. _J R109
3. ALL RESISTORS COMPOSITION UNLESS - c, 12K
-Igt 112- 0 0
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED =4-30MMFD
.
.. N500 I/2W
4. DATE OF ISSUE OCT. 11,1946
ALSO USED ON RA -106 L104
IF C115
CII4 470 MMFD
MAIN CHASSIS VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 5 MMFD
N- 030
350V!20%
Antenna lead disconnected.
All readings are in volts. Line I I7V. MAIN CHASSIS RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS
Tube 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 All readings are in ohms unless otherwise stated.
V201 -1.4 NC 6.3AC 0 180 180 0
(M=Million K=Thousand)
V202 -1.4 .5 6.8AC 0 190 190 .5 Tube 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9
V203 0 1.3 6.3AC 0 150 150 1.8 V201 2.1M 0 0.2 Gnd 28K 28K 0
V204 0 0 0 8.3fAC .9 NC -.05 V202 2.5M 68 0.2 Gnd 40K 40K 0
V201 -.05 .2 6./AC 0 260 150 NC V203 0.2 100 0.2 Gnd 36K 36K 100
V206 240 0 8.5 6.8AC 6.8AC 0 0 1.4 0 V204 0.8 0.3 Gnd 0.2 5.9M NC 5.2K
V207 NC II 290 190 0 NC 6.3AC 13.5 V205 5.2K 33 0.2 God 26K 60K 83
V209 .7 6 0 6.SAC -.8 0 250 V208 26K 470K 1K 0.2 0.2 God God 1M God
V210 -.3 0 6.3AC 295 180 1.1 V207 NC Gnd 17K 40K 470K NC 0.2 5,0
V211 -.3 0 6.3AC 0 285 165 1 V209 5.8M 2.25K God 0.2 7.7M Gnd 370K
V212 -.4 0 6.3AC 0 240 52 .23 V210 1.6M Gnd 0.2 (1001 15K 50K 82
V213 .5 -5.2 6.3AC 0 0 0 -18 V211 1.2M Gnd 0.2 Gnd 15K 50K 82
V214 1.6 6.3AC 290 -2.7 0.0 II 1.6 VII 2 270K God 0.2 God 17K OK 82
V215 -.5 0 0 6.3AC NC NC 115 V213 200K 1110K 0.2 Gnd Gnd (Ind 100K
V210 NC 6.3AC 255 270 0 NC 0 13 V214 3.3K 0.1 ,4K 1411 Gnd Gnr1 God 3 3K
V217 -.9 N(' 0 6.3AC 15 18 0 V215 1,1M God (Ind 0.2 NC NO I '0K
V218 6.8 0 6.3AC 0 6.8 NC V214- NC 0.9 5K 11K 41.0K i 20K God
V219 NC 0 220 225 -46 NC 6.3AC .5 V117 ' 5M Gnd Gnd 0.1 11K 11.1( G nd
V220 -33 11.5 0 0 200 7.5 0 A 3 AC V31+ .:1001( 0 0.2 (Ind '00K NC ikt
V221 0 330 14 0.1 830 14 6.8AC 0 3'319_ God Gnd 1111s. 2 5 ,, 11 K 500K G11,11_
V223 NC 430 NC 400AC NC 400AC NC 410
V224 NC 6.3AC 1 0 1 100 0 200 Main chassis is shown on blueprint.

*
 280 VIDEO 1 35P VIDEO I.F. VIDEO DETECTOR IL VIDEO AMP PICTURE TUBE
F.
R 233 2RP VIDEO AMP 315 VIDEO AMR C221
GREY
C205 GREEN V202 V203 VIOLET N A G C. 206 05% 1/2w 6.236 R280 SOCKET
117 VIDEO IF. 408 V207
L204 6405 _tv A".".. 428 L2.16 206- A 600V 225% .1200
V201 .0001
500V
L 206 61105 1211
V204
V205
6405 1/2W - 2W
1/2 12497 666 07/6 C 222
05-2000225%
R 333
6665
R 205
1. C 20 8__T=.4
.2.,?4,.-T
0...4 L210
74; ORANGE
R335
106
1/2,6
II
1-35
6415,0w1-1_ L 213
1215
C2i7 R 227
5.66 6237
1006-029
VIOLET G201 BLUE 0025
L201 .0001 L203 613K I/2W
'i 0210 25% rs'aT 500 - 111-11e WHITE C220131 R23
2706 R 241
500V 05%
;1XL C212
20 RA
450V v2 w
.0;
60001,5 5008
IT- PLATE
7,7E 206 8207 0209
101Amr,.. L20
005 GRANS C214C C 216 0 +50% L218
GREEN
ED ±10%
1/24/
26 226 5000- MAN 1350V o L214 R 222 R223 5407MMF
o % ERN
1.202 R 203 11
10 211, 36 02658 R 239
2 t51.6411. R225 9295
BROWN 566 R 216 450V OW 100 1006
226 4706 4100% K 3.96
5% R211 R 213 R 215 L 212 .50% /2W1S
I/2W
4500 IN 1/2v/
I/2W 5% 226 R212 156
5%
221, 2W BLUE R 219 .10% C21413;
"0
250 50% 2W V2W_ C2T4 120% R 242
2W 226 2W 51;. '10 4500 C219 BRIAR
8202 Can 1W 1/28 450% R 229 20081 NESS
3906
II 218 #112 .2000 R.23I
478 50V 1208 J
#214
C2I1
L2/4 1/2W
I/2W - 10% 560,, 27 K C2204-` 325%,
1/29 !CO" .005 112W R226 125% 10 V204
GREEN 450V 1,- IK M2 Wt20%
IV/
460V R 240
I/2W ,1/2-12AUT
0203 R 224f CONTRAST 450% 2206
C206 III 6228
.005 243 81_
.005 I/2W 470K -10% D.C.RESTORER I/2W
450V 10 K
450V I/2W
I/2W
R 208
ION I/2W '1
5300V DIAL LIGHT
5300V
SYNC SYNC.
AUTOMATIC
ALLEN B. DU MONT LABORATORIES INC. 0220 GAIN CONTROL 0 Tu 195 INDICATOR
a l R 344 , 0248 81 005 06243Z
500 A.M. AUDIO
.0
R 252 AM
.1 MODEL RA -I05 TELESET 42 DECK 7/32KW r'72°: 8244 1.2 M -I/2
0214
641.7-G1 TUNER .1 205
22 SOCKET
RECEIVER MAIN CHASSIS A"SECTIO /2 C229 C23I .1207
aI 202 - 001 .05 2 DECK
0226 R246
15.30 6.30
; .05 3500

070
1.2 MEG 200V "B*SECTION P2 DECK
sI 2000 1/2W R253 1-,25%
5202
'8 -SECTION et
'25%
J TO C 227 ; 2 45
8247 8250
R251
=.-4c,410^-
1,2W
C230
01
S202
I DECK
CONV. .01 1.2 MEG 1/2 W 16- 1/481 400v C260
400V 1/2W C291 *20% -.. 025% "5 SECTION .005
Itts.t.ow 025% 1/2 W 5 202 600V
:50 8345 :?54
390,, SOUND DISCRIM. 0.024571r-45 t25% .1202
1/2W 1/29 3t SOUND
10 SOUND 202 SOUNDI.F. F V213 .13.36 Manua° TO
0210 211 21 LIMITER 6415 ,1,22.ME INSIDE J 20i AMP C256 0258 252 SPEAKER
64U6 64U43 G242 044 SOCKET PHOND
8 4 CO204,3 R,
V2I 2 C245 R282 '05 sumo 0216
(.0,2,407v V215 400V Amp
C 232 R256 4500
64116
SATS 1 r225% 6V6-131,8
228 ±2z00:0.40 T vF 1006 225% C220 -C
5 MMF I/2W 10
500V I 10% 2 201 I/2W
2202 2203 -10%
Z 204 C 248 R274 -1 C251 450V 50%
MF
1004 IT A .02 0253 - 10%
; R2 8265
R 268
500V 1/2 W
R 275 I:j.3
.C250 - 400v
225%
OINFD
4500
R284
'23613311 I X<VI
TT
1-
AVQ©.0047
240
33K
IW 2706 R270
IOK 7 II
1006 350.
R277
226
2206
i/214
R287 288

F IL
5

0235
2 1.. R262
2
0239 "X.
SOOST
720%
0241
2
,T,7
/2W
1/2W
C246

00
I
49
,AMF R 276
I/2W

C2521
R3 6
680K
10 %
R279
2M
I/2w
R28I
2006
25% R26
126
2W
I.2K
2W

SLACK/YE LO
R256
8.26 C20
344,
R259 mmF
25
40 .005 IR 263
2.5
UHF
R264
82,,
.005
450V
R 269 4 OV
R272
5000
110%
I006
I/2W
.01
400V R278
I/2
C294
,2W 2206 C265C R286
2
006 500V 5000 ,,29 172W 8.26 V2W zgz,
C.OW
4500
2W 40VI t5MMF I
4500 100K
M 1,1F
1/2W 18
025% ME6
I/4 W025% 150V
OTNOTNRECL
.100%
O 300 VOLUME
.30
RED/BLACK R C255 vERT SAW GENERATOR vERT DEFLECTION AMP
826257 VERT BuFFER ID 306
2W NOR. OSCILLATOR
4500 -E.- V220-4 R304 R 305 !OK T201 BLK. V220 -B V221 T202
SYNC. CLIPPER i/26SN7 ION I/2W 10 1/2 W I/2W ,31:, 1/26161 -CT 027 1.0276 6567 GT
SYNC.DISCRIMINATOR 8LU GRN
01
0217 R293 8296 400V 400V
R298 7i 210% E
6405 228 i06 0219 TO C C272 ±25% S203
0263
.01
R289
2261/2W
1/2W R294
1006
C266
47MMF
500V
I/2W
Z205
1/2W
C268
666 GT/G
400V
925%
.005
600V I
25%
01
400V
ql--I A 330K
R 309
R 311
436
RED
YEL.
-0 0-
C2140
tO 136
1292 02202
00 10 R295
±10%
005 C269 9300 6302
0 1/2W 0 R 310
4141/4w
1/2w
T5%
4000 R290 /2 6301 62 DECK R 308 240 %
i5OV 2711 600VT25° 05 1.20
325% L531
1/2VI
.100%
-105i
-150V
.100%
-10%
I/2W
101,
400V 2W
56
W.W. I/2 W 00 "A" SECTION
500K wet
I/4W
dr
4ir
R 312
2 2M R515 #316
T25% IOW ±5% 0303 0202 0 VERT 1/2 VI 106
1
/10K
x' I 2.26 HOLD 2W 2W
1/2w VERT C278
SIZE 2000-6V
34'I2°.4T26541' R313
S300 R 30 '2 450% -10%
47 6 450V C285 C 220,,
C287 10% 1/2 by .60% 25 _0 10
C284 005 50V -
.005 R314 VERT
.1203 1219 600V S300 .50% 2.00
600V 2252. -25%
ANt V222 V22 225 % R 342 339 vERT 29 PC'S R3I7
R324 REACTANCE TUBE 56 K 56K LIN. T20
SWITCH ON RECTIFIER R318 028 4700
C286*
01 1002W i0028 2W
TONE CONTROL 5U4G TOOK 80 1/2W 300V v224 WW
IW 350V RAC]
50% V81,
203
SWITCH SECTIONS VIEWED FROM S201 3 1/2
- TEL C282
KNOB OR FRONT END OF SW1TCH,WITH 4 6319 80 F1331 HOR OS
C279 1006 R328 R32 R330
ROTOR IN EXTREME COUNTER -CLOCKWISE M4. C288 029
05 01 276 76 226
(AM.) POSITION 600V 120% 05 4W 1i.A1
-10%
A 'ZERO TEMP COEF 125% K201 R3E1.4 200V
25%
. IW
200V
225%
2W
SWITCH POS. RED OA 1150 200" R 326
I. A.M. 4 'CERAMIC iczao 5W 10" 40
C285-4
MICA _.OS L2
I/2W .-11*C292
2. PROMO 0 "PAPER 6000
C285-8 -1 475V RED
RED 1000 1.601 (REF)
3. F M. 525% R321-8 C 259
R 327 40 *-78 6V
4. TELEV LIGHT ON 250, 25
ISO" 150% DEFLECTION YOKE
0
25V
1/26 1100v -10%
5. 7ELE0 LIGHT OFF SRN V T= L 0250% J204
-b° FOCUS COIL
NOTE- &NATE
1602 (REF)
ALL CAPACITOR VALUESARE MICROFARAD
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
2 ALL RESISTORS 10% TOLERANCE FOCU
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED VERT HORIZONTAL
R 23
3 ALL CERAMIC CAPACITOR VALUES
ARE MINIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE 25w
SPECIFIED BY TOLERANCES
4 DATE OF ISSUE NOV 15,1948 J208
II50 A.C. 613,1.
PHONO. MOTOR

ALLEN B. DU MONT LABORATORIES INC.

TELESET SERVICE CONTROL DEPT ALSO USED ON RA -106
2 MAIN AVE. PASSAIC, N.J.
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE
CONSENT OF ALLEN 8. DU MONT LABORATORIES INC.
This drawing is to be used when servicing those
RA -I05 Telesets starting approximately with serial
No. 8,501,001. When servicing those sets whose serial
The serviceman should realize that circuit changes on
future and previous sets that differ from this schematic
May cause certain of these measurements to be appar-
ently in error.
All readings to chassis.
Selector switch in TV position.
RCA I95A Voltohmyst used.
64A
number is lower than this number, please see main chassis
schematic dated Oct. 8, 1948.
 20 FT 2.C.0 DUCTON
LEAD
Ill
won REMOTE

TELE-1 011
SAL. ro. CONTROL
ANTENNA E PUSH SUTTON
!

COIL
'----1ELAy

TO
SWITCH WITH
SOY FIL.
L. c c. Loo I

ct5 ,
6J6 MIX.
V27 TELEVISION IT'S TELERIFIC!
R41 22$
Ci---19K V

V4 TS
0
65517
v. OC.RESTORER
SYNC, SEP RAMP
Vie°
ve ,21f MG cl TH PICTURE
DM I
-
68A6
PM I F -
100

16BA6
I.F 2BMG_ V5
END PIK OET
VII
VIDEO
6AC
TIM
10604 OR
3oo vGBA6 6AL5 LI32 54P4
121.P4
C16 1
MT PM
611 1F 120P4
I

V26
SPOT STATOR COND. ,!,>; 6J6 OSC.
CI,C2,CS,C7,C6,C11- LOW SANDI 7

_.-._._._,
1C5,C.4,C6,CS,C10,C12

1-103 L104 - COUPLING RINGS I

SANDI

TRIMMERS DRS
600
CANC., CIS,C19 -LOW BAND
125111C16,C20,C21 -NON AND Olt
c.
4.7
AM COX 6AU6
V
'IMMO POWER OUTPUT

l-
SOUNO LIMITER 11
6K6 003 6004/V
j L/SBUOD-NW. Fit WAVE TR6142i 6AU6 V6 5RD PM
11SW-ION --ii-HgRAL INSTRUMENT TUNER
11 NJ" 02 MF 400
)TOsm+-A100MF CST
50 wV 5:51'w 'V RN R66
000 10011
BRIO1TNESS
.

CONTROL
. TELEVISION I.F. ALIGNMENT DATA NOTES

VIDEO 1-11F. TUNER SWITCH SHOWN AT

-
TI- TOP TRAP 2025 MC LOA CHANNELS POSITION.
BUILT-IN Ti 111 RIM WAS SIR
NOT. PEAK 2175 MC 2 -SELECTOR SWITCH SHOWN IN DIPOLE
IN EMILY RECEIVERS
T2- 24.9 MC TELEVISION POSITION. A109 TONE CONTROL
R70 47 K
TO -242 MC 3 -ITEMS MARKED '?" R49294 II150 END AM. IF
TA -22,1 MC C-91-92 ARE
R-911-99
C96 10
MCMC MATCHED PAIRS !IX.
SOUND REPLACE AS MATCHED PAIRS.
TS -7-11-9 - 20.29 MC 4MPEAKERS. 0

O. M.
A.M. I.F.
.15XC
ALIGNMENT IMAMS

MTZI
TypE
LW.
Nona
BC LOOP / 024 AM CONV
AM 05G. 6BE6
L119 pIA Lei C7114794F
4 NOP
0774 ccosoLE 10' PM MASTER VIII 6SN7 RIOT DEFYOL
mootL Z_.31.. 6AL5 RI03 HOR.BLOCX.C6C. 5504 6BG6 V17 E
12TZ4
Es. HIS PHASE DETECTOR L94
6 -THE 95 AMP FUSE USED IN It -65N7 VMv TIE DISCHARBE MA. OUT - 0100
91411 PHASE PUT 00
: SERIES WITH THE CATHODE
5 -THE FOLLOWING TAMLE SHOWS / C127
CST
OF THE 6.150 IS A PIGTAIL CHANGES REWIRED IN FOCUS V A99 100K DOR. CENTERING 400V
TYPE, SOLDERED IN PLACE. RESISTORS FOP 10. OR 16. RISE
R100 10K
PICTURE TUBES. 0
EXPANDED
HON pc*, NOR PEAK
TIM SARA LINE FUSE IS TURF rah.. .0051.6
RI61-100X
ACCESIBLE FROM THE toP t97 SNDA to IOTA
R110 IN,
RI 7
mor4 It/ C115
A WOG 10 IOTA
C77
<21 220 -r_ BMA
BOTTOM OF THE CHASSIS GT6 .."'VEPRAWSIE -.-(450WV) V20
/1.11. NONE I2TZ 011KK R125 VERTICAL '. NISH VRECT.
FOR REPLACEMENT BY 1274 11711 mom IETZ ;02,25:(: 11K 15 DEFLECTION YOKE
SWITCH
REMOVING THE MASONITE V29 MANNED
11129-LIFT 0 F GROUND VERT OUTPUT TO VOL.
BOTTOM COVER. AND RETURN TO 5 R117 ADD R11134,
0104
1500
6AR5 8129
125K
CONTROL
SHOWN BY DOTTED LINES
--101\0"--"M" \N-WT617,--1 ROW DAMP
FOR 10B., IELP4 B 120P4. CIO, .0591F. LINE
KILONKIS FUSE
M". MEGOHMS 0105 C106 2M R1E2
FOCUS COIL
L95 INTERLOCK
1500 = 1600 629
P RELAY POSITION
ARM
55100 -
NESS
VERT.
SIZE)
REAR VIEW OF SWITCH
WAFERS SHOWN
ALL RESISTORS 'A WATT
ALL PAPER CAPACITORS 400WV
UNLESS OTHERWISE MARKED. 8120
006
ORME
0001.
VEST
1 000060000000 3

R127 0
0119 1.90
TZ L PoO .191F
vERT HOLD
T.Z.- NON ENERGIZED -(4): NOMML1, I
I - TV ALL CERAMIC e MICA CAPACITORS
RIOT
V II
NORMAL- ENERGIZED 2 - F
ARE IN mmFD, AND RATED 500. LOW V.RECT

HORIZ.
:0.. VERT
3 - AN
- PHONO - C )12
vERT.CENT
RELAY CONTACTS IN PEAKING UNEAR 1000 mf
REAR
015 -1251
DIAGRAM SHOWN IN
AC -60 4,
VIEW
T.Z. (EXPANDED) POSITION, 0
RELAY

IOT Z I 10" TABLE

IOTZ3 10" CONSOLE TT E
12TZ I 1211 TABLE
SERIES 12113 12" CONSOLE T T E
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
IOTZ4 10" CONSOLE

GAROD RADIO CORPORATION

BROOKLYN 1, NEW YORK
I 2 TZ4
12TZ6
I5TZ6
1211

1211

1511
CONSOLE
DELUXE CONSOLE
DELUXE CONSOLE
WITH AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
GSA
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
REAR VIEW

GAR
NOR. WIDTH

0 0
EXPHOR.0
PEAKING
0
TELEVISION, HOR, LINEARITY
VIG V14
V 19 1,10 R. oSC. PH. 111v. VIS
Models lOTZ1, lOTZ3, NOR. OANIFER D.0 -AMP vEar. osc.

lOTZ4, 12TZ1, 12TZ3, V15

HoR RN.
12TZ4, 12TZ6, 15TZ6.
With Telezoom feature.
V 1t
D.C. REST V6
1/1060
SYNC.5
AMP.
O O
Vacl
/../ v. OUT V5
v20 VI7 0
Rix.
H. VOLT. 140 OE 1".
RECT. OUT.
DISC,
20.25104 5. I.F.
/ V18 V4
V21 / 0
E RS1.

,
I S.F.P1W.

GT
FIG. SECT. V10
BEAN
BENDER
TV IF v8 v3
REO 109P4
RESPONSE OR V12 PIX.
Narn012g,4"---..y. AUDIO

00000
REO OUT.
1201.4/ 0
V7
S. 0 V2
P1X.
LE
4 2o .2D
V 24- V 25
A en 0 12AT7 0
CONY. 1.1.F. OF
V23
FIN CONY. V27
MIX.
AM- 20.15 MC
SOUND V2.6
FIG.2 CAP.
Fl",apl V12. TRAP osC .
,
I
t 1 FM RF AMP.
TV RF
RESPONSE TUBE PLACEMENT - TOP VIEW

'CIRCUIT SELECTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR METER

STEP CHANNEL CONNECT
(ALIGNED SWITCH ADJUST
CONNECTIONS FREQ. VTVM INDICATIO
TV
FOLLOW PROCEDURE FOR FM - IF a DISCRIMINATOR ADJUSTMENT,
SOUND STEPS 2,3 a 4 AS SHOWN ON AM -FM ALIGNMENT* CHART.
ACROSS CENT ER
2 TV 8 TAP OF MIX. GRID ACROSS 4.7K
COILS 13 GND. 22.8 MC LOAD RES. T5 MAX. DEF
(RI50) (R39)
B
3 22.1 MC T4
TV 4
T3
11
24.2 MC
II

IF
11
5 11

24.9 MC
11

T2
11 H le
6 21.75MC
11

TI ( BOT.)

7 11
20.25 MC
N
TI (TOP) MIN. DEFL
*Use identical signal generator frequencies as
in Steps 2,3, & 4, of P.M. I.F. alignment. 65
 AM -FM RECEIVER ALIGNMENT CHART SERIES IOTZ, 12-u, a I5TZ TELEVISION RECEIVERS

CIRCUIT SELECTOR R'C'V'R SIGNAL GENERATOR METER COMPONENT METER

STEP SWITCH DI AL REMARKS
ALIGNED ADJUSTED INDICATION
POS. SET TO FREQUENCY CONNECTIONS TYPE CONNECTIONS

BC I BC 1650 KG 455 KC THRU .IMFD TO A C ACROSS VOICE TOP AND MAXIMUM

I.F. 30%MOD. 6 BE6 GRID OUTPUT COIL BOTTOM OF DEFLECT ION
PIN 41 T -I0 , 711

FROM LIMITER TOP AND

FM THRU.OGR 01 DI MOFFD . DC le
2 FM 108.5 MC 20.25 MC. GRID, PIN I OF
BOTTOM OF
I. F. VTVM G6ARUO6uNDAND
UN MOD. 12AT7 (PIN 47) T6 ,T7,18

i.
FROM DISC. MAX. DEFLECTION
FM ..
3 * " " CATHODE, PIN TOP OF OF EITHER
DISC.
30F 6T8 AND T9 POLARITY
GROUND.

BOTTOM ADJUST FOR

1. il. II II II II
4 OF T9 0 VOLTS ZERO BETWEEN PLUS
AND MINUS PEAKS

1650 KC COUPLED TO AC ACROSS

BC WC VR LOOP MAXIMUM
5 BC 1650 KC OUTPUT VOICE COIL C -126 DEFLECTION
OSC 30%MOD. BY 2 OR 3
TURNS

1500 KC
BC II II II II
6 " 1500KC 30% MOD. C- 125
RF

THRU BALANCED FROM LIMITER C-I 23

300!1 DUMMY DC GRID PINI OF 2-6 MME.
FM 7 FM 108.5 MC 108.5 MC MAXIMUM
ANT. TO FM. VTVM 6AU6 AND TRIMMER ADJ,
OSC UN MOD. GROUND. AGENT TO DEFLECTION
ANT & GND.
TUNING GANG
OSC. COIL RE PEAT STEPS 7 a8
.. .1 I. .. ..
8 87.5 MC. 87.5 MC. CORE
L90 AS NECESSARY
UN MOD.

.1 II II
RF COIL ..
FM 9 " 9 5 MC. 95 MC CORE
L 86
R.F. UN MOD

ANT. TRANS.
CORE
st .1 II II .
" ..
10 T -18
 'S1 3NN V140 MO1 804 1011 (INV S13NNVHO 119111 804 zoli 9811snrav A9 30VIN 39 AV11 3S11/111141100 31106 '1.0N 41
'10e1.1.N00 %INN. 3NIA 3111 AO 9114111 3H1 NIHIIM 113M 03A13338 3/1V Sl3NNVI4 0 831410 1'1V 1V11.1. 335 01 )403H3 ZZ
w 101 1 9 011 c1.7.9 IZ
'OW e (I 818) 0189
ral 'N011031d3Q rinkrixvw 804 isnrav doll .1111 9nv9 ssotiov
£1 011 5L'513
S1VNIV118 31
VN1431NV
OZ
3A08V
SV 311VS
3908d Oa AON3f1031:1A SNO1133NN00
S el V 3 el isnrav RAJA 13 NN VHD d 3 IS VNN31NV
0 103NI409 OlVel 3N39 "WM'S Aroma
1N3141N911V 'OSO Al
owszes 9
*S13NNVHO 11 OR LG 61
GTGG
11V NO 3S11041S321 trinvvido 011 GeS9 9
OR £9 SI
Nivlso 01 0311M0321 38 AV111 ONGZ*19 II
613 HO '910'413 '£13 AO 1N311 ORGL'IL
ORGZ19 01169 LI
-isnrav imons 'S131410043
11
11V NO 3SNOdS3 )133H3 S
311GL'113 9 011 6L
OVIGzLL 91
'M0138 NMOHS SV 'XOliddV 610 '813 ORGL18
3SNOdS38 2104 isnrav 413 '£10 N 9 31158 SI
01415M8 11
31
0119/.90Z 9
0,14 LOZ iI
311GZ'GOZ .1
II
011 Ge£OZ 9 W 10Z
S13NNVH 0 11
OR GV661 N £1
11V NO 3SNOdS38 04nriliaso 01.1 51/61
OI OR 561
01 0381(103/1 38 AVM 11
Ord SZ161 ZI 11
IZO HO OW '913 '510 AO 1N3 OW Si. '161 13
6
-15nrov 1149116 'S13 NNVH3 311 GZ191
OW 681 11 11
111, NO 3SNOdS311 )103H0 GL'581 13
8 OR £81 01
II
041 GZ '181
M0138 NMOHS SV WHOA OR GL'611
-3AVM 804 99N18 isnrav von 'sof N OW ILI 6
011 GZ'GLI
'110111S0d 3A1.1.V1321 31.1VS 3141
(Z*914 33S)
IMO 9 0518
0v31
'3(OHcIdV NI SHIVd 834141181 /13X111 SSOHOV)
ONV d2i 3H1 d33/ '3011111dINV HOV3 14.1.1M
IZ3 '0Z3 'ONO 9 S1I03 0111 GeGIZ 9 S1VNIW83.1.
)1V3d AO °AO/ NVH1 3/1011 683 910 `G13 0189 1111 AO dV1
£1 OR LIZ 8
531839 NI
011 GZ'l la VNN31NV
-)18VI*4 HlIM `M0139 NMOHS SV
831N30 SSOHOV 801S1938
X02:1ddV 3SNOdS38 /104 isnrav 1131AlldlIV 1.2i3A Nr)811V0
lf OG1 3NO
3dOOS AON311031IA (:133MS 314 01) SNOT 133 NNO3
el V1413 isnrav 103 NNOO
13NNVHO e101VII 31438 A3 N 30 031:14 cl3J.S
VNN31NV
H3)1211/11 21011/113 N 39 1VNSIS Avmna
N31001911V 38 Al
4
0)
0) AMPLIFIER ICI' PM
6V6
TUBE AUDIO SPEAKER
"H" AMP.
SOCKET L. F.
C67 I 5
.0 2 ME 400V (WAS V12)
25WW.

C611
I2K
.01 MT
7 6AT6
PHASE INV.
TO 400 V.
R109
I1.02
REFER TO CABLE PLUG IO"PM
T2 SERIES TO AMPLIFIER 100K 470K
SOCKET -TOP OF SPEAKER
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM TELE.CHASSIS H.F.
1(.4 400 V.

100K CO
ith
110 V. A.C. 40
:5V. 650 7W
PHONO FAHN STOCK
OUTLET CLIPS TELE.
ANTENNA CHASSIS
20 MF. 7.-...r, 20 ME YOKE & FOCUS COIL BUILT-IN FM Pi
0 CABLE B SOCKET FOLDED DIPOLE
0 450 V. I ASSEMBLY yry
CO0 - PLUGS
PLUGS*
Li
TO HI -VOLT. I pl
117 V. A.G. 0 TO DUAL Ir OR 15" ABLE ,44
0 6 SPKRS. C.R.T AUDIO AMR
OUTLET
1 1
5Y3 OND. ,_ di INPUT PLUG
AT REAR OF TV CHASSIS P. TO "H"
o E1o
L6.5 V. O
PHONO
PLUG
K KILOHMS
AMPLIFIER CHASSIS - TUBE LAYOUT CRT.
DUAL
SOCKET
10 SPKRS. 4? rl
Now TO
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - AMPLIFIER UNIT SHIELDED
RECORD 117 V tll
CHANGER 60.
I2TZ6A-7A, 15TZ6-7
SERIES $11It
la ° ollbF
PHONO
DELUXE CONSOLES I LINE
SPKR. "'"
CARL
rn
PHASE PLUGS AUDIO
CONSOLE REAR VIEW SHOWING CONNECTION OF UNITS CORRECTLY AMP.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
25.55mc 26.3mc
23.3mc 25.55m
26.3nm GENERAL ELECTRIC
2I.8m
23.3mc MODEL 809
A B TELEVISION RECEIVER

VERTICAL VERTICAL FOCUS THERMAL

LINEARITY SIZE SWITCH CUTOUT

25.35mc
25.55m c
O ©0 Ka C)
DRIVE

NOR.
26.3mc
23.3mc 23.3mc PREQ.
26.3 me

FIG. 2. VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT CURVES 1 ST AUDIO

1.F COIL
SECONDARY
TOP
RATIO DET.
PRIMARY
BOTTOM
T 341

L244

TUBE TOLERANCE
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS

"
HORS4AL TERLOCN

0 NO
''''''
HORIZONTAL
TNE"NNSL WT.
CUTOUT
FOCUS VERTICAL® VERTICAL(§)
SIZE LINEAR, L243-®
CLAMP

PICTURE TUBE

FOCUS
COIL

®-L242

C) --L208

P (occasional adjustment) controls

Late production chassis is 11

identified by "T" ink -stamped

on the chassis front apron. Val
Early production sets are X 371 X 372
similar to Models 805, 806, *1312 1125W4 USED ONLY ON CHASSIS MARKED T
& 807 of the next section.
NOTE: Late production 8o9 receivers used a new design
FIG. 1. TUBE AND TRIMMER LOCATION
horizontal sweep transformer, deflection yoke, hori-
zontal size, and linearity controls.

69
The 2526 damper
tube was replaced with a 25W4 when this new sweep
transformer was added.
 ul
0+
4= LA N) 1-, \.,4 r0 F--, CD
10 < o 0- cr Ft H. CI- Cr 0 1-, m CD M cF Ft cF
IIIIIIII 1--, Ft001-, 00cD c,- 01:000q
ON ..-.3 CI- C., 0 ch 1:7 cl- 0 0 a 9 CD 9
< CD
Clq D) 1.-
0+ (D F-4 Ft I-, CD £
.- 2) 0 a) cl- Ft
0 W0 CD
1- a) 1--'
4= 4= 4= W < .CD .- ND N.) S.) r0 s) r0 s) N) N3 s) N) ND N3 ']co im
'0 0 c+ CT V1\..,4 0-,..51 WON,J1 _(1 Cro_r. WI-, .1 a. co Cl- C+ W 1-. 0 o - 1-. 1
0) 0 0 0,:. 1))a) I CD CD
Ft cl-
H gH. <
a) `<
. . . ,
0 ,...r, si, ..r, '
0 1.--.

0+ 1-, ),A )...n W W\J-1 ,..4

.
WCW
. . . .
W\J-1 (..,. 00
. . m g
.0 0) CD CD ch 0 0 K 0- ''.0 C 0 .q Ft 0) K 0 1-, En
Z
g X 0 - Z .51 ,J, ,..r. C Ft K 0- "F K M 1-" Ft Ft C < (0. FF
a c) m /-.. M. 1-. CI- OqM 00(1, CYCI
K'
. C4X
. 4 4 G
0 0) 0 0' si-. G 00 m 0
0CD
C-2 x co 4' x co
co 4 X co4
co 0md-
,0 . X x c)
co ca mM
CD C-1 0 C) CD 0 .1 IM 'Li 1 ND 0+ 0. H. 1--,. 0 d- 0
,-3
't 0 0-ack m. 0' r< I-, or co .1 a)
`.< K C .--, ED 1-3
a(1) 0+ D) 0 -CD 1-,. 0) ED H. M 1
1--.. (.1-
CA Cr
(1,015 N3 e rcc)crg d-
I
N) N3 ND IN) '--4 0
omo a.,c1).---
0 0 H 1-, 1-+ Ft SD CD CD ID
't ''
}- t-''
O .--.
0 I
C3 0 I
0
.1
Ft 0
CD 0 OD I
r0rt < 0 arao ---0 ar3lo0crq.la I--
0* I-, a Crq <- C a> .,
._ 1-,. C
0
1111
,,,, W \...r _,.1 .0 co £ .-., 0,.-,,,,,,.-tro,-1,11-t d_orior.104 C co
ON ..0 '1 I-. co
0
I I I I co
0 0 0 C 0,4 (4
a( 51) ED cF 0 0 a. ED CD 0 c+ 0- (),) Ft 0 ID 0 cl-
.1 0a)
0 CD cn
-4 ',-.. 0 (-1- 10 c+ c''' LTJ
.c0 a. CD cr.. d-
0 a .10) c+ . 0 0' co r.F.,a,m a m g0+400 m0
-6. CD CD CD 0 0-.
1.< ,-t f-. fa 0 000 1., i.--
FF I-, CD E-1- c. -F O
0 9 1-3 N.)0Cciq
cF 0 0 F-, c(- 0 1-.. H.
F., En
0+ 0- a) Ft 0- 0- Cs an 0 c+ 0 0- 0 0 ED
0
- CD P., row 0 D) 1- Cil
0 0 0 H. Ft ED
2) 0,/ q CD ID I
IN q , 0 ry "i, K
CD 0+ 0 Ft Ft ED s..,, 0+
Ft a)
W .-- 0 0 q 'A..-- 0 0, ',J, ,, 017 0 0.^ 1-3 0 --.) -, k -A -- ,-- .--- ,- F-0 1--1 C0 a) Fo
co
CD 0 0 D) 1co o
a Co 0 .0 rt .1 CD, - .-cr rt 1 ,-. - ro.- .-., 1 C a ro .
0.-b 0 Ft 0 Co N - :r. .-. A, 'Ci -- tO C1) ...C) Q., e7 0, C) CA. 0 F-' .1 or < .1 ,-, or or 0 ,,,. °
1E1
. a. a 1-. I- I- I-4 ..3. h. I-. .,- H. I-, . Cil. .__, 00 1-,. r.,, H.
no 0 '-'. 1-, '0 0q
CD
< o .-
H. K 0 .0 Z CD ID 0
(1)
co .1 cr .--, or o rt
0 Ca .-- or
.1
.-3 co a.
Z
1 09 0" ,..,,DgCoqm O<
Ca oa . 5 0 cp ..t
rs,, Q. g cF4a I 0, q 1 0.. c.1-1 0- C C F -F 0 c(- 0 F''' till
K CD c.t- (a) co G a° co
a>
0<co a 00 00
g0- g g < 0
11 --.3 Q. ID 1..., ...., cD 0 CD
Ft K 0,4 K 0- H )--,. ,-,)
(:, 0 .-..) --- i--, H. ---- 1-.., H. ---. 1-, H. 0 0) ID 0 CD I-, 0
CD I 0), En En VI
O. Q, °' .--- -- 0, < < 0 1-,
- g0.,a-4. 0, --0 ._- 0-
- 1-,..
0 0a0 00 0 1-
DO CD ,< F,. a)
< 1-, Ft M 0) 0)
N'' 0 1-,.
0+ i- c+0
cc-
1.-,
CD .1
a) tf
F.:(
,_,., --- _ --- Fa -- F,D t0 "-- '-c, 0
En cD
.100IDID
01-,. 010 1-' KFt .-- .--.) a. Ft I-. Ft Ft ,<1.1 0
0£
I-' 0 ,--b K
+' FE) (--, , ,,,,' Fri I-, eri FL) ..-( s..0 '0 F-'
...4 cl- .--, 1-- .P C i- cl) 0 O. w cD til
I--, II) ''''' 1-, CD -0 CD H. CD
9C
I.
a) H. 0+ 0) 41) cn 0-1- cnFt H. - 0t)
Ca 4 r- £
CI 1 cl- 1 .0 c+ 1 cl- a.
-0 til 01-Cl
0 no
0 ch 'Cl-
0 9 .-., ci- 1-.. 0 g
HI 0 a) CD }-I I--, 0 K Ft ID Ft ..n 5 a. o O.0 N
.
I0 1-, 1--, .--, £ 1--, 0 t -c 1-....o m
c) .0
5
Ts m
1--. cx, 1-. 0-
.--., Cn 1-... CD a)
0
ti
I I I -- --- - ---- --- ..-- -I-,-- t0trl 0 o co d- 0o smgom
1--i Hi cn .-4 a)
C C <4 0m o I En
1
co co woo woo
0a,.5m co a. 00 0'
a. a coF.---0 r a)0 00'0i-,cl-0 0£ 0- 0 Da
FA; 0s 9 0s . Co
0 Co
f_.. -
00. --- 0. -.
9 I -I 0 o.00 or 0
fa. - .
40
,.. 'CD 0
-
,f z 40
,-0 r. 1.(i,
05M W co or "-I
,--.. CID
Cil CD [.] CD 5 04 £
, 0 0" >4 0 ar co
, , , 0 9ro 0q.1 o
0 0
co co £ 0' ID
I- G go
a 0.or ol- 1-- .co 0000(1). -30c( -
0 o Z or r- In co G. or 0" a cF 0 D.) cD K 0 tri c+ F -F pi
,-1 1 1 .1 X 0- c -r 0 0' co a) 0-1-
I 4Fd H. CD
t.t .-3 G .1 co 'EDW.-P..100 0

CD
, 0Ft...a
sv 1,
a ,-3 G
, ,.
OD
D)
a r-. G
(...,1
c.,.
Q.
0 Fb ,-,0
0 0.1 K5. <4 5 Ft U)
,-J 0)
,..,,,
0 CD
02
'4 rt t-.
H. 0 N)
0,(1 0
K 00
cs

0 t, tc.
Ft ro .i
4= ID
,-aj
OF,

s) co
0,-h t,N)
.-.3
-C-
,..)
ON

lai
'-1
D)
ED
0,-t t,N3tdK
tl
ON

DD
cn
,--d OD
0 0* 0)
I-,
zilk .-, K
rNo a '0
£
111
or
or
Ft
a)
M
0

CD
r

o
00
",-..... no ..-- 1-,

0 co
0
0 -1-g0-'coq

....,
g

.--,
(:)..
1-+

.1
I
Ocr

CAD
rc
a .-
1-..
0
CD
I-,
F.
N)
1-,

co
o
00
cD
so
M
0
1

..p.
<

o
Ft 0-
a,
.-I
CD

0
m

CO
d-
0
co
0'
OD

0
CD
q
5
CD
K'
1-.
G
0,,Q

<
1-...
F£'
r-
H'
g
g5 a,
I-.
°
.73-'

CI)
Ft
a) Ft
0 (D Ft a)
,, 0 a,. 4, o m
DD
.1 o
.--t a) CD 0
or
VD 0 C cl
1.-..

CD
or r<
o-
cl,

.--b
CD
'i
cD
1-,

d- 0'

0 a,
0 Z =
.-3 0,
ch
0' a a>
or
tid
ell
etil
404
11111.__,.
1--, W Cil I--,. CD 9 CD C CD O 0 1--, M 1-,. M F -u M NMI
0 a0 0,4---
H
c+ ,-.) 0+ CD Ft Ca. ry oc -b. 1-,- cr .-0 < ri Z
0 q K '0 0 0,2 .--b Oq ,-b (-1) 0 .1 .-
a' 0cr I-,4k q,0o .-,coo
En rcrk,4 0
0,1 1-. OR 0 X ' M .0 0 - .1 0 0 CD CD ID s..r. a. c+ c< 5
0
O .-., o
0 .-s o
o
sa. .1 ,-t ti < Q,
--- a,
00
Ft 0
ND
000 K 1-0
Ft
K N3
K0
1
CD,
c..
cF
0 N3
e
CD 00 cc) SD
0
c'D 0 0 1-,
0 cF 0+ 0 1--( 0 < .--t (0,
L.-. ...-- 0 0) En 1-,
K ,-.) 0 X0 << .-- 0 0) .-- 0 CD C o lo 0- .1 1- d- co .1 oG 11)
a) co a, F.6
0 . 0 CD '.c-.CCD
0 0Ft 00 00 0Dz.Ft0 0 N) O.) G £
K-
< or- Oq 0 cl- 0 0,1 ,1 0 .0 Ft F-, 0
0 X CD ,-3 rs - G£
.1 Cl-
rt I- .m ri 0, (20
0 ..Fc CD .--, .- < - 1< 0 --t, 0 0 0 Pa ta, p c,
...1 CD ,-., (I, ..., Cl) i--' H .D
1 0H. 0,
D) H. -F ----...-3 0 0rt g & c+ m c+ 0 co m m c ,-3 M .4 Pil
, , _,,,,.. 0 cf) o 0 0-'
'e 4 aq e -o a) cl- 0 0 0 _p- -.1
.-- 0+11.) COc+ 0+
cl- 0 0 CD 0O+.-., -P----
I-- - Ft ID F-'D)
. C CD < 03 1- ,..n
t -c 171 < Ca CD
1-) .10 a, 0 0 C 00 0 0- C F+
(t+ 0 cl- H. a. g C -CD g m 1E1 cn
0Li
CD y:1 cl- ch Cl H. cn N) 0 CD Ft t-, N.) 0 c+ CD C 0 K Cl- a d- aF. or 0 or 0
O ,..,4 0 C 0 N3 .- C 0' 0 N3 00 0 co o' W Fc 0 .--, C
Cl CD
, C
a 4,-
gm- 0K, -tgg cf a.a cp c") .-1 mom. 4-_- c,' ID 0 ,C cc- cr D) 0)
,. ,... 0-O
a) 0 0 1-.. 0 0
00 00 c+ 0 m m
G a) £. co 0' 0 00 -- c CD cl- ,,, cl,
0 C ht
g .--. VI
fil), 0+ cD cD c+ - 0 0+ 0 70 c.- E. . 00 aa
D) 0 < 0 c+ 1-, a. c+ Ft 0 CD .--,.
,.., 0 000Ccl- 0 H. M 0 10 a) IDD 0 c+ 02 0 m .., ,-i 1-, o 0 I.-. 0 ci-
,' a 'Cl- '
1--, (1) 0 En Ft cF
cl- 0 (D a << 5 o 0 0 I-, C M /....
ca)
CD
D) 0 0- 0 En 0 I-, D) C'
..< cl- cl C) cf- .- q 0,1I -F 0
,(I) 0 cr. c-i- .-4 o:f 0 Cf) .--.) c+ 04 K ND cl- CD
,,,, N.) CD -P0,0010 Co
vI 1-,. (--,.
XJ00 5CD C
d- co
0 0 0) o r,) o < o -F- or 0 0 cD rt 0
,- 01 co Ora 0 < c+ 0 c+ X _,,1 0 .-3 \J, 0 co a I
0 0a
- 0, 0 CD 0 H. .-.> SD 0 0 I--, 0 1 ro c+
G CD
- , rt ri
'''..1 - mH'..-.1 co
a r7,
a or -, 1- <
. P 0 co Crq a.
0 c< H'
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Aa I, IGNMENT -- CONTINUED
II tep Signal Sweep Signal Connect Channel Adjust Remarks
Generator Generator Input Oscilloscbpe Switch
Frequency Frequency Point to Head -End Setting
Chassis and
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
1 21.8 MC 20-30 MC v6 grid Plate tV8A) 5 or 6 Brass screw of L244 may be
23.3 MC Pin 1) Pin 1) and L244 for curve adjusted to level
25.55 MC and B3- of Fig. 21A). the top of the
26.3 MC (32-) curve, as in Fig.
2LC).
2 23.3 MC 20-30 MC V5 grid Plate tV8A) 5 or 6 Brass screw of L208 tends to
25.55 MC Pin 1) IFin 1) and L243 for curve reduce the valley
26.3 MC and B3- of Fig. 203). at the top of the
tB2-) curve of Fig.
3 23.3 MC 20-30 MC V4 grid Plate 078A) 5 or 6 Brass screw of 20)), as the
25.55 MC Pin 1) Pin 1) and L242 for curve screw is turned
26.3 MC and B3- of Fig. 2tC). into the coil.
032-)
4 23.3, MC 20-30_MC V3A grid Plate lV8A) 5 or 6 L208 and L244
25.55 MC Pin 7thru iFin 1) and for curve of
26.3 NV, 27K and) E0._ Fig. 20)).
head -end '
grd.
AUDIO I -F ALIGNMENT
1 4.5 MC Grid -- -- Secondary of T341 Connect a vacuum
at 1/10 of V8 for approx. 1/4v. tube voltmeter
volt (Pin 7) measured on a to junction of
approx. and head- VTVM. R343 and R346,
end gr.l. and head -end grd.
2 4.5 MC __ Grid -- -- Primary of T341
of V8 for max. reading
(Pin 7) on VTVM.
and head -
end grd,
__ __ -- Adjust core of
3 4.5 MC Grid
of V8 L341 for max.
lPin 7) readings on VTVM.
and head -
end grd.
4 4.5 MC -- Grid -- -- Adjust secondary
of V8 of T341 for min.
lPin 7) reading on VTVM.
and
head -end
grd.

7 175.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel

and sweep term- R209 and #7
179.75 MC inals L208.
at
head -end
8 83.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel Screws of L226 to Video marker
and sweep term- R209 and #6 place 83.25 MC should fall on
87.75 MC inals L208. and L236 to place the top of the
at 87.75 MC markers, curve. The audio
head -end as shown in Fig. marker should
3(B). fall at least
9 77.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel one-half the way
and sweep term- R209 and #5 up the side of
81.75 MC inals L208. ___ the curve. It
at may be necessary
head -end to slightly read -
10 67.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel Just Channel #6
and sweep term- R209 and #4 for proper track -
71.75 MC inals L208. ___ ing on #4, #5,
at and #6.
head -end

71
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION. RECEIVERS
.11 61.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel Screws of L223 to Video marker
and sweep term- R209 and #3 place 61.25 MC should fall on
65.75 MC inals L208. and L233 to place the top of the
at 65.75 MC markers, curve. The audio
head -end as shown in Fig. marker should
3(C). fall at least
12 55.25 MC 15 MC Antenna Junction Channel one-half the way
and sweep term- R209 and #2 up the side of
59.75 MC inals L208. the curve. It
at may be necessary
head -end to slightly read-
just Channel #3
for proper track-
ing on'#2 and #3.
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
1 237.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 13 L215 by spreading Set tuning
term- R209, or squeezing capacitor at
inals L208 and turns for zero mid -position.
at -C216 beat. Adjust for zero

2 231.55 MC --
head -end
Antenna
term-
Junction
R209,
12 - beat, on scope,
of signal gen.
freq. & osc.
inals L208 and freq. Check
at C216 Channels #12
head -end thru #7 to see
3 225.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 11 --- that zero beat is
term- R209, at least 1/3 of
inals L208 and a rotation from
at C216 either end of
the tuning knob
4 219.55 MC --
head -end
Antenna
term-
Junction
R209,
10 - rotation.

inals- L208 and

at C216

5 213.55 MC __
head -end
Antenna
term-
Junction
R209,
9 -
inals -L208 and
at C216
head -end
6 207.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 8 ---
term- 5209,
inals L208 and
at C216
head -end
7 201.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 7 --
term- R209,
inals L208 and
at C216
head -end
8 109.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 6 Adjust screw in The oscillator
term- R209, L213 for zero adjustments for
inals L208 and beat. Channels #2 thru
at C216 #6 should be
head -end made with the
9 103.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 5 Adjust screw in tuning knob set
term- R209, L212 for zero at least 2/3 of
inals L208 and beat, a rotation from
at C216 either end of
head -end its rotation.
10 93.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 4 Adjust screw in
term- R209, L211 for zero
inals 0208 and beat.
at C216
head -end
11 87.55 MC -- Antenna junction 3 Adjust screw in
term- R209, L210 for zero
inals L208 and beat.
at C216
head -end
12 81.55 MC -- Antenna Junction 2 Adjust screw in
term- R209, L209 for zero
inals L208 and beat.
at C216
Niiiiiiii-
CL
A/17000.0Z
8313M
dVi - MS snood =loos it DIE
.Mw - 151181800 I) Flweiovlaaovzion
NM - 923141 H91118
'X114 010H A
XVW - 010H 41
XVM - g11004 011301
1100Z 11E,
AO AS - arm 10 A /'' 1/1361
iv as slot:Limo ,rda A
4:8 C,
3 ONVISIS3 ?A
MLa
ALI I - g/10A 3N11 L
1081800 snood do 10/11 N1M Cj Lgl
1700g S21 AEA` MO
83101H HO AOC 31V05 asn -1E )10L _. 4A -
*901
A/413 000'0 30 0 C
A/13.0001 34, ACV b9 £O
L La
88313111 66Z 0
6 L6 a 0
V111 - /SVIIINO3 A9`01
'NAV -SS] N1H9188 M La
11081
'MON - 01014 71 MOOS
)109 A
1111'480N - 0101414 AS I VOOS £
1V111180N - snood 0
NM - 31.41110A
M09 a M001
IV 13s 61081800 1
A013Z L Al -
939V110A La 00 11.1,10 tt 0V QV
V OZ M
0 (3 M.£Z 91. 61
17009 L
0 0 11,.
00 001r
21
d MLZ
C105)1 VO ZL
)1 8
OV81
ML3 A093
OV901
LIDO?.
OV A
,0° ;os LLZ 3
4 99a0
'fa°
1
Z
*A I
Maa
0V56 0° CA AS MO9 )109
MLz AgLZ
LL
37 110ZZ ML3 MO9 Z
AZI N9g VOZ
AVal
A001 nay 06
09
AS Agl
MS
; OW.L )141.3 0
ASLI Ogg Age
MO
Atd AC93
0Vg
Ag9Z
MLZ MI?
0V56 Y59
>MUM .19411:1W JOIJAD3 punosmzs-is MAUD INHWNDITt 3,k1 'DIJ
Aeliow 481JJ133 ein4o!d ad
S2I3A1303?1 NOISIAMIL 6161 a3a2armaimo-xson
 1

R204 V 3A V4 V5 V6 V7A VBA V8 B V7 B V9

CONV. IST IE 24o LF 3. IF DEL Ioo VIDEO 240VIDEO DC. RESTORER PICTURE TUBE
:zz Rf L224 .44T. s VI 512417 601/6 6406 64U6 126AL5 1/2124117 V212457 /2 6AL5 10BP4 OR I 0 FP4
6AU6 666 4PEEN OM 0292
7020 14-r RF at 0220 C245 1110 C249
Icr 0z1 po R26.
3.
T 23 L257
014 0282 06511H : 11
4252
2 SRIXIES
P. C201mo -
03 n
11 0 R
3300 R265 0274 5000 R336
6
ri ,221
O0 A 338E6
C253 R2
R2 5000 AO
r3;;EG
47 470 7:01
CtFk
00 C232
T5000 5 L25 L 212
L233 2-61LI CL i65 78 C270
PCIR L232 .44r6a44 L2 Ja. 623.1
I' 0267
5000
'6:+-1254
6 11. 9 0
?AVG 300
0,6 6AU6
R205 .06 V2 240RF
cq c-4 0
510 5411
C2071310
205
Ct
soon R295
ct = 50
000
'6
170000',
O0 610
203 CVO
5.60, 5000 12SN7GT
(-4 wo7:, 12SN7GT
L209 L20 +2,1 L212 013 L2.
C.215 '4. C' 4,34.2
O CD 1.rf Rf a a' FF' 15
sec iso
P-6 929
ct ct'E:1 3
V 3B 0300 9
0291 02137 ',
H ct '')4SIAT7 00R3T0020'''004
O CD 01 4,302.
314E,
0303,15

MU_
- 7700
-n
wHOO 20

V2A V1213
= 27011
V14
It12SN7GT 412 SN7GT B3GT/I3C16
co CD AFC NOR SWEEP 111/ RECTIFIER
VI IA VIIB M5 C.526
1/212SN7GT CLIPPER
12SN7GT V13 96°
Na 198G6'°
(D I 1-1 625x
co (1) 3 00 VI51'
25W4GT
Z47/i
CD ct 4331 3, DAMPER
1z0O tI 0 cd 3860
95,1 - 5 540R 21ELITI 3110 JAR '6,50
T L 80 ft +
326

I-I CD ES 200K 2 L3I5 29.311

V 4.--( 6
co 0. 0 -$320 C3
c-1, 3D
TO ..121.43 05787
0 0 14
ct 0 0
2 0,10E RI
VERT ,ST 280 3R0 Via 1ST 280 OSC
OL/TRIT 511.2 VID1F Vgif 01072. CE:
CET MAK 87 OF COAN VIE V17 VIE VIE 200
1372. 25L66T 123,476164. 64. 641.15 SAL512AU 6406 64. ,4T7 1541
25L6GT
O CD
4 217: Rnl 4
*4
4 4
6AU6
LIMITER-AMPLI
6AL5
IDETECTO
6SQ7
Is, AUDIO AUDIO OUTPUT
7354
5
C C
Lr36 702377 '737. 1, 1 NU
5001. 5000f 5001 5000T 9300r socciseocr 400cr
0 W C3 g356 A COARSE FOCUS
41
tBLACK
R374 199666 125H GT 1254761 23850T .U6 EAL5 L374 6507
I CO C34
75 343 R36
HOR HOR 644 04144ER v9 ODD 1110 1ST
CO CD OUTPUT 056 40.3 "4\ LF DET AUD
000 030
0 (0 Ei R341 R3142
(.1i 34. R3
0355 330 UN 330 C 53
60
CO 0 °°°T
" R 50
6-10356
1-4
p000
5100
0 CD -L 9 ":."4 Fa
(.0
15- C.NECRONS
FIG. 6. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (T)
 9xpt03xp0 .9 In
110160
0019
MY -19 000
,
09111 01900113
09611 Gctl
lope
9065.3.
ttg, Rtl 9.G
MO 11SC
G.,
099 210C11 19611
.0611 1112 a
99611
000S 0 Cr 130 'so
Ott
6.0 10011 011r 6 vox NUM.
vRtl 03
9.6 ax100'/KO Oft Gl.
00
IN
I.61 xSa 19[11691 VD. 1.411611
woo S9tl 260
000 13'^".!00S
KO
10"Y 1;0:0
UV "' t`A,
1-
indino °env 0100V sl ". 22
80.1.03133 134W-831 Ni cT
0 L'S
v. <
1991S3 LOS9 c1V9 911'69 IV NI 90110 9x.9 L11V9 6191 90. 90. 011991.121109169
8IA LIA - 9IA IV 101. 130 MOO AVIA 01 111.10
6IA aw .0
ANDO
OW .1 I1A all 120.0 OD.
lag±
10A
.ZT SO
9160
02 NO02 99611
G1. L.
00
6/C0 + ALSO
Kb
06 022 ovoe ea
93x3
VSS 9X11 6X0 I- LL
LEO SIND
SC
006
DOG
92.-3 21ci 001
Ott
0-99861
OGNSZIMt
scctl 104 H.LVO 19LNSZI91
104100 81IA VITA
d33MS 40H
831311038 AH d33MS 400 04 V
908/10281 lOGNS 31j( lOGNS3I9
VIA V21 A
931A
101119-2 6113NN.0 NO 1.3110 0096A
"T, 7
I
a3 a3H
Cn
201 :0"01 10212E zone
6
LS
aez,ro
s
020
MT Ilik,1941101 8£A
9020 2.11Kb0611 L193 Ps,
06
Ci21 OVA son
.1.0GNSZI
000G --1"
lOGNS31 401083830 0120 CC.
8011'
1
1433019 1621-1,,,
VOIA d33MS 183A
aix0'l9
009. Wit
jt
,
061
06 1.020
. Ai S
g'621 az
e Olt 1290 398r17; 'iogs
N.
0090
6621
v2 69 t G
0006
LOOT xgr 0001. pn gsn 62
-301,31 I
:fit 91912 HO S9
.23 ova
9993
77, GI
9920 XP KEG 0000 0096
061
--0 ya
000. Xb feri KEY u^ IEEE3 '93.136
511100 Il0 0S1
999 tl
6221/
49210 91 1911 Y1U1
01
fix [OEl
99W
1020 99.1
0301 o
4. G/29
.20 0311
9621 61920
09
692 EL20
*OS 001
S rap 38+s1
1692 AO
Veld 01.. tvde 01
1913/91 p,h
S1V9 111031 126219 6740391 9069 91169 9099
91-1V9
IA 9.,,14.
Wig
302.1. 68^136 43dd-1094340193U 00 030IA.1) 03011' +91 133 31 02£ 310x6 41 +91 AN00
SG A 88A V9A VGA 9A GA VA I V£A
.out
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

GENERAL ELECTRIC Alignment data given under

Model 809, may be applied
to Models 805, 806, & 807.

MODELS 805,80681807 Early production Model 809

is very similar to Models
805, 806, and 807.

SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART

Tube Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Tube Type
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

V1 - - 180V
12.5V 10.5V 180V 15V 6AU6

V2 10.5V* 10V - -
157V 157V 13.5V 6AU6

V3 220V 12.5V 13.5V -

125V 7.5* 12V 12AT7

V4 10.5V* 13.5V - -
135V 135V 13.5V 6Au6

140v - -
v5 135V 27ov 27ov 140v 6Au6

v6 12.5V* 15V - 260V 185V 15v 6Au6

v7 13v* - - - 12V
-2.5V 13V ¢AL5

v8 100V 3V 12.5V - -
225V 2.5V 14V --
12AU7

v9 -
9.ov - - - - -
325V 133V 10BP4 or 10FP4

V10 19V* 300V 35V -1v 19V* 7V* -

12SN7GT

V11 9ov 25ov 145v 12v 45V 13V -

12SN7GT

V12 -5V 115V 8.5V -50V 190V - -

12SN7GT

V13 10.V 265V 19BG6-G

V14 1B3GT/8016

V15 275V 325V 275V 265V 325V 25Z6

V16 125V 140V -

265V 175V 140v 6Au6

- -
V17 12.5V 13.5V 12.5V 12.5V 6AL5

V18 12V 2.5V 13V 13V 13V 122V - -

6SQ7

V19 280V 140 19V* 50V 65v** 25L6GT

Measurements taken on a 20,000 ohm -per -volt meter.

Line volts 117 v. a -c.
Measure between tube pin and Bl- buss.
Volume control at minimum setting.
Brightness control set at minimum.
Contrast control set at maximum.
Focus control set at maximum clockwise.
Horizontal Hold normal setting.
Vertical Hold normal setting.
Voltages marked with a single asterisk (*) must be measured on a 50 -
volt scale of meter.
Voltages marked with two asterisks l**) must be measured on a 250 -
volt scale.

76
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
GENERAL j ELECTRIC
SERVICE DATA
FOR

TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODEL 814

Models 810 and 811 are very

similar to Model 814 described.
R -F UNIT VIDEO I -F VIDEO .AMPLIFIER
r 1 -
R -F 1ST 2ND 3RD LIMITER-
DET.
E T. AMPLI.
AMPLI. CONY. 14-11 I -F I -F IF AMPLI.
L_____ -

0 SC. 14-V
SUPPLY
NOR. DEFLECTION- 15.750 G.P.S.

CLIPPER
T
A.F.C.
SWEEP
GEN.
r
VERT. DEFLECTION - 60 C.P.S
SWEEP
OUTPUT
DAMPER

SWEEP SWEEP
Fig. 1. Block Diagram, Model 814
GEN. OUTPUT
L

SOUND I -F
r 1
1ST AUDIO
AMPLI. AMPLI. LIMITER -0- DISCR. AUDIO OUTPUT
SPEAKER
JI
L

DESCRIPTION-TELEVISION RECEIVER CIRCUITS
The Model 814 television receiver circuits are divided into the
following sections:
1. R -F Amplifier, Oscillator, and Converter (Head -End).
2. Video and Audio I -F Amplifier.
3. Video Detector and Video Amplifier.
4. Horizontal and Vertical Sync. Pulse Separator.
5. Horizontal Sweep Generator and AFC.
6. Horizontal Sweep Output.
7. Vertical Sweep Generator and Vertical Sweep Output.
8. High Voltage Power Supply for Picture Tube.
9. Low Voltage Power Supply.
A brief description of the operation of each circuit is given in
the following paragraphs. This is supplemented by simplified
circuit diagrams of each portion of the circuit under discussion.
Reference is also made to the complete schematic diagram
A block diagram of the Model 814 receiver is shown in Figure 1
to assist in signal tracing and to better visualize the operation of
the receiver.
1. R -F AMPLIFIER, CONVERTER, AND OSCILLATOR (SEE FIGURE 2).
The r -f amplifier makes use of a Type 6AU6 pentode tube
connected as a grounded grid triode amplifier. The antenna is
connected into the cathode circuit of the tube through a trans-
former, Ti, so as to provide a substantially constant input
impedance of 300 ohms to the antenna and transmission line at
all frequencies. The transformer, T1, is balanced to ground in
the primary winding which provides cancellation of noise pickup
on the transmission line. An electrostatic shield is incorporated
between the primary and secondary winding of T1 to prevent
noise from being transferred from primary to secondary by
capacity effect. RI is the normal bias resistor for VI. A choke
(LK in Figure 2) is placed in series with this cathode resistor to
prevent the input impedance from being lowered by shunting
effect of the cathode bias resistor and the by-pass capacitor,
RI and C2. LK also neutralizes the total cathode capacity, thus
preventing it from affecting the input impedance. The choke
value is changed when switching from the lower five to the upper
The r -f amplifier is coupled to the converter by a wide -band
transformer consisting of windings L, and Ls. The windings are
self -tuned by the distributed and tube capacities to provide
optimum gain. Variable trimmers CS and C6 are shunted across
the primary and secondary windings, respcctively, of the r -f
transformer to permit compensation for misalignment resulting
from differences of tube capacities when a tube change is neces-
sary. On Channel #2, the transformer is triple -tuned to provide
better image frequency attenuation of the 88-108 me FM band.
Three of the r -f transformers are used to cover the upper, six
channels. Each of these transformers is made sufficiently broad-
band to accept two television channels.
The triode converter is one section of a Type 12AT7 dual triode,
V2B. Bias for this section (V2B) is developed by the oscillator
voltage appearing in the grid of V2B, causing grid rectification
and charging the grid resistor -capacitor combination, R4 and C7.
The remaining triode section of the 12AT7 (V2A) is used as the
oscillator, and is capacity coupled to the converter tube grid
through the capacitor, C8. The oscillator is a modified Colpits
oscillator, oscillation being produced by the grid -to -cathode
capacitor, C32, and the plate -to -cathode interelectrode capacity,
C, of the oscillator tube. The choke, L4, provides a d -c ground
to the cathode of the oscillator tube and maintains the cathode
off ground at the r -f frequencies. The oscillator operates on the
VI V2B
R -F CONY.
/\ INDICATES
SWITCHING POINT

seven channels. LI is a series compensating choke which pre-

vents a loss in gain on the high frequency channels. Fig. 2. R -F Amplifier, Converter and Oscillator
77
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
high frequency side of the r -f signal on all channels. Three oscil-
lator coils (L11, L12, and L13) are used to cover the upper six
channels, the frequency range ofthe oscillator circuit at each coil
switching is sufficient to tune two channels. Capacitor C80 is the
tuning capacitor used to tune the oscillator on the lower six
switch positions to the individual channels and on the upper three
switch positions C80 tunes the oscillator to one or the other chan-
nel covered by that switch position.
To prevent hum modulation by the local oscillator when operat-
ing on the high frequency channels, the filament supply to V2A
is rectified by a selenium rectifier, SRI, and filtered by C102.
The r -f amplifier, converter and oscillator section is constructed
as a complete sub -assembly which can be readily demounted from
the main chassis.
2. VIDEO AND AUDIO I -F AMPLIFIERS (SEE FIGURE 3).
The video i-f amplifier is a three -stage band-pass amplifier,
using three Type 6AU6 tubes. The video i-f transformers, T11,
T12, T13, and T14 are overcoupled and then loaded with resis-
tance in the secondary circuits to give an adequate band-pass
frequency characteristic. A single movable powdered iron core
is used in transformers T11, T12, and T13, for tuning of the sec-
ondary. Transformer T14 uses two tuning slugs to tune the pri-
mary and secondary. At tertiary winding is incorporated on T11
which connects to a series resonant trap circuit to permit ad-
justment of the slope of the high frequency end of the band-pass.
It is adjusted so that 26.3 mc will fall at 50 per cent point on the
curve to compensate for the sesqui side -band transmission of the
video carrier frequencies.
V2B V3
CONY. 157 VIDEO I -F 2ND VIDEO
7 II 712
R5
TO
BIAS
13, 017
SIB MC
26.3 MC
CARRIER -SET
SOUND I -F
TRIMMER
TRIMMER
C12
21.6 MC
SOUND I -F
C95
721
.I?°6 C65 R77
B so that each recurring pulse originates at the zero voltage axis.
Fig. 3. Video and Audio Amplifier
A series tuned circuit consisting of C16, and the parallel com-
bination of L15 and C17 is connected across the secondary of T12
and tuned for maximum attenuation of the 21.8 mc in the video
amplifier. This prevents the 21.8 mc sound i-f from being passed
through the video amplifier and affords a tap on LIS for taking
out the sound i-f and passing it through to the sound i-f amplifiers.
The sound i-f is taken off at this tap on L15 and then applied direct-
ly to the grid of the sound i-f amplifier tube, V22. Additional
i-f gain and selectivity is provided by the two stages of single -
tuned impedance coupled amplification. Since the television audio
is frequency modulated, the transformer T19 functions with the
diode section of V19 as the discriminator.
Bias voltage derived from the grid return circuit of the hori-
zontal blocking oscillator is applied to the grid circuits of the video
i-f amplifier tubes, V3, V4, and VS. A potentiometer (Contrast
Control) permits this bias to be changed on the grids of V3 and
V4 so as to vary the gain of the video i-f amplifier.
3. VIDEO DETECTOR AND AMPLIFIER (SEE FIGURE 4).
The video i-f amplifier output is applied to one section of a
6ALS dual diode (V6A) which is connected as a shunt diode to
develop a negative -going signal across the diode load resistance
R19. The signal is then amplified by two triode amplifier stages
using a Type 12AU7 dual triode tube, V7. L16 and L23 are series
compensating coils while L22 is a shunt compensating coil. These
are used to obtain good high -frequency response and provide
sharp cut-off at frequencies above the useable pass -band. L16
also prevents the i-f frequency from being passed through the
video amplifier.
78
In addition to amplification, the first video amplifier tube,
V7A, operates as a noise limiter. The B voltage applied to V7A
is low and the video signal from the detector is negative -going;
therefore, any large excursions of voltage above sync level, such
as noise, will drive the grid to plate current cut-off. Thus, the
interference will be limited close to the level of the super sync
signal. This improves the signal to transient noise interference
ratio without affecting the video signal.
The use of capacity coupling in the video amplifier necessitates
that the d -c component of the video signal be restored to main-
tain proper background illumination. This is accomplished in the
grid circuit of V7B. The video signal at this grid is positive -going
so that with the resultant grid current flow, the capacitor C28
will be charged up to the peak value of the sync pulse. Since this
charge will vary with the amplitude of the pulse, the resulting
bias change will provide the required d -c restoration. This restora-
tion in the grid circuit of V7B necessitates direct coupling of the
picture tube, V8, grid to the plate circuit of V7B. By connecting
the cathode of V8 to a variable B + source, the proper bias may
be maintained on the picture tube and the brilliance may be
controlled.
4. SYNC SEPARATION (SEE FIGURE 5).
Amplification and separation of the sync pulse from the com
posite video signal is accomplished by tube sections, V11A, V6B
V6A
DES.
V7A
LIMITER-AMPLI.
V75
AMPLI.
V
PICTURE -TUBE
026
V4
F
713
VIDEO
1-F
Fig. 4. Video Detector and Amplifier
VIIB. The triode section VI1A, is used to amplify and invert the
phase of the composite video signal applied to its grid circuit and
also to further limit the transient noise. This produces a video
signal in the plate of VI IA wherein the sync pulses are the most
positive portion of the voltage waveform. This positive -going
signal is applied across the diode section, V6B, which rectifies
the positive portion and charges the capacitor C42 negatively
in proportion to the amplitude of the sync pulses. This diode
thus establishes a bias for tube V11B and, also, clamps the sync
The clamped composite video waveshape applied to the grid
of tube section V11B, which is biased by the diode V6B, causes
the negative portion of this waveshape to be cut off in the cathode
circuit of V11B, leaving only sync pulses. V11B is connected as a
cathode follower with the horizontal sync pulses being taken off
from resistor R92 and the vertical sync pulses being taken off
from the plate of VIIB.
An integrating network consisting of R37, C39, C38, R36, and
C37, is used to separate the horizontal sync from the vertical
sync pulses before passage of the sync signal to the vertical sweep
generator.
RIII
V II A V68 VIIB
TO 8+
PHASE INVERTER CLAMPER CUPPER
VI"..I4029
V E RT.
SYNC.
INPUT 0391. 0381 C37T OUTPUT
R42
R41
NOR. SYNC.
12109 540 R92 OUTPUT
043
Fig. 5. Sync Separator Circuit
5. HORIZONTAL SWEEP GENERATOR AND AFC SYNC (SEE FIGURE 6).
The horizontal sawtooth generator makes use of one section of
a Type 6SN7GT tube, V12B, connected in a blocking oscillator
type circuit. Instead of its frequency being controlled directly by
the horizontal sync pulses, it is controlled by a d -c voltage on its
grid which is the resultant of the phase difference between the
incoming sync signal and a voltage wave derived from the output
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

-
of the sweep generator. The resultant d -c voltage produced by (horizontal frequency and horizontal controls, respectively) set
the tube V12A is called an automatic frequency control (AFC) to their mid -positions assuring their having adequate range for
voltage. operating and service adjustment.
The tube VI 2A obtains its operating bias through its connection
to the grid circuit of the blocking oscillator tube, V12B, through
resistor R51. The blocking oscillator produces a large negative
bias in its grid circuit during its normal operating cycle. When the
horizontal sync pulses or the combined output voltage (shown ,(X)
at lower left of Figure 6) are impressed separately on the grid of ti
V12A, they do not have sufficient positive amplitude to cause
appreciable plate current flow in tube V12A. However, if they
-
;I
- ----- -- --
I, CUT -OFF -1
A

2
are combined and phased properly as shown in Figure 7A, 7B, it I

or 7C, their composite amplitude is sufficient to cause plate cur- I

rent flow during that portion of the cycle where the waveshape is
above the dash line axis in Figure 7. During the time that conduc-
tion takes place, the capacitors C86 and C78 become charged
positive in respect to ground, the magnitude of the charge and the
I

il
V
I,
II
JI
resultant voltage thereon being dependent upon the duration of IJ

the flow of current in tube V12A. Since the resistor R50 is in the SWEEP GEN. SYNCED SWEEP GEN.
bleeder circuit across the filter and also forms a part of the grid
return circuit for the sweep generator tube V12B, any change in
voltage across R50 will result in a change of frequency in the
FREQUENCY
TOO LOW 0 PROPERLY

0
FREQUENCY
0 TOO HIGH

horizontal sweep generator. Thus, if the contributing voltage of

R50 makes the grid of V12B less negative, the frequency will be Fig. 7. A.F.C. Wavoshapos
raised; likewise, if the contributing voltages make the grid of
V14
V I2A V 12 B N.V. RECTIFIER
A.F.C. NOR. SWEEP
R46
LIOA. C 48
HOLD
. C82

C47 R5I
T16 V13
NOR.
SYNC SWEEP
INPUT SAWTOOTH OUTPUT
86 OUTPUT
0 NOR.
SWEEP
COILS
083
HOR. -

FILTER FREO, R66 FROM T17

Fig. 6. Horizontal Sweep and A.F.C. Sync

Fig. 8. Horizontal Sweep Output

V12B more negative, the frequency will be lowered. Thus, it will

be seen that the longer the conduction period of tube V12A, the
higher will be the frequency of the blocking oscillator and its
sawtooth output.
Referring to Figure 7, the B curve shows a sync pulse phased
so that about 50 per cent of the pulse width is riding on top of the
integrated sawtooth, while the remainder of the pulse after point
(X) falls down into the trough, making the conducting portion
have a width which is average between curves represented by (A)
and (C). If each successive sync pulse falls in the same phase rela-
tion as shown in curve (B), the Horizontal Hold Control which
controls the amount of current flow through V12A is set so that
this phase relation does not change. This would cause the sweep
generator V12B to run at the same frequency as that of the
transmitted signal. Under this condition, if the sweep generator
tends to run slower than the incoming sync signal, the conduction
period will be made longer through tube V12A because the pulse
will move forward in relation to the integrated sawtooth wave
with a result as shown in Figure 7(A). It will be noted that the
conduction pulse is of greater duration (wider) than in curve (B).
Therefore, tube V12A will conduct for a greater period of time,
thus raising the positive potential across R50. This greater con-
duction period causes the sweep generator to speed up until it
attains the condition in B. Likewise, if the sweep generator is
operating at too high a frequency, the pulse will advance along the
integrated sawtooth wave until a large portion of it falls down
into the trough of the waveshape, as shown in Figure 7(C), with
the resultant shortening (narrowing) of the conducting pulse.
This causes the frequency of the sweep generator to be reduced
until the condition in Figure 7(B) is again restored.
The Horizontal Frequency Control capacitor (C49) forms a
part of the discharge circuit in the grid of the blocking oscillator,
V12B. By varying its value, the free -running speed of this oscil-
lator can be adjusted to supplement and act as a course control
for the Horizontal Hold Control on the front panel. The free -
running speed of the blocking oscillator is also adjusted by the
inductance variation of the blocking oscillator coil, T16. This is a
variable iron core adjustment normally set for the proper free -
running speed of the blocking oscillator with both C49 and R46
6. HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT (SEE FIGURE 8).
The horizontal sawtooth voltage generated by the blocking
oscillator, V12B, is shaped and then amplified a by Type 6BG6
tube, V13. The output of this tube is coupled to the horizontal
deflection coils, D2, through an impedance -matching transformer,
T17. The damping diode, V15, is used principally to remove a
transient oscillation created by the rapid retrace of the current in
the high inductance of T17 and still retain the positive overshoot
in the primary winding for use in the high voltage supply. It
also is used to provide a linear trace and to recover some of the
energy from the inductive kick -back, and use it to help supply
the B+ requirements of the output tube. During conduction of
V15, capacitors C54 and C55 are charged up and since they are in
series with the B + voltage to tube V13, they contribute a sizeable
portion of the plate voltage. The variable inductance, L19 and
C54, constitutes a phase shift network which alters the phase of
the ripple voltage developed across C55. This means of changing
the ripple voltage which also supplies part of the B + to the output
tube provides a method of controlling the linearity.
A horizontal drive control, C81, forms a capacity voltage divid-
er in conjunction with capacitor C51 so as to control the amount
of sawtooth voltage supplied to the grid of V13. This permits
adjustment of the grid -.awtooth voltage to compensate for
variations in output tubes.
The Horizontal Width rontrol, L18, forms a series parallel
circuit in respect to the ou' -3ut of the yoke. The inductance is
variable in both coils of this control; the inductance of the series
choke is maximum when the parallel choke inductance is mini-
mum and vice -versa. The parallel circuits shunts the current
around the deflection coil, depending upon its inductance, and
the series coil attenuates the current by changing the impedance
of the series circuit. This type of control provides a uniform im-
pedance to the output transformer over a wide range of adjust-
ment.
79
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
7. VERTICAL SWEEP GENERATOR AND OUTPUT (SEE FIGURE 9).
The vertical sawtooth voltage is generated by a Type 6NS7GT
tube, V9, connected as a multivibrator. This voltage is coupled
directly to a Type 6V6G vertical sweep output amplifier tube,
V10, and then to the vertical sweep yoke, Dl, through the im-
pedance matching transformer T15. Vertical speed is controlled
by changing the time constant of the multivibrator grid circuit
by potentiometer, R29. Sweep size or height of picture is changed
V9 V10
VERT SWEEP GEN.') SWEEP OUTPUT
C30 T15
VERT. VERT
SWEEP
SYNC.
INPUT COILS
R27
Fig. 9. Vortical Swoop and Output
by the potentiometer, R31, which changes the B voltage applied
to the charging (R30, C34) of tube V9 simultaneously with the
screen voltage on tube V10. Vertical linearity is controlled by
feeding back correcting voltage developed in the cathode circuit
of V10 through C34 into the grid circuit of the output tube, V10.
The cathode voltage of V10 which is fed back through C34 has
an opposite curvature corresponding to the non-linear portion of
the generating sawtooth output of V9 so that by combining these
voltages in the grid of V10 correction may be affected. The
amount of the correction voltage is controlled by the vertical
linearity potentiometer, R33, in the cathode of V10.
8. HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (SEE FIGURE 8).
The high voltage for the second anode of the picture tube is
derived by making use of the inductive "kick" voltage produced
during retrace in the horizontal output transformer, T17. This
kick voltage has a magnitude of several thousand volts and is
positive -going, appearing between the plate of V13 and ground.
Since this voltage in itself is not sufficient to produce the required
anode potential, an additional winding connected electrically and
magnetically with the primary is added to provide further step-
up of this voltage. The top of this auto -transformer is connected
to the plate of a rectifier tube V14. This tube is a Type 1B3GT1
8016 which derives its filament voltage from the horizontal
sweep transformer T17 by a single turn around the core. Since
the frequency supplied the rectifier tube is high (15,750 cps), a
500 mmf. filter capacitor is more than adequate to give a smooth
d -c output. Due to the small capacity of the filter, this supply is
relatively safe to handle.
9. LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY.
Two rectifier tubes, V16 and V21 (Types 5U4G and 5Y3GT,
respectively), are used to supply the required plate current for
the receiver. Each tube is used in a separate and complete rec-
tifier circuit to supply two values of output B + voltage, 290
volts and 380 volts. The focus coil, which is a combination
permanent and electromagnet, is connected in series with a por-
tion of the output current path for the lower voltage supply, the
current through it being controlled by the Focus Control po-
tentiometer, R72.
CIRCUIT ALIGNMENT
GENERAL -A complete alignment of the receiver tuned circuits
consists of the following individual alignment procedures. These
are listed below in the correct sequence of alignment. However,
any one section alignment may be performed without the neces-
sity of realignment of any one of the other sectional alignments.
1. Sound I -F Alignment.
2. Video I -F Alignment.
3. R -F Alignment.
4. Oscillator Adjustments.
The alignment procedures is shown in table form on pages 9
through 11. Read the following detailed instructions before at-
tempting alignment as given in the table.
TEST EQUIPMENT -To provide alignment as outlined above, the
following test equipment is required:
80
1. R -F Sweep Generator.
(a) Frequency Requirements.
20 to 30 mc with 10 mc sweep width.
40 to 90 mc with 15 mc sweep width.
170 to 220 mc with 25 mc sweep width.
(b) Constant output over sweep width range.
(c) At least 0.1 volt output.
2. Signal Generator -Must have good frequency stability and
be accurately calibrated. It should be capable of tone modulation
over the following frequency ranges.
21.8 mc for sound i-f.
22.9 mc for video i-f marker.
23.4 mc for video i-f marker.
25.55 mc for video i-f marker.
26.3 mc for video i-f marker.
45-88 mc and 174-216 mc for oscillator adjustment and
markers for the r -f channel bandwidth measurements.
3. Oscilloscope -This oscilloscope should preferably have a 5 -
inch screen and have good wide -band frequency response on the
vertical deflection. Although the high frequency response is
unnecessary for alignment, it will be useful when making the
waveform measurements on pages 19, 20 and 21.
4. Crystal Calibrator -This unit is essential to establish calibra-
tion check points for the signal generator so as to provide good
accuracy of calibration.
Fig. 10. Audio IF Curves
5. Wave Traps -Accurately calibrated wave traps may be used
to supply markers in place of the signal generator for video i-f
and r -f alignment purposes.
AUGNMENT SUGGESTIONS -All alignment adjustments in the sound
and video i-f amplifier are available from the top of the chassis,
with the exception of the sound discriminator secondary adjust-
ment and the last video i-f stage. The location of the adjustments
is shown in Figure 16. Remove the chassis from the cabinet. When
it is necessary to make adjustment from the bottom of the chassis,
the chassis may be rested on its side so that the power transformer
is down. The following suggestions apply to each individual
alignment procedure.
1. Sound I -F Alignment -The sweep generator is connected
through a 500 mmf. capacitor to the grid of the tube preceding the
sound i-f coil to be aligned. Connect the oscilloscope through a
100,000 -ohm resistor across the resistor, R104, in the limiter
tube, V18 grid. Insert a 21.8 mc marker signal from an unmodu-
lated signal generator into the grid of V3. Keep the marker signal
attenuated so that it just shows a marker on the sweep curve. Adjust
L21 and L5, respectively, as you advance progressively one stage
at a time, for maximum gain and symmetry of the response curve
about the 21.8 mc marker. The curve should be similar to that
shown in Figure 10-A. With input at the first audio i-f, V22, the
bandwidth should be approximately 300 kc at the 70% response
point.
Keep the input of the sweep generator low enough so that the
sound i-f amplifier does not overload, otherwise the response
curve will broaden out permitting slight misadjustment. Check
by increasing the output of the sweep; the response curve on the
scope should increase in size proportionally. Adjust the signal in-
put to each stage to develop Yi volt peak at the limiter grid
(junction of R104 and C100), as measured by a calibrated oscillo-
scope, with a contrast bias of -4 volts.
For discriminator alignment, the secondary core of the dis-
criminator transformer, T19, is aligned by using a tone modulated
21.8 mc amplitude modulated signal and listening to the tone at
the loudspeaker. This adjustment is made for a minimum tone
signal output. Apply the signal generator input to the grid of V22.
If the sweep is used for the 'secondary alignment, the cross -over
should be symmetrical about a 21.8 mc marker and should be a
straight line between the alternate peaks, as shown in Figure
10-B. For the discriminator transformer primary alignment,
connect the oscilloscope to the junction of C74 and R86. With the
same sweep input as in Step 1, adjust the primary adjustment
screw for a maximum peak -to -peak amplitude of the response
curve, as shown in Figure 10-B.
 9
_, 9
K
-
2

"1
.
.4
- __-
;
.-
a.,

5 _ ref
0111*"
---
_
-7'
0 _ a
0 2
0
2
. i- ;
H-,37.ms JO Val
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
affords a good uniformity in mutual coupling. The tuning is
accomplished by moving turns. The upper six channels, # 7
through #13, are tuned by four sets of coils. Each converter and
r -f coil is overcoupled to give adequate bandpass so that two
channels may be covered by each set of coils except Channel # 7.
Instead of magnetically coupling the r -f and converter coils in
relation to each other, they are physically located on the channel
switch so that the only coupling is afforded by the common a -c
ground return of each coil. This ground return is made through a
special shaped metal wafer on the channel switch.
The input sweep signal is applied to the antenna terminal
board at the r -f unit. Disconnect the 300 -ohm cable between the
antenna terminal board and the r -f amplifier input. To prevent
distortion of the r -f response curve by standing waves, the un-
balanced shielded cable of the signal generator should be termi-
nated as shown in Figure 13. The resistors used should be non -
inductive. The marker signal generator may be loosely coupled
through a small capacitor to the same point of input as the sweep
generator.
The output r -f response curve is taken off at the junction of R5
and C10 through a 10,000 ohm resistor. Disconnect C10. The
Contrast control is set for a minimum for all r -f alignments.
For Channels #2 and #3, the r -f coils should be aligned to
give approximately the curve shown in Figure 14-A and 14-B. The
"P" marker represents the video carrier marker, while the "S"
marker is the sound marker. The frequency of these markers is
indicated for each step of the alignment procedure. Adjustment
of the bandwidth is made by moving the plate coil closer to the
grid coil or vice -versa. On Channel #2 the sliding of the copper
rings will give both the required bandwidth and the frequency
adjustment. Spread or squeeze turns in plate and grid coils to
change frequency. Spreading turns results in a raising of the fre-
quency; while squeezing turns lowers the frequency.
For Channels #4 through #6, the coupling is fixed by the tight
coupling between the primary and secondary turns. However, this
can be controlled to a certain degree along with the frequency by
either spreading or squeezing the end turns of the combination
converter and r -f coil. On the upper four coil assemblies covering
the Channels # 7 through # 13, the coupling cannot be changed as
it is fixed by the common ground wafer located between the r -f
and converter coil switching wafer. This ground wafer is cut to
give the proper amount of coupling at the time of manufacture.
ANTENNA TERM( NAL BOARD
U U
5 TIB
-2 "..N% POWER TRANSFORMER
17
PRIMARY
ITOP1
An
SECONDARY
(BOTTOM)
DISCRI
TRANS
14
8
15 \
VIEW IN DIRECTION .Ad
DRUMS TO SE IN POSITION SHOWN WHEN FOCUS POT
IS IN EXTREME COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION
Fig. 15. Focus Control Stringing
..._CBD
J.-SELECTOR
82
Tuning of these upper frequency coils is affected by the brass
adjustment screws which form a shorted turn in the coil. The
further the screw is introduced into the coil field, the higher wlil
be the frequency and vice -versa.
The variable capacitors C5 and C6 are used to compensate for
the slight differences in tube capacities which affect tuning when
it is necessary to change the r -f or converter tube in the field.
These trimmers are adjusted for Channel #6, as indicated in the
Alignment Table, and then are not readjusted until a new tube is
substituted for either VI or V2.
Note: When making r -f alignment, the tuning control
should be set so that the oscillator frequency is approxi-
mately correct. This may be checked by tuning in the
sound frequency for that particular channel for maxi-
mum audio output. A 200 to 300 ohm resistor should be
shunted across the primary of T11 or R103. This is done
to prevent the oscillator voltage from upsetting the r -f
alignment curve.
4. Oscillator Adjustments-The oscillator coils for Channels #2
through #7 are adjusted so that the Tuning control, C80, will
tune the station at the mid -rotation position for each of these
channels. Since the other remaining six channels, #8 through
#13, are combined so as to be covered by only three switching
positions, the oscillator coils are adjusted so that the Tuning
control will tune in the two channels assigned each switch posi-
tion at two points equi-distant from the two extremes of its
rotation. With the Tuning control set to its mid -position, the
oscillator coil is adjusted to give a maximum output when a
modulated r -f signal at the test frequency specified is fed into the
antenna terminals. The oscillator coils are adjusted by spreading
turns to raise frequency or compressing turns to lower frequency.
Apply the signal generator with tone modulation to the an-
tenna input terminals and set the generator to the frequency
specified in the Alignment Table for each switch position. The
signal generator must be very accurately calibrated. This can be
done by beating its output against a known channel carrier, or
use a station operating on the channel and then tune in the sound.
For output indication, advance the volume control about to
mid -position so that the tone modulation or audio modulation
on the station may be heard. through the loudspeaker.
The oscillator coil is located on the coil form or switch assembly
nearest to the front of the r -f unit. This is shown in Figures 12
and 17
mC50
062
AC33
-C35
ELEC
SHIELD
REMOVED
01,02
4 TN DEFLECTION YORE
VIDEO IF TRAYS HORIZONTAL SWEEP
TRANSFORMER
TN
DEC MOE01 F TRA
12
MGR VOLTAGE
ANODE CONNECTION
VB
21,P4
PICTURE TUBE
PICTURE TUBE MOUNTINGSTRAP
TIMING
- VERTICAL IDLD `c173AS-
SI
Ti_BRIGHTNESS
R95
Fig. 16. Component and Trimmer Location
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
T6
ONVERTER
SECTION OFSI

RI

T3

R5K
C3617 1st VIDEO IF
CIO ADJUSTMENT CI I C9I

Fig. 17. 114 Head -end Assembly, Oblique View

R.F PLATE OSCILLATOR

SECTION OF SI OF SI
\\SECTION

83
1T81 T101
Fig. 111. R -F Head -end Assembly, Side View
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ALIGNMENT TABLE
Before attempting the following tabular alignment procedure, read the preceding section "Alignment Suggestions"

SWEEP SIGNAL CONNECT

STEP SIGNAL GENERA- INPUT OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL
SWITCH ADJUST REMARKS
NO. GEN. TOR FRE- TO CHASSIS
FREQ. QUENCY
POINT AND SETTING

(1) SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT

21.8 MC 21.8 MC Grid of V17 Junction of R104 Channel L21 for max. amplitude See Fig. 10A for re -
marker with 1 MC thru 500 mmf. and C100 thru #4 and symmetry about sultant curve.
sweep 100K resistor marker.
2 21.8 MC 21.8 MC Grid of V22 Junction of R104 Channel Top and bottom tuning
with 1 MC thru 500 mmf. and C100 thru #4 cores of T21 for maxi -
sweep 100K resistor mum amplitude and
symmetry about mark-
er.

3 21.8 MC Not used Grid (1) of C74 and R86 Channel Secondary slug of T19 Turn volume control to
with 400- V22 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 for min. sine wave mid -position.
cycle tone mmf. ohm resistor amplitude or listen for
modulation min. tone.
4 Not used 21.8 MC Grid (1) of C74 and R86 Channel Primary slug of T19 for See Fig. 10B for re -
with 1 MC V22 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 max. peak -to -peak am- sultant curve.
sweep mmf. ohm resistor plitude and symmetry
about base line.
5 Recheck Steps 3 and 4.

(2) VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT

1 22.9 MC 20.30 MC Grid (1) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust primary and Remove tube V4
26.4 V5 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 secondary slugs of T14
markers mmf. ohm resistor for max. amplitude and
flat response with mark-
ers as shown in Fig.
11A.

2 22.8 MC 20-30 MC Grid (1) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust slug of T13 for Remove tube V3 and
25.55 MC sweep V5 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 max. amplitude and replace V4
26.3 MC mmf. ohm resistor flat response with mark -
markers ers as shown in Fig.
11B.

3 21.8 MC Grid (1) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust C17 for min.
with 400- V3 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 400 -cycle amplitude.
cycle modu- mmf. ohm resistor
lation
4 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (1) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust T12 for max. Remove V2 and replace
23.4 MC V3 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 amplitude and flat re- V3.
25.55 MC mmf. ohm resistor sponse with markers as
26.3 MC shown in Fig. 11C.
markers
5 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (7) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust slug of T11 for Turn carrier set trimmer
23.4 MC V2 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 max. amplitude and to minimum capacity.
25.65 MC mmf. ohm resistor flat response with mark- Replace tube V2.
26.3 MC ers as shown in Fig.
11C.

6 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (7) of L16 and C27 Channel Adjust C12 until 26.3
23.4 MC V2 thru 500 thru 10,000- #4 MC marker is 50%
25.55 MC mmf. ohm resistor above base line. 25.55
26.3 MC MC and 22.9 MC
markers should be as
shown in Fig. 11D.

(3) R -F ALIGNMENT

1 83.25 MC Channel #6 Antenna ter- R5 and C10 Channel C5 and C6 for max. See Fig. 14B for proper
and with 15 MC minals at r -f thru 10,000- #6 amplitude and flat re- alignment curve.
87.75 MC sweep amplifier ohm resistor. sponse with correct
Disconnect C10. markers location.

84
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ALIGNMENT TABLE (Continued)

SIGNAL SWEEP SIGNAL CONNECT

STEP GEN. GENERA- INPUT OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL
SWITCH ADJUST REMARKS
NO. FREQ. TOR FRE- POINT TO CHASSIS SETTING
QUENCY AND

(3) R -F ALIGNMENT (Continued)

2 77.25 MC Channel #5 Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- See Fig. 14B for proper
and with 15 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #5 ductance if necessary alignment curve.
81.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor-
rect markers.
3 67.25 MC Channel #4 Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- See Fig. 14B for proper
and with 15 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #4 ductance if necessary alignment curve.
71.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor-
rect markers.
4 61.25 MC Channel #3 Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- See Fig. 14B for proper
and with 15 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #3 ductance if necessary alignment curve.
65.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor-
rect markers.
5 55.25 MC Channel #2 Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- Adjust inductance by
and with 15 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #2 ductance if necessary moving copper rings.
59.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and See Fig. 14A for proper
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor- alignment curve.
rect markers.
6 175.25 MC Channel #7 Antenna R4 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- Adjust inductance by
and with 15 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #7 ductance if necessary brass screws in coils.
179.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and See Fig. 14B for proper
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor- curve.
rect markers.
7 181.25 MC 186.5 MC Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- Adjust inductance by
and with 25 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #8-#9 ductance if necessary brass screws in coils.
191.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and See Fig. 14C for proper
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor- curve.
rect markers.
8 193.25 MC 198.5 MC Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- Adjust inductance by
and with 25 MC terminals at thru 10,000- #10-#11 ductance if necessary brass screws in coils.
203.75 MC sweep r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and See Fig. 14C for proper
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor- curve.
rect markers.
9 205.25 MC 210.5 MC Antenna R5 and C10 Channel Check and adjust in- Adjust inductance by
and with 25 MC terminals thru 10,000- #12-#13 ductance if necessary brass screws in coils.
215.75 MC sweep at r -f amplifier ohm resistor. for max. amplitude and See Fig. 14C for proper
Disconnect C10. flat response with cor- curve.
rect markers.

(4) OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS

1 59.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns Volume control at mid -

with tone terminals #2 of oscillator coil of T2. position. Set tuning con -
modulation trol at mid -position of
travel. Use sound out-
put as indicator.
2 65.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns Volume control at mid -
with tone terminals #3 of oscillator coil T3 for position. Set tuning con -
modulation maximum. trol at mid -position. Use
sound output as indi-
3 71.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns cator.
with tone terminals #4 of oscillator coil of T4.
modulation
4 81.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns
with tone terminals #5 of oscillator coil of T5.
modulation
5 87.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns
with tone terminals #6 of oscillator coil of T6.
modulation

85
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ALIGNMENT TABLE (Continued)

SIGNAL SWEEP SIGNAL CONNECT

STEP GEN. GENERA- INPUT OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL
SWITCH REMARKS
NO. TOR FRE- TO CHASSIS ADJUST
FREQ. POINT AND SETTING
QUENCY

(4) OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS (Continued)

6 179.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns Volume control at mid.

with tone terminals #7 of oscillator coil of L10. position. Set tuning con
modulation trol at mid -position. list
sound output as indi
7 188.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns cator
with tone terminals #8-#9 of oscillator coil L11.
modulation
8 200.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns
with tone terminals #10-#11 of oscillator coil of L12.
modulation
9 212.75 MC Antenna Channel Squeeze or spread turns
with tone terminals . #12-#13 of oscillator coil of L13.
modulation

MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS

REPLACEMENT OF PICTURE TUBE.
To replace the picture tube it is necessary to remove the
chassis from the cabinet. Remove the picture tube socket, the
high -voltage anode cap, and then partially loosen the setscrews
that clamp the picture tube front mounting strap. The fiber
centering gasket (see Figure 20) should be slid off from the neck
of the picture tube. Carefully pull the picture tube out through
the focus and deflection coils.
Install the new picture tube from the front of chassis by insert- the base of the picture tube.
ing the base of tube through the deflection yoke and focus coil
assembly. The tube should be moved back so that the front sur-
face of the picture tube is approximately 1% inches in front of
the chassis front apron. The rim of the bulb should rest on the
channel rubbers and then the tube is clamped firm but not tight
in place by the picture tube mounting strap. The picture tube
should be rotated until the keyway at the base of the tube points
approximately as shown in Figure 20. Install the high voltage
anode cap onto the high voltage anode of the picture tube.
Replace the chassis in the cabinet and secure by the cabinet
mounting screws. Now push the picture tube forward on the
chassis until the face of the tube is tight within the picture tube
mask. Push the deflection yoke assembly forward as far as it will
go. The front of the deflection coil should butt up against the
bulb portion of the picture tube. Insert the fiber gasket between
the neck of the picture tube and the focus coil, as shown in Figure
20. This centers the neck of the tube where it passes through the
deflection yoke assembly. Install the picture tube socket onto
Wipe the screen surface of the picture tube so as to remove
finger marks and dirt. Precaution-Do not handle, remove, or
install a picture tube unless shatterproof goggles and heavy
gloves are worn.

PICTURE
TUBE

C) ANODE
TERMINAL

DEFLECTION
YOKE

FOCUS
COIL

Fig. 19. Knob Control Location

CENTERING
MAGNETS
PICTURE
TUBE BASE

HORIZONTAL
LINEARITY

(0 0 0 0)-AC. INPUT FOCUS COIL

DEFLECTION
YOKE
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
DRIVE SIZE

O HORIZONTAL
O
VERTICAL
FREQUENCY LINEARITY

86 Fig. 20. Location of Preset Adjustment Controls

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PICTURE CENTERING ADJUSTMENT.
The cabinet back cover must be removed to make this adjust-
ment. The centering magnet assembly is located between the
Focus Coil and Deflection Yoke, as shown in Figure 20, and is
used to center the picture within the tube mask.
The larger magnet ring can be rotated 180° and pushed closer
to or farther from the smaller ring magnet which is soldered in-
side of the sleeve. In one position the outside magnet is aiding the
inside magnet and rotated 180° it is opposing the inside magnet.
To get maximum deflection of the electron beam, it is necessary
to have the two magnets aiding and close together. To get mini-
mum deflection, the outside magnet must be rotated 180° (op-
posing). Therefore, to center the electron beam, move the outside
magnet away from the inside magnet (towards the focus coil).
Rotate the whole centering assembly until the beam moves in the
proper direction, then move the magnets together, either aiding
or opposing until the desired correction is obtained.
TILT CONTROL
This adjustment must be made with the cabinet back removed.
If the picture is slightly tilted and does not square with the
picture tube mask, rotate the deflection yoke in its clamp bracket
until it is aligned. The deflection yoke is held in its clamp bracket
by spring pressure.
HORIZONTAL LINEARITY AND HORIZONTAL DRIVE.
These controls are used to adjust the linearity. Adjust the
horizontal drive control to a minimum capacity setting (counter-
clockwise), which is just before a vertical white line appears.
Turn the horizontal drive control clockwise until this line just
disappears. With Horizontal Size at approximately its correct
setting, adjust the Horizontal Linearity until the picture shows
correct horizontal proportions. A maladjustment shows up as an
elongation or crowding of either side of the picture. This is best
adjusted when a test pattern is being broadcasted by adjusting
the control until the distance from the center of the test pattern
to the left-hand and right-hand edges measures the same. If the
Horizontal Linearity control will not give the proper linearity
adjustment, turn the Horizontal Drive control slightly clockwise
and repeat adjustment of Horizontal Linearity. Always leave the
Horizontal Drive control at maximum counterclockwise position
consistent with good linearity. If there is any fold -over of pattern
at center of picture which shows up as a lighter area about .1,4 to
inch wide running vertically on screen, the Horizontal Drive
control should be turned clockwise until it disappears.
HORIZONTAL SIZE.
This control changes the horizontal size of the picture. When
adjusted to the recommended width, the picture should extend
for approximately 343" inch beyond the edge of the picture tube
mask so that the left and right edges of the picture are not visible.
In the picture showing incorrect adjustment of the Width con-
trol, it will be noted that this conditions makes the inner circle
of the test pattern an egg shape instead of a perfect circle.
VERTICAL LINEARITY.
This control gives the proper vertical proportions to the
picture. Improper adjustment will either crowd the lower or
upper half of the picture, as shown in the illustration. This is best
adjusted on the test pattern by adjusting the Vertical Linearity
control until the distance from the center of the test pattern to
the top or bottom edges measures the same. The adjustment of
this control will alter the height of the picture slightly so as to
necessitate the adjustment of the Vertical Size control simul-
taneously with it.
VERTICAL SIZE.
This control changes the picture height. When adjusted to the
correct height, the picture should extend for approximately
,14 inch beyond the edge of the picture tube mask so that the top
and bottom edges of the picture are not visible.
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY.
This is a coarse adjustment that supplements the Horizontal
Hold control adjustment on the front panel. This control should
be adjusted to give approximately 13 volts bias measured across
the Contrast control (R74 to ground) with a vacuum tube volt-
meter.
116 ADJUSTMENT.
The core of the blocking oscillator transformer T16 changes
the frequency of this circuit. Its adjustment is made as follows:
Connect a VTVM to measure the voltage from the junction of
R74 and potentiometer R73 to ground. Tune the receiver to any
suitable television signal. Set the front panel Horizontal Hold
control, R46, to the midpoint of its resistance range, then adjust
the iron core of the blocking oscillator transformer T16 and the
setting of the Horizontal Frequency control trimmer C49 to
bring the picture into horizontal synchronization and to develop
--12 1.0 volts across the contrast control, as measured by the
VTVM. The iron core adjustment and the trimmer setting are
interlocking and, therefore, it will be necessary to readjust each
of these controls in turn to bring the picture in sync and, also,
to obtain -12 volts.
The sync range should fall in the approximate center of the
front panel Horizontal Hold control range, and it should be
possible to throw the circuit out of sync by turning the control to
either end of its range.
CRITICAL LEAD DRESS AND COMPONENT
REPLACEMENT
Since the operating frequencies are relatively high in a tele-
vision receiver, it is essential that all components be replaced in
exactly the same position they occupied when they left the
factory, all leads be made as short as possible and exact replace.
ment parts be used when service is required. Leads in wiring
between components are usually critical as to placement against
chassis or proximity to other components. Some of critical wiring
precautions are listed below:
1. Discriminator (T19) Leads-Dress primary and secondary
leads of the discriminator transformer close to chassis.
2. Head -end Unit-All leads which run between head -end unit
coil assembly and front apron of chassis should be dressed as far
as possible from the oscillator coils.
3. Plate Lead of 6K6-The plate lead (blue) of 6K6 should be
dressed as far away from the 6AQ7GT 1st audio circuit as pos-
sible.
4. Electrolytic C102-When replacing this V2 filament rectifier
electrolytic capacitor, C102, connect the ground lug of the
capacitor as directly to chassis ground as possible.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The following is a listing of possible troubles and their cures.
This is not intended as a comprehensive coverage but will merely
serve as a guide in locating some of the more difficult problems
that may be experienced. From time to time this information will
be supplemented by a service bulletin.
I. NO RASTER ON PICTURE TUBE.
(a) Check for waveform on oscilloscope at output of T17.
If present, the trouble is probably in the Type 1B3GT rectifier
tube, filter circuit, or picture tube. Check for open circuit in high
voltage winding or R62 of T17. If the filament of V14 glows
orange, high voltage is being generated and the trouble will
possibly exist in the picture tube, V8.
(b) If there is no waveform at output of T17, check operation
of V13, and sawtooth generator, V12B, by oscilloscope waveform
measurement.
(c) Check that high voltage anode cap is contacting the anode
terminal of the picture tube.
(d) Open in Brightness control. R95 or R32 or R43.
(e) Defective V7B tube.
(f) If anode voltage is very low, check deflection yoke for
continuity or shorted turns, check Horizontal size control for
continuity.
2. RASTER NORMAL, NO PICTURE OR SOUND.
(a) Oscillator V2A defective, or oscillator coil resonates outside
of channel.
(b) Defective antenna or lead-in. With contrast full up if
antenna system is working satisfactorily, noise pattern should be
seen on screen and heard in speaker.
(c) Converter, r -f amplifier, or first video i-f amplifier stage
defective.
(Continued on page 91)
87
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
225 V

SG
025V
I
G

0
165 V E.
1o 09
2 08
30 07
ti) °6
%

VIEW LOOKING INSIDE

OF CAP

6
L r}1 r: 4,),(1
ri t .LI -Li L.LLI
VI3 68666 4405** 1.11

I
G 1

4 5 6V N 1 I

0 6.3VAC .,._ _ _ ___d V7 I2AU7 H

3 06 /I
vac
V 6SN7GT G *I 1 I 46
63VAC
45v
2 0 K
2. 6 57 VI
..504

355V

45
I 8
SG
2995P
P
605
G

-12V*
5
-3n
.1
2

230V
p 1I
1

1
i
p
18 V
32

. 0 °6 I

30 1 i

200 0 7 K
L5V
1

8 440 VII 6SN7GT V6 6AL5

1
1
1

0 V20 6K6GT/ V19 6AQ7GT

r I__ _ _ __ __1_, P
4 2.0
VAC H .
225V it p 2 150 BA,
VI5 5V4G 4 10 06 ACV
1
I305 2 .3 SG 40 7
G
8 06 25 V
10 06
70
250V
3 0
--21 i -- ? - 25V 7
14
p
.1 P
H -7V 6.3VAC 4.3V
1

,_
L_1 L--- 6.3VAC
V5 6AU6 V21
5Y3GTH
SG b
220V 5 6 i05V 8.1 11

V9 6SN7GT 07 310
0 . 300P

G P 63 30
2 30V 2 1

9VA-
- 7 - - - -.--
1

VI4 1836 T/8016 H 8, 03 7-1(-

50% J o
63VAC 7
e4
/,
I

\ VIO 6V6GT/ G V4 6AU6

40 01 \ 6
V16 5U46 V18 6SH7 p

//
( 5 SG
14
405
3800 r
'\\ \ \
P
11000V 60 OV n7 2E0 56 205
40 "1 40
°I 01

//
SG

//
\\
\\
P

2700 .I
6.3VAC
3
O K
v
3 °00
2 I

345VAC
S0
4
- 02 35V
1?
04

/ \ V3 6AU6 V22 6AU6 clv Ac

/ p
280
2205
'
/ \
\ 6.3VAC
5 6 6
5V 10
8
l'''v
.VI74 U?Cg1/

/7
30 6.3
\
.
,, 2 i 6
-7.7
6
SG
1109 AC 3.6 ,i8v

/
/ \
\
1.0V 2% K
1430

\
* MEASURE WITH A VTVM THROUGH 1/2 MEG OHM \ VI 6AU6
.

* * MEASURE AT START OF PRIMARY WINDING \ SG

150V
7 1.60
p

9
/ \ 3 1

/ \ P
150V
02
NOTE:D-C MEASURMENTS TAKEN ONA 20000 011,1 PER VOLT METER \ 4

/ SELECTOR SWITCH SET AT CHANNEL NO.4 \ 6.3VAC

NORMAL SYNCED PICTURE, NORMAL BRILLIANCE AND CONTRAST \ V2 I2AT7
LINE VOLTAGE II7VAC
%BLUES LISTED MAY HAVE A TOLERANCE OF +20% I P 33V *
160
6.3VAC
, 09
4
/
3
,
1i1

2300
.10

I 1

Lii

88 Socket Voltage Diagram

 tit llitY4 8.9.8.!O 011.8.910S
54,-.94T3A-Aran
Co ...JIMVAV914.7Wr 01515321,e se en SA 601 OZA CA 0
=..
2141 . 032102210 SI 622I 102a0
01012 1012212A eel 20 921111212220 "toe
1 IONIA °mom 2141 NI 122,0
leo 0212IONS 212121I2 SI 01111 1101SIS. it OSL t 52e2O 2212111
MO 10,3
" ce yen
-4 3M
2,09
I .1.1 uoa
n In oz ess see
-.n
0 mune 0100e
ea:ire )1--e-1-
220
663
N2121 ialS0 many
216IA 10-2.029 ZA
,1 1
21212112AVV2-1 Amos

0 021a
000
VISIA
142
22
22e7X,
1.1021
e 9
yp1 900T
use I
40-6.
.2222200.
9-989
se.
»es lY
eee
S701;
00,
931 N 459
0, 120.212.229 Z "17,F-1 rllA
2131210. feel
912e/i,Ii-S9/
'A 'N '3S113VVAS
5zY
NOISIAIO
SDIN011133'9
0rit
ANVeIWOO D11113313 1)MM°
ae
nose,r10
Ti'-
1 - 21.020 DO
0220
-,112.2_2202,
-22112-22
-7 00107-
tet
Nal0Tr 1212A Ildrie 002[00,-,-. OA 00 002 --
SZl S0201A ova, 98 A 0114Ne....0_
.4,3212121410. U. ate 80102120 3I 39I
alf 2-8
Tree- se 901.
V9A
9.01,113;048 00TAT--
4
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PICTURE DEFECTS
The following illustrations show picture defects which are The adjustment of the controls is most efficiently accomplished
caused by incorrect setting of the operating controls and/or by the use of a test pattern, similar to that illustrated, which is
preset controls or by interference picked up by the antenna. normally transmitted just prior to the scheduled program.
The correction is indicated for each control maladjustment.

Fig. 22 Fig. 23

NORMAL PICTURE
PICTURE TOO DARK

The normal picture should show good focus and a good con- Turn Contrast control slightly counterclockwise and/or turn
trast between blacks and whites with the intermediate shades Brightness control clockwise.
of gray. The picture should not tend to either move vertically
or horizontally.
Fig. 25
Fig. 24

SLURRED
PICTURE
PICTURE
TOO LIGHT

This indicates that the picture is out of focus. Adjust Focus

Turn the Contrast control slightly clockwise and/or turn control until the picture detail is sharp and clear.
Brightness control slightly counterclockwise until a good con-
trast ratio exists between the black and white picture elements.
Fig. 27

Fig. 26
ICTURE TILTS
OR MOVES
VERTICAL SIDEWAYS
PICTURE
MOVEMENT

Adjust Horizontal Hold until picture straightens up and locks

into position so there is no sideways motion.
Adjustment of Vertical Hold control at the receiver front
panel will stop any vertical roll of picture.
Fig. 29
Fig. 2$

PICTURE
ELONGATED
PICTURE
HORIZONTALLY
ELONGATED
VERTICALLY

Adjust Horizontal Linearity control so that the horizontal

Adjust Vertical Linearity control so that the vertical radius radius from center to left side is equal to radius from center to
from top to center and bottom radius are equal. This adjustment right side. This may alter the horizontal size.
may alter the vertical size.

Fig. 31
Fig. 30

PICTURE
PICTURE
TOO TALL
TOO WIDE

Adjust Horizontal Width control so that the right and left Adjust Vertical Height control so that the top and bottom
picture edges are just covered by the mask. picture edges are just covered by mask.

90
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
3. PICTURE NORMAL, NO SOUND.
(a) Audio i-f amplifier, audio discriminator detector, or audio
amplifier defective.
(b) Defective speaker.
(c) Obcillator V2A off frequency.
4. RASTER NORMAL, SOUND NORMAL, NO PICTURE.
(a) Video i-f amplifier (after 1st i-f) inoperative.
(b) Video amplifier tube V7 defective.
(c) Grid lead to picture tube open.
5. NORMAL PICTURE AND SOUND, NO HORIZ. OR VERT. SYNC.
(a) Check for signal waveform at grid (4) of V11A and grid (1)
of V11B
(b) Tube V7A plate circuit components improper value.
6. PICTURE NORMAL, NO VERTICAL SYNC.
(a) Check grid (1) of V9 for vertical sync pulses.
(b) Check frequency of vertical sweep generator. This should
be capable of free running frequency of slightly less than 60 cps.
(c) Check sweep generator tube, V9, components.
(b) Check tube V12A and its circuit components.
(c) Check sweep generator V12B and circuit components.
S. RASTER EDGE NOT STRAIGHT-KEYSTONING.
(a) Defective deflection yoke.
(b) Defective sweep transformer.
9. PICTURE JUMPY.
(a) Operation at too high a Contrast control setting.
(b) Gassy or noisy 6BG6G (V13) or 6V6GT (V10) tubes.
(c) Noisy sweep or sync circuit tubes.
(d) Excess noise received by antenna system.
10. POOR PICTURE DETAIL.
(a) Mismatch in antenna and lead-in system.
(b) Misalignment of i-f and r -f circuits.
(c) Defective video chokes.
(d) Make sure focus control goes through focus.
(e) Overload of video amplifier. Check contrast control
operation.

II. AUDIO MOTOR BOATING.

7. PICTURE NORMAL, NO HORIZONTAL SYNC.
(a) Dress V20 plate lead (blue) as far away as possible from
(a) Check grid (4) of V12A for horizontal sync pulse. Discon- V19B tube circuit components.
nect leads from R54 and C57 to examine this.

WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
The waveform shown in Figures 36 through 51 represent The oscilloscope where the vertical deflection amplifier has
measurements on an average receiver wherein the controls have been precalibrated is used to make measurements at the point
been adjusted for a normal picture with correct Contrast, Height, indicated in the wave form boxes. The oscilloscope sweep fre-
Width and Linearity. Most measurements must be made when quency is indicated in the waveform title.
a signal is being received.
GRID (2) OF V7A (12 AUT) PLATE (6) OF V7B (I2AU7)

11111111111111111 11111
T
3V
I
I

1
ji

11111111111111111 11111
f
50V
1111111011111 101 111111111111111111

Fig. 36. Video Output of Defector

Fig. 37. Video Output
(Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed) (Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed)

GRID (I) OF VIIB (6SN7)

1111111111111 111111
1111111111111111 111111
T
70V
A_

Fig. 3$. Clipper Grid Fig. 39. Clipper Vert Sync. ulse
(Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed) (Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed)

Fig. 40. Vortical Multivibrator Fig. 41. Vertical Multivibrator

(Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed) (Osc. Synced at Half of Vertical Sweep Speed)
91
 (133-IdS d22mS ItiluozP0H Jo J113H paouAs aco) (PAS dawns muozpoH Jo jpni le paauAs aso)
26
0411,1 euldunia 10 PP0,01r3 IS 'IN MIL/001110.11 dooms pi LIO11114,1 p PINS 'OS .111A
(1)33dS daamS roluozpoH Jo JPI,H 2111 13331 AS .3s113 (paads dawns piluozpoH Jo JIBH papoAS .3s0)
401/2.101100 dOOMS INUOZJJOH JO PMO .1111A
sperioro *3-4"1/ loluaz!apH .111, 'EU
(paads dooms muozpolir Jo Hap/ 7e paauAs -320) (paads dawns muozpoH Jo jleH le p231.1AS 3s0)
PP° 'LP Via osina auAs paiuozpoN *14613,3 Juld113 VP 'SW
111111Ii., 11111111111111111i J111111
A01
(LNS9) VZ1A AO (b) awe (LNS9) 811A AO (£) NION/V0
(paads dawns paapiaA Jo Rugg la papuAs aso) (P32dS daams teD9JaA Jo RBI; le paouAS 'DSO)
indino loawA I. aP0,103 'St '1111i inel4n0 cliistAS 10214.10A 'PP Ai
AOQ1
AOG£
-f
I
(9A9) 01A AO (£) 3.1Vld
(Pax's dooms Ie3piaA Jo JloH ae p2a1.1AS .3s0) (paacls dooms lea!paA Jo Bel; paauAs oso)
JopmeA1441W ioawilA 141 .1001.1CMAfflOW 1021440A LIF
f
AC
(LNS9) 86A AO (I) 0189
03,4uo3) IN3v38nsv3w WII0d3AVM
S2I3A130321 NOISIATIMIL 6,61 C3C33N-N3LIO-ISOIAI
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

the hallicrafters Co.

MODELS T-64, 509 AND 510

1111111164-- HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING

I
Operation of the receiver chassis outside of the cabinet
involves a shock hazard. An interlock in the line cord dis-
connects the power when the back cover is removed. The
HIGH VOLTAGE supply, while of low current capacity,
operates at a 9,000 volt potential. Exercise all normal
HIGH VOLTAGE precautions while working with this equip-
ment.

KINESCOPE HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

The kinescope housing provides adequate protection
against possible tube implosure while in the cabinet. Do
not expose the kinescope or handle it in any way without
providing personal protection in the form of shatterproof
goggles and heavy gloves. The kinescope should be handled
by qualified personnel only.
Model 509
\ N
The kinescope envelope encloses a high vacuum and with
the large surface area of glass involved, the stresses set
up, particularly at the front rim of the tube, are considera-
VERTICAL HOLD NORMAL CONTRAST PUSHBUTTONS FINE TUNING VOLUME
BRIGHTNESS
ble. An abnormal handling stress, accidental blow at a
POWER
HORIZONTAL HOW CIRCLE (12 CHANNELS)
highly stressed surface, or even a scratch on the surface of
the tube could cause it to implode or collapse with destruc-
Model Differences . Model T-64 - custom installation tive violence.
(chassis unit)
Model 509 - Wood cabinet
Model 510 - Plastic cabinet NON -OPERATING CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS
CARE OF THE KINESCOPE WINDOW The "non -operating" or screw -driver adjustments
normally will require an occasional minor adjustment if any
The window in front of the picture tube is made of safety circuit work or tube changing is required. A test pattern,
glass, hence may be cleaned by any of the conventional win- generated either locally in the shop or obtained from a tele-
dow cleaning processes. Abrasive or strong solvent type vision station is recommended for best results. Normal
cleaning solutions that may scratch the glass or damage the picture contrast and brightness should be maintained during
cabinet finish, however, should be avoided. the following adjustments for best results.

AUDIO IF AUDIO HA1,1010

AMP AMP OUT pur

6A116. NAVE 646-GT

300 OHM
ANTENNA
TRANSMISSION
LINE

SYN SE ARATOH [PICTURE

IST IDEO END 50E0 DC RESTORER IS
RF AMP MIXER 1ST IF AMP END IF AMP 3RD IF AMP 4TH IF AMP VIDEO of AP TUBE
AMP
SACS 6AU6 6A 6 SON PNASE INV
SAGS SAGS SACS NAOS 1011P4
6V6 -GT) MACY I S117-GT)
(6A5s) (EARS)

VERTICAL
OSC. 5
AMP
osa 6511551
SYNC. DISC
604
GALS

LOW HORIZONTAL AMP

HORIZONTAL
VOLTAGE MV RECT.
OSC.
SUPPLY REACTION SCANMM3 11136T/8016
GSNSGT
SWIG SNAGS a svG

Fit. 1. Funet oval block dia0ram. 93

:21g.,°0;2V.IF8EVERn m0
Ili 211 tX*: ; r5:i. r in N4>'40
F."2'5gHcag 000000000000000000
888888890000000888888888
k 0000,9090000 00
5.` g 00000000000000
515°0.1.P 2 ° 000000000000000000
;485!..°5";:m:1('104- IP 8888888888888888
Z5. g'64,9-V2.7,n;5,) g "
0
r 880088888888888888
s....05.s5-Sor,..g. vmo > 000000000000000000
-0 888888 8888888888
z0 IA
MS=Zt!'48..W.0 88§88§888888888888
oo oo 00000000000o
g SA
888888888888888888
F4-0 000000000000000000
oz 5
O om> x
z _rn
.3M og

cg
00
c 721 CZ
-M

g ftl

,u-44

t71 o
05.
.3 ,-fa-

m
0
)s.

to.)

m
z
N

4
 wo...co
.5!Z
r>,222- .522
(12U.?,
.2
-"4--o
2" fw-i. ""6'1.
.611?)
=5w ...,-.5 w4
iglil !glqiIN °)
wc.o.0.51n1644
g.v.c...,...1
=-.,.,
-z453 '"°-E 1.2'0-00,
cnr&.wu 06.ws..om za-u

'-'' `L'S as
80ii!!1;
0 QJ
z4f.,.9,11
, , i
0
0
IA
CC)
% ho,0-,
mg- .,..w.a,
0.
.....,_
....4.1.5. -u.,1`6!
..-.
5.06...-8,
,Es -0 2ti";:?t.0.0t7A&'g z g . .0 :51 0 0)
.0.00
Fa
>,,...,0
21:10
..t..,V
D3,8
Eo.00,5,en
otE.'"
t..4.+Z
7.'3'',21
E

z .,:a:
44ggg's.q,
5

;se_qe.,5,Asz,.....
om,zor.c.. ..
E-0"-(73'6.mo75
m a, m 0w i2;111114!il(12 -.0 z.
tg'!ir.:!
AO'
Pi wi53°
:1-w...-8
11:0 824s
,....i.E.1.-.
'01,2- t'22-E.a'22-evw
e...,,St
-0,0
.1.2.73al.Q.221
Z..,,a,""° WIllii
7-4-:-.2w.E<w",5g38*+1
z -'8',L.
14.1 1731".9.4! f
I' 08 wo5, t.',°z° -
0 %M. -LP -.940. .w-0.,1 ,',1 ho 4. °
OE
w ,cdcne,
,-,IX
ori
f. ,o bi) - ,.,I
13
(TWA17A;I:!illgPMei2.6
.9..
(gmug. a; tem c 0 =L.1
E-M'al-aawv-eim4.,$z%
..,w
cn ,t6
1) m . E cl
E.,:E LW1452tt.E.9...a° -clua
m
q=m0 0E z_, -,=,=q, 3-00=,
1-,-8,dv...4,-cgt-6,.:.40w..,-6.5,z!!..3"t
E.g.:0g 54:,0`"gtt.w.EG)2
,,,
2
..,, z
u;-,...-0 (;?..,0,P,o;i- 8 2
fa, w-.50.0.,,0
"0°.-H°00.0-12.,=
wz,w2.1.
u.40,..,.
s-awl ="Ew°D.,2,1')=0..t.'40'S cle,wc;3tERAold.g4E
-.S.,,A ,'1).&?,cd 8rgozw,4m"Ot.5...m.-4-o
w_,=,,,1.2. tmw,4514,
n
.,,,z,v2.-0.0mt1,0 w cilw..0,0z tim=
ZE"5.4 C...g7,2,?.;
a;=ww.... M20 4tle-':,-. 75
,..,-,. 25ua
'g
(-4
P'DO 11-0'E.:ATJ,.="c lirjmcuIcuZg =0 ...,,,,zwOn.on.
g=oa),ar, s..,.
,c.m4,-.0w7,..,
,y4.,7,8,2,1,0mE.w7,0,0_,=m
u"0(-'2,tmoo=----0
02-0-w `1,4:12z
Z4 .3(100'. 0-w
4T-.5
oggc)g-.5-ur1 =-0-`2<tr.
0.-
545'r.
w ..`2,2
--.
-0 4. > .- 3 f z' .- . 4:,.,I.-x cl. t E-ci, vzo 4.'04:LE
.'- -= ,''' , <' E
.A1''''0
,d
7514 bp
,4.,t5.4M44W9'. $.
.53 CA g 0>:, 0:8°W2r15" t'C''''' 5 i'4.4".-7'C'U.5 C%
wW.°07/OW !;/5 7;C,';',CW22 >'.= 0:14,713t"..5z>8.,="at;E-igen ,_7,AF2,
-4?,2.4.
a'4 C'
"Rg715C452m18-QUI:REY6,w2'-ic,122.0.
174 _.=r1.2.E-51)1;,;g.:12.,--8.22-wtE8.-w:a2.4Q..Q1
.--)E-.
gai
Ey at :1 u 2 ; t . ; :E,' a! C t ,,, -. .5 7 74 .5 td X2 a V) ., 8 a g 79: E. -2 0 E ,4
.7 , c, dui 73 74 r,
E'"Omulki,8 "5,u ..2gE -8-2 0'8-$.6
=.'-'
,.'"'02.m2 1.4.,4-qmV, n
-;,4r) %4Q,c0.",;:21.1,----.Eu. Q;.ciiE'51=.wL12..;-2 280 007,-08.1%w Yx
0 li`c;IEIh L4°.,:d 'E' -E 3 jii-g-W,,... IiLl.ni, «" :a 3,t4 Ei!.,v?s,
gp a '8!:.;HII g) bow ot . . -0 20
0 (1:1T,N ILO; I-
Z Mc12
.
V4.s14.'1
r.., . ,
¢,,,
1) -.9 2 .
0
0.
IPI .E.711,4w-E.
g+a..$==,-1wE gh . R,R411.. 71 Ea-o ox Z> , '8 cg ci,
-cs
,o k%1,40.5 .
@,
mm
>0";',C0i4gE ',7,6'..,`0"
.Z0,1$4 X
lil
..7;::::o.,
.0 gof,
-
w
w -L9 0 at
aww. 41,1-2.. -o
.3-c'
ci 0 0 ...'o -44c
fq.11:1"sH831.71
6'..A.°
cd - cy V
,-,
2wi2$.;:.15
-0
->
o

f'wt',1
.0,
5bn;,,,,,
..-,c)

''.d.a.
30",
0,--.
gs'2QCO.
m
,1,&),D

-:9e.:
as-.
0.
2 Ea.-vg08
-,m_
43 c,"
tE '5.
..,-.-
-8185 5 9,,,
;.,
42 ge (,)
zw ,121:42-4
la tre4E.gto.74.
-E--1,4.7.-.. bf5.5 a. .1 a. '2 I' F,
cl. oo, .:,..
m -,,-E tt: ,(5).P=1w8E-;
ra -1..n., wow
4.,....swg_ §E. Ul
Ix 61,-E 2 g'ES
4
874
@n t8 ,E'
od_
......., go ;.;; -y
-=
-.0- z,c74,-e10,0
,s
0 =.0,:4=2.00,
.uo ,.., ,7,11. EP,tg
ga oml,e.p..mie
5...a.5
0Z
1-
iii triz..g.
.t.O.B
s 1
.
0,
-°=,%;
.-E-
.-p,
,,..,-
E
=,
-.5).
w8 gsg ..6,_.,4-s
7,.,- to-W 0.0. ,Zco
- 0 0:5* --81'w
0>o
li, >'
01" .EE.g0 .a.E.0, .a
iv ci,1% .0 .0.0,
-
0. 4'2t2-5
.20.0 u09,
t,',...,.-:
0 2W7gwn0
Z E.
z Ou
en X
o-
0
0..
.
,..
z'.'
-5, 'a' ,,, -.. 8 2g w.,;
t .1._,,--' ,..E7T.:75
Ili :;iii
L'', cn cutc.,ca
ill
ha
... u,
.w c"mac" Zvi
p c.)
0=t> >§2'.81'
W
'a' " ur t 14,
E-. -6.--.`1 .55 44'd re U7 M
^ C Q L-
E4 -, ° 2 c'''X' .0 2
RE"' :PVLI t.'w$81
.... 0
1;20 . L, -fra .p.§
E
go.';',26, Oa;
ELI kl.' -8P.8 rsigigH8b.0 e,0E.2
.5.M !il%17:1:!
mt..4
., 443 O
. gu,A
t %),,a '-',.,
.1F.-.0 C'OM W.520732W4T.
9 n-9 2ag
,,
El'cll
0
..,
c..

04
"110 Zku
-
+,2
''
IP! O '' 2
15 2 .'
"LE "$..cc ' w ..9.7d I; v.,

ma co
a,
-.98
2 ,!, 2

:STD'. E .,.5.
11.9.2.11t
A..Z .0,.z 3
m, W 0 0
22 §
wW,.,As.0
=
Z.4 1:1
O ;4"
wF,
'4
E.,0 ''',,,
gj''''t
, gt:
,a)J?:,°,
i.."7jZ
zo log. 5 ex %T.,802?..,f,
,.),.,-,g, `0,'lq,' 8 .9A -o 8 8.0wE.-w.8
:i:z1-0:42
*.eW
0..wz-z;
F.4"
>6
17:
,
0).0 5 QM P4 wS
1.1`-''4. a 14)24.51'zg ,.'z'g
c., 8. 015
zE=K X4 154 2 7.1°8.'m CO cl.rOil
m=g11" .5 74wmW'a'
c442,42 -R2
t ,;=,..m.2,
...,,v.; ,.;
co pg
ov .z t 0zmid.
6+ c 20
8 cl.. D0 f.,E .c. 0
m El -Jr.
bl) 0)
2E xa 41 = 202E5,
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
adjust the FM DET. SEC. ADJ. of the f -m detector transformer
MEASUREMENT OF H.V.POTENTIAL ON (T-1) for the null.
KINESCOPE ANODE 5. Shift the frequency of the signal generator either side of
The second anode potential will be approx. 9,000 V.on a re- 4.5 mc and touch up the FM DET. PRI. ADJ. for approximately
ceiver that is functioning properly. Since the high potential for equal peaks. Use just enough signal generator output to obtain,
the kinescope anode is obtained from the horizontal output trans- one volt peaks for best results.
former, the "non -operating" control adjustments outlined above
must be made or be known to be in proper adjustment before I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT CHART
the H.V. measurement will have any meaning. Improper oper-
ation of the horizontal sweep circuit or circuit faults in the 1. Connect the electronic voltmeter across the 5600 -ohm
high voltage filter will generally account for an abnormal anode resistor (R-57) in the plate circuit of the 6AL5 VIDEO DET.
potential. If the anode potential is low, check the HORIZONTAL tube (V-8). This resistor is located on the terminal strip be-
DRIVE adjustment outlined above. tween the 6AU6 4th IF AMP. tube (V-7) and the 6AL5 VIDEO
DET. tube (V-8).
CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE 2. Connect the output of the low frequency signal generator
to the receiver's antenna input through two 150 -ohm carbon re-
Do not use hand held flexible test leads when sistors, one connected in each conductor of the transmission
making the following measurement. Keep the line.
hands clear of the circuit during measurement. 3. Set the signal generator output (unmodulated) to develop
A 9,000 V. potential exists in this circuit. Ex- two volts at the electronic voltmeter and adjust the five i-f
ercise all normal high voltage precautions. amplifier coils, according to the following chart, for maximum
d -c voltage as measured by the electronic voltmeter. Readjust
1. Connect a 50-megohm resistor string in series with a the signal generator output as required to maintain the two volt
200 microampere meter. Connect the free meter terminal to potential at the electronic voltmeter.
the chassis and the high side of the resistor string to the anode
cap of the kinescope. The connection to the anode cap may be I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT CHART
made with a fine wire slipped under the connector. Make up Signal Generator
the resistor string with 10-megohm one or two watt resistors Frequency Adjustment Stage
to provide a safety factor for voltage breakdown. If 10-megohm (No Modulation) (Refer to Fig. 11) Adjusted
resistors are used, a total of five will be required to obtain the
50 megonms. Make the setup self-supporting and allow adequate 26.2 mc 26.2 MC IF AN. Mixer
clearance between the resistor string and chassis parts to pre- 25.5 mc 25.5 MC IF ADJ. 1st IF amp.
vent high voltage breakdown.. 23.5 mc 23.5 MC IF ADJ. 2nd IF amp.
2. Turn on the receiver and set the BRIGHTNESS and CON- 23 mc 23 MC IF AN. 3rd IF amp.
TRAST controls at minimum. The microammeter will read 22.2 mc 22.2 MC IF ADJ. Video detector
approx. 180 microamperes or 9,000 V. at the kinescope anode. 4. Set the signal generator at 26.2 mc. Reduce the signal
The anode potential is measured in this manner (CONTRAST generator output until the electronic voltmeter reads one volt
and BRIGHTNESS controls at minimum; meter current approx. and readjust the 26.2 MC IF ADJ. for maximum output voltage
200 microamperes) to simulate the kinescope load on the high at the electronic voltmeter. Readjust signal generator output
voltage power supply. to maintain a one volt peak for this adjustment.
5. Check the i-f amplifier frequency response by tuning
ALIGNMENT, PROCEDURE the signal generator from 21 mc through 26.25 mc and observ-
ing the change in d -c voltage at the electronic voltmeter. If
Note.- The following alignment adjustments do not require the signal generator output is set for an electronic voltmeter
the use of the kinescope tube. It is recommended that the tube reading of 1.5 volts at the peak i=f amplifier response, the d -c
be removed if extensive alignment adjustments are to be made. voltage should not drop below one volt between the two peaks
normally obtained with this i-f amplifier. If the responge is
CAUTION -Removal of the kinescope tube exposes the HIGH unsatisfactory, repeat steps 3 and4 or try slight modifications
VOLTAGE anode connector contact. Keep this lead and contact of the recommended settings to obtain the desired response.
clear of personnel servicing equipment and grounded objects on Avoid resonating the coils with the iron core at the bottom end
the service bench. Exercise all normal high voltage precautions of the coil form. (Adjustment screw near limit of its travel.)
while working with the exposed units. Check the two carrier i-f responses, 21.75 mc and 26.25 mc.
The 21.75 me response will be approximately 20 db below the
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED peak response (Approx. 0.15 volt) and the 26.25 mc response
Signal generator covering 4 mc to 30 mc will fall approximately 6 db. below the peak (Approx. 0.4 volt).
Signal generator covering 40 mc to 215 mc Refer to Fig. 12.
Electronic voltmeter The average i-f amplifier sensitivity when feeding the sig-
Two 150 -ohm carbon resistors nal generator output through the antenna input as described
One .01 mfd. 600 V. tubular paper condenser above will run approximately 600 to 3,000 microvolts for the
one volt d -c peak measured at the 5600 -ohm resistor (R-57).
F -M SOUND CHANNEL ALIGNMENT (Receiver's oscillator operating on channel 6.)
1. Connect the low frequency signal generator output be- STATION CHANNEL ALIGNMENT
tween the control grid (pin 1) of the 6AU6 1st VIDEO AMP. tube
(V-9) and chassis ground. 1. Due to the broad frequency response of the i-f amplifier,
2. Connect the electronic voltmeter between pin 7 of the it is necessary to use a 24.5 mc signal generator or oscillator
6AL5 FM DET. tube (V-16) and chassis ground. (unmodulated) as a beat frequency oscillator (BFO) in order to
3. With the signal generator (unmodulated) set at 4.5 mc, locate the center frequency of the i-f amplifier response for
set the 4.5 MC LIMITER GRID ADJ. and FM DET. PRI. ADJ. the correct local oscillator adjustment. This "BFO" generator
for maximum d -c voltage as measured by the electronic. volt- should be loosely coupled by means of a wire from the genera-
meter. Adjust the limiter grid coil (L-14) before adjusting the tor output placed in close proximity to the 6AL5 VIDEO DET.
f -m detector transformer (T-1) primary. Use just enough sig- tube (V-8).
nal generator output to obtain approximately one volt at the 2. Connect the high frequency signal generator output to the
electronic voltmeter. receiver's antenna transmission line through the two 150 -ohm
4. Connect the electronic voltmeter across the 1,000 mmf carbon resistors,one connected in each conductor of the trans-
condenser (C-17) at the output of the f -m detector stage and mission line.
3. Connect the electronic voltmeter across the 5600 -ohm

96 resistor (R-57) in the plate circuit of the 6AL5 VIDEO DET.

tube (V-8) as for the i-f amplifier alignment.
 LI L2 L3 .,0
2
, 09
T

'A o3 .3 0f as 3 J 3 3

.4
010

C5
010

C.
Cy.
-A
YE Olf
3.0 GIN II f. I AUDIO
VI5
6AU6
IF AMP T,
V16
GALS
FM DEC
V11
6AU6
AUDIO AMP
VIN
666-67
AUDIO OUTPUT
FOCUS
COIL
13 L6 7 L. .y L7
C21
023
VIN
65 R13
R6 RT 1011P4
9-4A-6 4-A9-4 076.1 6120 KINESCOPE
500 2200 -1"0 600t

-
C14

1 ,Re
SO,
.3
I

3 tob LUG VIEW

022 1 622 R23 R24 R25
L.
C
21
CA fC2F 126 f211 IL 1-2.) .29 c91 60
D.
560
2

015
0271
L 12 CI3
1-16
DEFLECTION
9000 V.
2ND. ANODE
RA
I YOKE
RIO RII
11-4-
1:6 R26 CE4A y
12,000 1000
.6 11610
". °3 °3 101 1 1 1 '3 1 3
2 629 Roe
so.000 15495.1.
630

-
BRIGHTNESS
C3Ai C36i C3c1 03/ C3Ei .3Ff .36f .50f Cli C3i .39f C3L
C161(-
114
.11
IZAUT

Vi V6 L24
V, L26 S GALS
V12

SAGS 6AG5 VS V7 T8 L26 NAGS

rardarTDC

6AU6 6AU6 CAL5 RTol T IC

SYNC. DISC.
(60651
043II-
(43A95) 6 AV9U6 (I,FLO 6V6-GT
C33 C36 ARUN INVERTER 2 1500
RF AMP MIXER ST IF AMP CA0 3RD IF AMP Coo {TH. IF AMP C56 VIDEO DET. 71:5ri 052 1ST VIDEO ENO VIDEO AMP 665 055 Moo
AMP
et33 .R0 0 la as T,oc7o 054
I
R99,

-:
1.5 100 11.% 1518 41.600
C29 . Now Lz 600t 1266
k, GS
118

y L20 ;1-21 '1-22

R56, .L29 .os ts:000 *76
416 L19 L2, 010
42. 600t
100
-°" TO LIT
100
R3I
C32 R34 R33 R.I R4
R49 Ft, R6y 099
58
Iwo HA. 46 P-1(
ANTENI:
1(--
C30 R32
-
t2Aao
ft -v- 1600 H42 ee C42
I I
C66-0-6
5600
'4*
L2311 662
64 1- C'92
640 1.70 600V.
moo
I(

Ce,
4 RST
1.9 031 'j1'035 1R31 1000 644, woo .00 cRy_j,n. 5000 R61' R13
ISO
1000 *0,000 3r. =
000 670,000 ot 00 3
"43 2.200 220a 0 1.000 2200 2200 11120 WO
.06
...FPI,

600 .

HEATER
6% 639 644 647 VI3
R82 CB
1159
C34 C32 C39Ioo,Poo 041 00 000 044 i00.000 65117- GT
611011160 10.P.
11004 I ..5
V20 11000 CONTRAST
POT HOR1Z. 05C.

.1C84
R..
V3 r
TO 2ND. ANODE
CAP OF TUBE V, iC -r
_Caro .45
6C4 R991
090. vy. / ....
...v Res 664 *.0e7
16307 / 8 Te.0
RECTIFIER
H_
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL -.., (5Y N0.1 R.
Ty CENTERING CENTERING 30, 66,y. 4011.
001 ...,..
Cy, Poo
SOO 1
S05 Ply
V20 / 47.000
68060 0,0001 7.1011.0
HOREZ. AMP
zone ON 2000 FOCUS vM - 245_+ .1024c
122 102 'R
C
5V40
RECT. SCAN 77
*--CM*
6
-71s 150
00
1000 R103
0 6SN7 -GT
VERT 05C. AM .
r00410
-
T23
..
c,RR1R LUG VIEW PIN VIEW
02.000 1.66 067 31140 itiP0 306 PLe Ss
H R104

I-
OPDT)
064 FINE
90
RECTIFIER 2. 111?'' ab 0091 as /16 CIRCLE
TUNING
220 .20 e --1".' R119
moo TO FILAMENT Crypt R106
R921 OF TUBE Vyo Lao
105000 .95 G74AICT 8I 6.3 V C60 Rii*
21109. i14111
TN2D'Zoo '' Ill .'LV"

, v.14.'7i '''""
6.35. AC ''' :zoo WIDTHL3
600t NORMAL
0199 11 LUG VIEW PIN VIEW VERT/CAL
NEATER iT6?
.969Cee
,,
HORIZONTAL - IWO 20/121. I PL (SYNC)
R17
DRIVE L34 6.3V. AC
RIOT1
C240 4
11 079019106 ".1. am
96
HEATER
R. VERTICAL '°-
T ' " HEIGHT
HORIZONTAL
LINEARITY NFDTI1W1 HAPOO LINEARITY IRIS R115
210 621:911 74 sa RH. moo =1.31120 514213.

PIN VIEW
VO' i15 C16 Irv. BOTTOM
VIEW
105-1E5V. 60,AC
504 PL6
P1-3 P1.4
INTERLOCK
NOTE - CONNECTOR
CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MME UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. ROT TO! PI VIEW
VIEW
RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS, AND 1/2 WATT
RATING UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
* THIS CONDENSER USED WITH 606.5 ONLY. (SANE AS 0-I3)
POWER SUPPLY CHASSIS
LAST R SYMBOL - R122
LAST C SYMBOL C 94
LAST 1. SYMBOL - L 34

Plf. 18. Schemattc dlafrom.

9 TA
'131.1NMIO Al AO iO3t1.4
133.1.1.130 snNtri
'On A 'no "wool
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

V -ED V-25

Tr' 61410g.TrESS
BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST

MIN MAX. ASN.

55

GI I5

CAUTION -SEE TEXT FOR MEASUREMENT OF POTENTIAL

AT MD ANODE CAP

FRONT APRON
BOTTOM VIE ER SU

a
ta
V 10
1:MM CO

mm Tzo9
if" am I kZER rct
En
*V cm MEE:VW"
get 602NM
®NM
NMI Min cam Imo CIE.
CONTRAST o0NTRAL
MIN/MAX

Ill dere
,1314 mom
mom
%goy immimo
mm trig CI
mm 4140-
MCI mm
MOO yAlp,94
o *41s)
° 9400
V -t3

MCCIEIM a V -I2

m= cm MCC 0", .4 =
a
co elk)* mm m. as h-ggpt0 940, CLE

=CI Nun 0,610 ma 611

o 6." co f HORIZONTAL CONTROL
HORS W.

V-1
ina Ewa
MEE
%Id,. =NM
imcm get; mm
cm to* En

ir.s ,924)4
a. NE= AI, cm
cim 1.=
49.0* El
GIMP
V-111

COM

AK
ex tido m EN VW mo CI tiA1.0
mm 69T% om 1:1 m® 411$1.6*
ECM
voto CUM
mm ALTERNATES FOR TUBES V-10 a V.11

o V-3
t=IM
ty94 CI=
4.0TC°
MCI YeZ9 ®m MEAD
a FRONT APRON
BOTTOM VIEW OF RECEIVER CHASSIS
NOTES -
6 ',NO CONNECTION vOLTAGE SHOWN FOR THIS TERMINAL CACI WHEN TERMINAL IS uSE0 AS A TIF LUG
SOCKET vIEWS ARE BOTTOm viEWS
T %ICAO, READABLE VOLTAGES MEASURED AT THESE TERMINALS GENERALLT REANiNGLESS
ALL VOLTAGES ARE MEASUAED BETWEEN TUBE SOME TERMINALS 6 CHASSIS WITH ZERO SIGNAL
ALL VOLTAGES ON v-9 Ax TAKEN AT TIE PCMITS OF TM. SOCKET LEADS
5 LIME VOLTAGE -117 v AC. ODE POTENTIAL AT 10994 IS RECOMENOE0 FOR CHECK ON IBSOT RECTIFAR
MEASUREmENT or 290
A ALL VOLTAGES SHOWN ARE DC UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
IO. I= SPACE PROVIDED FOR SERVICE NETER READINGS
5. DC VOLTAGES SHOWN WERE MEASURED WITH AN ELECTRONIC VOLTMETER
II CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL PICTURE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

Fie. 17. Tube socket uoltage chart.

98
 SISSVH3 M13 M3IA d01 0)
to 0)
0
0
(014 9Z1Z 1N3141SOMIVd11111)
llNn sNiNni 010H aloN
S
HO.L1MS
ao 11311804SNV14.1.1131.113AN0 3811101d 111.1.NOZWOH 1V08.143A 3ONVM11:113 9 311M -10A
dlIV 41 aNnos 1S1 9119 9 1100 91 aNnos isi
% d1041/ 91 aNnos au £ 9nv 9\ d111V .4I aNnos ONE 9 nv 9
dill/ AI 0301A .I.S1 G 9V 9 \ 6-1) 380140 AlddilS1:13MOd
391/110A MOl
0 (OW 9aZ3 1N3111.1.SOCOV dVell)
410301A 1S1 SNVell 41 aNnos ON Z
d1.411 AI 0301A ON 3 99V9
UMW
0 (014G1911.N3vasnrav d1/111) 143N804SNVH.1.
41 0301A ON Z )101VN9V111
d141/ Al 0301A 08£ SOV 9 indino oianv 109A9
6 c) (01.4E1Z) 1100 41 0301A 08£
d111V oianv 1S1 91V 9
1
13 7.) ."0+ 0 Hosia aNnos en-ld 11381/3dS
-
Cl)
14 0
0 0
0 (prism) 1100 N011031930
E'rx. 1100 dV1:11 300H1V0 0301A14.1.
.0 63 $4.
4.) 74 11 dWV 91 0301A H1V 20,97
v o_ -o 14301804SNVel1 OSO
C4 .49
- 4.
O9 (OW teSS) 1100 41 030IA H1 V
9N1)13019 1V011113A
co v 0. ""
(1' 4.'d 1100 snow
-t 47, .o o v 9 1V 9 Hosio aNnos
N x 110103NNO0
0 4) - 0 8311104SNVI:11 83M04
3OV110A H9114
5173. 31011d30311
0 indNi VNN3.1NV
o 0.4 g ..Y. \Indino olanv
dWV 030IA ON3 9 151 191 NS 9 19 INS 9 1100 Alle1V3N11
C>~gub 13)100S 80.1.03NN00 'N39 H1001MVS 1V1NOZ180H
E asni 31111.1.01d 1H911 1011d 1V01.1.83A
°VIM 83141103N Al
a3iw
.
t.,'"
.8
1:13dd113 9 dV4V ONAS WOO 8313A31 ONAS 21V 9
0, I -I
.CUy 10 S
E-4 U
0 ^.
c..) CU
N01.11/311A11N3a1
O I -F BUS TEST POINT FOR SETTING -3 VOLTS. 1ST SOUND 1 F 6 AU 6
UNGROUNDED END (TOP) OF CONDENSER TRANSFORMER 2ND SOUND IF AMP
O 6 AL5
6 BA 6
SOUND A / 1ST SOUND IF AMP
DISCRIMINATOR
6 AG 5
MAGNALOK 6 AU 6 1ST VIDEO IF AMP
TRANSFORMER 3RD SOUND IF AMP
1ST VIDEO
I -F TRANS
I N 36 CRYSTAL
6 I3G6G DETECTOR
HORIZONTAL
3 6 AG 5
DE F LECT 10 N 2ND VIDEO IFAMP
OUTPUT

6 SN 7 2ND VIDEO
VERTICAL OSCILLATOR 1 F TRANSFORMER
& OUTPUT `NK vim= (22.3 MC)

6 SN7 GT 6 AG 5
MAGNALOK 3RD VIDEO IFAMP
HORIZONTAL AFC

5 V 4G SOUND DISCR
DAMPER SECONDARY
ADJUSTMENT
HORIZONTAL
SPEED COIL
I
6 AG 5
4TH VIDEO IF AMP
HORIZONTAL
DRIVE TRIMMER
VIDEO
DETECTOR LOAD
HORIZONTAL
LOCK TRIMMER
RESISTOR (144)

-2. ,

HORIZONTAL
LINEARITY COIL" 6 SN 7 GT
6 AL5 V 5U 4G 6 SN7GT 1ST 8 2ND VIDEO AMP
13 D -C RESTORER, LV RECTIFIER SYNC AMP & CLIPPER
SYNC LEVELER

BOTTOM VIEW, CT 214 CHASSIS

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION.

SOUND TRAP ADJUSTMENT

CONVERTER COIL (SECONDARY)

SECONDARY MIXER 6J6

(SOUND) COIL) HEATERS
7/ OSC 6J6
TO ge THROUGH
1000 OHMS

PRIMARY
it I
OSC ADJ., WAVETRAPS FOR F -N ANTENNA
ADJUSTMENT, CH 2-5, 7-12 SIGNAL REJECTION CONNECTION

TO VIDEO
I -F GRID /
TO SOUND
I -F GRID

CH./
R -F SLUGS
CH.13-1

10K MIXER
DAMPING CH.13 CH. 6 CH.13 C11.6
RESISTOR MIXER SLUGS OSC. SLUGS TO .8 (RED) TO GRID BIAS LINE (GREEN)

R -F UNIT OF THE CT 214 CHASSIS

SOUND TRAP (SECONDARY)

CONVERTER COIL
SECONDARY TAP

-
PRIMARY ADJUSTMENT
WEER
R -F
TO SOUND
I F GRID
FINE TUNING DRIVE
ADJUSTMENT OSC 7
TO VIDEO ANTENNA
iF GRID CONNECTIONS

TO GRID
BIAS URE

ACCESS TO MIXER
COIL BOTTOM SLUG

ACCESS TO
HEATERS L -F COIL SLUGS A

POSER GRID IS
R -F MIXER OSC
,__ To .s
ACCESSIBLE
RED
CPC 2 COILS THROUGH HOLE

R -F UNIT OF THE CT 218 CHASSIS

I TB HEATERS
SOUND ADJUSTMENT
(SECONDARY) CONVERTER COIL

MIXER F -M SIGNAL
TRAPS
L -F OSC SLUG

OSC
YELLOW INDICATES WHICH R -F
SPAGHETTI LEAD CH IS IN POSITION
FROM COIL TO
SOUND I -F R -F AMP GRID
BIAS LINE
H -F OSC SLUG .

H -F RF COIL
VIDEO I -F
TO VIDEO
AMP GRID
H -F
MIXER COIL
L -F RF T,
AMP COIL

memit
/ -477.
CONVERTER COIL L -F
H -F L -F L -F H -F
PRIMARY ADJUSTMENT MIXER COIL MIXER TRIMMERS R -F TRIMMERS

R -F UNIT OF THE CT 221 CHASSIS

101
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
I -F R -F ALIGNMENT
In aligning the amplifiers, it must be remem-
bered that feedback between output and input
circuits leads to regeneration and, if feedlback be
appreciable, to oscillation. It may be determined
whether the amplifier is oscillating as follows:
Increasing signal generator output by a
factor of (for example) two should result in
a rise in output voltage in approximately the
same degree. If, instead, a decrease in output
with increased input is noted and if there be
a steady output voltage as indicated on the
V.T.V.M. even without input signal, the cir-
cuit is oscillating.
Regeneration insufficient to cause oscillation
gives rise to distortion of the reproduced response
curve, and proper alignment is not possible in
such event.
Regeneration may be caused by poor bonding
between the chassis of the receiver and of test
equipment being used. Connection should be made
by short, heavy leads. Many service organiza-
tions use a metallic sheet (galvanized iron is satis-
factory) atop the bench which affords good R -F
grounding between chassis, even though they are
not conductively connected thereto.
After the several connections of equipment are
made and a pattern being reproduced, it must be
possible to place the hand at various points of the
equipment chassis and along the interconnecting
cables, with no visible change in output potential
or wave form. Failure to attain this probably
means that regeneration is present, better ground-
ing is necessary and subsequent alignment ad-
justments are questionable.
It may be necessary, to realize such a condition
in the absence of a metal -topped bench, to employ
two or more short bonding wires between chassis,
connected at different points.
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR ALIGNMENT
Connect output of the signal generator to the
third I -F grid and set output of signal generator
for approximately one volt at 21.25 mc. Connect
Voltohmyst Jr. in series with one megohm re-
sistor to junction of diode load resistors (174)
and (175). Adjust primary core of 3rd Sound I -F
Transformer (4) for maximum d -c output. Move
Voltohmyst to output of discriminator (V7 Pin 1)
and adjust secondary core of 3rd Sound I -F Trans-
former (4) for zero d -c output. Readjust trans-
former (4) primary for symmetrical plus or minus
d -c output on either side of 21.25 mc.
The sweep, in conjunction with marker signals,
can also be used to align the discriminator but
the center cannot be set as accurately using this
method.
The peak to peak bandwidth of the discrimina-
tor should be approximately 350 kc and it should
be linear from 21.175 mc to 21.325 mc.
To observe the response curve on the oscillo-
graph, connect the sweep generator to the 3rd I -F
grid and the oscilloscope to the audio takeoff point,
102
pin 1 of the 6AL5 discriminator, V-7. The sweep
should center at 21.25 mc, with sweep width suffi-
cient to produce the "S" curve.
DIMENSION a .1)
LINE BETWEEN
GEOMETRIC CENTER
OF CURVE IS AT
PEAKS IS STRAIGHT. 21.25 MC.
21.25 MC
"S" CURVE, OUT-
PUT OF THE
PROPERLY -AD-
JUSTED FM DE-
TECTOR
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT
Connect sweep output to first I -F grid. Connect
oscilloscope to third I -F grid return (high end of
resistor 162) and adjust transformers (2) and (3)
for maximum gain at 21.25 mc and symmetry
about 21.25 mc. The output level from the sweep
should be set to produce approximately 0.3 volt
peak to peak at the third sound I -F grid return.
The bandwidth at seventy per cent response from
the first sound I -F grid to the third sound I -F
grid should be approximately 200 kc. If a 60 cycle
sweep rate is used, it will be necessary to reduce
the time constant in the second sound I -F grid
circuit in order to reproduce the response curve.
To do this, shunt resistor (162) with approxi-
mately 5600 ohms.
PASSBAND OF SOUND I -F
AMPLIFIERS
R -F UNIT ALIGNMENT
Since there are represented, three distinctly
separate R -F units, alignment procedures must be
covered in three parts. However, basic considera-
tions remain throughout, common between the
three.
For example, local oscillator adjustment is made
by inserting into the antenna terminals an R -F
signal of frequency equal to that of the sound
carrier of the particular channel being aligned.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Assuming that the sound discriminator has been
previously carefully aligned, adjustment is such
that the converted R -F -signal falls at the center
of the discriminator "S" curve. It should, thus, be
converted to precisely 21.25 mc. Local oscillator
tuning is to zero discriminator output, between
two peaks, indicated either by listening to the
speaker (using an A -M generator), or by measure
of D -C discriminator output (using unmodulated
signal generator).
CONNECTING THE GENERATOR
If generator output is not a 300 ohm balanced
circuit, a balanced condition for push-pull opera-
tion as shown below should be established.
The terminating resistor is equal to the cable
impedance and the two line resistors are such that
the receiver "sees" about 300 ohms. For example,
given generator cable of 50 ohms, the line re-
sistors should total 250 ohms, or 125 ohms each.
By such padding, both signal generator and re-
ceiver "look into" resistance equal to their re-
spective impedances, and a nearly balanced (push-
pull) condition is established.
LINE
RESISTOR
TO SIGNAL
GENERATOR
LINE
RESISTOR
Normally, only the oscillator will require the
attention of the service technician with respect
to alignment. Although adjustments are provided
for the R -F amplifier and converter circuits, these
are broadly -tuned and factory -adjustments should
suffice for the life of the instrument.
It is well to remember that local oscillator fre-
quency is subject to variation in exchange of os-
cillator tubes. Therefore, trial of several tubes
(even of the same manufacturer) is sometimes
necessary before finding one which does not ma-
terially change oscillator frequency, in the event
that replacement is necessary. Should all channels
appear to be detuned (the effect of off -capacity
tubes is greatest on the higher frequency chan-
nels) as evidenced by optimum sound reproduc-
tion near the end of rotation of the fine tuning
control, tube -exchange should be made until cor-
rect tuning is realized.
ALIGNMENT OF THE TUNER,
CT 214 RECEIVER
This is the tuner having 13 -channel positions
with coil -selection between channels. It uses 6J6
tubes in balanced circuit. The oscillator tube is
covered by a lead microphonic-shield.
OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
Oscillator alignment is predicated upon exact
alignment of the sound discriminator circuits.
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
Alignment must start with channel 13 and pro-
gress in consecutive channels toward the lowest -
frequency channel, since any adjustment to a coil
will also affect all channels of lower frequency.
With RF signal supplied to the antenna termi-
nals, set the signal generator (crystal calibrated)
to the R -F sound carrier frequency of the chan-
nel being aligned. Set the fine tuning control about
midway in its rotation. Adjust the oscillator ad-
justments (slug or screw) so that the sound I -F
is 21.25 mc as indicated by
(a) Sound in the speaker, a zero -null between
two peaks. In this, an A -M generator is re-
quired.
(b) Zero voltage on a V.T.V.M. between a posi-
tive and a negative peak. An unmodulated
generator should here be used.
Access to oscillator adjustments, with the ex-
ception of channels 6 and 13, is from the front
of the tuner. These are revealed without necessity
for chassis or front -panel removal, by removing
the two knobs, CHANNEL and FINE TUNING.
R -F AMPLIFIER, CONVERTER
ALIGNMENT, CT 214
1. Connect sweep generator to antenna input, not-
ing the precaution regarding termination. Con-
nect the oscilloscope to the grid of the con-
verter through a 10,000 ohm resistor. Bypass
the converter plate circuit to ground through
approximately 1000 mfd.
2. With the channel switch in position 13, and
the sweep covering this channel (see Part I for
frequencies), adjust L25 and L26, L51 and L52
for the normal over coupled circuit curve. As
illustrated, the curve should be symmetrical be-
tween the sound and video carrier frequency
markers, which should occur at approximately
the 90 to 100 per cent points: L25 and L26
stud extensions should be maintained approxi-
mately equal, to maintain symmetry, as should
L51 and L52 adjustments.
Next, channels 12 to 7 should be checked for
frequency. Normally, these curves appear some-
what overcoupled or double -humped with a 10 or
15 per cent peak -to -valley excursion. Sound and
video markers should occur at approximately 90%
response. Tolerances allow some shift in these
curves but in no case should the markers fall at
less than 70% response points. Channel 7 is gen-
erally the worst offender in this respect and in
some few cases it may be necessary to compromise
(9.1- -
80% 80%
20 % MAX.
VALLEY NOT GREATER
THAN 20%.
VIDEO AND SOUND CARRIERS
WITHIN THE 80% LIMITS.
TYPICAL R -F PASSBAND, ALL UNITS
CT 220 IS ROUNDED ON HIGH CHANNELS, AS AT (a). 103
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
on the adjustment of channel 13 to realize all
markers about the 70'2:- point.
Channel 6 is next aligned as was channel 13,
tuning L11 and L12, L37 and L38.
Channels 5 to 2 should then be checked as were
12 to 7, above.
ALIGNMENT OF THE TUNER,
CT 218 RECEIVER
This tuner is the 12 channel unit using 6BH6,
6AG5 and 6C4 tubes, with coil -selection between
channels. A metallic shield encloses the below -
chassis components. Therefore, in alignment, in
order to eliminate repeated removal and replace-
ment of the shield during coil adjustment, the fine
tuning control may be set about 120° from its mid -
position in the direction of less capacity (clock-
wise in production units, but the split stator fine
tuning rotor may be toward the rear of the chassis
from the stator plates, making this rotation coun-
terclockwise).
Note that the fine tuning wheel is secured to its
shaft by two set -screws. Therefore, if all stations
tune toward the end of rotation, it is possible to
reset this control by loosening the screws.
OSCILLATOR COILS
Oscillator coils in the five lower channels are
tunable by means of slug -adjustments which are
sealed in wax. Those of the seven higher channels
are variable by adjusting the wire loops, spread-
ing the loop apart or making it smaller. Coils
should not be permitted to touch another coil or
circuit element, nor to fold back upon itself in
mechanical connection, else variable contacts may
give rise to intermittent operation.
Alignment is by the same process as was used
in connection with the CT 214 chassis:
Connect signal generator to the antenna
terminals, set at the sound carrier frequency
of the channel being aligned (see Part I) and
adjust the coil for zero -null in the sound -
discriminator. The discriminator must have
been first determined to be properly aligned.
Reheat the L -F slugs after adjustment, to se-
cure the adjustments against vibration.
R -F AMPLIFIER, CONVERTER
ALIGNMENT, CT 218
Connect sweep generator to the antenna termi-
nals, observing proper termination to the gener-
ator cable as outlined in connection with the
CT 214 chassis. Connect the oscilloscope to the
grid of the 6AG5 converter (pin 1, nearest the
right-hand side facing the unit) through a 10,000
ohm resistor.
Through a 1000 mmfd. (approx.) condenser,
g,ound the plate of the 6AG5 mixer. Conn,'rtion
may be made to the plate side of C19 (270 mmfd,
coupling to video I -F grid).
With the channel switch in position 13 and
the sweep covering this channel, adjust P-13 and
G13 (3 turn coils) by spreading or compressing
turns for the normal curve as illustrated.
104
Next, channels 12 to 7 should be checked for
frequency response. They should fulfill the limits
of the typical curve shown and, if they do not,
it will be necessary to readjust P13 and G13.
Channel 6 is next aligned as was channel 13,
tuning P6 and G6 (9 turn coils near the switch
spacer bars). Check channels 5 to 2 as were 12 to 7
above.
ALIGNMENT OF THE CT 221 RECEIVER
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
The fine tuning control may be rotated through
360° and it will therefore be found that the sound
carrier may be tuned in two positions which should
be separated by greater than Y2 inch as measured
on the circumference of the fine tuning knob. If
this condition is not met :
1. An oscillator tube being off -capacity causes
all stations to tune near one end of rotation.
2. If the notched dial wheel has been removed
and replaced, improper relationship of the
gear teeth will cause a like effect, or cause a
station to tune on the wrong channel. A like
effect is noted if the slotted dial -mount shaft
has been rotated before locking with the
Allen screws.
3. Tune the oscillator slugs as follows:
(a) Assuming proper alignment of the dis-
criminator, connect an electronic D -C volt-
meter to the sound output point of the dis-
criminator (pin 1 to ground, V7).
(b) Feed an unmodulated RF signal at the
sound carrier frequency of channel 7
(179.95 mc) into the antenna terminals, set-
ting selector to No. 7.
(c) Tune High -band oscillator slug so that
zero output between two peaks is had, when
the Fine Tuning is near the center of its
range.
(d) It may be necessary to compromise the
setting of Channel 13, to attain the most -
uniform positioning on channels 12-7.
(e) Low -band slug -tuning is by the same
process.
The slug is adjusted on channel 2, whose sound
carrier lies at 59.75 mc. Again, some compromise
may be necessary to approximate center -of -the
fine tuning scale on channels 2-6.
There are provided, trimmer condensers for
alignment of R -F amplifier and converter stages
on both high and low channels. Adjustment is as
follows:
(a) Connect sweep and marker generators to
the antenna terminals, through a resistor
network if necessary as outlined in connec-
tion with the CT 214 R -F alignment.
(b) Connect the mixer plate to ground through
approximately 1000 mmfd. Access to the
plate is at the plate -side of the condenser
coupling to the video 1 -le grid, using a
miniature insulated clip and keeping it as
far from the coil as possible.
(c) Connect the oscilloscope to the mixer grid
coil center -tap, across the grid -leak resistor.
Since the two coils have their center -taps
connected, scope -connection should be to
the coil which is not being used (connect
to the low -band coil when checking high
bands, etc.).
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
(d) Adjust R -F amplifier and converter trim-
ming condensers to approximate the typical
curve shown. Turn the two condenser screws
associated with either circuit by approxi-
mately the same amount, to maintain elec-
trical symmetry.
ALTERNATE R -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENTS
If the available sweep generator has insufficient
output potential to observe a pattern through the
R -F amplifier, connection of the oscilloscope may
be made to the video detector load resistor, gener-
ator to the antenna terminals and the unit aligned
by observing the receiver's overall characteristic.
On all three types of R -F unit, the curve obtained
should approximate that shown. This is based
upon assurance that video I -F alignment is correct.
Switch between R -F channels, correcting the
sweep generator frequency to correspond. There
may be some differential between reproduced
curves, which is permissible. If, however, there be
major differential, the R -F amplifier is in need of
some retouching. It is seldom that R -F amplifier
adjustments will require adjustment.
VIDEO ALIGNMENT
Connect the oscilloscope across the video de-
tector load resistor (R144). This is between the
"low" end of the green peaking coil of the detector
circuit, and ground. (If the signal generator to be
used has not provision for amplitude modulation,
use a V.T.V.M. instead of the oscilloscope). Apply
AM to the generator.
The signal generator is to be connected into the
grid of the converter, through a small mica ca-
pacitor for D -C isolation. Access to the grids in
the three types of R -F unit assemblies is as illus-
trated.
Set bias on I -F bus by adjusting the picture
control to approximately 3 volts. Make the follow-
ing adjustments, in order:
Gen. Fre-
quency, MC Adjust For
21.25 Converter trap (top slug).__.minimum
21.25 Cathode trap, V15 (top) minimum
19.75 2nd I -F trap (top) minimum
27.25 1st I -F trap (top) minimum
21.8 Converter plate (bottom) maximum
25.3 1st I -F (bottom) maximum
22.3 2nd I -F (bottom) maximum
25.2 3rd I -F (top of chassis) maximum
23.4 4th I -F (top of chassis) maximum
GRID
CT 214 TUNER CT 218 TUNER
ACCESS TO CONVERTER GRIDS FOR I -F ALIGNMENT
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
It is necessary from this point in the video I -F
alignment, to assume proper alignment of the R -F
unit, which is a prerequisite. The local oscillator
must be fixed by the fine tuning control, so that
an R -F signal at the sound -carrier frequency of
one of the lower -frequency channels appears as a
null in the speaker, between two peaks (the center
of the discriminator "S" curve). Furthermore, the
R -F amplifier alignment must be proper, so that
the R -F video and sound carriers are above the
90% amplitude points on the R -F response curve.
Connect the oscilloscope across the video de-
tector load resistor (R144) and the R -F sweep gen-
erator to the antenna terminals. Observe the con-
nections indicated under "R -F alignment" regard-
ing the use of single -ended signal generator cable.
If necessary, retouch the I -F amplifier slugs to
give the proper response curve as shown :
In making any final touch-up adjustments, it
should be remembered that the converter and 2nd
video I -F coils are relatively high "Q" circuits
and tend to control the I -F response at the high
and low frequency ends of the band respectively,
while the 1st and 3rd video I -F coif are low "Q"
and tend to control overall response over the cen-
ter position of the pass band.
since there is some slight shift in response with
change in bias, the recommended level (-3 volts)
should always be used when aligning this circuit.
22 MC
25.75 MC
PICTURE CARRIER
21.25 MC
SOUND
CARRIER
27.25 MC
19.75 MC
ADJ. SOUND
ADJ. PICTURE
VIDEO -I-F SELECTIVITY CURVE
AND OVERALL IF -RF CURVE
GRID CONNECTION WHEN
HF COIL SWITCHED IN
az
WHEN L -F COIL IN
CT 221 TUNER
105
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
PICTURE DEFECTS

OPEN PEAKING NETWORK OPEN CATHODE BYPASS, C84 (HORIZ. LINEARITY CIR-
VERT. OUTPUT GRID C85, R141 VERT. OUTPUT, C95 CUIT) OPEN

bb\
41.11.00..opor****.00i4
1110.4.00.4....******
01111karam

DEFECTIVE DAMPING RESIS- OPEN CATHODE BYPASS, LEAKY SAWTOOTH FORMING

TOR, HORIZ. OSCILLATOR, R155. HORIZ. OUTPUT, C90 CONDENSER, C61
UNABLE TO SYNC. HORIZ.

11111111,
LEAKY COUPLING CONDENS- LEAKY COUPLING CONDENS- LEAKY COUPLING CONDENS-
ER, GRID OF HORIZ. OUTPUT ER, VERT. OUTPUT GRID, C89 ER, GRID OF 2nd VIDEO AMPL.,
TUBE, C41 (FOLDOVER AT BOTTOM) C80

LEAKY COUPLING CONDENS- IMPROPER VALUE OF PLATE GROUNDING SPRINGS NOT

ER, 2nd VIDEO AMPL. OUTPUT, LOAD RESISTOR, 1st VIDEO CONTACTING THE PICTURE
C81 AMPL. EXPANDED TO BETTER TUBE SHELL. PICTURE EX -
SHOW H.F. PHASE SHIFT, PANDED TO SHOW STREAK -
SMEARING. ING, DISTORTION.

106
 f.-
1i
900,11161
O
O
_L,S2 "
(61- 939 9g4
1,A9 -
9314110 WA 9019 091A
st.ng 050 WOR 01'0 -tom
19LNS9 19LNS9 2/I
IMP
o
tleUti.4 o.
suoT 4.3 AtItIO 0
p ea e quints'
1,J2Z@ °,111
e 107 1,0o"
ir100A
r.16, 3/3 A093 91116
11,1100 1030
.1/3 ASO 0140
350 1830
991A
9344110 ONAS
BS1A
11313031 0.5
sin nal
drlef 0.5
0 60704 19LNS9 19LNS9 VI 19LNS9 VI 9199 ?II 19LNS9 Z/I
CD
Ar4
EZA
Gill 380101d
115131
nal
09IA

C)
131.111

n8
am At
OVIA

O
CIA EIA Oln
83801538 00 1010 03010 ME 191 03010 151 130 010in 3-103010 W. MY 0301n Otlf 4-1 030111 ONE 4-10301A 151
s -in 3/1 19LNS9 3/I 19LNS9 VI b£N1 9999 9909 0099 S099
uOingnOtra
0
V
6A 9A 9n Sn
109100 4-0 0510 44 4-100005 MK 3-100005 ONE 4-100005 151
19979 9199 01/9 9999 9999 9099
1141311
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION

R -F

R -F TUNER, CT 214

2 ALL ELECTRICAL VALUES

SHOWN ARE IN OMAS OR
MMF
SPECIF LESSU OTHERWISE
INDICATES CHASSIS
GROUND

R -F TUNER, CT 218 ART

L
T. TERN WARP

FY ANT k.nt
4.-OMPB-1-1-11--gwrcw

6J6

,L6
CO
BOTTOM HEW OF CHASSIS
FRONT

I. BAND SWITCH SHOWN IN

VGLOOKWISE POSITION.
2. ALL ELECTRICAL VALUES
SHOWN ARE IN OHMS OR
MAW UNLESS OTHERWISE

33. -.Z?NDEICITES CHASSIS

GROUND

6J6
V3

I
STATION SELECTOR SHOWN
IN NUMBER POSITION
2 ALL ELECTRICAL VALUES
11 SHOWN ARE IN OHMS OR
I MMF UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECFI3
Rri INDICATES CHASSIS
GROUND

R -F TUNER, CT 221

108
 m
00153110
AN 50_
1.011 001.1
O
OM
5 s'Y'
s. . I(. )1
0 AVI 99
® Ifj
3011
30
4,4,, dtd no*
14 8 0 OION VON
013
831111030 /.9 i I seen 581A
aong ttSS
Og:5 101.16t 1100
7,,fseiv-- DSO 0014 010+4
.I.DLNS9 Z/I
.I.OGNS9 Z/I
09989
OZA
1030 A H (a) Ind
9109/.1.9281`-'4.
3.3110 533.
aetmq. og.
stIOT 40 elt-ItIO 0
0 091.15
193A at peaecitunx
t et® e
£

'4J339.
0
)191
O

9
49 T3
1911- _
1,27,MC
n ea . 9
IMMO,
C..
e I,
® 44e4.___Ztk------^""---
41100 .30 3
ln.gr A09( d/0 A. VIII dhl A911Wel
0910 8011
01F1
did A. v91A 1
® mail: =- sge?. andano 1830 OSO 1830 11311193 'ONAS 113130317NAS VV. 'ONAS
il,
.-Ha
t
~^^^-0-0.
9
e.-nnen--una,-
°-.'
e4
19LNS9 Z/I 10LNS9 2/I .1.9LNS9 Z/I 8109 2/I .LOLNS9 2/I
f.t), -NY
99- ,e) GS. 533.
can
3e11 3801011
bc0IZI

3.91111.1
99 d81 , ..e. -s' .z..- t?,
533.
eel
aolla
.....1111 fktD AIA90 0
c)
I
We A 2f
dAlG ® el/d 0
OSIA 13VIA IVIA £1A ZIA III 01A
8380193N 109 03010 ONE &IV 03010 1S1 13003010 3-103010 141.0 JWv 031311085 1-I 03010 OK 1-I 03010 151
8109 Zit 10LNS9 Z/I 10LNS9 2/I b£N1 4009 4909 8909 8909
933 55- 991
091.
900"
0" 9011 1140510
6A BA 90 SA
1ne1n0 3-0 ISI 3510 1-V 310N1109 000 3-1 arenas 052 3-I act's' 15111...116,
109)19 9199 8109 9109 9089 9989
.15 il 313
1-pressa
4
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MAGNAVOX CT 214-218-221 TELEVISION
SEE TABLE

a
O

12

O
6K6GT 0
GAGS
°
V9 6BA6
V4
awn

SEE TABLE 1137 1

GAGS
VII
1830./8106

68666
VI9 83

0
SEE TAR.

GALS
VT
0 0 GAGS

9°
V13

6SN7GT qp +0 ®p0
1
V16
L Virefe 31

(1;7--'0'

6SN7G
0 ©41"
01
1

C:41,,i
, c---.7.
.. ,5to ro,,, .
°we
t
,,,.. _
NO Ar
.:. to,
, ION,8
...6SN7GT SEE TABLE
6SN7GT '' VI4
4tei ci 0
1

vi, ®11

EE TABLE

ITEM ELECTRICAL VALUES

NO. CT214A C721413 CT2I4C
25 SEC.I,2,3 OMIT SEC2 OMITSEG 2
33 120 MMF 180 MMF 180 MMF
86 .25 MFD 25 MFD 25 STRAP
96 OMIT .01 MFD .01 MFD
97 OMIT 120 MMF ISO MMF
98 OMIT USE USE
99 OMIT USE USE
173 IOOK i5OK 150K

SEE TABLE

110 PARTS IDENTIFICATION

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

SERVICE MANUAL
MODELS CHASSIS
VT105 TS -9
VTIO5M TS -9A
VK 106
This material is presented on TS -96
VK 1066 TS -9C
VK I06M pages 111 to 130, inclusive.
TS -9D
VT107
VTIO7M

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHASSIS

Chassis TS -9. This television chassis has 22 tubes plus a 10" picture tube. The
picture, sound and scanning circuits, together with their power supply, are con-
tained on a single chassis. Four type 25Z6GT tubes, operating in a bridge circuit,
are used to supply "B" power. It is designed to operate on 105 to 125 volts, 60
cycle alternating current.

Chassis TS -9A. Same as Chassis TS -9 except that the four 25Z6GT bridge circuit
rectifier tubes are replaced with a conventional power supply circuit using 2 rec-
tifier tubes (SY3GT & 5U4G). The power transformer in this chassis differs from
the one used in Chassis TS -9. A total of 20 tubes plus a 10" picture tube are used
in this chassis.

Chassis TS -9B. Same as Chassis TS -9 except that a reflexed type audio circuit was
added to obtain greater audio amplification. The 1st sound IF amplifier is used as
a combination 21.9 Mc IF amplifier and as an audio amplifier.

Chassis TS -9C. Similar to Chassis TS -9A but has added sound IF stage to reduce
variations in sound level with setting of contrast control. This chassis has 21
tubes plus a 10" picture tube.

Chassis TS -9D. A new clipping and horizontal synchronization system was incorpo-
rated in this chassis. V-13 (6SN7GT) was replaced by a 12AU7 and an additional
12AU7 and 6ALS were added bringing the tube total to 23 plus a 10" picture tube.
Two trimmer adjustments, "Horiz Lock -in" and "Horiz Fine Freq" were eliminated from
the rear of the chassis. The "Horiz Oscillator" adjustment which was formerly on
the top of the chassis was placed at the rear, and the "Focus" control pot which
replaced the variable resistor in the late TS -9C chassis was retained in the TS -9D.

ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

By means of the four connection antenna receptacle, either a 75 ohm un-

balanced, or 300 ohm balanced input is available. This receiver is normally wired
to match a 300 ohm balanced line. If the receiver is to be used with a 75 ohm
line, rewire the input circuit as shown in Figure 1.
1 1 1
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
SECT OF
300 ft TWIN
300 A TWIN TRANS. LINE
TRANS. LINE

(*)
INPUT CONNECTIONS FOR
A 300 11 TRANSMISSION ANTENNA RECEPTACLE
LINE. ON TELEVISION CHASSIS
(TOP VIEW)

ANTENNA TERMINAL CONNECTOR PLUG

STRIP ON BACK OF FOR ANTENNA
CABINET RECEPTACLE ON
TELEVISION CHASSIS

SECT. OF
75A
COAXIAL LINE
75 A
COAXIAL LINE

REVISED INPUT CONNEC-

TIONS IF A 7511 COAXIAL
LINE IS USED.

FIGURE 1. ANTENNA CONNECTIONS FOR 300 OR 75 OHM LINES

OPERATING CONTROLS
There are 8 controls on the front panel of your receiver. See Figure 2.
Note that each front panel control is A dual control, consisting of a small knob
and a large knob. The function of each control is indicated by markings on the
front panel; the "circle" indicates the large knob while the "dot" indicates the
small knob. See Figure 2 for front panel control functions.

f
NOTE: 0 INDICATES LARGE OUTER KNOB. INDICATES SMALL INNER KNOB.
f-
4$ O CHANNEL VERTICAL 0
FINE TUNING HORIZONTAL

VOLUME 0 CONTRAST
OFF TONE BRIGHTNESS

CHANNEL OFF -TONE BRIGHTNESS HORIZONTAL

CHANNEL SELECTOR TURNS SET SETS PICTURE STOPS PICTURE
AND INDICATOR. N' a 'OF BRILLIANCE. MOVING LEFT OR
A NO ADJ USFTS RIGHT.
SOUND TONE.

- FINE TUNING -VOLUME CONTRAST- VERTICAL

TUNES RECEIVER ADJUSTS VOLUME MAKES PICTURE STOPS PICTURE
FOR BEST SOUND OF SOUND. BRIGHTER OR MOVING UP OR
AND PICTURE. DARKER. DOWN.

FIGURE 2. OPERATING CONTROLS

SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS

The receiver is completely adjusted at the factory, so normally none other
than the front panel control operating instructions need be followed in putting the
receiver in operation. However, to provide for any misadjustment of the service
controls, due to handling, the following instructions are in order. See Figures 3A,
B & C for location of service adjustment controls.

112
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

HORIZ. FREO CENTERING

SCREWS
(COARSE)
L-55

5V4G
V-18 REAR VIEW FOCUS
OF CHASSIS or-R-110
HORIZ. 0 IVE HORIZ. HORIZ. FREQ.
C -62C 1 LOCK -IN FINE) POWER
C C-62 8 INPUT
VERT
-42A 00
LINEARITY

0
R -73
HORIZ. HORIZ.
SIZE LI NEARITY
L-56 L- 57 VERT.
SI

SIZE NOT USED

R -64 IN SOME
CHASSIS

FIGURE 3A. CHASSIS TS ..9, A, B & EARLY C SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL LOCATIONS

CENTERING
HORIZ. FREO SCREWS
(COARSE)
L-55

5V4G
V-18 REAR VIEW
OF

HORIZ. DRIVE- HORIZ. HOR Z. FREO,

C -62C -IN (FINE) POWER
C -62A C-62 INPUT
8 ODD

HORIZ.
SIZE
L- 56
0
HORIZ.
LINEARITY
1-- 57 FOCUS
R-151
a
VERT.
LINEARITY
O
VERT.
SIZ E
R-64
R-73

FIGURE 3B. CHASSIS TS -9C (LATE) SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL LOCATIONS

CENTERING
SCREWS

REAR VIEW
OF CHASSIS
a
HORIZ. DRIVE HORIZ.
6144 POWER
OLS6C1
INPUT
VERT. fo ol
FOCUS SIZE

0
R -151 R-64
HORI Z.
SIZE
L- 56
HORI Z.
LINEARITY
L-57
0VERT
LINEARITY
R-73

FIGURE 3C. CHASSIS TS -9D SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL LOCATIONS

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
FOCUS CONTROL

The FOCUS control should be adjusted until the fine horizontal line structure
of the raster is clearly visible over the picture area. The control should be
turned through the correct point several times so that optimum focus is obtained.

CENTERING

The picture is centered by positioning the focus coil. By means of three

screws, the focus coil can be shifted to center the picture in its mask. These
centering screws can be reached by removing the safety screen from back of receiver.
A separate line cord, such as Motorola Fart No. 3013470756, will be required to
supply power to receiver when screen is removed.

VERTICAL SIZE AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the VERTICAL SIZE control R-64 until picture fills the mask vertically
(6-3/8" minimum). Adjust VERTICAL LINEARITY control R-73 for best overall vertical
linearity. Adjustment of the VERTICAL SIZE control will require a readjustment of
the VERTICAL LINEARITY control and vice -versa. Center picture with centering screws
on focus coil.

HORIZONTAL SIZE, DRIVE AND LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT

Turn HORIZONTAL SIZE control L-56 fully clockwise. Vary HORIZONTAL DRIVE
trimmer (C -62C in Chassis TS -9, A, B & C - C-144 in Chassis TS -9D) for best com-
promise between brightness and horizontal linearity. Clockwise rotation increases
picture width. Adjust HORIZONTAL LINEARITY control L47 for best horizontal lin-
earity on right half of picture. Adjustment of the HORIZONTAL SIZE will require a
readjustment of the HORIZONTAL LINEARITY control and vice -versa. Center picture
with centering screws on focus coil.

HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR CHECK

Obtain a picture on the set with approximately normal contrast. Vary the
HORIZONTAL HOLD control R -69B from one extreme to the other. The picture should re-
main in horizontal sync in all positions of the control except the extreme counter-
clockwise, and there the picture should show a marked tendency to slip to the right.
This slippage serves as a reference point to insure the proper range of the hold
control to give synchronization under all conditions. If picture fails to show this
tendency to slip,
1. Leave the HORIZONTAL HOLD control in the extreme counterclockwise position
2. Adjust the HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer C -62B until the picture tends to
slip to the right.
3. Rotate the HORIZONTAL HOLD control clockwise until the picture falls into
sync, then rotate an additional 10-15 degrees clockwise and leave in that
position.

When the receiver has been adjusted in this manner, it should be possible to
switch off and on the station or to another station and have the picture in syn-
chronism at all times. If this is possible, the horizontal oscillator is properly
aligned.

The horizontal oscillator is properly adjusted in the TS -9D chassis if the

picture remains in sync in all positions of the HORIZONTAL HOLD control. If this is

114
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
not the case, adjust HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR coil L-61 on the rear of the chassis until
the picture holds throughout the range of the control.

COMPLETE ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR (CHASSIS TS -9, A, B & C ONLY)

If, in the above check, the receiver failed to hold sync over the proper range
of the HORIZONTAL HOLD control, the horizontal oscillator should be aligned as
follows:

1. Turn CONTRAST CONTROL for about normal picture contrast.

2. Turn HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer C -62B tight.
3. Adjust HORIZONTAL LOCK -IN trimmer C -62A to about 2 turns from tight.
4. Adjust the horizontal oscillator coil L-55 so that the picture will lock -
in over the whole range of the HORIZONTAL HOLD control.
5. If it is not possible to obtain proper syncing in Step 4, back off on
HORIZONTAL LOCK -IN trimmer an additional turn, or until it is possible to
adjust L-55 to make the picture sync over the whole range of the HORIZON-
TAL HOLD control.
6. Turn the HORIZONTAL HOLD control to its extreme counterclockwise position.
7. Adjust the HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer until the picture tends to slip
to the right.
8. Rotate the HORIZONTAL HOLD control clockwise 10-15 degrees past the point
at which the picture falls into sync, and leave it in that position.
It should now be possible to change stations without losing synchronism.

ADJUSTMENT OF ION TRAP AND DEFLECTION YOKE

Under conditions of rough shipment, it is possible for these parts to become

misaligned. The following instructions will enable the service man to bring the
parts to their normal setting.

See Figure 4 for adjustment locations. A mirror placed in front of the

receiver will help in making these adjustments.
NOTEIF A RING TYPE ION TRAP PICTURE
IS USED ITS ARROW MUST CENTERING DEFLECTION YOKE KINESCOPE KINESCOPE
POINT TOWARD FRONT OF SCREWS (3) ADJUSTMENT RU CONNECTION
KINESCOPE.
KINESCOPE
ION TRAP CUSHION
LOCKING SCREWS
FOCUS
KINESCOPE COIL
SOCKET

BLACK
(TOWARDS REAR)
MAGNETS

FLAGS
INSIDE KINESCOPE KINESCOPE
KINESCOPE CUSHION GROUNDING
ADJUSTMENTS SPRING (2)

NOTC-ION TRAP MAGNETS MUST BE LOCATED

- OPPOSITE KINESCOPE HU CONNECTION.
BLACK BLUE Ls.IF NV CONNECTION IS ON BOTTOM,
ION TRAP MAGNETS MUST BE ON TOP.
LOCATION OF ION
TRAP ON KINESCOPE

FIGURE 4. KINESCOPE ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

115
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ADJUSTMENT OF THE ION TRAP

Two types of permanent magnet ion traps are used on the TS -9 series chassis.
One is held in place with two clamps, colored black and blue; and the other slips
over the neck of the tube and consists of a large and a small circular magnet.

Shifting of the ion trap will result in poor brilliancy, or shadowing of the
corners. The ion trap should be mounted on the neck of the kinescope so that the
black end, or large magnet, is toward the rear of the kinescope and approximately
over the "flags" on the kinescope's gun structure. Vile observing the raster on
the screen, move the ion trap slightly backward or forward, simultaneously turning
it slightly to and fro until the brightest raster is obtained, and one in which none
of the four corners are cut off or shadowed. These adjustments should be made with
the brightest picture obtainable, consistent with good line focus and a full, square
raster. When adjustment is completed, tighten screws to hold ion trap in position.

DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT

If the deflection yoke shifts, the picture will be tilted. To correct, loosen
the wing nut on top of the deflection yoke and rotate yoke till picture is straight.
Before tightening wing nut, make certain that the deflection yoke is as far forward
as possible.

ALIGNMENT

GENERAL, The alignment procedure covers all chassis, through TS -9D.

The chassis should be mounted on angle iron brackets (Motorola Part Number
7B484018) so that all connections and adjustments may be made easily. Spurious
response trouble may be reduced to a minimum by bonding the chassis and all instru-
ments together with braided metal straps.

A metal screwdriver may be used for making video IF adjustments, but a plastic
or fibre screwdriver is required for RF or sound IF alignment.

EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR ALIGNMENT

AM Signal Generator: Frequency Range 20-220 mc

Output 0-100,000 microvolts

Electronic Voltmeter

Oscilloscope

Sweep Frequency Generator: Frequency Range 20-30 mc

Sweep Width: 10 mc minimum

VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

It will be necessary to remove the kinescope to expose two video IF tuning

cores. A short screwdriver of 2 to 3 inches in length is convenient for making the
adjustments.

1. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel, e.g., the position
which would correspond to channel 14 or 15 if there were such marking on the switch.
This disables the local oscillator and prevents spurious responses in the IF ampli-
fier.
116
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
2. Turn the receiver on, and adjust the contrast control R -76B, for -5 volts
bias, as measured from the variable tap of the control to chassis.

3. Apply a -3 volt bias to the mixer grid by means of a dry battery. Con-
nect the positive terminal of the battery to ground and the - 3 volt terminal to
the point at which the two 470,000 ohm resistors (R-6 & R-7) in the mixer grid are
connected.

4. Connect the signal generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor of

100 mmf to .01 mf, to the grid of the mixer tube V-2 (6J6, pin 5). The low side of
the signal generator should be connected to the oscillator coil mounting plate near
the mixer tube socket. To avoid regeneration, keep the grid and ground leads to
the signal generator as short as possible.

5. Connect the electronic voltmeter across the video detector load resistor,
R-48 (4700 ohms). With zero output from the generator, the meter should read less
than 1 volt negative contact potential. A voltage appreciably greater than this in-
dicates oscillation in the IF strip; and the generator lead connections, groundings,
etc., should be checked.

In the TS -9D the video detector load resistor (R-48) is tied to B- instead of
ground as in previous versions. Care should be taken to connect the voltmeter di-
rectly across the resistor and not to ground.

6. Adjust the output of the signal generator throughout alignment for no more
than 1 volt increase across the detector load resistor to prevent overdriving the
IF amplifier. Use the 3 volt range on the electronic voltmeter.

7. Refer to Figures 5 & 6 for location of alignment adjustments and to the

following chart for procedure.
SIG. GEN.
STEP FREQ. ADJUST REMARKS

1 23.6 mc L-59 (or T-5) Adjust for maximum.

2 26.4 me T-6 Adjust for maximum.
3 22.9 mc T-7 Adjust for maximum.
25.7 mc T-8 Adjust for maximum. NOTE: This
adjustment will,normally tune
very broadly, since the core is
practically out of coil.
5 21.9 mc L-44 Increase generator output about
(Ts -9D,21.7mc) 10 times and adjust for minimum.
(Sound trap adjustment).
6 25.7 mc T-8 Readjust for maximum as in Step 4.
7 24.7 mc T-9 Adjust for maximum.

The normal video IF sensitivity is less than 400 microvolts at 24.5 mc for an 0

increase of 1 volt above contact potential, across the detector load, R-48, with
-3 V. mixer bias and zero contrast bias.
The video IF amplifier response curve is shown in Figure 7. The bandwidth at
the 3 db points should be approximately 3.5 mc. To check this with an AM generator,
note the signal strength in microvolts necessary to produce an increase of approxi-
mately 1 volt above contact potential at 24.5 mc. Increase the generator input by
1.4 times and shift the generator frequency both sides of 24.5 mc until the original
detector voltage reading is again obtained. These two new frequencies thus obtained
are the 3 db skirt frequencies and should be approximately 22.9 me and 26.4 mc.
This measurement should be made with the -3 volt mixer bias and a -5 volt contrast
bias.
117
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
HORIZONTAL
HOLD BRIGHTNESS -0 POWER SWITCH
A TONE
0- FINE TUNING

VERTICAL RAST )4 -VOLUME 4 -CHANNEL SELECTOR

HOLD
AL
V-2
MIXER 05C.

TOP VIEW OF
CHASSIS T-5 OR L-59
216 MC
V., RE
RF AMP TUNER
V-3
IST VIDEO 1 F
T-6
26.4 MGM,
ANTENNA
RECEPTACLE
V-4
2NQ VIDEO IF

V.130 8 V OUTPUT AMP T-7

22.9 MCH
V-10 V-5
VIDEO IF
4th VIDEO IF

V -II m25.7 MC
POWER
PULSE AMP VIDEO DET
8 PULSE TRANSFORMER
8 STRIPPER STRIPPER USED ONLY IN
CHASSIS TS -9C
I.VdisT5VP
WRE8
AMP IiI4S-mdTRAp
V-N6D
IF
Ml&la OSC 8 V-24
OR IZ CONY.
PRI. OUND IF
(TOP)
SEC.
(800 V-26
10 SOUND
V-7 IF RECT.

21.9 MC
SOUND DISC.
PRI (TOP)

V-9
AF AMP

CHASSIS TS -9A aTS-9C CHASSIS TS -9 a TS -98

(OTHERWISE SAME AS TS -9A)

FIGURE 5. CHASSIS TS -9, A, B & C TUBE & IF ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

As the video IF in the TS -9D is 26.2 mc instead of 26.4 mc, it will appear
slightly above the 3 db point at 26.4 mc. If, when checking the response with a
sweep generator, the picture carrier appears too high on the curve, adjustment of
the 26.4 mc I.F. (T-6) will bring it down to the desired position.

4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT

1. Connect the signal generator to the plate of the video detector, V-11,
(6ALS, pin 7).

2. Connect the electronic voltmeter and germanium crystal rectifier, as

shown in Figure 8, to the plate of the 2nd video amplifier, V-12 (12AU7, pin 6).
Use the lowest voltage scale on the meter.

3. With the signal generator set at L.5 mc and maximum output, adjust trap
L-46 for minimum reading on the meter.

An alternate method is to tune in a normal picture and adjust L-46 so that

the strippled or half -tone effect in the picture is minimized or eliminated. Make
sure the fine tuning control is set on center audio peak while this adjustment is
being made. The RF portion of the receiver must, of course, be aligned first before
this method of adjusting the sound trap is attempted.

118
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
HORIZONTAL POWER SWITCH FINE TUNING
BRIGHTNESS & TONE
VERTICAL CONTRAST -- -0-CHANNEL SELECTOR
HOLD
1.-V
NO TYPE FUNCTION
V-1
V-2
V-3
6AG5
6J6
6BA6
RF AMP
MIXER-OSC
1ST VIDEO IF
TOP VIEW OF
CHASSIS 0
V-4 6BA6 2ND VIDEO IF L-59
23.6 MC
V-5 6BA6 3RD VIDEO IF RF
V-6
V-7
V-8
V-9
6AU6
6AU6
618
6V6GT
SOUND IF
SOUND IF
DISC 81ST AUDIO AMP
AUDIO AMP TzZ.-64 MG
00 TUNER

ANTENNA
V -I0 6AG5 4TH VIDEO IF RECEPTACLE
V-11 , 6AL5 VIDEO DE T & NOISE LIMITER
V-12
V -I4
V -I5
V-16
V-17
12AU7
6SN7GT
6SN7GT
6BG6G
1B3GT
1ST a 2ND VIDEO AMP
VBO &VERT OUTPUT AMP
HORIZ OSC
HORIZ OUTPUT & H V GEN
H V RECT
T-7
22.9 MC
e
V-18 5V4G DAMPING DIODE
T -I5
V-24 6AU6 SOUND IF 24.7MC T-8
25.7MC POWER
V-25 5U4G RECT
L-44 SOUND TRANSFORMER
V-26 5Y3GT RECT
21.7MCH TRAP
V-27 12AU7 1ST STRIPPER

0
,.-, L-46
4.5MC
V-28 12AU7 PULSE AMP & 2ND STRIPPER TRAP
V-29 6AL5 PHASE DETECTOR
21.7MG 24
1 ST
SOUND
IF

FIGURE 6. CHASSIS TS -9D

0 PRI - TOP
SEC- BOT

21.7 MC.
SOUND DISC.

V-8
TUBE & IF ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
CHASSIS T S- 9D
21JMC.
OR
21.9 MC. 26.4 MC. DC PR °13

.05MF-141-1

VTVM

MEG
1N34 ±

4-
FIGURE 7. VIDEO IF RESPONSE WAVEFORM FIGURE 8. ELECTRONIC VOLTMETER CONNECTIONS

CHECK OF VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT WITH SWEEP GENERATOR

Since variations in tube gain and component values cannot be taken into con-
sideration in the single frequency alignment technique, whereas they can be coat-
pensated for in a sweep alignment, it is very desirable after AM alignment to check
the shape of the IF response curve and to touch up the adjustments by using a sweep
generator and an oscilloscope.

1. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel (a position corres-

ponding to channels )J or 15) to disable the local oscillator.

2. Adjust the contrast control for -5 volts bias.

119
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
3. Apply a -3V bias to the mixer grid, at the junction of the two 470,000
ohm resistors, R-6 & R-7.

4. Connect the sweep generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor of

100 mmf to .01 mf, to the grid of the mixer tube V-2 (6J6, pin 5). Ground the ge-
nerator to the oscillator coil mounting plate, again keeping the leads as short as
possible.

5. Connect the oscilloscope vertical amplifier input to the grid of the 1st
video amplifer, V-12 (12AU7, pin 2), or to the grid of the 2nd video amplifier,
V-12 (12AU7, pin 7) if more gain is needed. Run a lead from the scope terminal on
the sweep generator to the horizontal input on the oscilloscope; or use the built-
in sawtooth, synchronized internally, whichever is preferred.

6. Set the sweep generator for a center frequency of about 24.0 mc, with a
deviation of about 10 mc. At all times keep the output below the level at which the
IF strip is over -driven, the point at which the response curve begins to change
shape as the generator output is increased.

7. Turn on the marker in the sweep generator. If there is no built-in marker

in the sweep generator, loosely couple the output of the AM generator to the IF
strip, or feed the output to the mixer tube grid through a small capacitor. At all
times, keep the marker output low enough to prevent the marker from distorting
the response curve. If a wide band scope is used, the marker will be more distinct
if a capacitor of 100 mmf to 1000 mmf is placed across the scope input. Use the
smallest size possible, since too large a value will affect the shape of the curve.

8. Adjust the sweep and scope until one complete response curve appears on
the screen.

9. Compare the curve with the ideal curve in Figure 7, using the marker to
locate specific frequencies on the wave. If it is necessary to alter the shape of
the curve, readjust the core closest in frequency to the point requiring correction.

SOUND IF ALIGNMENT

1. Make adjustments and connections as described for video IF alignment.

a. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel.

b. Adjust the contrast control to -5 volts bias.

c. Apply -3 volts bias to the mixer grid.

d. Connect the AM generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor, to

the grid of V-2 (6J6, pin5).

2. Refer to Figures 5 & 6 for location of alignment adjustments and to the

following chart for procedure.

3. Except in step 1, keep the output of the signal generator low enough to
prevent limiting during alignment.

120
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ELECTRONIC
SIGNAL VOLTMETER
GENERATOR CONNECTED
STEP FREQUENCY TO ADJUST REMARKS

1 21.9 mc Across video det. L-44 Adjust for minimum. (This step
load, R-48 not necessary if performed dur-
ing video IF alignment).

2 21.9 mc Across R-122 & R-14 T-2 Adjust for maximum.

(Junction of R-12 & pri &
R-13 on TS -9) sec.

3 T-3 Detune 2 turns counterclockwise.

sec
(bottom)

4 21.9 mc High side of volume T-3 Adjust for maximum.

control (Junction of Pri
R-17 & R-23 on TS -9B)(top)

5 21.9 mc Same as Step 4. T-3 Adjust so that the meter indi-

sec cates zero output as the vol-
(bottom) tage swings from one polarity to
another. This is a very sharp
adjustment. Use a fibre screw-
driver.

NOTE: On chassis TS -9D, T-2 is T-17 and T-3 is T-16. The signal generator is set
at 21.7 mc instead of 21.9 mc.

With -3 V. mixer bias and zero contrast bias, the normal audio sensitivity is
as follows:

Chassis TS -9: 400 microvolts for 1/2 V. from junction of R-12 & R-13 (47K) to
ground.

Chassis TS -9A: 400 microvolts for 1 V. across R-122 & R-14 (terminal #1 of T-2 to
ground).

Chassis TS -9B: 400 microvolts for 1 V. across R-122 & R-14 (terminal #1 of T-2 to
ground).

Chassis TS -9C: 100 microvolts for 1 V. across R-122 & R-14 (terminal #1 of T-2 to
ground).

Chassis TS -9D: 100 microvolts for 1 V. across R-122 & R-14 (terminal #1 of T-17 to
ground).

RF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

The locations of the various adjustments are given in Figure 9. It will be

noted that the oscillator adjustments are arranged in a counterclockwise sequence
on the front side of the chassis, starting with the #2 channel as the first adjust-
ment at the top.

121
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
The RF amplifier adjustments are located in a similar manner, starting at the
top of the chassis and going around to the bottom. Both coils for each channel are
placed together and then apart, alternately, in the channel sequence.

The antenna trimmers are also located in a counterclockwise manner, starting

at the top of the chassis with #2 channel and going around to below the chassis.
FREQ. BAND PICTURE SOUND RECEIVER
CHANNEL MC CARRIER CARRIER OSCILLATOR *

2 54-60 55.25 59.75 81.65

3 60-66 61.25 65.75 87.65
4 66-72 67.25 71.75 93.65
5 76-82 77.25 81.75 103.65
6 82-88 83.25 87.75 109.65
7 174-180 175.25 179.75 201.65
8 180-186 181.25 185.75 207.65
9 136-192 187.25 191.75 213.65
10 192-198 193.25 197.75 219.65
11 198-204 199.25 203.75 225.65
12 204-210 205.25 209.75 231.65
13 210-216 211.25 215.75 237.65
* In TS -9D chassis, reduce osc frequencies by 0.2 mc.

TRIMMER REPLACED
BY FIXED CAPACITOR IN
7,8,900,110203.4 -CHANNEL Na SOME SETS.
vNOTEI-THIS
195 MC 6 5 4 3 2 -4 --CHANNEL NO.
T -C-18 86MC 80MC 70MG 64MC 58MC-.--ADJ. FREQ.
C-5 C-4 C-3 C-2 C -I ANTENNA
ON ADJUSTMENTS
ANTENNA
COIL

L-12 L-10 L-5

n n

giFPNV313
9 8 7 6 5 --CHANNEL NO. - RF ADJUSTMENTS
L-19 L-17
) ADJ. FREQ.
L2 I L-22 L-20 L -l8 t L-16/
196MC 80MC 70MC 58MG
1208MC 191C1 171IMC I
214MC 202MC 184MC 86MG 64MC

BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS SIDE VIEW OF CHASSIS TOP VIEW OF CHASSIS

3 2
65.75MG 59.75MC

L-25
OSC. ADJUSTMENTS
FREQUENCIES SHOWN ARE SIGNAL
GENERATOR FREQUENCIES AT WHICH
4

5 81.75MC 0 L-27
L-26 0
OSCILLATOR FREQUENCIES ARE I
L-28
ADJUSTED. 6 87.75MG L-29 CHANNEL SELECTOR
7179.75MG FINE TUNING

FIGURE 9. OSCILLATOR, RF & 8 185.75MC O

9 191.75MC 13
215.75MC
L-36
ANTENNA ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
12
L 209.75
L-34 L-35

122 FRONT OF CHASSIS

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Procedure:

1. Connect the AM signal generator output cable to the antenna terminals of

the receiver. Match the generator to the 300 ohm input impedance of the receiver
by using a 100 ohm resistor in series with the output terminal of the generator
cable and a 150 ohm resistor in series with the ground terminal. This arrangement
is for a 50 ohm generator. If the generator impedance is 30 ohms, use a 120 ohm
resistor on the output terminal and 150 ohms in series with the ground terminal.

2. Set the contrast control for -5 volts bias. (Measured from arm of con-
trast control to chassis).

3. When aligning the oscillator, connect the electronic voltmeter across the
volume control (junction of R-17 (100K) & R-23 (47K) on chassis TS -9B).

h. Turn the channel switch to the channel to be aligned.

5. Set the fine tuning capacitor C-13 to half -capacity position.

6. Set the signal generator at the sound carrier frequency of the channel
(see above chart) and adjust the signal generator output until a voltage reading is
obtained on the electronic voltmeter, connected as in step 3.

7. Locate the oscillator tuning adjustment belonging to the channel being

aligned. See Figure 9. With a non-metallic screwdriver, adjust the oscillator fre-
quency until the reading on the meter is zero. The meter reading will change ra-
pidly from one polarity, through zero, to the opposite polarity as the oscillator
frequency is adjusted to produce the correct sound IF of 21.9 mc.

8. Proceed as above for each channel; and, if the fine frequency trimmer is
left in the same position for each channel when the oscillator adjustments are made,
very little retuning of the fine tuning control will be required in changing from
one television station to the next.
9. With the oscillator correctly set, the next step is the alignment of the
RF amplifier. The RF coils for all channels and the antenna trimmers for the first
five channels are aligned at a frequency 1 mc higher than the center frequency of
the channel under test; that is, 4 me above the lower channel limit, or 2 me below
the upper limit. See chart above for channels and Figure 9 for alignment locations
and frequencies.

10. Connect electronic voltmeter across the video detector load resistor R-48.
In the TS -9P the video detector load resistor(R-48) is tied to B- instead of ground
as in previous versions. Care should be taken to connect the voltmeter directly
across the resistor and not to ground.

11. Set the signal generator to the RF alignment frequency and adjust the out-
put for a reading on the voltmeter.

12. There are two coils for each RF channel. Using a non-metallic screwdriver,
detune one core considerably in a counter -clockwise direction. Then tune the other
for maximum output on the meter. Now, retune the first coil for maximum output,
and the RF amplifier is aligned. Do not retune the other coil again for maximum,
as this will not give a proper bandpass characteristic. Always keep the generator
output low enough to prevent saturation.

123
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
13. Antenna coil trimmers are provided for channels 2 through 6. See Figure
9 for locations. They are peaked for maximum output on the meter at the same fre-
quencies used for aligning the RF coils.

14. Capacitor C-18 is tuned at 195 me and has enough bandwidth to work
effectively over the high frequency channels.

15. Proceed as above for all channels.

RF ALIGNMENT CHECK

The signal generator is connected to the antenna terminals of the receiver

and tuned to the center freqllency of each channel. lith the contrast control set
for maximum gain, the sensitivity should be as follows:

VOLTMETER
CONNECTED VOLTAGE MICROVOLTS SENSITIVITY
CHASSIS TO READING CHANNELS 2-6 CHANNELS 7-13

Video Sensitivity

All TS -9 Video Det. 1.0 V Increase 100 300

series Load (R-48)

Sound Sensitivity

TS -9 Junction of .5 V 100 300

R-12 & R-13

TS -9A Across R-122 1.0 V 100 300

& R-14

TS -9B Across R-122 1.0 V 100 300

& R-14

TS -9C Across R-122 1.0 V 25 75

& R-14

TS -9D Across R-122 1.0 V 25 75

& R-14

The peak value of discriminator audio output voltage should be 1 volt or

greater for a ± 25 kc shift, with 1 volt of signal at the limiter grid. One volt
exists at the limiter grid when 1 volt is measured across resistors R-122 and R-14
(chassis TS -9A, TS -9B, TS -9C, TS -9D) or 1/2 volt at junction of resistors R-12 and
R-13 (chassis TS -9). The electronic voltmeter is connected across the volume
control (chassis TS -9, TS -9A, TS -9C, TS -9D), or at the junction of resistors R-17
and R-23 (chassis TS -9B). The signal generator frequency is adjusted until a zero
voltage reading is obtained and then is shifted ± 25 kc from zero frequency.

124
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
NOTES:
1. MEASUREMENTS TAKEN WITH RCA VOLT OHMYST JUNIOR
ELECTRONIC VOLTMETER.
2.NO SIGNAL INPUT.
3.117 V. A.C. INPUT TO SET.
4.CONTRAST CONTROL SET FOR -3.0 VOLTS BIAS.
5.0THER CONTROLS IN NORMAL OPERATING POSITIONS.
6.MEASUREMTS MADE FM SOCKET TERMINALS MARKED
WITH A BLACK DOT (.RARE TAKEN BETWEEN TERMINALS
INDICATED AND B-.
7 ALL OTHER MEASUREMENTS MADE TO CHASSIS.
V-1 V-3 &READINGS D.C. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
6AG5 9.*VARIES WITH SETTING OF HOLD CONTROL.
6BA6

V-4
6BA6
-3.0 0
V-14
6SN7GT0
.60 V-10 170
6AG5
3A

V-5
6846

V-13
v-11 6AL5 6SN7GT
V-6
6AU6
V-24
6AU6
V-15
75
6SN7GT
V-12
100
V-26 I2AU7
100
5Y3GT 5V4G
NC NC
A C.
6.3
N V-16
0
68G6G
N A.C.
V-9 V-8
6V6GT 6T8 CAP
HIGH VOLTAGE
DO NOT MEASURE WITH
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
V-17 _______

1B3GT/
8016

FIGURE 10. CHASSIS TS -9C VOLTAGE DIAGRAM

Material presented on pages 111 to 130 inclusive, covers

Motorola Television Models VT1O5, VT1O5M, VK106, VK1O6B,
VK106M, VT1O7, and VT1O7M, using Chassis TS -9, TS -9A, TS -9B,
TS -9C, and TS -9D. There are complete circuits of these dif-
ferent chassis presented on the following five pages.

125
 Pi TUNER

626

MOTOROLA O
TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -9
USED IN MODELS VTI05, VKIC6 & VT107 1-3i
L',

VIDEO IF AND VIDEO AMPLIFIER

z
Mz

L19

:01

batus
to RTICAL DEFLECTION STEM
6`SW;6
D :..Nrt
POWER SUPPLY

6;NEGT

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM

6SNYGT

L19
-SOY WWI,

=J. ti9

V9
0.4 ALI. RESISTOR& alit inoiCATE0 in Won
ono
11101,SAMO 1.00.01 WES
ET2
MIT MEV,. NY win!, 1451.11,[1
 S.11101411 UV {SIPA r11. anak03. mar
SI.140 10000 OrerallOria 1.10 -a
Sroo0 14, aaas0Mra, 1110iSiSla 1.0r
00 OS
)I- 41' "1, L011A V 90INA 'SOWN S1300W NI msn
V6-S1 SISSVHD NOISIA3131
Sens
V 108010W
1:4N:t!4.1.2.,4tt °'
9109'1^ f8t 00Oi 11
191,159 .r aTio
a. VAW".°x
13.15I5 N011931130 larINOZI0ON 50
St
000
sOP
irE
91959
0 CC
- to
Ai7
A1,1.09 83801
91.1109
NaiSAS NO1103,30 1,191183n
:g9
ZS
8'
'3141°A 4 399 99 9999
=
novo 0301n 008 11 0301n
A ?;
OCS
03
110
.011 3.00
000
OW
..1500
'AT
"ty° f 01
6314i1d8a 0100V arra i1 0NrOS 03801 ad
a
 RF TUNER vs SOUND IF AND AUDIO AMPLIFIER
TT3
,k1r5Ano. 6V6GT
61.10A.

ADO

600
MOTOROLA 211

TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -96

10
USED IN monFLs VTI05, VKI06 E. VT107

r VIDEO IF AND VIDEO AMPLIFIER

1101110 PI kEte,0.,
68A6
-37

43 34

00 14

40
116
40
000lii 1_,6,011111

00

50 vH V RTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTE

SNTGT
.7.5=VV
POWER SUPPLY 7ei 1-01
605

us ""K 11:17.3 FP L0
OLD
. 0 0010 PHI II 0
6SN GT
000

60
.fir .p r ayLer ii 620
OA

fag:
W. I
1714101
O
riXioo
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
0L 6BGGV
-Of
6N3GT IA

t 4
86 133
m
10 10 0
0 Al

NOM ALL AMMO. A. 1.1.7. N ON.

11. 711.1.10 110001 .05
111...1 Ku 11115 AIM S11.177111.
 e SNOI1V001 3001
0 ®
06-S1 SISSYHO
a)
O©® q® 0 311V 331113, me 1. 31311 ANV
30040 omsnon 3x00001.3
RNO xl 03131010M 3. Se10101034 :310N
X80
if ZsiriLige
"''kRf
wlw
10,31 11
9108,1eS431
tt-3 IOLNS9
la.ald
1331SAS NO11031130 1V1NOZ1NOH
.6-038.8
10LNS9
o -A
""
4770 AlddrIS 833,0/3
Aietre'2°'. 9413S9
133 SAS N011031330 1tl911M3 LOIIA 901NA 'S011A S IJCION NI CASP.
14
06-S1 SISSVHD NOISI A3131
00 V1080101,1
AIM
xor Tnn
Ii31111cINV 03131A 11 0301A
iv -
ARV 06206
.1313 AV 61101103.00
IS I 610 63-1
1310
3131111113V 01003 ONV dl ONnOS
u3Nni 411
 RF TUNER SOUND IF AND AUDIO AMPLIFIER
Tt-3
""Eatt,. olofja7x
6NaT

0 0
02
73
0
1-3
Ei
VIDEO IF VIDEO AMPLIFIER

FOEBoeo

MOO

c sae

POWER SUPPLY

1133ST/8016

90
---
6e

BOTTOM VIEW
OF CHASSIS

e ROTE:RESISTORS ARE IRRIGATED IN WM.

11000 IONS TROIOSAX01. RMS. LAST OAP GHAT
RSA RHO.
8 0 MOTOROLA
TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -90
USED IN MODELS VTI05, VKI06 8 VTIO7
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PHILCO
TELEVISION -RADIO -PHONOGRAPH MODELS
49-1278, CODE 123
49-1279, CODE 122 49-1076, CODE 123
49-1077, CODE 122
TELEVISION RECEIVER MODELS
49-1240, CODE 124
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Philco Model 49-1278, Code 123 A or B, is a com-
bination television receiver, AM -FM radio, and phono-
graph in a modern -style, console -type cabinet. The
television receiver employs a 12 -inch picture tube, and
the phonograph section uses an M -9C Automatic Record
Changer, designed with two turntable speeds and two
tone arms, for playing either standard or new long-
playing records.
Philco Model 49-1279, Code 122 A or B, is identical
to Model 49-1278, Code 123 A or B, except for the
cabinet. Model 49-1270, Code 122 A or B, is housed
in a period -style, console -type cabinet.
Philco Model 49-1280, Code 121 A or B, is the same
as Model 49-1278, Code 123 A or B, except that a
custom -classical console -type cabinet is used, and the
phonograph employs an M -12C Automatic Record
Changer.
Philco Model 49-1076, Code 123 A or B, is similar
to Model 49-1278, Code 123 A or B, except that a
10 -inch picture tube is used, and the high -voltage power
supply is designed to deliver a lower voltage.
TELEVISION -RECEIVER CHASSIS
RADIO -FREQUENCY CIRCUITS
The radio -frequency section is built on a subchassis,
and incorporates a 6AG5 r -f amplifier, a 6AG5 mixer,
and a 6J6 oscillator and oscillator -control tube. Con-
nections are provided for the connection of both high -
frequency and low -frequency aerials.
SOUND CIRCUITS
The sound section, the r -f section, and the first
three video-i-f amplifiers, form an improved FM re-
ceiver. The sound-i-f signal is taken from the cathode
of the third video-i-f amplifier, and is further amplified
Copyright, 1949, PHILCO CORPORATION
49-1280, CODE 121
49-1040, CODE 123
Philco Model 49-1077, Code 122 A or B, is similar
to Model 49-1279, Code 122 A or B, except that a
10 -inch picture tube is used, and the high -voltage power
supply is designed to deliver a lower voltage.
Philco Model 49-1240, Code 124 A or B, is a con-
solette television receiver with a chassis similar to the
television chassis of Model 49-1278, Code 123 A or B.
Provision is made for the connection of an external
record player.
Philco Model 49-1040, Code 123 A or B, is similar
to Model 49-1240, Code 124 A or B, except that the
Receiver employs a 10 -inch picture tube, which permits
the use of a high -voltage power supply that delivers a
lower voltage.
The chassis of the above models are identified as A
or B, depending upon their coil complement. Chassis
A includes coils for channels 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 11, and
13. Chassis B includes coils for channels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
8, 10, and 12.
by two stages of sound-i-f amplification. The signal is
then detected by a 6AL5 ratio detector, which provides
a -f -c voltage for the oscillator -control tube, and audio
voltage for the 6AU6 audio amplifier. This amplifier
drives a 6K6GT, which delivers up to 2.5 watts to the
p -m speaker.
VIDEO CIRCUITS
The video section is comprised of four stages,
i-f a
6AL5 detector, and two stages of video amplification.
One section of the 6AL5 is used as an a -v -c (automatic -
video -control) rectifier. An a -v -c switch is incorporated
to switch the a.v.c. on or off, depending on local re-
ceiving conditions. The video output is applied across
a d -c restorer to the grid of the picture tube.
131
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
SWEEP CIRCUITS
A portion of the composite video signal is taken from
the video -output stage, and is amplified by the sync
pre -amplifier. Sync pulses are separated from the rest
of the composite video signal by a sync -separator stage.
Another amplifier inverts these pulses to a positive
The vertical sync .pulses are separated from
polarity.
the horizontal sync pulses in an integrating network
and applied to the vertical blocking oscillator to con-
trol its frequency. The horizontal sync pulses are
applied through a voltage divider made up of C509,
C510, and C529C to the grid of a phase comparer.
The vertical -sweep circuit consists of a conventional
blocking oscillator and a vertical output stage.
Horizontal -sweep voltage is generated by a blocking
oscillator with a plate -tickler feedback arrangement.
This tube also acts as a discharge tube during the time
it is conducting. A sawtooth output of 15,750 cycles
is produced as C513 is charged by the B+ voltage
through R521 during the quiescent period of the oscil-
lator, and is discharged through the triode during its
conduction period. The blocking -oscillator transformer
is tuned by C529A to approximately 200 kc., and pro-
duces a damped -wave train, which occurs 15,750 times
per second. The first positive half cycle of each train
occurs while the tube is conducting. Therefore, the
discharge time for C513 is 1/100,000 second.
The blocking rate of the oscillator is determined by
the r -c time constant of the grid circuit, the grid bias,
and the plate voltage. If the grid bias is made more
negative, C514 will require a longer period of time to
discharge sufficiently for the tube to conduct. Fewer
cycles will occur per second, and the blocking rate will
be lowered. Conversely, if the grid bias is made less
negative, each cycle will require less time, and the block-
ing rate will be increased.
The blocking rate determines the horizontal -sweep
frequency, and is automatically controlled by a bias
voltage from the phase-comparer triode. The horizon-
tal sync pulses are applied to the grid of the phase
comparer instead of the oscillator. Also applied to the
grid of the phase comparer are the following voltages:
1. A negative d -c bias, developed at the grid of the
oscillator and applied through R524.
2. A portion of the horizontal sawtooth voltage, fed
from the output of the oscillator through R519
and C512.
3. A pulse voltage from the plates of the damper
tube, applied through R533 and C519.
The d -c voltage biases the phase comparer, so that
it is below cutoff except when the positive tips of the
sawtooth voltage and sync pulse are applied to the grid.
C529C controls the amplitude of both the sawtooth and
pulse applied to this grid.
When the phase and frequency of both the sawtooth
and pulse have the correct relationship to each other,
the pulse appears during the sawtooth return time.
See figure 1A. The voltage from the damper shapes
the trailing edge of the sawtooth, so that a portion of
the composite voltage of sawtooth plus pulse exceeds
the cutoff voltage during part of the normal return
132
time. Plate -current flow through R522 produces a pul-
sating d -c voltage across this resistor and is of the
correct value to produce a 15,750 -cycle blocking rate
for the oscillator under ordinary conditions. C516,
C517, and R527 filters this voltage and eliminates noise
pulses.
Any tendency for the sweep to drift lower in fre-
quency will immediately result in a greater portion of
the sync pulse being presented to the phase comparer
grid. See figure 1B. Consequently, plate current will
be increased and the voltage across R522 will also be
increased. This decrease in negative voltage on the
grid of the oscillator, will automatically raise its fre-
quency.
CUTOFF BIAS AT_
PHASE-COMPARER GRID
A B
A- FREQUENCY OF PULSE AND SAWTOOTH EQUAL.PULSE AREA
ESTABLISHES QUIESCENT PLATE CURRENT.
B-SAWTOOTH FREQUENCY LOWER THAN PULSE FREQUENCY.
PULSE AREA CAUSES TOO HIGH PLATE CURRENT.
C- SAWTOOTH FREQUENCY HIGHER THAN PULSE FREQUENCY.
PULSE AREA CAUSES TOO LOW PLATE CURRENT.
Figure 1. Variations in Waveforms at Phase Comparer Grid
Any tendency for the sweep to drift higher in fre-
quency will instantly result in a smaller portion of the
pulse being applied to the phase comparer grid. See
figure 1C. The decreased plate current and decreased
voltage across R522 will again correct the drift.
The sawtooth voltage across C513 is amplified by a
6BG6G horizontal output stage, and is applied across
a damper tube to the horizontal deflection coils. C529B
in the grid circuit of the horizontal output stage varies
the amount of input applied to the grid.
POWER -SUPPLY CIRCUITS
In Models 49-1278, Code 123A or B, 49-1279, Code
122 A or B, 49-1280, Code 121 A or B, and 49-1240,
Code 124 A or B, two 1B3GT rectifiers are used in a
voltage -doubler circuit to supply high voltage to the
picture tube. In Models 49-1076, Code 123 A or B,
49-1077, Code 122 A or B, and 49-1040, Code 123 A
or B, one 1B3GT is used as a half -wave rectifier to
supply this voltage.
In all models, a 5U4G full -wave rectifier and a 7Z4
full -wave rectifier supply plate and screen voltages for
the rest of the tubes on the television chassis.
RADIO CHASSIS
For AM reception, a built-in loop is normally used.
An external AM broadcast aerial may be used if re-
quired. For FM reception, the built-in line -cord aerial
may
be used by plugging the lead into J900; the tele-
vision dipole aerial may be used by plugging the trans-
mission line from WS1 into J900.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER
RADIO AND PHONOGRAPH
After the Receiver has been properly located and the
aerial connected, turn the television OFF -ON -VOLUME
control to OFF. Then turn the radio OFF -ON -TONE
control to ON, and follow the operating procedure
given in the user's instructions. Turn the band (BC-
FM-PHONO) switch to PHONO, and follow the
procedure for proper adjustment and operation given
in the user's instructions.
TELEVISION
Provisions are made for connecting separate h -f and
1-f television aerials. The upper terminal board is the
h -f -aerial input, and the lower terminal board is the
1 -f -aerial input. Connect the aerials to the proper
terminals, and operate the receiver as follows:
1. Turn the television OFF -ON -VOLUME control
to ON, and allow the Receiver to warm up for about
five minutes.
2. Rotate the BRIGHTNESS control to its maxi -
=_E11
VFW
qP4.1-
I mam 15tCW4k*-
I
littrAIRO
µ00 11
Figure 2. Bottom View of Television Chassis
mum clockwise position. Set the beam bender so that
the arrow points toward the high -voltage -anode con-
nection on the picture tube. Then move the beam
bender forward and backward, to the left and right,
until maximum brilliance is obtained over the entire
face of 'the tube. Turn the BRIGHTNESS control
counterclockwise, so that the effect of the beam -bender
adjustment can be observed.
After the beam -bender adjustment is completed, leave
a raster of low brilliance on the face of the picture tube.
Check the position of the deflection yoke to make sure
that it is all the way forward against the bell of the
tube.
3. Set the AVC ON -OFF switch to the ON posi-
tion, and the CONTRAST and VOLUME controls to
approximately three-quarters of maximum. Turn the
Philco Precision Channel Selector to a station, prefer-
ably one showing a test pattern. Remove the channel -
selector knobs, and adjust the oscillator tuning core
until the sound is clearly heard and a picture appears
on the screen.
NOY., N MOUS 99-1040 MO 49,240 ONY
0 .DOLLY 40-10141 AND 49-1077 ONLY
MODELS 4,40, A0-10711 MO 49-1077 ONLY
MODELS 49-1040. 49-12,10, 11-1074 AND 40-1077
MODE' a ONLY
g 7fil= N4
$0111,,e;js,
133
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

4. Adjust the VERT. HOLD control (center knob

of dual control on front of Receiver) to the center of
the range through which the picture is vertically sta-
tionary.
5. Set the HORIZ. HOLD control (bar of dual
control) to the center of the range through which the
picture is horizontally stationary.
6. Adjust the FOCUS control for a sharp, well-
defined picture.
7. If the edges of the picture are not parallel to
the mask, loosen the deflection -yoke clamp and position
the yoke so that the edges of the picture are parallel
to the mask. Keep the yoke all the way forward. Then,
tighten the clamp.
8. If the picture is not perfectly centered, loosen
the two hex -head bolts on the bar of the centering
wobble plate. Move the centering wobble plate back
and forth for proper vertical centering, and up and
down for proper horizontal centering. Tighten the
bolts.
9. Adjust the CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS
controls for a pleasing range of grays. These controls
are dependent upon each other in determining the
strength and clarity of the picture.
10. Adjust the HEIGHT control until the picture
covers the face of the tube vertically. Figure 4. Top View of Television Chassis for 12 -Inch Models,
Showing High -Voltage Power Supply
11. Adjust the VERT. LIN. control for a symmetri-
cal vertical pattern. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 until no further im-
provements are obtained.
TB500
13. Adjust the WIDTH control, until the picture
covers the face of the tube horizontally. If further
adjustment is required, the taps on the width -adjust-
ment -coil assembly may be switched by changing the
link located on TB500. The downward position of the
IB3GT
H V RCCT link affords the greatest width. The WIDTH control
is used for the fine adjustment, regardless of the posi-
tion of the link.
14. Adjust the HORIZ. LIN. control for a sym-
metrical horizontal pattern.
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 until no further im-
provement is obtained.
16. Before adjusting the frequency of the local
oscillator, allow the Receiver to warm up for at least
20 minutes. Connect a 20,000 -ohms -per -volt, d -c volt-
meter to the A -F -C TEST jack. Remove the Philco
Precision Channel Selector knobs. Turn the core of
the oscillator coil in a clockwise direction for a positive
voltage indication; then turn it in a counterclockwise
direction for a negative indication. Note the zero or
crossover point. Adjust the core for a .5 -volt indication
in the positive direction.
17. Repeat the adjustment in step 16 for each sta-
tion in the area. Replace the Philco Precision Channel
Selector knobs.
18. Check all stations with the AVC ON -OFF switch
in both the ON and the OFF positions, to determine
Figure 3. Top View of Television Chassis for 10 -Inch Models, which position gives the best over-all results. In normal
Showing High -Voltage Power Supply

134
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

locations and for average signal strength, leave the

AVC ON -OFF switch in the ON position. In noisy
locationt, peaks of noise may produce such a high a -v -c
voltage that the resulting bias on the i-f amplifiers will
cause the loss of a few lines of picture information. In
locations where there is an exceptionally strong signal,
the amplifiers may become overloaded. In either case,
leave the AVC ON -OFF switch in the OFF position.
In this position, a -v -c action is removed and the CON-
TRAST control is switched so that, in effect, it governs
the over-all gain of the r -f stage and the first three
stages of video-i-f amplification. This arrangement
gives very good control over a wide range of signal
strengths, although the CONTRAST control will prob-
ably require readjustment for each station received.
19. Reset the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST con-
trols if necessary. See step 9.
20. ,Make certain that the VERT. HOLD and
HORIZ. HOLD controls are adjusted correctly. Re-
check all other control adjustments for the best picture
quality.
21. Replace the cabinet back and the Philco Pre-
cision Channel Selector knobs.
22. Misadjust the Receiver by use of the front -panel
controls, then bring it back to normal. At the same
time, explain to the owner the function, purpose, and
correct sequence of adjustment of each control.
23. Give the owner the instruction booklet; request Figure 6. Top View of Television Chassis for
him to read it carefully, and to practice operating all Television -Radio -Phonograph Models.
Showing Volume Control and Wafer Switch

front -panel controls. Specifically emphasize that only

those on the front should be touched.
24. Turn the television OFF -ON -VOLUME control
to OFF.

HORIZONTAL -HOLD ADJUSTMENT

Figure S. Top View of Television Chassis for Television
Receiver Models, Showing Volume Control
and Associated Parts
Ordinarily, the range of the HORIZ. HOLD control
potentiometer is sufficient to compensate for normal
variations and provide horizontal synchronization. If
for some reason, such as replacement of tubes or com-
ponents, synchronization cannot be obtained within the
range of the HORIZ. HOLD control, make the follow-
ing horizontal -hold adjustment:
1. Preset the adjustments as follows:
a. Frequency trimmer C529A, 11/2 turns counter-
clockwise from the maximum clockwise position.
b. Drive trimmer C529B, 2 turns counterclockwise
from the maximum clockwise position.
c. Lock -in trimmer C529C, 1/2 turn counterclock-
wise from the maximum clockwise position.
d. HORIZ. HOLD control, to approximately the
center of its range.
2. Tune in a station, and adjust TC500 until the pic-
ture is brought into sync.
3. Turn the AVC OFF -ON switch to OFF, and adjust
the CONTRAST control for normal contrast.
4. Turn the HORIZ. HOLD control fully clockwise.

135
 O
fA
H
0
1-3

40

w w or G. o .7.4 PD
Y.' 0 0 w .0 t7, n 8 ,..- 2 E. 0 9., gr: c") R. cfl."
aor ,-. co 0 ,-, e, co ,-,
0 o. ,-ct Oo (1, `R, , .
to
Pe a..-.
cn m Xg -t.
co 0 .r 0 M.% co a- ,.,t1
,-1 cn ft
0 w
2:i :1 0 ..4'. g 5 po
a. ,.. ,-, ,-o 0, 0 .6 0 ,?.,:i
,-o c
----... .,..
... !e-
:A No, ,-, ,,-.
cry ,-,,, ;'-,-
0- ,,,, ,-, 0 oi. ra a - H
n co & 9" ,..,
R, r,,- --''' i,.. 0 ,. Er' .., ,_, .-,
. 0- - n
0 n .00 0 0 CD
'J
,,., f, 0 ..c2
. 0 5.m 0 a-,, az: ...,
AD DD t--,
.0 n aCr M tt 4 'izt
f) n eCt CD
P 0
0 .D .I fD CIO 1--I . (9 CY
a. . ..a -
0 ,._ ,:,_,
eD ..,
fa. et0 a 0 0.... ...
0-' tt ....
.., CA ..., .-0 0
F,-,. 0. 0
.,
, -, .-. 0 0 e,. crQ & ..: 0 g:
CA co 0 0 c,
GOI . -,0 0 c. .d.
s 1-1 1:3
,
Q. a
0 00=.0..=..,
.4.- et 1- CI Fl
.4 " .. fp
n r, 0 0,
n et te, eti
Mop
5.4 A, 1. 0' gr ''' .1,
0... .1, 0 rt.
uo ° 01:$
s,, 0 z
"r. = il) 0 P4 0 "WO CI.
5 ° tz ,... E. 0
" et r+
.. 0 -
co, Cl'' 1:17'D
0
El
_ .... . i.i.
til ..., 'll.1 n
..- - -...., ,-I 0 0
.-i. ;:,. P... 5
t.) CD N 0- co o o.-I v,
;a .., 0 o PD .1 0 ,,, (A
,17
10' CO or *"
. 0 0".0a n np u0 ,
0. PD PD PD 0 0
el rt /4 co a CD , co 0
,?'
... -5
,,,
fp 0 or Cr DI S' ... 0- 0°
cp
.. ,-o, CD --- Si> .0 w
i-0 0 , ". wro 0 -n 0 0".
-.. .4 ,,,
Wcr,
a ....rD a ,.., 0 - .. ... Fr ,C
.-D
," '-0 7 g p 00 1-h
0 0
W,5
CI '-:::t., 0- A- P. .... `%. rt.
4 0 0 .1, CT
CA 41, I.1 .0 .,
" n g' :op a 00
co -. ' 71 . '5". OV p., ".
""
a m tt g" fri
co
-.., a. a, 0
.... ,r' 0
P ND '.. oPs 0. CD 00 4-D
r -D
AD
ND " ....
-.., ,-, fl?
n CD N con ..,..0an'r: ? t7, SD ? CD CD CCD0' PO ... ctO
0.. 0
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PHILCO TROUBLE -SHOOTING PROCEDURE
The Philco trouble -shooting procedure for television 3. Measure circuit resistances, and substitute con-
receivers and television -radio -phonograph combinations densers until the defective part is located. Correct the
is logical, thorough, and easy to follow. trouble before testing further.
In a combination which contains two separate re-
ceiver chassis, make an operational check on both chassis PRELIMINARY CHECKS
to determine in which the trouble is located or whether To avoid possible damage to the receiver, the follow-
the trouble is common to both. ing checks should be made, and any trouble revealed
should be corrected before either the television receiver
Both receiver schematics are divided into sections as
follows:
or the radio is turned on:
1. Inspect both the tops and bottoms of the chassis.
TELEVISION -RECEIVER CHASSIS Make sure that all tubes are secure and in the proper
Power -supply circuits Section 1
sockets. Look for any broken or shorted connections,
Sound circuits Section 2
burned resistors, and other obvious indications of
Video circuits Section 3
trouble.
R -f circuits Section 4 2. On the television -receiver chassis, measure the
Sweep circuits Section resistance between test point ID and ground, and test
point IM and ground. After the filter condensers have
RADIO CHASSIS had time to charge, the resistance at test point CI
The radio chassis is divided should not be less than 2000 ohms and the resistance
into four sections, but data at test point El should not be less than 3000 ohms.
on these sections will not be If lower readings are obtained, check the filter con-
included in this manual. densers for leakage or shorts.
On the radio chassis, measure the resistance between
In the procedure, master test points are given for test point M and the B- bus. If the reading obtained
localizing trouble to a particular section. Additional
is lower than 3000 ohms, check the filter condensers.
test points are provided for isolating trouble to the The resistance values given are much lower than
faulty stage. After the faulty stage has been determined,
normal and do not represent quality checks of the filter
locate the defective part as follows:
condensers. The values given are the lowest at which
1. Test the tube, or substitute another one known the rectifier will operate safely while trouble -shooting
to be good. tests are being performed.
2. If the tube is not defective, measure the tube - 3. If the complaint indicates that the receiver may
electrode voltages, and compare them with those given be turned on without risk of further damage, make an
on the schematic diagram to determine the faulty circuit. operational check on each chassis.

TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER

POWER -SUPPLY CIRCUITS - SECTION 1
WARNING: Use extreme caution when making high - Make all voltage measurements with a 20,000 -ohms -
voltage measurements in this section. Turn the receiver per -volt d -c voltmeter. To measure high voltages be-
OFF, and discharge the high -voltage circuit with a tween 6000 and 10,000 volts, use a 10,000 -volt multi-
well -insulated wire and hooded test clips. Connect the plier with the voltmeter. To measure voltages over
meter. Then turn the receiver ON, and read the 10,000 volts, use a 20,000 -volt multiplier with the volt-
voltage. meter.
To determine whether there is trouble in this section,
The following test equipment is required for trouble make the tests (see figure 9) at master test point 1:1 ,
shooting this section: M , and M , consecutively, unless the indication at
1. 20,000 -ohms -per -volt d -c voltmeter one of these test points is abnormal. If the indication
2. 10,000 -volt multiplier at test point CI is abnormal, proceed with the tests
3. 20,000 -volt multiplier at test points M , 13 , and fi . If the indication at
test point M is abnormal, proceed with the tests at
Turn the OFF -ON VOLUME control fully clockwise, test points M and . If the indication at test
and set the BRIGHTNESS control fully counterclock- point 3 is abnormal, proceed with the test at test
wise. To connect a -c power when the high -voltage point El . If the indications at all master test points
shield is open, use line cord and plug Part No. 41-3865. are normal, proceed with the tests for Section 2.

137
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TROUBLE SHOOTING - TELEVISION RECEIVER
POWER -SUPPLY CIRCUITS - SECTION 1 (Cont.)

D +370V ij +320V A +230V

O
II
5U4G
LV RECT
0
/ R101
4

K=>
C104A C1048

-22V
C 102

III +158V B +110V

0103
0 0
7Z4
L V RECT
L10
107
0 01 P--AAAA"-
v R100 V

C104C moo NI= C106A

3
ALL MODELS

1B3GT 1B3GT 1B3GT

HV RECT HV RECT HV RECT

©+7425V IN +7250V 111 +11,000V

C107
+6000V

MODELS MODELS
49-1040, 49-1240,
49-1076. 49-1278.
AND 49-1077 49-1279.
AND 49-1280

Figure 9. Simplified Trouble -Shooting Diagram for Section 1

138
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER
SOUND CIRCUITS - SECTION 2

The following test equipment is required for trouble To determine whether there is trouble in this section,
shooting this section: make the test at master test point A first. See fig-
ure 10. If the indication is normal, proceed with the
1. R -f signal generator capable of supplying a tests for Section 3; if not, proceed with the test at test
22.1-mc. signal modulated with 400 cycles
point A. If the indication for test point A is ab-
2. Audio signal generator normal, proceed with the test at test point A to
3. .1-mf. condenser isolate the faulty stage. If the indication for test
point A is normal, proceed with the test at test point
Turn the OFF -ON VOLUME control fully clockwise. A to isolate the faulty stage.

WEAK OUTPUT,SLIGHTLY STRONG 400 -CYCLE OUTPUT

CETUNED IRON 22.I NC, SHOULD PRODUCE CLEAR
MODULATED AT 400 CYCLES, SIGNAL IN SPEAKER.
SHOULD PRCOUCE CLEAR
SIGNAL IN SPEAKER.
WEAK 400 -CYCLE OUTPUT
SHOULD PRODUCE CLEAR
SIGNAL IN SPEAKER..

WS1 15200

2V

SAU6 SWOT
1ST AUDIO AUK AUDIO OUTPUT

WEAK OUTPUT, SLIGHTLY

CETUNED POOH 22.1MC.
MODULATED AT 400 CYCLES.
SHOULD PRODUCE CLEAR
SIGNAL IN SPEAKER.

Figure 10. Simplified Trouble -Shooting Diagram for Section 2

TROUBLE SHOOTING - TELEVISION RECEIVER

VIDEO CIRCUITS - SECTION 3

The following test equipment is required for trouble To determine whether there is trouble in this section,
shooting this section: make the test at master test point Q first. See fig-
1. R -f signal generator capable of supplying a ure 11. If the indication is normal, proceed with the
24-mc. signal modulated with 400 cycles tests for Section 4; if not, make the test at master test
2. R -f signal generator capable of supplying a point O.If the indication for test point O is nor-
100-kc. signal mal, proceed with the test at test point 0to isolate
3. .1-mf. condenser the faulty stage. If the indication for test point 4) is
4. 20,000 -ohms -per -volt d -c voltmeter abnormal, proceed with the tests at test point 4) , ©,
Turn the CONTRAST control fully clockwise, and O, and 0, in alphabetical order, until the faulty
set the AVC ON -OFF switch to ON. stage is isolated.

139
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER

VIDEO CIRCUITS - SECTION 3 (Cont.)

WEAK 24 -MC OUTPUT, STRONG 24 -MC OUTPUT, STRONG 24 -MC OUTPUT,

MODULATED AT 400 MODULATED AT 400 MODULATED AT 400
CYCLES. SHOULD CYCLES, SHOULD CYCLES, SHOULD
PRODUCE 10V AT VIDEO PRODUCE IOV AT VIDEO PRODUCE 10V AT VIDEO
OUTPUT. OUTPUT. OUTPUT.

.1 MF
C301 150V C304 51, II C3I6
GAGS GAGS 6.4G5 6AG5 NAGS HALO
MIXER 1ST VIF 2ND VIP 3RD VIF s I I 4TH VIF VIDEO DET

J301

.IMF .11AF

.IMF

V2 12AU7 V2 12AU7
15T VIDEO ALIPL VIDEO OUTPUT

WEAK 24 -MC OUTPUT, MODERATE 24 -MC OUTPUT. STRONG 100 -KC OUTPUT,
MODULATED AT 400 MODULATED AT 400 UNMOCULATED, SHOULD
CYCLES, SHOULD CYCLES, SHOULD PRODUCE 105, AT VIDEO
PRODUCE IOV AT VIDEO PRODUCE IOU AT VIDEO OUTPUT.
OUTPUT. OUTPUT.

20,000-0111AS-PER-VOLT
DC VOLTMETER
STRONG 100 -le OVTPUT,
UNMODULATED, SHOULD
PRODUCE OH AT VIDEO
OUTPUT.

Figure 11. Simplified Trouble -Shooting Diagram for Section 3

TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER

R -F CIRCUITS - SECTION 4

The following test equipment is required for trouble Set the channel selector control to the channel which
shooting this section: appears to be giving trouble. If the trouble is common
to all channels, it may be set to any channel. Turn
1. R -f signal generator capable of supplying sig- the CONTRAST control fully clockwise, and set the
nals (modulated with 400 cycles) covering the AVC ON -OFF switch to ON.
frequencies of the television channels To determine whether there is trouble in this section,
make the test at master test point *. See figure 12.
2. 10-mmf. condenser
If the indication is normal, proceed with the tests for
3. 20,000 -ohms -per -volt d -c voltmeter Section 5; if not, proceed with the tests at test points
, , and * , in alphabetical order, until the
4. 120,000 -ohm resisto. faulty stage is isolated.

140
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TROUBLE SHOOTING - TELEVISION RECEIVER
R -F CIRCUITS - SECTION 4 (Cont.)

ler-I./VT° -2.40

WEAK OUTPUT, 20,000-0HUS

RF MODULATED AT PER -VOLT DC
SIG.GEN. 400 CYCLES, VOLTMETER
SHOULD PRODUCE
10V AT VIDEO OUTPUT.
10
MMF

rri
MMF

TB400 T B403
(L F BAND) (HI BAND)
20,000 -OHMS -
Z400
Z PER -VOLT DC
VOLTMETER
2401

ITV C412 1/2 12AU7

VIDEO
OUTPUT
BAGS 1000 VIDEO 1ST
VIDEO
RF AMPL IF VIDEO
GAGS AMPCS BET
AMPL
MIXER
C410

II ,V

IMPIONMF

WEAK OUTPUT, MODERATE OUTPUT.

MODULATED AT MODULATED AT 400
400 CYCLES, CYCLES,SHOULD
SHOULD PRODUCE PRODUCE 100 AT
100 AT VIDEO OUTPUT. VIDEO OUTPUT.

Figure 12. Simplified Trouble -Shooting Diagram for Section 4

TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER

SWEEP CIRCUITS - SECTION 5
WARNING: Use extreme caution when making
high -voltage measurements in this section. Turn the
receiver OFF, and discharge the high-voltage circuit
with a well -insulated wire and hooded test clips. Con-
nect the oscilloscope, and then turn the receiver ON.
A cathode-ray oscilloscope is required for trouble
shooting this section. For viewing wave forms in the
vertical sync and sweep circuits, adjust the oscilloscope
sweep to 30 c.p.s. (one half the vertical sweep rate).
For viewing wave forms in the horizontal sync and
sweep circuits, adjust the oscilloscope sweep to 7875
c.p.s. (one half the horizontal sweep rate).
The wave forms given in figure 13 indicate the cor-
rect shapes, but are not intended to illustrate relative
amplitudes. The approximate peak -to -peak voltage is
given under each wave form. The peak -to -peak volt-
ages for the wave forms in the sync circuits were ob-
tained with the CONTRAST control adjusted to give
1 volt peak -to -peak at VIDEO TEST jack J301, and
with all other controls set for normal operation.
To determine whether there is trouble in this section,
observe the picture -tube screen. If there is no hori-
zontal sweep, make the test at master test point Q .
See figure 13. If there is no vertical sweep, make the
test at master test point Q . If there is a lack of either
vertical or horizontal sync, make the tests at master test
points @ and 0
If the indication for the test at test point Q is ab-
normal, proceed with the tests at test points G , Q ,
and Q to isolate the faulty stage. If the indication
for test point 0 is abnormal, proceed with the tests
at test points p and Q to isolate the faulty stage.
If the indication for either test point 0 or (;) is
abnormal, proceed with the tests at test points (I), (2) ,
and el to isolate the faulty stage.

141
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

TROUBLE SHOOTING TELEVISION RECEIVER

SWEEP CIRCUITS - SECTION 5 (Cont.)

REMOVE VERT
8L6 OSC TUBE 0

11 V 450 V REMOVENOR
O- 816 OSC TUBE

T500

R516
C 511
811801
3100 VERT OUTPUT
J501
NT sLuE175011GREEN
VERT BLN OSC

-85V , 300V.E> c>

R5I7 C526

164 1 250
RED1' IBLACK

R5I6
REMOVE HOR
BLH OSC TUBE 2V
2600
14 V
R515 C509

71 V 1/2 787
SYNC PRE-AMPL

150023V C501
1/2 787
SYNC SEP
C504
1/2 771
SYNC AWL
7V
R508 8548

R5I9

auC 524

31V

R52I
.111111111MMM
RD
1503

1/2 787 61080

PHASE COMP NOR OUTPUT
1502
1/2 7N7 520 SV 46
NOR BLN OSC

1400
1250 F325V DAMPER

6534

-
50V
-40

tt 2750

375V

1 501

I ,

170V 35V

Figure 13. Simplified Trouble -Shooting Diagram for Section 5

142
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
.'"--411114.

WS /- / (F) wSl-/ (R) WS /- 2 (F) WS /- 2 (R)

RADIO -TELEVISION WAFER SWITCH (PART OF OFF -ON VOLUME CONTROL) SHOWN IN RADIO POSITION AS
VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CHASSIS INVERTED.
WAFERS SYMBOLIZED WSI-I AND WSI-2 FROM FRONT TOWARD REAR.
(F) INDICATES CONTACTS ON FRONT OF WAFER LOOKING FROM FRONT.
(R) INDICATES CONTACTS ON REAR OF WAFER LOOKING FROM FRONT.

AERIAL AND RF COIL ASSEMBLY

OSCILLATOR AND MIXER COIL
ASSEMBLY
r-1-11
O'
70
06
50 L 502
04 WIDTH ADJUSTMENT COIL
30
02
10 ntc7-1ff.
11

ra DIA. BUS WIRE

L 202
LOW FREQ HIGH FREQ
CHANNELS 21013 T5 DIA. SPAGHETTI
CHANNELS 2 TO 6 CHANNELS 7 T013
INCLUSIVE INCLUSIVE INCLUSIVE BUS WIRE
Figure 14A. Wafer Switches. Notes. Tuners. etc.
IDIA.
4 COPPER TUBING

I- CONDENSER SYMBOLS 1
1 J. J..
T iiir ir T it
FIXED TRIMMER VARIABLE ELECTROLYTIC COIL WITH
ALL RESISTOR VALUES IN OHMS UNLESS MARKED OTHERWISE. TUNING CORE
_I
NOTE VOLTAGES GIVEN AT THE PINS OF THE VIDEO -AMPLIFIER AND VIDEO -OUTPUT STAGES WERE MEASURED PART NO
WITH THE CONTRAST CONTROL FULLY CLOCKWISE. 56-3545FA3
VOLTAGES GIVEN AT THE PINS OF THE VERTICAL OSCILLATOR WERE MEASURED WITH THE HEIGHT CONTROL
FULLY CLOCKWISE.

VOLTAGES GIVEN AT THE PINS OF THE VERTICAL -OUTPUT STAGES WERE MEASURED WITH THE VERT LIN
CONTROL FULLY. CLOCKWISE.

4.
I..

32 I

- -a 1
t <-t'
B

CLAMP SOLDERED APPROX 2

FROM END OF TUBING
Figure 15. I -F Alignment Jig
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TELEVISION RECEIVER ALIGNMENT
WARNING! Dangerous potentials are present in the
receiver when it is operating and for a short time
after it has been turned off.

GENERAL 5. Insert a 10,000 -ohm resistor in series with the oscil-

loscope lead.
The intermediate frequencies for the television chassis
are 22.1 mc. for the sound channel and 26.6 mc. for the 6. If additional attenuation of the marker signal is
video channel. Alignment of circuits operating at required, insert a 10,000 -ohm resistor in series with the
these high frequencies requires careful workmanship output lead of Model 7008 Visual Alignment Generator.
and good equipment.
7. Set the television controls as follows:
1. Top of work bench must be metallic, and the test
equipment and television -receiver chassis must make a a. OFF -ON -VOLUME control fully clockwise.
good metal -to -metal contact with the bench top.
b. AVC ON -OFF switch to OFF.
2. During alignment, the signal -generator output
should be attenuated to keep the output indication be- c. CONTRAST control fully clockwise. (When
low 2 volts, peak -to -peak. starting the alignment, it may be necessary to retard
3. Never disconnect the picture tube, picture -tube yoke, the CONTRAST control slightly to prevent regener-
or speaker while the television receiver is turned on. ation.)
4. Allow the television receiver and test equipment to d. BRIGHTNESS control to give a dim raster.
warm up for 15 minutes before proceeding with the
alignment. 8. Preset C200A and C200B fully clockwise.

TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TELEVISION ALIGNMENT

AND ADJUSTMENTS
The following test equipment is recommended for
aligning the television receiver:
1. Philco Precision Visual Alignment Generator for
Television and FM, Model 7008; this instrument has
the following features:
FM signal generator - Ranges, 4-120 mc., and 144
-260 mc., with a maximum deviation of 15 mc.
AM (marker) signal generator - Ranges, 3.2-
7.5 mc., 6.4-15 mc., 14.5-36 mc., 69-125 mc., and
138-250 mc.
Built-in oscilloscope
- - Sensitivity, 25 millivolts;
3 -inch cathode-raytube; crosshatch screen.
2. Vacuum -tube voltmeter or a 20,000 -ohms -per -volt
voltmeter.
3. If separate signal generators and oscilloscope are
used, these instruments should have the following char-
acteristics:
FM signal generator - Deviation, ± 4 mc.; center -
frequency ranges, 20 mc. to 30 mc.; sweep -sync output
with either built-in or separate phase corrector.
Oscilloscope - Calibrated; vertical sensitivity of 1
volt (peak -to -peak) per inch, or better.
NOTE: When using a separate AM r -f signal generator to obtain
marker pips, couple the output lead of this generator to the output
lead of the FM generator, using lust sufficient coupling to obtain
a suitable pip.
ALIGNMENT JIGS
Figure 17 shows a jig which is recommended for
coupling the signal generator to the mixer grid, to
provide short connections and good grounding. To
construct this jig, remove the coil form and windings
from an oscillator snap -in coil, Philco Part No. 32-4222.
Solder in a length of coaxial cable, as shown in figure
17. To use this jig, insert it into an empty compart-
ment in the mixer -oscillator section of the turret tuner.
Rotate the turret until the contact points on the jig
are engaged with the oscillator -mixer contact panel.
Figure 15 shows a jig which is recommended for
coupling the signal generator to the various i-f grids.
The following parts are necessary for the construction
of this jig.
1. 3 -inch length of 1/4 -inch -diameter tubing

AM signal -generator - Carrier frequency ranges, 2. 31/2 -inch length of 1/8 -inch -diameter spaghetti
20 mc. to 30 mc.; dial should be suitable for setting and 3. 4 -inch length of No. 12 or No. 14 bus wire
resetting accurately to the frequencies specified in the
ALIGNMENT CHART. 4. Clamp, Philco Part No. 56-3545FA3

144
 AERIAL INPUT SECTION 4 - RF
--6B46,s SIF= 22.1 MC 6ALS SECTION 2- SOUND ""frsoir

.
TO TEL 568 8116 621,
1.00 RAND
4LC202
DETECTOR
,, -_____=,-jE)J200 21311 V
,
Dim 18400 120V 6"°00 6.404 .2.I MF 120/
470,000
,T,I .0
0106 470,000 1122
JAC,. L. MC TEST
200 ..
IS1 S/F T ,00,-0- , 111.14 L2014 LIO 6- C2106600 R210
I or ioo JACK
606G1
AuLtIo C /9 )
-4-, roe 6,,,,, ic,01.1,01 0068 F
-I
c40.2 41* ,,,,,,, L20 Isco
, ... raw- .7 a2
' 10 p,,,,,,
ok000
1ST AUDIO

\''
.LC202 75V
WSPI 9 ,,,, , 2-2: '-'`2- ve,
#

2,4 NMI 111

C2/5 18 4

9
co '"If',67. 2 MF
2 .47- 220 01 MI
IlL11,d,"'
011
ii1Ou1:741

w
OSCILLA1OR AN0 1 R21I 0213
OSCILLATO0 68,000 III 11818
47,000 '' .40/./(R)
I CONTROL ;:plur ' 4T2(e)

Ili
6,51-210.1 1.11,4,J
C402 R
R IP 1h L ___J I__ L IC
I
0214
2

' 8
R0 MEG
a
22 22,000 C204 5
C2/2 40 L5200
4
W.S1,1,
AERIAL 1.111E 470141.0
1

C .01 MF A
12V
,...!...sm i
51-10-J TO RADIO %I 2=5 '
11404 0201
68 al° - 7
III 00
R200
4 ACK T.-
560 4
1"
0 14 f 0 (121-F 114.12 1 Vit ,..,4, C216 6,220 grAF '21'0' PI 00
R203 .1 1,1F T 5.0,..
.0. RIOS autAr ToWro-d A
(To
A 4004 3
,,:e.1 I 8403
20 4
0403
220
C22/

t500 IM--
MMf
,

. ,00.
. . I
V,'010 - R212
4.7 1.1E6
7
_..."...Z0/
44740

III
3 74C3.V4A0 4.r."''.210'1'44,
1

I
L 201® _

IILJOJ
R
t.f. - .1 7.002 M(
1 I
330

rE4F ...207./..
_:
4.
t HIG.71 BAR
NM
1E.11';" t ,
VIF=26.6 MC SECTION 3 - VIDEO
' ",,,1-4
ACRML

e -
11) TEL SET
o 6405
I, INF IRV
V 6465
2NO VIC V
INN 4'51'g
4" ..,..

0-.-
JR SAX" ,9212401
aooc
2 .1
000111 J. C.Iar IV ® ,,, WAN, VW. 0330
IC316 45> VIDEO

0
470 414C301 a 13 R''''' JACK OUIPUT
''.'
'CCCCCCC`

1 . 150V 'FIE 470 15,000 140V t...." 47044F 6443 47.000 47.04,
OZ, 110V, 2904
5 RF".47404 iy c.,,, \ TC302
RAF
C 031i C3II,,, ,,,,, Der R32I [J}6
1.1) R
07 220484 RJOI 301 470 =_._- _-,... 47,000 ,,,,, ,,,, .44 L3I

L4000 2 C440
C3004C
8200
C30 ° 'R.3:7
7
0311
5600 4 15
0 MW
C312a.
--'0000 301® V
Pt'

- L308
CJ II

.0610
-15-015-0,-4-11
.2210 ,-- '''.'
. 0334 jR335

III- C411 1500140.r 1500 18M10 19

1,311 10,000
}470.000

1.i2,`,T22000
,
C313
LI. 415 1 .3ir 0308, ..., IFf C3I0 H 0316 PO 0322 ;Irel IV C321
zvi.
6445
3300
C.,103
120 1. MMf YY
ix,, 0395
18MMF 100

1111 ilt000. u C307

3300

1
0325 329 0331
10000
3300 .1.:05m,
C414,4. ..!
s - 4, elm)
-' -05E4' 4701.1801.
4101,ER 1_
4PI.L305
.0.
RF 1.418ER OSC CONT "05 ,,,,,,,, -I. 9-- ,...L- 1
ii .
..f,,,[309 0332 IX
,..a f
6465 6465 6J6
gTC30
0
1

,
47 ., l'5',0':0 rof.' 1 6..,2° C322PF-1:& moo
's - l000 ATA
J.300 c3o, j,,,Jog 4.,,C00 03
MM'
c4gT
,
' '2°.m) 00
WARM T
i
4:,141" TUNER TEST T 1500 3300 g' i1091410
0,109 71500 3300 F
. 05021 7
0409
T 56.000 Clu JACK
1C324
Ctir R® 4r4701,41.0
44. 7
0316 Off ,,,,,
------- -F--- .5 80 C325,44 -
0497g 0305 A.....-,TIRE0,------,ME, At .0.13,8
I'
- RIGHTNESS
RJIT 6.3
A47044F 0000 0000 I PA rlirC.FT
00.,
C413 1::604'

a..
C417.FC,W1
101.14F Pr 4101+
4- MMF
3300
,t IOW 1 10.000
yf
CONTRAST1000000300 5000 .--'
100,000, 0.000 , 4,2 Tr 7
DC RES1TIRER

II

050/

0 n
-1500
09j
0543
IMG
7 gill
6
0
MT 1,, Pa 1Zr II E HOLD

.
142 JACK g,S0:0
SYNC PREANIPL SYNC SEP 6414 60661 1636T
2310 T 1N1 LOA
V
1/051 OL,PUT 2300 REC191/E0
,c,Ve,r-." 50V
KT, OSC 14C0 V
3000
§
C / 0308
05V q T.501 14, pa NORI2 FOCUS I-
CS26 0;00
65004' I
o r Atom
';'; 9- -85V ,,,,,,
410000
F
111.01
PICTIIE 7082
ifr 120
: LACK RIO
CI08
F

al R506 538 0ta 7 nov 4100

0305
co,oco _ A
10000
0509 C503
lo,000
CS 0544
5V ,.,
E soo
C
211(4 110V
I' 0000 ----0'.----IL''.1-,,'37'4'
,,,,,6
Zg
''
C5024
4114E6 T 241,44E
-
li RS41
.0 2.2 MEG

0545
15 5
PICTURE SOCKET
0100
41:C104.4
T 404F
85 WAS
LOW 004144E RECTIFIER Il1.1.010'.
//00
*MEI.
SO
100
.e 10000
= 1000 1.150
' L500
6
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
711.141.1111
270
0
4-
0 : 0
ct (--)
0511

WO
c52>41:
40MF
cPAAT OF
.50
5000
VERT
106 0 13367
RECTIFIER
0101
41.500
'1'5'&; C102
14 C0045

\ 4.50105 g
/---'"OfIlr''
5 4.. 8.5
40.0 JEWL LAMP

T 1 __Al234/4

II
R311 ....C10641 3010
C106 /
1 MEG R.542 T 10MF :4,C/0441 14 014.5
71010 G .0110
0502 68,000
C504 -- T094 s
25 .000
HE GHT
. Cm/ C:
.047M

140
22,000 8203 8200
C519 ;30
I C524
.4 IMF

too coos.4..
[T503

'-'
150
0000
LIOI

153 OHMS
3060

56
WV
LOW
72,
VOLTAGE
.000

WV 440,1 RECTI1IER
0f
CS. V 1250 10,000 m:C/0.4C

-
CRP CS08 -19
0324 2750 40 OHMS .

5?
14,9 147 oft.00510 T.00510 R518 ,
04T 1M19 2010
41.1011 44 .8 4 2001
SYNC AARL 1 03 0 4-50v 12 NI 42.000
r:UT
' rt
3.3MCG
220A30
SwASE
055 S.,
I4, NO OOP ,S' 2.5 7 /..
R3le lopoo .11. 0, 0514 w H 6, OSC CS10
.0014S ,:t. ,f,,
CNN 052 jiaM-1(
5
34 I 325V a L5026 FOCUS 0103 0102 LION
PL100
10.080 4111
4-
2.5 OHMS
atill 10,000 2:, 8526 -" HORIZ 100 [D

oii 0504 4E000

ill
150MMF

. -.- .5 5 12 TO
R322 HOLD 8500 C105
.Et.
100000
560,000 50,000 18300 SW JAI 5.G
C505
16 Haict Eg'°- A 0325
.2a- ASJ5 4-
1°3'0/5 3
DAMPER
RADIO
T 200144F
'T CONTROL

-_-
C50/0 KO 180,000
C517 AS30
2,000 C5298
t poo S28..,
0000
TC Of 02 C521
2

L5014
135000$
PRIER
SOC.101

itO','Do
W.r. '72Y.Ooo g.',,,10 '2,1,1A ,-,-..251.41 DRIVE

TgM
'''' 1 ._.,
,.FKa I:"" 1220; .2
'0,'
RS31
10000
12 LINEARITY
CONTROL

SECTION 5 - SWEEP SECTION 1 -POWER SUPPLY

Figure 14. Model 49-1278, Code 123, Complete Sectionalized Television Schematic Diagram
145A
.I
. -

1.6
.-

!kw
* (DoNi
X111

g
11111
AMMON. rn MIME
S WIM 111111111 11111Mil MUM
M1111111111MIIIIIMMIIIMMIIIIIIMMIMM
MINM .... MUNN
IIMI111111.1M111111111 MOM MM :01 MM 111111/
11 11111111111111111WMOMM111111111111
1111MEN
MMMMMM IBM le NI MIII IR II MN 11
MMMMMMMMM 1111WINO IIMIIIM1011M MUM
MUM MMEMIIIIIIIIMIll
1111111M
111111111MMEMIII11111M 1111B111111

.1 MMMMM
111111111111101111111MMI NOW11111
E MU MMMMMM !MEOW IMINIB1 OMENS
MIMI MIN MMMMMMMMMMMMMM MEI 1111111111.

111111.11M
MIN111111111MMONIIIN: all11M11111 111M1111110
11111111111.
7..11.1..1111111111.111.111011.1111111111
MMMMMMM 111M1111111111111111MO
MUM IMIll MM MM lIl
111111611111111111 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMM
111111M11111W1111111111.111111MO111,1 111111111110
I
0 0.
i
NN 1
O
0 0
O 0
0
0
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TELEVISION ALIGNMENT CHART
VIDEO I -F

SIGNAL -GENERATOR OUTPUT -INDICATOR SIGNAL -GENERATOR SPECIAL AD -

STEP SETTING INSTRUCTIONS JUST
CONNECTION CONNECTION

1 Connect output of AM sig. Connect vertical input of Set AM generator to 22.1 Adjust TC307 for minimum TC307
nal generator through i-f oscilloscope to ALIGN TEST mc. (modulated). Indication.
jig to grid (pin 1) of 4th jack 1301.
video-i-f tube.

2 Connect outputs of AM Same as step 1. Set FM generator to 25 mc. Adjust TC306 for curve TC306
and FM signal generators ± 4 mc. deviation. Set AM similar to figure 18.
through IL jig to grid (pin generator (unmodulated) to
1) of 4th video-i-f tube. 24.9 mc. to produce a mark-
er pip on response curve.

3 Connect output of AM sig- Same as step 1. Set generator (modulated) Adjust TC304 for minimum TC304
nal generator through Lf to 28.1 mc. indication.
jig to grid (pin 1) of 3rd
video-i-f tube.

4 Connect outputs of AM Same as step I. Set FM generator to 25 mc. Adjust TC303 and TC305 TC305
and FM signal generators ± 4 mc. deviation. Set AM for curve similar to figure TC303
through i-f jig to grid (pin generator to 23.9 mc. to 19.
1) of 3rd video-i-f tube. produce marker pip on re-
sponse curve.

5 Connect output of AM sig. Same as step 1. Same as step 1. Adjust TC200 for minimum TC200
nal generator through i-f indication.
jig to grid (pin 1) of 2nd
video-i-f tube.

6 Connect outputs of AM Same as step 1. Set FM generator to 25 mc. Adjust TC302 for curve TC302
and FM signal generators ± 4 mc. deviation. Set AM similar to figure 20.
through i-f jig to grid (pin generator to 26.3 mc. (un-
I) of 2nd video-i-f tube. modulated) to produce mark-
er pip on response curve.

7 Connect outputs of AM Same as step 1. Set FM generator to 25 mc. Adjust TC301 for curve TC301
and FM signal generators ± 4 mc. deviation. Set AM similar to figure 21.
through IL jig to grid (pin generator to 25.8 me. (on -
1) of 1st video-i-f tube. modulated) to produce mark-
er pip on response curve.

8 Connect outputs of AM Same as step I. Set FM generator to 25 mc. Adjust TC300 for curve TC300
and FM signal generators ± 4 mc. deviation. Set AM similar to figure 22. It may
through mixer jig to grid generator to 23 mc., 24 mc.. be necessary to readjust
(pin 1) of mixer tube. 25.2 mc., and 26.6 mc. to TC301. TC302, TC303, and
produce marker pips on re- TC305 in order to obtain
sponse curve as required. this curve.

SOUND I -F

9 Same as step 8. Connect vertical input ofSet FM generator to 22.1 Adjust C200A and C200B C200A
oscilloscope to AFC TEST mc., ± 1 mc. deviation. Set slightly counterclockwise C200B
lack 1200. AM generator (modulated) until an indication is ob-
to 22.1 mc. served on the oscilloscope.

10 Same as step 8. Same as step 9. Same as step 9. Adjust TC202 for minimum TC202
amount of AM indication TC201
(see note). Adjust TC201 for
symmetrical pattern (equal
peaks).

11 Same as step 8. Same as step 9. Set FM generator to 22.1 Adjust C200A and C200B C200A
mc., ± 1 mc. deviation. for maximum peaks and C200B
Turn AM generator OFF. symmetrical pattern.

146
M OMMENEMOMEMMUMMMINMEMMOMMMOMMONM
MMMMMMM MMMMMM MMilmOMOMMEM MMMMM mlm
S UMMIUMMOMMUMUMSMOMSUMMOMMOSMUMOM
SMEMMOMMEIMMEMEMOOMMIMINSOMEMMONO
MOMMMIMMOUEM MMMMM MMMMMMM MMMMMM
:um
OUSUMUM2.:511MMEMMMSUUMMUMUMMEMMUOM
MMMMM MMIUMN6=.5=mMOEMMO MMMMMMMMM um
O MOMOMMIONEMMMOM =1.11OMMOMMINE
MUMMIMIMOMMEMORNMOMOMMEMa,mmIMEMMIE
MUUMMMOMMESUUOUMMOUOUMMOMFMOMMINOM
MMOMMMMOOMMIMMMISMOMOMMM.F.AMOMMIMNIM
OWOMMOOMMEMMEMOSVO!:MMEMMEMMOOM
mmaimmEMEM
M MM imilammiammommmwm
IIMMMINIMMOMM MM MM 1111OMMEOMMEOMMONO
mUOMMEMUM MM MM MMMEMEMMOMMOUMEMOM
moMMINIMMENK.MMUmMEMMOMMEMMMIOMMMOM
MMOMMUMMAIMOMMOMMIONMEMOMMMMEMMIMOM
moMMIUMEMOMEMMEMMIMMEMM MMMMMMMMMM
O MMMOMIMMOMMEMMOUMMUMMOMOMMEOMMEMM
O MMOMMIMUOMMUMMEMMUMIMOOMMEMOUMUU
MIUMMMEMMOMMEMUMMUMIIMMIMOMOMMOOM
S UMMORMESMEMOUMMUMUSAUOMMUNIMMUM
O MOMMENIMOMMEMEMMEMMMEMMOMEMUMEOMIM
iiMEMMMOMMUNIMMEMMEMMMEMNOMMMEMMUIM
MMEMOMOMMINIMMEEMMIMUIMMOMMOMMUMMIM
MOMMMOMMENOMMEMOMMEMMMMOMMOINNOMM
mimmimmminimimOMMEMUMEOmmommimm
mummommummommommimmornimmimm
MEMMUMMMuZTOMEMMOMMOMEMSMIMIMMEMM
S muEEMMMEENNEMMm
mn
Uu-6.7=MUMMUMUMBENNEMMN
IIMOMMOOMMMOMMOMMMODMENOMOMMEMMEM
MMMMMMMMMMMMM MMOMMENWUmMEMMEUMmmal
mmmMUMEMMEEMEMMOMIMMOMAMMOIMOOMMMUN
mammamomeammaimmusamamommamms
MMMMM minamommammemmomemanamm
MMMMM MmEMEEMEMMOMUMMEMENMOMMMUMWM
MMIIMMEMNIMEMMEMIMEMMOMMEMMKEIIMMUMM
mmuUMMUM MMMMM sommaamaamm
somminimmomminumillomminammummia
mammamminummam:ammammommammamm
ammem===ria..glamommsamsamminams
O MMIMOMiZZZONMMEMMEMMEIMMOOMMIIMEMIIM
MMMMM EMMEMMOMIMMOOMMUMMEMMEMMEMMON
maIMMIUMEMMFAMMUMMOMMOMMEMOMMENUOMEN
smuMEMMEMEMIEMMUMUMUMMUMUMMUMUUSO
aMEMMMUMMEMEMOMMMIMMOMEMMEMMOMMMEM
mMEMMEMMUMMINUOMMMUMMUMEMIUMMIMOMMII
MEMIIMMOMMIMNEMMIMMOMMEEMMIIMOMUM
aammomminammammammommommanomme
MMMMM MEMMOMMOMMUMMMEMOMMMUMMEIMO
SEMMMEMMEMEOMEMMOMOMMUMOMMMMOMME
SianaMMEMENEWEEMONSMOMMENESESOMMI
MMMMM MMOIMMAMMOMOMIMMOMMEMMOMMEMMO
VOMMMEMEMMOMMUMEMEM MMMMMMMMMMMMM m
lammoMM5UMMEMMEMMOMMMOMMERMIUIMMEM
OMMOOM.0.61TRUMUMUMMINUMMUESUMMEER
0111MMOMMIZTOMMMOMMIMMIMMMIMMOMM
emmammu
giONEMEMMEMEMEMENNIOMMarUMWMOMMEMM.
ONMEMMONNUMMUMEMUNIOAMIWZROMMUMEN
ROMMMEMMENMUMMEMMEN MMMMMMMMMMM me
ImmemmmiummimmOmmilimmimaimummwom
MMOMMEMOMEMMOMMMOMMOLIIIMMOM
auUm MMMMM EMMEMOMMEMMOMOMMUMOMMOM
lammummanomommammi MM 5.1 MM mama
immammimummalammemw.5grammanim
immimmenamammanalT=adairLdmammemme
a
MEMMUMaMPTZAMMIMMOMMOMMMEMMMEMOMMIN
OMUMMEtiMMOMMMMIIMMMEOMMMUMMIMMENME
maimmommainsimaimirnmaiummommi
suUMMEMUuuMMUmMEMMMOMMOMMOMMEMOMO
a MMMMMMMMMMMMM OMMUMMMEMEMOMMOMMO
EMUMOOMMEMMEMMINEMEMMOMMOMMOMMEMMO
IMUMOMMOMOMOMUMMOMMOMMIMMIMMOM
IMUMMMOROMIOMEMOMMMOMEMOOMMOMOMMMO
IONMOMOMAIMEMEMMOMEMEMONOMMEMMOM
am MMMMMMMMMMMMM
MilmMMIMMME
mums MMMMMMMM
lam MMMMMM NmEOMEMMOMOMIMMIMIMMUMMEMEM
MOMMUOMMMOMMORMMOOOMMENUMSOMMUM
mumommiammammeammimmumwommaim
MIMMMEMMEMOMMMENMEMMIMEMMMIMMEMEMMUM
MMMMMMMMMMMMMM Mmommuummm MMMMMMM
ZmUMMUMM M
mU MMMMM M-Um6r.,
mummmmummummumumimummmwzmummummum
MOMMUMMEMEMOMMOMMOOMMEMPIMMIMAMMEM
n ummammemmeammommatamanammo
MIMMMEMEMOMMUMENUMENISSEMONEMBEMB
MMOIMMMEMEMMEMOMMMEMr.uml MMMMM MEM
MM.
MNIMOMMEMMEMMMOMP4MMEMOMMEMMUUM
milIMMMEMEMMEMMIUMMEMEMMUUMMMIMMEMEM
g am MMMMMMM p".;.0 M
E MENMEMMUF=aMUMMOMOMEMOMMEMMIMMEMM
MUM MM MM MUMMOMMEMMINIMIMMEMMMEM
IMEMEWAMMIMMEMMOUIMIMMUMMEMMMUMUMUM
manamminammannammummaanamme
O MEMMOMAMMUMMIONOMOMIEMMEMMEMMMEMM
MUUUMMMUMMOMMUSEMOSUUMEMOOMMIMMUM
MOMOMMOOMMIMMINNMMOMMOOMMOMOMMONS
O MMIMMMOMMOMMMEMOMMMOMMEMMMEMIMM
aMMUMMOMMUMOMMOUMMUIMEMMUMMUMMEMEM
MUUMUU MMMMM MEMMUMMmel MMMMM Ummlom
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Television Carrier Frequencies CIRCUIT VARIATIONS

The television schematic diagram for Model 49-1278,
Video Carrier Sound Carrier Code 123, also applies to Models 49-1279, Code 122,
Channel
Band Width
Frequency Frequency and 49-1280, Code 121. The television circuits for
(mc.) (mc.) (mc.) Models 49-1040, Code 123, 49-1076, Code 123, 49-1077,
Code 122, and 49-1240, Code 124, are similar to those
2 54-60 55.25 59.75 for Model 49-1278, Code 123. Variations in the cir
cults are shown in the following schematic inserts. In
addition, Models 49-1040, Code 123, 49-1076, Code 123,
3 60-66 61.25 65.75 and 49-1077, Code 122, have a 15,000 -ohm resistor
R529 and an 18,000 -ohm resistor R532 between pins 6
4 66-72 67.25 71.75 and 8 of the 5V4G damper tube.

5 76-82 77.25 81.75

6 82-88 83.25 87.75

AERIAL INPUT TO
TV SET
7 174-180 175.25 179.75
TB400
8 180-186 181.25 185.75
R4/2 R4//
9 186-192 187.25 191.75 220 220

10 192-198 193.25 197.75

TO TERMINALS
TO TERMINALS 6 AND7 OF Z400
11 198-204 199.25 203.75
3 AND 4 OF Z400

12 204-210 205.25 209.75

Model 49-1040, Code 123, and Model 49-1240, Code 124
13 210-216 211.25 215.75

68666
HORIZ OUTPUT TO CENTER TAP
OF 1503 PRIMARY
USING THE ALIGNMENT CURVES
TO R534 TO R536
Figures 18, 19, 20, and 21 show the approximate i-f 5
response curves that should be obtained at the VIDEO
TEST jack when sweep signals are applied to the grids
of the fourth, third, second, and first video-i-f grids,
7 2 3 S500
(PART OF S200)
respectively. Figure 22 shows the over-all video-i-f 03 04 6

curve, and gives the upper and lower limits of relative TO

response at any frequency over its range. When the 6.3V AC R537
television receiver is properly aligned, all points on the 100
over-all curve should fall between these limits.

Each curve is shown on a Crosshatch Screen, Philco

Part No. 54-4545, from the Model 7008 Visual Align- 7N7
HORIZ BLK OSC
ment Generator. They are specifically drawn for con- 7N7 TO
venient use with this equipment. VERT BLK OSC 6.3VAC

To use these curves with Model 7008, the sweep 7Z4 RECTFIER
width and the centering and gain controls should be
adjusted to give patterns which are proportional to the
curves shown. Model 49-1240, Code 124

148
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

68666 TO PIN 3 OF
HORIZ OUTPUT TO CENTER TAP OF AUD 0 OUTPUT TUBE
T 503 PRIMARY
0:IL S200
T200
TO R534 TO R536
PL 200
C 520 .4 11
TO PIN 4 OF
R535 7 AUDIO OUTPUT -,- J201
220,000 C522 TUBE
10 MF
S500
TO or4 (PART OF S200)
Model 49.1040, Code 123, and Model 49.1240, Code 124
6.3V AG -# 03 04

/8361
HV RECTIFIER TO PICTURE
R549
TUBE ANODE
100 7250 V
7N7
HORIZ BLK OSC R/08
TO
7N7 680,000
6.3V AC
A ,,se VERT BLK OSC T503
4. R/05
7Z 4 RECTIFIER 410 680,000
411
4111111.
7425V
Model 49-1040, Code 123 WHITE 411111.

41 C/07
411. T500 MMF

YELLOW T/00

68666
YELLOW HORIZONTAL
OUTPUT
YELLOW STR

ORANGE
Model 49.1040, Code 123, Model 49.1076, Code 123, and
Model 49-1077, Code 122

GREEN STR
68666
HORIZ OUTPUT
TO CENTER TAP
ORANGE OF T503 PRIMARY

R534 TO R536
YELLOW STR
TO C520 100

WHITE R535 7
I 220,000
si0 TO
(PART OF 6.3V AC
R200) R537 C523 C522
PL/00
100 T680
MMF
T
W00
T0117 VOLT
60 CYCLE

Model 49-1040, Code 123, and Model 49.1240, Code 124 Model 49.1076, Code 123, and Model 49-1077, Code 122

149
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TELEVISION -RECEIVER CHASSIS
Model 49-1240, Code 124, Model 49-1278, Code 123, Model 49-1279, Code 122,
and Model 49-1280, Code 121

RUN NEW OR ADDED OLD OR REMOVED REASON FOR CHANGE

DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE PART NO. PART NO.
NO.

2 C511 changed from .0047 mi. to .0056 mf. 45-3500-7 45.3502 To improve vertical sync.

3 .001-mf. condenser added in parallel with C419. 45-3500-5 To reduce video modulation in
local oscillator.

4 150-mnd. condenser added between pin 6 of 60-10155407 To reduce hum radiation.

vertical -blocking -oscillator tube and ground.

5 R538 changed from 10,000 ohms to 68,000 ohms. 66-3688340 66.3108340 To improve vertical linearity.

Model 49-1040, Code 123, Model 49-1076, Code 123, Model 49-1077, Code 122,
Model 49-1240, Code 124, Model 49-1278, Code 123, Model 49-1279, Code 122,
TUNER UNIT and Model 49-1280, Code 121

2 Choke added in the B+ lead to the local oscil- 32-4112-11 To reduce video modulation in
lator, between the ungrounded end of C419 and local oscillator.
the junction of L402 and C402.

3 C401 changed to a special temperature -coefficient 304224.51 30.1224-39 To reduce local -oscillator drift.
condenser. or
62.010009001

I -F STRIP

2 R220, 6800 -ohm resistor, added in the lead be- 66-2688340 To reduce harmonic beat.
tween the ungrounded end of R210 and the junc-
tion of C210 and pin 7 of the FM -detector tube.

2 R221, 6800 -ohm resistor, added in the lead be- 66-2688340 To reduce harmonic beat.
tween the ungrounded end of R211 and the junc-
tion of C211 and pin 5 of the FM -detector tube.

3 L300 changed to an improved coil. 32-4359-4 32-4359-2 To increase video-i-f gain.

4 4.7 -ohm resistor added in the lead between pin 3 66-9478340 To reduce hum.
of the FM -detector tube and ground.

5 C222. 470-mmf. condenser, added between pin 7 62-147001031 To increase sound-i-f gain.
of the first sound-i-f tube and ground.

6 10-mmf. condenser added in parallel with C303. 62-010009001 To prevent oscillation of video-
i-f stage.

6 10-mmf. condenser added in parallel with C306. 62-010009001 To prevent oscillation of video-
i-f stage.

Philco Models 49-1040, 49-1076, 49-1077, 49-1240,

49-1278, 49-1279, and 49-1280, are described on
pages 131 to 150 of this manual. You will find
Models 49-1075 and 49-1275 almost the same as the
models described, while many other 1949 Philco
television and television combinations are very
150 similar in many respects to models described.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
The ion trap rear magnet poles should be approxi-
mately over the ion trap flags. Starting from this posi-
RCAVICTOR tion adjust the magnet by moving it forward or backward
at the same time rotating it slightly around the neck of
the kinescope for the brightest raster on the screen.
Reduce the brightness control setting until the raster is
slightly above average brilliance. Adjust the focus con-
trol (R191 on the chassis rear apron) until the line
TELEVISION RECEIVERS structure of the raster is clearly visible. Readjust the ion
trap magnet for maximum raster brilliance. The final
touches on this adjustment should be made with the
MODELS 8T241, 8T243, 8T244 brightness control at the maximum position with which
good line focus can be maintained.
Chassis No. KCS28
FOCUS COIL WIDTH
Models 8T241, 8T243 and 8T244 are "10 inch" table MOUNTING
SCREWS CENTERING
model television receivers. These receivers employ ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS
twenty-one tubes plus 2 rectifiers and a 10BP4 kinescope.
The receivers are identical except for cabinets.

C153S

/13 &TOR= NTAL

DRIVE
C153 A 1.11112)
LOCKING HORIZONTAL
HEIGHTrl-
I
FOCUS
SI) St RANGE LINEARITY

Lyffmci,

Figure 6-Rear Chassis Adjustments

DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT.-If the

020e-toneoe.
0
1
-
lines of the raster are not horizontal or squared with -the
picture mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condi-
tion is obtained. Tighten the yoke adjustment wing screw.
PICTURE ADJUSTMENTS.-It will now be neces-
sary to obtain a test pattern picture in order to make
further adjustments.
BRIGHTNESS OFF -ON
SOUND
STATION
SELECTOR
If the Horizontal Oscillator and AGC System are
HORIZONTAL VOLUME operating properly, it should be possible to sync the
HOLD
PICTURE CHANNEL picture at this point. However if, the AGC threshold
VERTICAL FINE
NO. control is misadjusted, and the receiver overloading, it
HOLD TUNING may be impossible to sync the picture.
Figure 1-Receiver Operating Controls If the receiver is overloading, turn R138, on top of
the chassis, counter -clockwise until the set
operates normally and the picture can be synced.
KINESCOPE
CUSHION
DEFLECTION CENTERING
ADJUSTMENTS
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
ADJ.
YOKE AOJ.
ALIGNMENT.-Turn the horizontal hold control to the
extreme counter -clockwise position. The picture should
SMALL remain in horizontal sync. Momentarily remove the
MAGNET
GAP ON signal by switching off channel then back. Normally the
THIS SIDE picture will be out of sync. Turn the control clockwise
slowly. The number of diagonal black bars will be grad-
REMOVE ually reduced and when only 3 bars sloping downward
TWO
SHIPPING
FOCUS
COIL to the left are obtained, the picture will pull into sync
SCREWS upon slight additional clockwise rotation of the control.
Pull in should occur when the control is approximately
90 degrees from the extreme counter -clockwise position.
The picture should remain in sync for approximately 90
ARROW LARGE
MAGNET
degrees of additional clockwise rotation of the control.
FOCUS CO IL
MOUNT NG
GAP ON
THIS SIDE
At the extreme clockwise position, the picture should
KINESCOPE CUSHION SCREW be out of sync and should show I vertical or diagonal
black bar in the raster.
Figure 3-Yoke and Focus Coil Adjustments If the receiver passes the above checks and the picture
is normal and stable, the horizontal oscillator is properly
ION TRAP MAGNET ADJUSTMENT. - Looking aligned. Skip "Alignment of Horizontal Oscillator" and
at the kinescope gun structure, it will be observed that proceed with "Centering Adjustment."
the second cylinder from the base inside the glass neck
is provided with two small metal flags, as shown ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR.
Figure 5. -If in the above check the receiver failed to hold sync
with the hold control at the extreme counter -clockwise
position or failed to hold sync over 90 degrees of clock-
wise rotation of the control from the pull in point, it will
be necessary to make the following adjustments.

Copyright, 1948, by Radio Corporation of America, RCA Victor Division

Figure 5-lon Trap Flags

151
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
8T241, 8T243, 8T244
Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.-Turn the hori-
zontal hold control to the extreme clockwise position.
Tune in a television station and adjust the 'no hori-
zontal frequency adjustment (under the chassis) until the
picture is just out of sync and the horizontal blanking
appears as a vertical or diagonal black bar in the raster.
Horizontal Lock in Range Adjustment.-Set the hori-
zontal hold control to the Lull counter -clockwise position.
Momentarily remove the signal by switching off channel
then back. Slowly turn the horizontal hold control clock-
wise and note the least number of diagonal bars obtained
just before the picture pulls into sync.
If more than 3 bars are present just before the picture
pulls into sync, adjust the horizontal locking range trim-
mer C153A slightly clockwise. If less than 3 bars are
present, adjust C153A slightly counter -clockwise. Turn
the picture control counter -clockwise, momentarily re-
move the signal and recheck the number of bars present
at the pull in point. Repeat this procedure until 3 bars
are present.
Repeat the adjustments under "Horizontal Frequency
Adjustment" and "Horizontal Locking Range Adjust-
ment" until the conditions specified under each are
fulfilled. When the horizontal hold operates as outlined
under "Check of Horizontal Oscillator Alignment" the
oscillator is properly adjusted.
If it is impossible to sync the picture at this point and
the AGC system is in proper adjustment it will be neces-
sary to adjust the Horizontal Oscillator by the method
outlined in the alignment procedure.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT.-No electrical center-
ing controls are provided. Centering is obtained by
mechanically orienting the focus coil with the three ad-
justment screws shown in Figure 3. Center the picture
on the screen by adjustment of these screws. The focus
coil should be concentric around the neck of the kine-
scope to prevent curvature of the raster.
FOCUS COIL ADJUSTMENTS.-If, after making
the centering adjustments in the above paragraph, a
corner of the picture is shadowed, it will be necessary to
loosen the focus coil mounting screws (shown in Figure
3) and change the position of the coil to eliminate the
shadow. Recenter the picture by adjustment of the
centering screws.
Recheck the position of the ion trap magnet to insure
that maximum brilliance is obtained.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY AD-
JUSTMENTS. - Adjust the height control (R155 on
chassis rear apron) until the picture fills the mask
vertically (6t1 inches). Adjust vertical linearity (R162 on
rear apron), until the test pattern is symmetrical from
top to bottom. Adjustment of either control will require
a readjustment of the other. Adjust vertical centering to
align the picture with the mask.
WIDTH, DRIVE AND HORIZONTAL LINE-
ARITY ADJUSTMENTS.-Adjust the horizontal drive
control C153B to give a picture of maximum width within
the limits of good linearity, Adjust the horizontal linearity
control 1,111 to provide best linearity. Adjust the width
control until the picture just fills the mask.
Adjustments of the horizontal drive control affect hori-
zontal oscillator hold and locking range. if the drive con-
trol was adjusted, recheck the oscillator alignment.
FOCUS.-Adjust the focus control (R191 on chassis
rear apron) for maximum definition in the test pattern
vertical "wedge" and best focus in the white areas of the
pattern.
CHECK TO SEE THAT THE CUSHION AND
YOKE THUMBSCREWS ANI? THE FOCUS COIL
MOUNTING SCREWS ARE TIGHT.
152
AGC THRESHOLD CONTROL.-The AGC thres-
hold control R138 is adjusted at the factory and normally
should not require readjustment in the field.
To check the adjustment of the AGC Threshold Con-
trol, tune in a strong signal, sync the picture and turn
the picture control to the maximum clockwise position.
Turn the brightness control counter -clockwise until the
vertical retrace lines are .just invisible. Momentarily re-
move the signal by switching off channel then back. If
the picture reappears immediately, the receiver is not
overloading due to improper setting of R138. If the pic-
ture requires an appreciable portion of a second to re-
appear, R138 should be readjusted.
Set the picture control at the maximum clockwise posi-
tion. Turn R133 fully counter -clockwise. The top one-half
inch of the picture may be bent slightly. This should be
disregarded. Turn R138 clockwise until there is a very,
very slight bend or change of bend in the top one-half
inch of the picture. Then turn R138 counter -clockwise
just sufficiently to remove this bend or change of bend.
If the signal is very weak, the above method may not
work as it may be impossible to get the picture to bend.
In this case, turn R138 clockwise until the snow in the
picture becomes more pronounced, then counter -clockwise
until the best signal to noise ratio is obtained.
The AGC control adjustment should be made on a
strong signal if possible. If the control is set too far
clockwise on a weak signal, then the receiver may over-
load when a strong signal is received.
Replace the cabinet top. On Model 8T241, recheck pic-
ture centering after the top is replaced. Replace the
cabinet back.
CHECK OF R -F OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS.
-Tune in all available stations to see if the receiver r -f
oscillator is adjusted to the proper frequency on all chan-
nels. If adjustments are required, these should be made
by the method outlined in the alignment procedure.
The adjustments for channels 2 through 5 and 7
through 12 are available from the front of the cabinet by
removing the station selector escutcheon as shown in
Figure 7. Adjustment for channel 13 is on top of the
chassis and channel 6 adjustment is in the kinescope well.
See Figures 11 and 12 for their location.
4
/i1)
AC
0Q Os0
TO REMOVE ESCUTCHEON, SLIDE OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
SPRING CLIP TO LEFT - FOR CHANNEL NUMBER
Figure 7-R -F Oscillator Adjustments
PICTURE I -F FREQUENCIES
Picture Carrier Frequency 25.75 Mc.
Adjacent Channel Sound Trap 27.25 Mc.
Accompanying Sound Traps 21.25 Mc.
Adjacent Channel Picture Carrier Trap 19.75 Mc.
SOUND I -F FREQUENCIES
Sound Carrier Frequency 21.25 Mc.
Sound Discriminator Band Width between peaks.. 350 kc
VIDEO RESPONSE To 4 Mc.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 8T241, 8T243, 8T244
TEST EQUIPMENT. -To properly service the tele- CAUTION: Do not short the kinescope second anode
vision chassis of this receiver, it is recommended that the lead. Its short circuit current is approximately 3 ma.
following test equipment be available: This represents approximately 9 watts dissipation and a
considerable overload on the high voltage filter resistor
R -F Sweep Generator meeting the following require- R189.
ments:
(a) Frequency Ranges Adjustments Required. -Normally, only the r -f oscil-
lator line will require the attention of the service techni-
20 to 30 mc., 1 mc. and 10 mc. sweep width cian. All other circuits are either broad or very stable
50 to 90 mc., 10 mc. sweep width and hence will seldom require re -adjustment.
170 to 225 mc., 10 mc. sweep width The oscillator line is relatively non critical. When oscil-
(b) Output adjustable with at least .1 volt maximum. lator tubes are changed, in all probability it will be neces-
(c) Output constant on all ranges. sary to adjust only CO in order to bring, the entire line
into adjustment.
(d) "Flat" output on all attenuator positions.
Cathode -Ray Oscilloscope, preferably one with a wide ORDER OF ALIGNMENT. -When a complete re-
band vertical deflection, an input calibrating source, and ceiver alignment is necessary, it can be most conveniently
a low capacity probe. performed in the following order:
(1) Sound discriminator (5) R -F and converter lines
Signal Generator to provide the following frequencies. (2) Sound i-f transformers (6) R -F oscillator line
(a) I -F frequencies (3) Picture i-f traps (7) 4.5 mc. video trap
19.75 mc. adjacent channel picture trap (4) Picture i-f transformers (8) Sensitivity check
21.25 mc. sound i-f and sound traps
22.05 and 25.0 mc. cony. and first pix i-f trans. SOUND DISCRIMINATOR ALIGNMENT. - Set
25.9 mc. second picture i-f transformer
the signal generator for approximately .1 volt output at
21.25 mc. and connect it to the second sound i-f grid.
24.6 mc. fourth picture i-f transformer
22.0 mc. third picture i-f transformer Detune T113 secondary (bottom).
22.5 mc. fifth picture i-f transformer Set the "VoltOhmyst" on the 10 volt scale.
25.75 mc. picture carrier
27.25 mc. adjacent channel sound trap Connect the meter in series with a one megohm resistor
to the junction of diode resistors R203 and R204.
(b) R -F frequencies Adjust the primary of T113 (top) for maximum out-
Picture Sound put on the meter.
Channel Carrier Carrier Connect the "VoltOhmyst" to the junction of C183
Number Freq. Mc. Freq. Mc. and R203. Adjust T113 secondary (bottom). It will be
found that it is possible to produce a positive or negative
2 55.25 59.75 voltage on the meter dependent upon this adjustment.
3 61.25 65.75 Obviously to pass from a positive to a negative voltage,
4 67.25 71.75 the voltage must go through zero. T113 (bottom) should
5 77.25 81.75
be adjusted so that the meter indicates zero output as the
voltage swings from positive to negative. This point will
6 83.25 87.75 be called discriminator zero output.
7 175.25 179.75 Connect the sweep oscillator to the grid of the second
8 181.25 185.75 sound i-f amplifier.
9 187.25 191.75 Adjust the sweep band width to approximately 1 mc.
10 193.25 197.75 with the center frequency at approximately 21.25 and
11 199.25 203.75 with an output of approximately .1 volt.
12 205.25 209.75 Connect the oscilloscope to the junction of C183 and
13 211.25 215.75 R203. The pattern obtained should be similar to that
(c) Output on these ranges should be adjustable and shown in Figure 15. If it is not, adjust the T113 (top)
at least .1 volt maximum. until the wave form is symmetrical.
The peak to peak band width of the discriminator should
Heterodyne Frequency Meter with crystal calibrator be approximately 350 kc. and it should be linear from
if the signal generator is not crystal controlled. 21.75 mc..to 21.325 mc.
Electronic Voltmeter of Junior "VoltOhmyst" type and SOUND. I -F ALIGNMENT. - Connect the sweep
a high voltage multiplier probe for use with this meter oscillator to the first sound i-f amplifier grid.
to permit measurements up to 10 kv. Connect the oscilloscope to the second sound i-t grid
Service Precautions: - If necessary to remove the
return (terminal A T112) in series with a 33,000 ohm
isolating resistor.
chassis from cabinet, the kinescope must first be re-
moved. See Figures 3 and 5. if possible, the chassis Insert a 21.25 mc. marker signal from the signal gen-
should then be serviced without the kinescope. However, erator into the second sound i-f grid.
if it is necessary to view the raster during servicing, the Adjust T112 (top and bottom) for maximum gain and
kinescope should be inserted only after the chassis is symmetry about the 21.25 mc. marker. The pattern ob-
turned on end. The kinescope should never be allowed tained should be similar to that shown in Figure 16.
to support its weight by resting in the deflecting yoke. A The output level from the sweep should be set to pro-
bracket should be used to support the tube at its viewing duce approximately .3 volt peak -to -peak at the second
screen. sound i-f grid return when the final touches on the above
By turning the chassis on end with the power trans- adjustment are made. It is necessary that the sweep out-
former down, all adjustments will be made conveniently put voltage should not exceed the specified values other-
available. Since this is the only safe position in which wise the response curve will be broadened, permitting
the chassis will rest and still leave all adjustments ac- slight misadjustment to pass unnoticed and possibly caus-
cessible, the trimmer location drawings are oriented sim- ing distortion on weak signals.
ilarly for ease of use.
153
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
8T241, 8T243, 8T244
The band width at 70% response from the first sound
i-f grid to the second i-f grid snould be approx. 200 kc.
PICTURE I -F TRAP ADJUSTMENT. -Connect the
"VoltOtimyst" to the junction of 8135 and 11136.
Remove the 6SN7GT AGC Amplifier tube V107. Con-
nect a 250,000 ohm potentiometer between pins 5 and 6
of the V107 socket. Adjust the potentiometer until the
"VoltOhmyst" reads approximately -4.5 volts.
Set the channel switch to the blank position between
channel numbers 2 and 13.
Connect the "VoltOhmyst" across the picture detector
load resistor R119. Under this condition, both leads of
the meter arc at approximately -120 volts. In making this
measurement, care should be taken not to touch the case
of the meter or to permit the meter case to become
grounded.
Connect the output of the signal generator to the grid
of the converter tube VI. To do this, remove the tube
from the socket and fashion a clip by twisting one end of
a small piece of wire around pin number 1. Replace the
tube in the socket leaving the end of the wire protruding
from under the tube. Connect the signal generator to this
wire through a 1.500 mmf capacitor keeping the leads as
short as possible.
Set the generator to each of the following frequencies
and with a thin fiber screwdriver tune the specified ad-
justment for minimum indication on the "VoltOhmyst."
In each instance the generator should be checked against
a crystal calibrator to insure that the generator is exactly
on frequency
(4) 27.25 mc.-T104 (top)
(1) 21.25 mc.-T103 (top)
(2) ::1.25 mc.-.Tio5 (top) (5) 19.75 mc.-T106 (top)
(3) 27.25 mc.-T102 (top) (6) 19.75 mc.-T101 (top)
In the above transformers using threaded cores, it is
possible to run the cores completely through the coils and
secure two peaks or nulls. The correct position is with the
cores in the outside ends of the coils. If the cores are not
in the correct position, the coupling will be incorrect and
it will be impossible to secure the correct response.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER ADJUSTMENTS.
-Set the signal generator to each of the following fre-
quencies and peak the specified adjustment foe maximum
indication on the "VoltOhmyst." During alignment, re-
duce the input signal if necessary to prevent overloading.
22.5 mc.-T106 (bottom)
24.6 mc.-T104 (bottom)
22.0 me. -T103 (bottom)
25.9 mc.-T102 (bottom)
T1 and T101 are coupled by a link and in combination
constitute an overcoupled transformer, The character-
istics of such a transformer are such that it is impossible
to adjust it to a single frequency.
To sweep align T1 and T101, connect a 330 ohm com-
position resistor across the primary coils of T102, T103,
T104 and T106.
Connect the "VoltOhmyst" to the junction of R135
and R136. Adjust the 250,000 ohm potentiometer for -2.0
volts on the meter.
Connect the oscilloscope to the plate of the first video
amplifier, pin 1 of V106.
Connect a sweep generator to the converter grid
through a 1,500 mini capacitor. Set the generator to sweep
from 20.0 mc. to 30.0 mc. and adjust the output to pro-
vide a 4 volt peak to peak signal on the scope.
Connect the signal generator loosely to the converter
grid and adjust to provide markers at 21.95 mc. and 24.8
me.
Adjust T1 (top) and T101 (bottom) to obtain the re-
sponse shown in Figure 17. The T1 core must penetrate
to the terminal board end of the coil in order to obtain
the correct response.
Remove the 330 ohm resistors from across T102, T103,
T104 and T106.
154
Adjust the 250,000 ohm potentiometer for a 15 volt
peak to peak signal at the plate of the first video amplifier.
The bias as measured by the "VoltOhmyst" should be
-4.5 volts or less.
Observe' and analyze the response curve obtained.
The response will not be ideal and the i-f adjustments
must be retouched in order to obtain the desired curve.
See Figure 18.
On final adjustment the picture carrier marker 'must
be at approximately 45% response. The curve must be
approximately flat topped, with the 22.1 inc. marker at
approximately 95% response and the 25.0 mc. marker
below 90% response.
The most important consideration in making the i-f
adjustments is to get the picture carrier at the 45% re-
sponse point. If the picture carrier operates too low on
toe response curve, loss of low frequency video re-
sponse, of picture brilliance, of blanking, and of sync
may occur. If the picture carrier operates too high on
the response curve, the picture becomes smeared. In mak-
ing these adjustments, care should be taken that no two
transformers are tuned to the same frequency as i-f oscil-
lation may result.
Disconnect the bias potentiometer and replace V107.
Remove the converter tube and take off the clip to pin
number 1. Replace the tube in the socket.
Picture I -F Oscillation. -If the receiver is badly mis-
aligned and two or more of the i-f transformers are
tuned to the same frequency, the receiver may fall into
i-f oscillation. I -F oscillation shows up as a voltage across
the picture detector load resistor that is unaffected by r -f
signal input. If such a condition is encountered, it is
sometimes possible to stop oscillation by adjusting the
transformers approximately to frequency by setting the
adjustment cores of T101, T102, T103, T104, T105 and
'1'106 to be approximately equal to those of another re-
ceiver known to be in proper alignment. if this does not
have the desired effect, it may now be possible to stop
oscillation by increasing the grid bias. if so, it should
then be possible to align the transformers by the usual
method. Once aligned in this manner, the should be
stable with reduced bias.
If the oscillation cannot be stopped in the above man-
ner, shunt the grids of the first three pix i-f amplifiers
to ground with 1,000 mmf. capacitors. Connect the signal
generator to the fourth pix i-f grid and align T106 to
frequency. Progressively remove the shunt from each
grid and align the plate coil of that stage to frequency.
If this does not stop the oscillation, the difficulty is not
due to i-f misalignment as the i-f section is stable when
properly aligned. Check all i-f by-pass condensers, trans-
former shunting resistors, tubes, socket voltages, etc.
ANTENNA, R -F AND CONVERTER LINE AD-
JUSTMENT. -In order to align the r -f tuner, it will
first be necessary to set the channel 13 oscillator to fre-
quency. The shield over the bottom of the r -f unit must
be in place when making any adjustments.
The channel 13 oscillator may be aligned by adjusting
it to beat with a crystal calibrated heterodyne frequency
meter, or by feeding a signal into the receiver at the r -f
sound carrier frequency and adjusting the oscillator for
zero output from the sound discriminator. In this latter
case the sound discriminator must first have been aligned
to exact frequency. Either method of adjustment will
produce the same results. The method used will depend
upon the type of test equipment available. Regardless of
which method of oscillator alignment is used, the fre-
quency standard must be crystal controlled or calibrated.
If the receiver oscillator is to be adjusted by the hetero-
dyne frequency meter method, couple the meter probe
loosely to the receiver oscillator.
If the receiver oscillator is adjusted by feeding in the
r -f sound carrier signal, connect the signal generator to
the receiver antenna terminals. Connect- the "Volt-
Ohmyst" to the sound discriminator output (junction of
C183 and R203).
Set the receiver channel switch to 13.
SSI
arpssod aq pinoys n uopED!pu! pagpads ay; 10; aatuttyal luatmsnipu yyym puuq ay; Si z13 'sluatulsncpu A3uanb
aoluppso aietadoiddr ay; klutisnfpu puu puury3 yaua -31; 1111133 ay; 31E 99-1 puu Er; 61 513>11utu ay; uaam;
paepums k3uanb3J3 ay; put lantaaal ay; .8ty yoyms -aq ApratilatutuAs p13530f aAana asuodsaa paddol-aug
Ay siauuetp uo Aatianbal; loirwaso ay; isnlpv Alalutupcoaddr OE 103 '7,13 pue 991 `EI1 '61 isnipy
amaq-e su suotreD;pu; .10; IsufpV sapuanbaa; 111i153
.alqut luatutalyu ay; u; palsy punos puy 1111;30 9 (10001(3 01 aoveppso lanletu ay; las
su ADuanbal; aadoad ay; 04 paupuels A3uanbaa; ay; las 9 131111E133 1JA03 01 ioveppso daams 144 ;as
gt laUUEL13 lantaaaa 344 yaltms .9 lauttuy3 o; 133I3331 ay; las
'flag ay; ut payano; *1311UE10 aturs ay; ut p1u210 pcau s; 9 lattu0y3
aq 100 pinoys puE sluatulsnipe poiluoa Aiolau; ale atirtu
-atlas ay; uo umoys o 1 pue T sluatulsnipu ioruppsp
1
akittra paatnbai ay; uttlym pr; Apsua 511)11510
.aoluuttutias;p punos 111013 1.85li00 013Z ao 1alaw A3uanb ay; pur puoaq Aianpuaudtuoa atuo3aq 5l10013 A3uanb
-aa; au.Apoaalay ay; uo 4uaq apppne Lye .10; 9D isnipv -Da; aay2ty ay; Datys paauataadxa aq pploys adA; sty; Jo
AlinDapp ou `aanamoy 'AiretuaoN siautretp laylo uo do
luatulsnipe ay; 2uptetu apym S13311ELII ay; 112 0; lap() Ally8lys lauuutp 11005 aSIU10.1(1
18051 slt jo aipptux ay; 0; loaluoD .Styun; aug ay; las -1003 Appssod pUE `3,I3 pire TID '04D '01 lsnfpeal 01 X1ES
(.101riaua.8 tuu.S!s ay; .10; .3u; -saaau aq `sluatuisnfpe 11005113 lunptfttput ou aau
gL'gIg .10 aalaui A3uanbal; auSpolalay Jo; Dul Lcg) A3uanb 11144 amts 'siauuutp A3uanbai; 4214 alotu 10 auo uo luau;
-al; 1331103 ay; 04 paupuuls S3uanbal3 ay; lsnipv -a.unbaa sty; tyyym Hu; lou op 5.11)11510 ay; 11 asuodsal
E; yayms 410013 laalaaai 394 las %08 anoqu sialautu ay; 44!M asuodsal paduys aadold ay;
10e4 slauurya asay; ;Ey; puno; aq pploys ;I .sanana
ir3paulnu asianaa Ut antylu03 pue asuodsaa reatdA; io; 61 aan9!g aas patuulqo asuodsal ay;
;sag E; lautiutp u2yr 04 XIESS333U SI 11 `a3uupnput lo anaasqo puu S131111E13 asay; 30 41E3 01 .101E1p3S0 13}11EU1
sdals 2typpu Aqpaureaqo a1E sapuani)aa; .1amo; Datys put lompso daams '434;ms lauueya lan;a3a1 ay; 2u;
sluawasnfpu 2upir10 uaym 33Efd -4341ms Aq E; 420014; L SpUUELp Jo asuodsaa ay; 13143
aq ;sum ;tun 3-.1 ay; Jo tuolloq ay; lama platys au anina ay; Jo ado's do; tuntunym put asuods
.pasn potilaul yatym
ssalpiaaa -al unnupcutu 10; 91 isnfpu puu Z3f 1311UElp 01 11311MS
3111ES ay; styutuai luatuu2yr Jo lapao atu, sjetyuzia; */, puuEtia '61 aan.8;d 115
vuualuu aantaaal ay; 04 i0luaaua.8 iut.t2;s ay; laauuoD anina 5!4; uo slutod asuodsai %16 01 %o6 lE S13111ED
(10z2i pUE ESID JO 0013 ainptd pur punos ay; 44iM anan3 asuodsai 'paddo4-451;
-Duni) Indlno imutyuyiastp punos ay; 04 lsAtu404oA 5 .103 TT3 puu 013 jo sluaullsnipe 142y5 yym uotpuni
ay; 133UUO3 `pasn potion; 13111E3 punos 3-1 ay; j; -003 U! luad Ap.1.8noN ylp!mputq ladoid ay; ant.8 04
1oluip3so lanp3aa ay; ol Alasool aqoad lap to ay; aidno3 TTY lsnipv 13I -11E3 ain;30 pUE punos ay; gym
'pasn poylatu 1111ux ADuanbal; auSpoialay ay; 31 AlleaylaulutAs situ; anana 141 ;pun t13 Pus 013
.301 gL'6LI Pus '310 STILT laPIED
9D gL'SIZ L£Z £I punos put lapau3 Dano0 L iauuutp Jo S13311E111 pasta/
gL'60g ZI L putve43 1atio3 0; aoluipaso daams ay; las
gIl gL'E03 gg3 TT
911 gL'L6I 6Ig OT
(Iauuutp snsiaa. uotle3431 4ug ;yetis 43wits 10; I.T aan
LT I gLI6T £13 6 -8!A aas) L 110013 O4 yayms 1311UELO laapaaa ay; las
811 2L'g81 LOZ 8 isag palsnipe aq pp -toys 'siauuuy3 A3uanbaa; 42;11 ay;
611 gL'6LI I03 Jo Auz Jo asuodsai isamoliru ay; suy L 110013 13tys
TrI-031 gL*L8 601 9 stuuttuaa; tuualue
I31 gL,18 NT aantaDal ay; 01 Alasoo; loa541012 pulls ay; pauuop
g L 'IL £6
E31 gL'g9 L8
tg1 2L.6g 18 3 uolnnenuiai aiqoD daatng paaualoqua-oi a.tneu
zuaunsncpv baaa 311 -bola laqumN
acquipso JapieD 'os0 .4-21 puuelo 17021
puuetio punos 1DARDOZI 318VD
_Lndino d33MS
ameprae aq ;snit; 'bald aatnup punos 03ONV1V8NO
iapun palsy satauanbaa; ay; `,C3uanbai; 11y153 punos 3-1 VIHO OS
ay; u; 2typaaj Ay palsncpu aoluipaso 1azya3ai ay; 3;
'310:1E11EAE
aq ;sum bala 'asp g -H aapun palsy ADuanbaa; my;
-u1qlle3 ay; 'poylaux aalau; ADuanbal; auXpoialay ay; Aq
palsnipu aq 04 SI lompaso 1aap3a1 ay; n -palriqp3 .10 'OI aart.8;g
palloiluo3 relsAi3 aq ;sum paupuels Aauanbal; ay; 'pasn umoys sr Sutlaauuoa Aq palyelqo aq UE3 Indlno paaueleq
SI 4uatuu2yr ioleipaso Jo poylatu t.13114m Jo ssapa1u2a2I 0140 001 Indlno papua-apitys tuyo 0g E suy 1015111350
daams ay; 31 I8 aan.8;d tutat;p yna.y3 ay; u; umotis
'3p:tulle/iv luauidulba ;sal go adA; ay; aiu Indly papua-1'.8045 woo gL 10 paDuum woo 001
uodn puadap ;pm pasn potalatu atu, slinsaa OWES ay; aanp 10; uotpauuo3 gold 141, daams ay; Jo aautpaduy Indlno
-old ;pm luaunsnipt Jo poylaux layyg A3uanba.g. lauxa ay; uodn spuadap uot1Oauuo3 ;t3 potpatu atu, siuuttuia;
o; pau2yu uaaq anuy ;sag ;sum aoluututtiastp punos ay; ruualue 11/4131.1 ay; 0; loluipaso daams 3-1 ay; pautmo
asua aallui sty; u; ioluuttutaasw punos 141 01013 anduto
013Z 103 101EUIDSO ay; AupsnIpt pue A3uanbai; lapava ialatu ay;
punos 3-1 ay; 4E laataaal ay; olty luuSts 2typaaj Aq uo salon 91- 10; aalatuotwalod sup; ay; Isncpv gi;g1; pue
to '11410 A3uanbal; atapoialay pa4v1qyu3 S 431M tern Jo uopunf ay; ol asAtuypiloA ay; 13auuo3
Ivaq 0; 3! 2upsnips Aq pau2yu aq Autu atm lovei(1aso yun Fltyuni J-1 ay; ut
UOIVIIIDSO 3-21 15 uo;43auu03 ;sal ay; 0; adoasollpso ay; 43auuo3
Ta)paya aq ;sum luatuuklye 3-a am- 43!M apaDold AEUI am
4uatuu2yE imumaso ay; '1011002HE 3-1 OE 2tymotiog 'ADuanbaa; of ;as s! a015i1350 E; puuey3 ay; 3544 moN
uofteDgpads oh0s ay; tyyym aq ;snit; aolrutuyiDstp punos taloa; aktulion 0132 10 aalatu A3uanb
spuuutp luatulsnfpu luug up pay3no4aa aq molls DuApolalay ay; uo 4514 apppne ue ao; 93 lsnipv
gI3 pue 991 'Er; '61 '1553 ay; lou spp 31 Iutod luatulsnipe ay; 2up4euz aptim
asuodsaa %cis ay; atioqu aq pploys slanatu; ay; '51553 Hu aHuta s4; lo alplytu ay; 0; l01l010 2tyun; aug ay; las
uI pautelqo asuodsaa ay; 2utaiasqo puu t10013 y3ea of *(aoltaauakt 1uu21;s 14; io;
1oluip3So pue 10451150 daams `aanta3al ay; 2u! atu gL'gI3 10 aalaut A3uanbai; auApolalay 103 'DUX LW
-4311ms Aq g lauu5y3 y2noito umop g sputieya 3131113 A3uanbaa; 4331103 ay; 04 pirptrels A3uanbal; ay; Isnfpv
PPM 'CII.L8
Sel3A130311 NOISIATIML 6,61 a3a33N-m3imo-Jasow
 ' -3 ,z .1 . ug. 2," 2. F, 5 5 Fg a. ?,c, ,z_,. . - a. p_. 4 r? st F, ,; ....-T. E-,
r. a'
a t20 ' 5 FS 3- 'F; 5 ' ' g -0. . . E.-71, K 9, (.9'. g 5.g.°
UI gitni, ,.....,, > 2 2 ," g IV
,T., x- ,,-- al ; Os
'ce:'''>-
.D.,, :`'reC:--',!9
.° '.0g 2:1 8-m S° nq ..F. L-7''5 g .'''' ! cr'''3 ;7z oil rd I o'4' 9'-- (I : 71 v.i., . i 'F.1 ?>I 18:1 . `"91 89.T.g :6::4c. g'n2-n i2- 1 cl Pill 6-"1 1:z;%;2 43 V qrl. ; g'3 51 -e-.PC1
.''' .1
.7-%
C) t r) c. a f4 0 V- :4-43' c''irl a.' !-,`::' 0 ' -' D :1' .9. N ' -' : -. 9, .5. " ';.,, a -R n ' -3 ''"-t4. '2`ZR:(31-"" r''' -1-.Z .2.."61o4' `.° ,''ci)''' c >t, n n ,7,*".,5.e) g, a 'n 0
O g ,-,
E '-'9.91. n 0 ''il '" 8 4'..t° 74 5.r' .'S 4 52..-:;' ' 5 ,g 2 2, g ° 5 47Pn 8 r4'. ° n'EE; n 4Jp'" 5. '7''.8-.... '-' .1-3 . a rg' got, t:q. ..v. 9
s...?.,t-g-F.I. 0 B.... .9. 2:. '-c-w. ;*-- - ,-,,'. sn `4 .- E. ::: eg ;'" '7'0 . e.'%. 7. ST'o E -FS
c`,`
0 =,1 0 '3 '''''' 5.0 °'-`",,',»Ri-"' P.E.`-2 r. °7 tTP X
na g-,. R. ,p, g 4'e9":-,.r°`4,,,z .,7.5m,T,T> ,T."' E,..,::z =0
O
Rnt.,44..?.,, P'g9-t., t'.55!'....:(9 ::917'T `;.'a:77.7,1;:4'2--:i71.-1:`,g
.pn, s.,.g ,;!....:,...c1 .E,J'E w,' Kelp co
-- .1v. ,T, q g '''' g '-a- i... 5.4 z' 5. o- fa. n = a. ;.',. , 2 -. -1 , -< r) :-..' ° - ".4
gq,',19,P) '''''`'41-.
'(7,'S'' ,T, n '&.' .'?.. ,.. F75' -`7''til
E.q, -17 i7 Om
.-3 '". i l'''' 21> '---4: ;'' 7-, 2- 2 =:5: 5 Z12.1: 2 7. - - 8 r. ^-7 n `7 t rp a 1 '' '8 g o 0 = 2, , ,.., ,,, o A, ,. orPayFro g __,.. 0,..,.N- -,.P470
o. 0- n '',,'' A, -I cn o' 0 , 5.'''. t.4
n `4 (7 ''''' :.-al
-'71F,'' 2 51
5:, g- & 4 '51. T 5... r:" `;'4 g. -'':";''' ''''''. 8. .I
->_T'L.9 5 -*A, '-' o ..0,9.-2=S' 5.0-n5'0 " =3 °Tng-Er3 --T '4C)
'ggg°'11:4',:ii,,9z".4gc(;) %.' ar 1-3
= ca.= a,,, r) 74, ** z ;-' F..' . - xi .?,
F; =- , ,T, ;.; = F.-r,g,~',1E-
r'.0.o.C8
Hp , ? ,41 n _ = FS r07,:g t '''' t/ g..5
z -- -a" o B...., -X-r° 5-.°,1Z1 re , P, gu 9 tar cr o. '6'.. :9- g
> ``' 3g -0 E2 !,,-,-;r. ,-, -2..7; ,,,g 0 m,A,. - Ll
- .,:.".,"-. > 5
= '`:)
,.,.
mg,..2s r'5.s-1-.---.'c' <,'7'-='E^0 Pz0,-,:i.r.0 e,'0,.....,,;(5"4,918"g-,9-=r, = _.
- . -t. 9..c.,,
'"'r6''"'"' 2r -':i1,- '''ng'u ii. . 5
sti.. B.-':751 ?7,i8'-i.:4ii 9.27°t.71 i";'.!.,--."42-.,67 .41.21 7ii''
-,F,,r. '---no m2,s.,
,7,..,7.2E-,g...et,'"3 5.gI,-...2 ',9qFoi g.R.a. x
g,--,,,, .., g 6F, = P ,a app 714 7-1%
.o iu.'..-Y'' w ...n
.'.`-'.R
;.1.'"' TeL7..ga'-'?-3.?.528.<,,>,0,9-2-..2,1,t, 6 §. A, 5. ; ,T t n =2 m Et.' 0 - ... 5. > " ..3g
n
P n- 5 5 ri' 1-3
g. a `-''.
.... 97;`5: '.5' ;.6A
0 t,,.
B 7.E5'
, _.,,,,,
- PNLE°: 0 ,,,,
'94 t -1.:41g.
ma '1 '' q:tun.»
rAz ,..,... ,...
'8 A4° 5. i' 04 -:3- 5' P. "9, ga: P°
..9_:,...,8 '-'. .r.i'7'4--.1.2-
'5' 'I.°. 0; 412.r. m
N a' 5 ,C 5.2
.4
E.'''' F.1 `4 g 0.. ° g., -r) .1 ff gP,`:',T.0. 41 F. , , , e, -- 72, 5.2 ,,, = 1 i .1 ,t, ,''' ,g 6I Lt t I. f i ,0 ,E1,7, I ,;E3 ri ...: :;!: 1 LI
o °a.., o
';''.45-(-) ''..=
0 r?.r° . - a: w ao c..'. A, 5- x".^, g 'E n"^ ; (5..A' -i.'.372 'i,' g R...- i.3,p:1 T,.-3 0 .... 71 9, , ....., o st, 4 -, 5.- R
P. ,-,, ., ,..' g ,._., T.; r") r° a
a. -.g, ,e1, §'' roc, Fr. '-'0-.8 0 '1'..q. n',&..-8, t..,6.= 0n <..F,'
= o .=0 .-,, ft. an 0
ei,
0-,-3,...6... lio =5 1- g , O° cu
tg 0 5'
P cl E.
.. '...,e9,D"g e' F, ..C.7.)
- ,t,-° 5 i
I 5g
z
Oa L'; IOSI'iP g*° ...,. M
00,pr''t.74. w 'O'' z v 0 `Z '-'`
c ----'2''"g i.j,.(Dr. 014,,-i CD 7a a.. : g
E.',(2. 0 =a5 o 'FI:"'15.
;-., i7,,,..= c.,,
1..-3 r,`°=;,,zg 5-t'0..r.5* tzi. rt Zr--,'"3.P :1. -19 .-t r. '7' 'e - ." .-- 0 cf,= re
',7. .T. * n a. r' 0 §P !,41,°,,,,, &Ile) rD 5, td F.; : E : , t t, , < :5-F, n pl .7.1.F rEO 1 :
t;
2,7,, Gqgne2-1-31 '-^5,-3°,-.ii. a- r . -,,,?,..?,--,9 c"2 a2 5. P 0.6 g '5::::2,.5.F.''.4
, ..,....,,,,..., TIJ271%;'' Z2 ti 8 0 a' ., P
.-ow
0.-=.;,,,. -> _ -,..- St
E -G......;), -,0. -,,Pd RF`-5F13.& ,..'1,,,g,..- ..." 4".:1'5',4 ;I. 14:7:11 Al
. . .-1 .
w.EI
gi .... rl, op I .- I 7: CA I co a. .-- a , o'< a a .' ..., (G' , r,i'i ;4',T;i4-i.4.7,';1 7;ggLg5q, EY.P...5 tl,!(-3 ,.114- 0PI
2. g. f'," -6'. 2- '-'.' '':' r,:'; 5...."" LVE
0 . -. n .-- 0- ',7.: g, a !`.,.' cig-..g
-.. o ,_J cr ,:?, :-.1 r D 4 , ,1 ' - o - 0 "'
'6'5"-ZY n47 i0 7 ,7'. a.r, a 2 Di
1-30p ro ..i
; Na' 7', '-,2-7; 'A P0 Flg
n F., R
0a E .. _5 2. '4', .- r" > . R . MI
= (.'.
:"" q a r., e -x ,711
. i'7.,. r±,/+'gi%:(").g* "-, a
z-5 -0
''l 4 =8 n
7- ton
gE'clii;go,gr, ''''0:3E; :t4-
.,,-.E.
1
..,.;
5* .2-2 .4 z 6'
ag r, .,.,
0" 0- -P 04- '-'. '7"-. ?,... 2_ ,,,,-.1. _cr
.
e, mm..."71
5 c:".. '4§61 `4 !". nCr1.1-3" , el
..y, = 0= -
ng - .74
S .z:,--.- -. 0
cl:=. p2 "c e, t-, -ms MI
r'>;::3'1 o cr.= ^-'. .w.
.9.1 5'2. m.. '11:!,,-I.: go .175
,4:1.0 ma,5- fte
g .r.,0 0 Z g .1
-, , -0_ .-..
.8 , g,,2 .., z --!--:".n. me
U3 , a.... r.- rya CM a o'"i a
^=x-ro " ?7
-°4.3`2'n
:1:a"4 al. P:J;'e):1' 5-g-5.: 'GO c'qc,,I.Et.s1
Z P -.8 ",'`. nnong, 0
nno``,-.-=`" 2 0 4.4.=-,
0 -Ti
.... ..., ,.., ,P4,
7Dr, ,0,-,
,..,. 0 F.,j,-. g.rig - 5.,-; -El
A.4..0 g R.5, _N-,:4 § -0 ,T, ,.0 nt 8 ,..' 2
_s.,.-...,,,. o .5.crSl'-;z: 5
o-5....?-g.e7.-..."' .o r- o's ,....
re "top
co s' r7;' ri, p., g 1,,,, t. F,-,, .6 12', .2 . o- F,' r.pg (1,

(7.7,- 0.. St
,,,a,.4 P, a
2 T6.5=r-.6' .-g 0.... E,4 o :4; 41 1 :Eit (i in
b I:"
na, -0 .`"g5,7.Zte,g p 7Y e,5:5....:
nCro 0
gRtig 0.... Ll
T.:. tg k Floee, tr:5.1 I is:5-`4. g, 5-
G.
F...., t!*..,.. Xl
gi:541 .;:9'3;" 1-(3. cer,°"r' -0,.
0 * - p3 0 al
to -0040.-
C. .44 el. ..71 fa: g:
rt r. : g 5 El" 5: 5'ciii .,. Mira
.r4g°'''4.
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
8T241, 8T243, 8T244
3.. Plx. TRANS. TRA
vIDS
7104
a
2725
SOUND SOUND
DISCRIMINATOR 21.2 S
RESPONSE RESPONSE C

ePIC

3SPRO%
0 KC
BETWEEN
MARKERS

Figure 15 Figure 16
Discriminator Sound
Response Response

C TEST
C12-.4c,cy,R13
00
Figure 11-Top Chassis Adjustments

Figure 17 Figure 18
T1 and T101 Overall I -F
Response R -F Response
POE SOUND
CARRIER CARRIER

CH

CHANNEL CHANNEL
Figure 12-Bottom Chassis Adjustments

n1-11
PINS 5 646 V107
V107
CONNECT 250N POT
HERE TO ADJUST
BIAS

JUNCTION OF
8203 & R204 \CHANNEL
TERMINAL A CONNECT CHANNEL
T112 CONNECT "VOLTOHMYST" S
HERE TO ALIGN
ALIGNHEE
SOUND--F
II SOUND I -F
JUNCTION OF 5134
IZ222 CONVECT
PAN 70°Ltirlil HERE
R-F BIAS
JUNCTION OF
8755 Et_12136
O
TZVIrAi HERE 1V
117

grtc«.`Nte- BIAS CHANNEL

ATZESPTiOT

emkrftgs
7109
flga.str4 Figure 19-R -F Response
c.acEor
tavalTERE
TO ALIGN
TIPS OF TIPS OF
SYNC AT
CLIPPING
LEVEL
SYNC
CLIPPED
1 V106

V" I-1 I-1

/
SOUND I -F FARS'N CBELOW
CLIPPING
LEVEL
CLIPPING
LEVEL

Figure 13-Test Connection Points

INCORRECT CORRECT INCORRECT

OSCILLATOR
ADJUSTMENT Figure 20-AGC Threshold Adjustment Waveforms
FOR CHANNEL
NUMBER

INCORRECT

OSCIL ATOP ADJUSTMENT FOR CHANNEL 13 IS ON CORRECT

TOP OF R -F UNIT AND CHANNEL 6 IS ON SIDE.

Figure 14-R -F Oscillator Adjustments Figure 21-Horizontal Oscillator Waveforms 157

 r

MOST -OFTEN -NEEDEDALIGNMENT

1949 TELEVISION
TABLE
RECEERS
IV
8T241, 8T243, 8T244
I
STEP
\No.
CONNECT
SIGNAL
GENERA TOR
SIGNAL
GEN.
FREQ.
CONNECT
SWEEP
GENERATOR
SWEEP
GEN.
FREQ.
CONNECT
OSCILLOSCOPE
TO
CONNECT
TO
MISCELLANEOUS
"VOLTOHMYST" CONNECTIONS
AND
INSTRUCTIONS
ADJUST REFER
TO
TO MC. TO MC.
DISCRIMINATOR AND SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT
Not used Not used In series with 1 Detune T113 (bot.) Fig. 13
1 2nd sound i-f grid 21.25 Adjust T113 (top) Fig. 12
(pin 1, V117) .1 volt meg. to junction for max. on meter
of R203 & R204 Fig. 11
output
2 " " " " Junct. of C183 & Meter on 3 volt zero
T113 (bottom) for
on meter
Fig. 13
R203 scale Fig. 12
" ad
2nd sound i-f grid 21.25 Junction of C183 Not used Check for symmetrical response Fig. 13
3
(pin 1, V117) center & R203 waveform (positive & negative). If Fig. IS
1 mc. not equal adjust T113 (top) until
wide they are equal
.1 v. out
Terminal A, T112 " Sweep output re- T112 (top & bot.) Fig. 13
4 1st sound i-f grid 21.25 1st sound i-f grid 21.25
duced to provide for max. gain and Fig. 11
(pin 1, V116) re- reduced in series with a .3 volt p -to -p on symmetry at 21.25 Fig. 12
duced output 33,000 ohm mc. Fig. 16
output resistor. scope
PICTURE I -F AND TRAP ADJUSTMENT
S Not Used Not used Not used Junction of R135 Remove V 107. Adjust potentio- Fig. 13
& R136 Connect potenti- meter for -4.5 Fig. 11
ometer between volts on meter
pins 5 & 6 of
V107 socket
Converter grid 21.25 64 o Junction of L104 Meter on 3 volt T103 (top) for Fig. 11
6 & R126 scale. Receiver on min. on meter Fig. 13
(pin 1, V2) channel 13
" " T105 (top) for Fig. 13
7 de 21.25 66
min. Fig. 11
" " for "
" T102 (top)
27.25
'T104
Id
8 min.
" " for "
de
27.25 44 (top)
9 nun.
" " T106 (top) for "
" 19.75 "
10 min.
" " for "
ee 19.75 dd
ed
T101 (top)
11 min.
o " o o T106 (bottom) for Fig. 12
o 22.5
12 max. on meter
" o 46 o T104 (bottom) for "
13 144
24.6 max.
" " " ad
T103 (bottom) for "
w 22.0
14 max.

15 Oa
25.9 " o ' T102 (bottom) for "
max.

16 44
21.95 Converter Sweep- Pin 1, V105 Junction of R135 Shunt 300 ohms Adjust T1 (top) Fig. 12
24.8 ing & R136 across pri. T102, and T101 (bot- Fig. 17
grid T103, TI04, T106. tom) for proper
(Pin 1, V2) 20 to Set bias -2 V. Set
30 mc. response
swp. gen. for 4 V.
P -P on scope.
M 0 " d
Remove shunt re- Adjust T1 (top), Fig. 11
17 sistors. Set bias T101, T102, T103, Fig. 12
to give 15 volts T104, T106 (bot.) Fig. 13
P to P on scope. for proper resp. Fig. 18
ANTENNA, R -F AND CONVERTER LINE ALIGNMENT

Antenna 215.75 Not used Not used Junction of C183 Fine tuning cen- C6 for zero on Fig. 13
18
terminals & R203 for signal tered. Receiver on meter or beat on Fig. 11
gen. method only channel 13. Het- het. feq. meter
rodyne mete r
coupled to oscil-
lator if used.
Junction of R134 Potentiometer for Fig. 13
19 & R 222 -1.5 volts on meter Fig. 11

175.25 Antenna Sweep- Test Not used Receiver on than- L6, C10, C11 & Fig. 13
20 Antenna Connection R13 nel 7 C14 for flat top Fig. 12
terminal & terminals ing Fig. 11
(loosely) 179.75 (see text for channel response between
on) 7 markers. Markers Fig. 19
P (7)
above 90%.
.. 205.25 40
channel " " Receiver on than- L6 for max. re- Fig. 11
21
209.75 12 nel 12 sponse and min. Fig. 19
slope of top of (12)
curve
44 175.25 et channel " 44
Receiver on than- Check to see that Fig. 19
22 nel 7. response is as (7)
179.75 7
above
0 181.25 64 channel " ii Receiver on than- di Fig. 19
23 185.75 8 nel 8 (13/

o " channel " di

Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
24 187.25 (9)
191.75 9 nel 9
" channel " " Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
193.25 (10)
nel 10
21 Is a 197.75 10
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ALIGNMENT TABLE 8T243, 8T244
CONNECT SIGNAL CONNECT SWEEP CONNECT CONNECT M1SCELLANEOUS8T241,
STEP SIGNAL GEN. SWEEP GEN. OSCILLOSCOPE "VOLTOHMYST" CONNECTIONS ADJUST REFER
No. GENERATOR FREQ. GENERATOR FREQ. TO TO AND TO
TO MC. TO MC. INSTRUCTIONS
RF AND CONVERTER LINE ALIGNMENT (Cont'd)
26 " 199.25 " channel Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
203.75 11 net 11 (11)
27 " 205.25 " channel " " Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
209.75 12 net 12 (12)
28 " 211.25 " channel " " Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
215.75 13 nel 13 (131
29 If the response on any channel (steps 22 through 28) is below 80'4 at either marker, switch to that channel and adjust L6, CIO, C11 & C14
to pall response up on that channel. Then recheck steps 22 through 28.
30 Antenna 83.25 Ant. terminals Sweep- Test Not used Receiver on chan- L9, L13, L66 & Fig. 19
terminals 87.75 (see text for ing Connection R13 nel 6 C12 for response (6)
(loosely) precaution) chan. 6 as above
31 77.25 channel " " Receiver on chan- Check to see that Fig. 19
81.75 5 nel 5 response is as (5)
above
32 " 67.25 " channel " " Receiver on chan- Fig. 19
71.75 4 nel 4 (4)
33
.. 61.25 " channel " " Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
65.75 3 nel 3 (3)
34 " 55.25 " channel " Receiver on chan- " Fig. 19
59.75 2 nel 2 (2)
35 If the response on any channel (steps 31 through 34) is below 80,, at either marker, switch to that channel and adjust L9, L13, L66 & C12
to pull response up on that channel. Then recheck steps 30 through 34.

R -F OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
CONNECT SIGNAL CONNECT HET. CONNECT CONNECT MISCELLANEOUS
SIGNAL GEN. HETERODYNE METER OSCILLOSCOPE "VOLTOHMYST" CONNECTIONS REFER
GENERATOR FREQ. FREQ. METER FREQ. AND ADJUST TO
TO MC. TO MC. TO TO INSTRUCTIONS
36 Antenna 215.75 Loosely coupldd 237 Not used Junction of C183 Fine tuning cen- C6 for zero on Fig. 13
terminals to r -f osc. & R203 for sig. tered. Receiver on meter or beat on Fig. 12
gen. method only channel 13 het. freq. meter Fig. 11
37 " 209.75 " 231 " Rec. on chan. 12 L14 as above Fig. 14
38 " 203.75 " 225 " " Rec. on chan. 11 L15 as above "
39 II 197.75 " 219 " " Rec. on chan. 10 L16 as above "
40 " 191.75 44
213 " " Rec. on chan. 9 L17 as above "
41 " 185.75 " 207 " " Rec. on chan. 8 L18 as above "
42 .. 179.75 " 201 " " Rec. on chan. 7 L19 as above "
43 " 87.75 " 109 " " Rec. on chan. 6 L20, L31 as above Fig. 12
44 .. 81.75 " 103 " " Rec. on chan. 5 L21 as above Fig. 14
45 " 71.75 " 93 " " Rec. on chan. 4 L22 at above .
46 " 65.75 " 87 " " Rec. on chan. 3 L23 as above "
47 44
59.75 , " 81 a " Rec. on chan. 2 L24 as above "
48 Repeat steps 36 through 47 as a check.
AGC THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT
49 Not used Not used Terminal A of Not used Tune in station, turn pix control Fig. 13
L104 clockwise. Adjust R138 for max. gain Fig. 20
without clipping sync on scope.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
50 Short circuit terminals C and D of T109. Tune in a station.
51 Turn hold control fully clockwise. Adjust T109 Frequency Adjustment until horizontal blanking bar appears in the picture.
52 Turn hold control % turn from clockwise to sync picture. Adjust width (L110), linearity (L111) and drive (C15313) controls until picture is
correct. Repeat step 51.
53 Turn hold control fully counterclockwise. Momentarily remove signal. Turn hold control slowly clockwise. Note least number of bars before
pull -in. Adjust Locking Range Control (C153A) for 7 to 9 bar pull -in.
54 Remove clip from terminals C and D of T109. Turn hold control fully clockwise. Adjust T109 Oscillator Waveform Adjustment until horizontal
blanking bar appears in picture.
55 Connect low capacity probe of oscilloscope to terminal C of T109. Turn hold control IA turn from clockwise. Adjust T109 Oscillator Wave-
form Adjustment until broad and sharp peaks of wave on oscilloscope are same height. Keep picture in sync with hold control during adjust-
ment. Remove oscilloscope.
56 Turn hold control fully counterclockwise. Momentarily remove signal. Turn hold control slowly clockwise. Note least number of bars before
pull -in. Adjust Locking Range Control (C153A) for 3 bar pull -in.
57 Turn hold control fully clockwise. Adjust T109 Freq. Adjustment until horizontal blanking appears as single vertical or diagonal bar in pix.
4.5 MC VIDEO TRAP ADJUSTMENT
58 Tune in a strong station. Detune the fine tuning control. If a 4.5 me beat appears in picture adjust L104 until beat is eliminated.
4'

159
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
8T241, 8T243, 8T244 SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
Following is a list of symptoms of possible failures and
an indication of some of the possible faults.
NO RASTER ON KINESCOPE:
(1) Incorrect adjustment of ion trap magnet-Magnets
reversed either front to back or top to bottom, front
magnet incorrectly oriented.
(2) V112 or V113 inoperative-check voltage and wave-
form on grids and plates.
(3) No high voltage-If horizontal deflection is operating
as evidenced by the correct waveform on terminal 4
of horizontal output transformer, the trouble can be
isolated to the 8016 circuit. Either the T110 high volt-
age winding is open (points 2 to 3), the 8016 tube is
defective, its filament circuit is open, C186 is shorted
or R187 or R189 open.
(4) V111 circuit inoperative --Refer to schematic and
waveform chart.
(5) Damper tube (V114) inoperative.
(6) Defective kinescope.
(7) R131 open (terminal 3 to ground).
(8) No receiver plate voltage-filter capacitor or filter
choke shorted-bleeder or filter choke open.
NO VERTICAL DEFLECTION:
(1) V107B or V110 inoperative. Check voltage and wave-
forms on grids and plates.
(2) T107 or T108 open.
(3) Vertical deflection coils open.
SMALL RASTER:
(1) Low Plus B or low line voltage.
(2) V112 defective.
POOR VERTICAL LINEARITY:
(1) If adjustments cannot correct, change V110.
(2) Vertical output transformer defective.
(3) V107B defective-check voltage and waveforms on
grid and plate.
(4) C150, R164, C147B or C148 -C defective.
(5) Low bias or plate voltage-check rectifiers and ca-
pacitors in supply circuits.
POOR HORIZONTAL LINEARITY:
(1) If adjustments do not correct, change V112 or V114.
(2) T110 or D111 defective.
(3) C164 or C165 defective.
WRINKLES ON LEFT SIDE OF RASTER:
(1) R166, R167 or CI69 defective.
(2) Defective yoke.
PICTURE OUT OF SYNC HORIZONTALLY:
(1) T109 incorrectly tuned.
(2) R172, R173 or R174 defective.
160
TRAPEZOIDAL OR NON -SYMMETRICAL
RASTER
(1) Improper adjustment of focus coil or ion trap mag-
net.
(2) Defective yoke.
RASTER AND SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE BUT NO
SOUND:
(1) R -F oscillator off frequency.
(2) Sound i-f, discriminator or audio amplifier inopera-
tive-check V116, V117, V118, V119, V120 and their
socket voltages.
(3) T114 or C186 defective.
(4) Speaker defective.
SIGNAL AT KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO SYNC:
(1) AGC threshold control R138 misadjusted.
(2) V105A, V107A, V108 or V109 inoperative. Check
voltage and waveforms at their grids and plates.
SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO VERTI-
CAL SYNC:
(1) Check V107B and associated circuit-C145, T107,
etc.
(2) Integrating network inoperative-Check.
(3) R154, R155, R157, RI58 or RI59 defective.
SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO HORI-
ZONTAL SYNC:
(1) T109 misadjusted-readjust as instructed on page 11.
(2) V111 inoperative-check socket voltages and wave-
forms.
(3) T109 defective.
(4) C140, C153A, C154, C155, C157 or C166 defective.
If horizontal speed is completely off and cannot be
adjusted check C158, C159, R172, R173, R174, R179
and R182.
SOUND AND RASTER BUT NO PICTURE OR
SYNC:
(1) Picture i-f, detector or video amplifier inoperative-
check V103, V104, V105 and V106-check socket
voltages.
(2) Bad contact to kinescope grid.
PICTURE STABLE BUT POOR RESOLUTION:
(1) V105A or V106 defective.
(2) Peaking coils defective-check for specified resist-
ance.
(3) Make sure that the focus control operates on both
sides of proper focus.
(4) R -F and I -F circuits misaligned.
PICTURE SMEAR:
(1) R -F or I -F circuits misaligned.
(2) Open peaking coil.
(3) This trouble can originate at the transmitter-check
on another station.
PICTURE JITTER:
(1) AGC threshold control 8138 misadjusted.
(2) If regular sections at the left picture are displaced
change V112.
 CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 8T241, 8T243. 8T244
R.F. UNIT V 116 5117 006 V119 V120 T114
TB
300.!
[
(F.20,42
(FRONT
TI1S
ANT LI 6A U6
1ST SOUND 1 F
6A U6
2.0 SOUND iF
±113 GALS 6 AN/6 6K6 - GT O't!ILT?.'51-
BAL TRANS N9TTNT SCR SOuND 1ST AU010 RAr .S
6A G 5 Mtov T112 _C12.0
D1SCR 5,AS CLAMP OUTPUT 3.20
AmPL a72010186 )g9
ST'FEDiS C 85
C21 5 _.55, A
2
-089 10 oi 0047 p,2.1
270 L6 R9 OV 1 Ii

P102 A L 8 150
AY ,s. C,73_liSI 0174 0201 0101 1 PM
(PRONGVit
> 10 33 7 10 MEG t 12207 (FRONT (PRONG SPEAKER
356 IC13 VIEW) VIEW)
1.57
i,so. 2 E
LG2 '5°0 I
L56, L63 C 1500_69 R200 R206c1C1460
72 tt L59 C 1111' R195 12196 8199 330K 680 02000 8 R209
COAX L64 1500T:82 1500.T 1200f 22K
0197 - 1000 18 1

L O 65 I1°° R204 C 183

100K 270 C(.17m0,ES
R221 C176 022g R131
C (6 50 K
5000 C132 47K 15001
1500 BRIGHTNESS
-i-135 v CONTROL
L52 L43 CIS
1500
Ifs +1355 -1.1350 +215V -1205
L 104
1-135y
3
° 53 L44 45 MC TRAP
FRONT
LS4 L45
° 54 5 101 51050 5106 LESS THAN 3-4
L105
Y
e REAR V 102 V103 V104
L55 L46 T 101 6AG 5 6AG 5 6AG 5 6AG 5 6A LS L103
93 Nv
12A U 7 460 180 MU 14
WHITE 12

TEST
1STT Po,
RANS.
IF 1ST PIN. IF C106
270
2ND Pix IF 300. PIK IF 0115
270
4T+ PiX 1 F (121
270
255 DOT
Jiff, 1ST EI 2ND VIDEO AMPL
19 25
C1213-47
RI30 425
clf-
01214
108s +1065 OV +1675 ,-1 o -1200. _1 34 V 2.2 mEG I
CONN
75IP) C102
,,,,
0 't If r104 TIOS TIOG R2I2 14V.
5
1 ' , _3,
[
T102 10
82 2ND Po< IF G
370n).,
IOF TR 33
R112
5600 7F TRANS
4TH PIX , SOUND
TRAP
5TH PIX 1,F
TRANS. 10K mg Pi7s2 ALC1291
I20 +322v
09V TRANS
,,,,,
5 r 4- --- 5 -120v.1r. $560o
i2119
i-n if-. ,R,..'" 0130
;0132
Y, 2.2
L To -6 A A 47 R105
112
([-.4
S
51
CI Oa."'"
47 4. X
Q
246:
.00
COG
36
,-,5,2e IA En (8,14
3
:IN ' w3300
RI26
3. CII94
270
'-I" .047T MEG
._l1 .6 2725 68
0
L101
mCI R104$
'el -T-5 2325 C
X MC ME r _87 9
L'?
g' y :;., ,L -51a
195 224 j
AiC MC. L102 =
..--
LJI
CIi - RS f 10K. =CIOY 36 MU N. me MU H R122
150 1500 wHITE OK LIOG
4-VV14-11
0104
- 0, clo9 --.12110 C1141/12113 C118 1-. R116 12115 C126- PI% CONTR 250
LAB
C7
1500 (081). T 1500 AB200 15001 1000 1500 i ,,,,,,,, ISO 10 R171
100
GRN
H
OATING
L49 15001
0106
"V
12109
L50 Croy 150 0100 - C117 - 0114 C938 - C125 R120
15001 15001 150 15001 150 11500 1500 1500T 10 C1271 -41R123
567 560 I 220 GLASS-.'
53 C 115 5121
1.9
6J6
osc
R155
18 TESMF
C197
R 141
5600
.11500 3135V 4.215)/ -1203 -1205 -120)4 10 BP4-
SI-FRONT KINESCOPE
52 REAR L2 C190
C5 0.47 51074 5108 5107 8 V 110
5, TO
LIS 24 L35 r04-4 -0.55. 65N7-GT 6SN7-GT 65147-GT 6 KG-GT
A GC T108
316 L23 A GC AMPL
RECT
1ST SYNC
SE PAR
GR
VERT 05C
AND DISCO
VERTICAL
OUTPUT VERTICAL
OUTPUT
+65000
L22 08 ( aelv +420 +2065 TRANI!
5 CI91 G- 2 0--1 +2155 Tt07 100115 ONLY>
Lib L21 29 L32 1500 0138 VERT o od6Lu LOU LT09 -1
130 L31 100
L.19 L20 LI "l;:
2 C, -075
e, C149 GRN +2155 +1350 +885. -605 -1205,
R139 O. I 4 RI66 RIGT
CI 7 8 7 ai RIG> 0187 1 L
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW VIEWED FINE 122 fi123
100KrGo 100K 560K,, C135 - C136 . 0139 8151 5152 2700 ;0.,T 560 560
FROM FRONT AND SHOWN
IN CHANNEL 2 (54-60 MC)
POSITION
TUNING

C133
I .--II i o//-
.01 22
T
.047
X
at
8000 1(3(2.00 0044/
i
R1571
E
0158
1 MEG
VETT
C150.1.
.047- R162
1

L.._
TEL BLK-GRN
Rat, 12194 R2I0 12193
1B00 6800 050 650
1930

433K C2 -
15001 L'47_P--- .R716 R140, 'P R150 0142 C143 0I44 12154.0 MEG .
HOLO
(ONTO
MI 23 51000
VERT CI4713
,

8191 C148B 0177

, 3.100K 330K9 0800 .0022 220KZ. TI- 3 Relt 90 mr fki 2250 40Mr
.

8 1
CoC N AR=T` FOCUS 6800 C147C
.AGC TuttestioLD
200K MEG, %4,° *--I f-- sm3 CONTROL 50 ME
C14.1 , 0160
R137, CONTROL SR217
I'.9199.- .2700 390
R 159
2.2 mo K -C PIGS C 148C

-,
s
All resmtance values in ohms. K 3, 1000. 470K 5°E20'g?
R155 $2 MEG. ir IC ME 000 --,0MF L IIS C170C
All capacitance values less than 1 is M F G-
C,L40°- 2 5 N1EG 12190 364. x10%
and above 1 in 91211, unless otherwise +2150 -600 -1200. -605 -600 -605 -120v HEIGHT i 330 FOOu
noted.
+081 +2150 CONTROL -1205 +215v -1205 COIL
COLOR DIGITS MULTIPLIER ,

C1464
GO 1.4F
RMA COLOR CODE, FIXED MICA CAPACITORS GOLD
0173 _L (IGG 1,114
wHirE IND1cATES oniA sTo WHITE INDICATES RN, STD SOK 0180 5113 41.50. o10111
BLACK INDiCATES JAN STD BLACK INDICATES JAN sTD BLACK P177 NOR HOLD R i74 150 K R156 T110 OILTEK
60K -1111111.. 120 o 56,K HOB2 163-61 CHOKE
vs., As OUTPUT /8016
BROWN 12102 TRANS
RECT
8185 DEFL YOKE
-CS. 5111 560 K
-vv,--4 10 ic i70A
-4> >ILIGETS 777: 65N7-GT T109
000 OS
R179
120K 6BG6-G
MOR1Z COILS
1380.210X(ToT81. RES 0115 40 MF
RED 100 HON
CONTROL
NOR
OSC TRANS A HORIZONTAL
OUTPUT
0160 R189 5U4 -G
OuALJTy
TOLERANCE
muLTIRLIER

RmA NEED MICA CAP...TORS RATED AT 500V, UNLESS mARKE0 OTHERWISE

OPAL,.
tOLERArvC
At-.ULTIOLiER
ORANGE 1,001,
-
' "v R175
8200
A
I
TT, 0
1

I
C 14G C
NW
12183
47
52005 PULSE
B
DO NOT
MEASURE
500 I .-166

V114.
RECT

G3V TO
C154,e Re, 000 I( 5V4-61 sEATERS
TOLERANCE QUALITY YELLOW 4 10,(100 CISBA .0022$82,* ixpm
2.7
34.n. C160 DAMPER
10-160 390
-...
MEG
NOR LOCKING 180
COLOR TOLERANCE COLOR CLASS COLOR CLASS GREEN RANGE
1

R220 Fr +322V B
.0'25= 1T022 22o 0168 025 A
RED :1.72% BLACK A YELLOW I) BLUE 710015
.047 L 1

36._
HOP LINEARTY
BROWN 0171 0178 c,59 Ci64 CONTROL
GREEN ±5% B GRAY VIOLET 8200 5015 .01 C162 -- .033 Figure 82 Circuit Schematic !Migrant Sm.
(
C152 - C151
I

00 ON -OFF 5w sc,. Of 5102

0 72T (05 R200) NTE
SILVER RED (' WHITE GRAY
60N
- 1203 +215Y - ILO SUPPLY
BLACK -±20% ORANGE WHITE
0
Cnil i-esistance -aloes hiss thas 1 ohm In some receivers, sub Stations have All voltages measured with "VoltOlimyst" In some receivers 1(222 was omitted. In some r: 12141 was 47K. In some receivers, 8134 was 100K and R137 is connected between pin 4 of V107
arc not shown. roused changes in component lead rotor and with no signal input. Voltages should In some receivers 1(124 was 18K. In some receiveceiverers, 12117 was 8.2K. R142 was d7K. and the arm of RI38. Lug 3 of RI38 is
Direction of arrows at controls indicates cod,
es in electrolytic capacitor values and hold within M20% with 117 v. am supply. In some receivers, two .47 rnfil ca- In some receivers, IC172 was 82K and In some receivers. R139 is conneeted be- connected to -120 volts.
clockwise rotation. their lug identification markings. Is some.receivers, C108 was omitted. pacitors M parallel were used for CI97. RI74 was 130K. tween pin 6 of V108 and pill 4 of VI07.

161A
 lb
INN
0 0
/ Ou!was
 TO CHECK OSCILLATOR TRIMMER ADJUSTMENTS: (C) Turn proper Oscillator Trimmer adjustment Screw
(A) Pull off the four front panel control knobs and remove clockwise until sound appears on pattern-indicated
the escutcheon by unscrewing the 6 screws holding this by bars across pattern and/or the lower vertical lines
to the front panel of the cabinet. This will expose the in pattern becoming wavy-then turn SAME Oscilla-
12 Oscillator Trimmer adjustment screws located tor Trimmer adjustment screw counter -clockwise just
around the Channel Selector Switch shaft. Starting to the point where the sound bars and/or wavy lines 0
with the first adjustment screw at the upper right in pattern disappear.
side of the shaft and reading from right to left (clock- IF STATION BUZZ is excessive and is NOT DUE to "Con-
wise), the first slotted round -head screw is Channel 13 trast" control being too far advanced in clockwise direction, 1-3
Oscillator Trimmer adjustment screw. The second adjust Discriminator Secondary adjustment screw for MINI-
screw from the right is Channel 12 Oscillator Trimmer MUM buzz. MAKE SURE THAT THIS POSITION IS BE-
adjustment screw, the third is Channel 11, etc. TWEEN the two MAXIMUM buzz peaks that will be noticed Pi
(B) Turn receiver Channel Selector Switch to channel on when adjusting screw is turned to the right and left of the
which TV station is transmitting its modulated test MINIMUM buzz position. This screw is located on top of the
pattern and adjust "Contrast" and "Brightness" con- Discriminator Coil Shield Can which is mounted on Tuner
trol for best definition of pattern. IMPORTANT- Chassis between 6AL5 Sound Detector tube and 6AU6 Sound
There are 14 positions on the Channel Selector Switch. I.F. Amplifier tube.
The MAXIMUM RIGHT and LEFT positions are NOT
USED. 0021.0

.0001 MI
050,00525.
e5NTGT
ISORIT.
GSN7GT
NORM A.

RT6 650/;.00.25 7JP4

TMT PICTURE TUN
40
"-" 4'
§
47200.25
-8. 31.
L 410000.,
2525 2.82
_J 4;
222=CLE 6SPITGT GSLTGT
VERT. OSC VENT. M, 213 1133GY-
HIGH VILTAGE 8016
41,000.25 UNIT 10 25 jai2.
M2E...;.
;-.
6Y6G
41.
M. 03C. OE

MEC, 2.2 mE00.

15
Si2 -17 11-02...
x-1 eT
50000
20 (y) 22.13.5.. 22.00.
moo., pgii. 200 7 10.01.

500200.0 z
210000.0.
I
50222220-1
1027
4,
SELENIUM NEETWIENS

I
4'
2 0
40

pf

'*117411"
*CHASSIS
DI
ca w
0.311 .3 6010
0 11133141111 10110n
1335 10311 10.901
A
003.301311=4.
...no ma. 00101130 11110 14. 11 winos
StlY9 g109
z
O
00000/3
1
110131.359118 310.5 'IMP,. 03013 0103/10 030 531/111113 0111 113111 el. .11 Oni
9r1V9 5109 20,19 soy9
Ann O.
.1,0000
509
.51
n01,0050 SOOTII*110
'Of 3; am ti
matini 411
S311I3S 901
I
S312I1S LOV
S311I3S 101 0 0
1[1.1!),u[as 13,11.1 310111 ofil mrios,a, 111010 13
11n., 10011331/503 .115 51x1 031100
3.111 104710{0 N MI 01301.0 "tn.
1101100$0 1100/1 MI SIMON MOS
3.LON
S1]OOW
mih
0) These service notes cover two Sentinel television receivers-the major difference between the two chassis is in
the size of the picture tube used.
All of the Model 401 and 402 Series use a 10 -inch picture tube.
0
CD
All of the Model 406 Series use a 12 -inch picture tube. 1-3

O
1-3
6SN7 6AL5 6SN7
HORIZONTAL HOW ZONI AL
Ch
SYNC AMP 8 PHASE DETECTOR
PHASE SPLIT TER OSCILLATOR OUTWIT
IT 0004 H V RELIIWER
HIGH VOL AGE SECTION

INTERLOCK
CONNECTOR PLUG
SOCKET
INTERLOCK Mx
SOCKET
T 6 VOLT I-----]
FILAMENT

6 VOLT 4
FILAMENT
" I
III
250 SWF IOTIIr
-I 6
V4
5DAMPER t?,
6 WIDTH
CON TROL
RECTIFIER 2

5
Ou: MF
ROOM
co
4,0004 C-22
6SN7
VERTICAL OSC R26
6SN7
VERTICAL AMPLIFIER
10BP4
PICTURE TUBE

22004
10 MFG k --.2t 1, MF R -32 ANODE.2
1000 MF

C -IT
n in 01 MEG.
AMWAAA

FILTER
CHOKE

-0 00000 DEFLECTION
YOKE
5

ELLOW MA
40 NIF ROME

I_ YELLOW F

-i

6
C -24A H C

LII
CD
 I-
ab 7
. 01 ,R.
') ;; O 0 F1; ,.i., ;8..9 2 ,4-g.-908
w
-4-) eo
-I,;-, ,1' g i 6. '''i:1)"2 g 7,i',??, 08E gco-''g42'1'7$f .--1E-Irn
j'''' 4-6'4
0'; ::: :: WI;
g 0 .-Z
13 4.4.0w.00
TA
o 4. -p
W g -4-a
o * 4Y, 1. `-4 2 0 ,,, bk...,, rn g , ..P 0 bk= ril
03
.'
2 4.-1
Q-4
73 ,:,,
(-3.
-I. ,42.n3 Zo m -P g 0 g
..---' r.
1111
a.% Z
-=-,-4a r...5 r,
al
.4 .44T
4, U
24 .?1 E 71?, I q8. t - a)
0, 0 -5 -Q
g 4;z -EV', Ft
' Z I -I 7:1 E
>/
ct
+) a) 0 ° Z 0 9'4
gla.)+',4 cD
7, E-i E -I g4
4-4 g p
2
.44.-. 0u. r- 'V4)1.°
'a' 74 .c4 cb 5 0 -.-..,.p r,...
ce kei ,,,_; CC .1 -c, 4.4.
1.01 > 4' g = I-,
,,24 -j"." -P44
,
,--, bk .....
O "-' M
IND
C1 C7,1. 1-, e t 0z1 ..,s g ,
- g a-4 g 1 a )' $0 17: '' . n Cf/ e 0 CI '12 r" ..__; g
cp -4-, NJ 0
rill E 42 ..''rn t ,..,o
.$ cl 2 gi, ,,s bk
,,,,...,
ci.--. ,, g =a 8- 0 '1:1:4.,
CI
,94 3
P §'E'' la :,- 4-, c 0 i,--_,. ="'-c 4,2g- g "L'4,-0..ggg,11170) Ot :41RL.l. c49r4,-4 ,....,E
,1,'
'-
4..
.4-1 F- 03 I3 o -..z, V +' zc:D'R' 7' 0-04,u - , k 0 -4, 'ciPC,
E_H c.4,0 ..., 07-
4A
1
4 -.. 4-,
. ,IrSg -o =-.'e4;)13 ,T),_4.,,, -....4.-, 0.,4E_, .._,,,,, 04
FA
mi .,
------,4-1
..0 .15
04

a)
a)
61

4C-5
b0f)
1::
''-'
37,i
4-
A (10
zw
g ,)
3 4 g b0
r4
'' CS
ro'c,
Cir..)j.ril
oo
.2 t 'Cr)
. 0 ci,
'-.-.0-I-.0=
-,-D

I
, 6'420§ .°' c...140 -,z4,0 .44-4
03 f. ,-,
-w
-, ;..,

ww,4rEti
7; ..-,

V8
..,,,,
g ,.=
cd -4-4

2 -,.' -::-, g0
U,''...cf"-'475-Prn41:/''CIC.1 ..q .!
_, 0--- 0 ....
344 g ..,4
t
i.
two
Cl) 0)
"5 = re) ').... ff).' 41.) r.1 t-,_,4 i-I g
P. '49. ,
0 tX,
C.) ,-,
rj. o-tz .IX"'"t'=73...'
F.
00 P.
0 -. .9 .-'
FIE:,44-0448
bk
c.)-e-c.a3cd
.2 n'clr.i
c;, --;:...
-g
en ''
o,0 ,......rq
to
1)--,,,,,;-4
-0,-",-,
CO -0 0 a)
a)
--,a .F,
Z .71.$
C.)
tg
g'R .c, 0.. .7, I04,72, g
,-,
Vs'EkC-4c.).
az
t,i- .,_,0, vg F. 0
0.0 e4, a a _,W 74 6
grg 0.7 ''
.6 51 LE 4.
,.., .gfr.4o.4
Di a, g o..4 0 Cg 4 "0 4 e C'
l'''cA 401 -422; : 4L4 El
.-
.:E>F; Ig'1.11i I $- g ctli
00 0
2.4-1
3 4.ct),c
-- 0 0" `1 -mr2 71.-4 g° c)"`P' E-i
- 0-4, °:,f,
-,00--,-,-o te.,
`1
Ell -E. i
..5.---: ct1-4-
zEIEd 1244 iT.Eit 7.,c ,fr.,z ' -,.,' Tcs ,.,-,=,,`,1 enw -07" ctE1-4: 271:
41 41, .,..4 Po o.
8 u.
2 p.. g (L'
14. ofg-F,
E.,,221 >1s.0 15,-,-. '-'k c`c:1- 0° 4:.), ,T,-.2 fri 0 2 . ....0 _TA, 0 k 3
0
;',
0a),---rga)4,t16"
..471..f,0 g' -'1-44::)Z 'OmE; 4-84
071 ce ,,-,
,U r&? ' t t 4 ,,,.4,1gi,i),.., 2_4-40,:E7u ;..,6c9 0,,,E "0E -1.,0000.Z.41 c..)E-IC ,-, :a' 2 > 40,
9 0
*r4 ;-.
'a'2
0
1- rct
40
wc, 0

ix
0
1-,c.
a . 7,
% . I .1. g

0
0 ;-. a
^',
,.. w.,..,
4-4,-4.40 <L)

-,,,E):',
t .5..
a) o ,, 0 0 .,, 0 0 o ,,,. 0..... .0 4/2 0
il teg t., '4 .-o, Ts 7= .' 1 2 5. . - -4 ' - ) ,.4, - - . ,T, ,,,,
wec 0,
P , , 3 E -i

,_,Z,.,-,
-.""
."C:)Z
4)
E.0
t) g51'2 gt °
,
Ell IN -0 sm= cp-vr, <9-;;48
c L4 , , . , -4-
rfi -i
gg
`1?, zu
... z"' ). a' i zrlut ,,,t_l cu,g ci,,,,4:9-7`8 Artfll-r4 '-'4n73...z '8.0eggH°O2,9
,,,0:Pr 00E., ir.?, ..-o,..,
,I4 c4.) g
p4,41_-1 ;_o ;,,,,,
E..cd v441,:% ..,T,4;-.2 2 ,0.,...
.1- ..,..7
-.0 4.-1.',!.;-_,9 0 0
0 -0
o
c.,

.
ff.'1!
Ul
wd
42 0 ''' - E
1.47..-
;11
a ,,,, , *.w '0'
ce ,-
.,4-0. 0.
ut0E-,-,- Et' .,c3,t':3_,.3 c.),.07,9abou cnwigo -r*-;=-. &44-',0 .6
-Pi.r"Pi
0 0 0 j)' W'''0 3 ' g ci).-S
cT) 2
Ea
x ,-,0
LC
4
N .t.L4 V

_a w '-'2
= 472 « ou)E-1044
u
-,..bi)
-,- gia r..) 1:3 C=1- E-.3

Cti'C'
.-C e
_4..
*
.-.T.7,
g a-, er
bk 0 VI 4 40 3-i
C..
doo 4-1 et
<to
 FOR SOUND I.F. ALIGNMENT
FOR SOUND I.F. FOR SOUND I.F. SEE PARAGRAPH 2(A). CONNECT
g -g
5-(1)
4.5 MC INPUT COIL TRIMMER 4.5 MC DISCRIMINATOR SEC. VACUM TUBE VOLTMETER ACROSS
SEE PARAGRAPH VD/ SEE PARAGRAPH 2151 10 MFD. ELECTROLYTIC NO. C-48 g
(Tilt 1.30
R-20 R 22
SYNC SEPARATOR Q C-62 TA
-11111R-14 R-43
161 wry
I
C-47 4141;* R.I5 44-rn rml
FOR SOUND
4.5 MC DISCRIMINATOR PRIMARY
05
8 SECONDARY TRIMMERS cagy
VIDEO AMP. SEE PARAGRAPH 2(E) R-52 hi
C-57

R-32 C-44 r'clq Mg

R-51 C58 R -I9 -24
C 23
VIDEO DETECTOR FOR SOUND I.F. ALIGNMENT L-917
SEE PARAGRAPH 21F(. CONNECT FOR VIDEO I.F. ALIGNMENT
VACUM TUBE VOLTMETER TO SEE PARAGRAPHS 1(8) 8 4 A) Dl 5D4
T-8 THE CENTER TAP OF THE TWO CONNECT VACUM TUBE VOLTMETER , a.
6800 OHM RESISTORS 6ALS ACROSS 8200 OHM RESISTOR R-41
1v -41.C:04121 40 2.4
SOUND DETECTOR LOAD RESISTOR P-46
C-49 C -I9 `4
R-46 b R -S3, AND TO THE 39000 97
300
OHM DESCRIMINATOR SECONDARY R-30-% C-32
SOUND RESISTOR R-47.
DETECTOR R-39

C-33
Eti?, erg
C-45
24o. I.F. A FOR VIDEO I.F. ,q
C-52
2 o & 400 25.75 MC TRIMMERS
SEE PARAGRAPH 1(21 R-54
(1
C -53 R-5713 ID
° R.49
11*
R-26 0.21 -36
AUDIO A R -35 C -I8
FOR VIDEO I.F. R -57A
z
5 71.25
I
&to. F. 23.4 MC TRIMMERS I.F. AMP.
0-27 6-41 R-24
SEE PARAGRAPH IIF) 11._..._113.1-R- 45
OSCILLATOR PADDER 0-46 C-26 1-3 Ir.
ADJUSTMENT SCREW =4. ecitIZC
R 56 r C-20
AUDIO OUTPUT
otm
C-54 R 50
dyzro 0-3

TUNER UNIT
SPEAKER
CONNECTIONS
0:1.0
(71 Ztm,py
NOTE, -
SOME MODELS USE A 6C4 OSCILLATOR
TUBE. tclz:/c)
tt 0
ta
p:J,.3p:1 trj
OSCILLATOR TRIMMER ADJUSTMENT SCREWS mt=1);.
ARE LOCATED AROUND SHAFT AS SHOWN.
SEE PARAGRAPH 3(G)

IMPORTANT "IP1
THERE ARE 14 POSITIONS OF THE CHANNEL ,AC4
SELECTOR SWITCH. THE MAXIMUM RIGHT W t/ CO
AND LEFT POSITIONS ARE NOT USED. 0 c-4
t"r1 1Ply'cn

411
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

11/2 VOLT
BATT.

ADAPTER LEAD
(SHIELD)

ADAPTER LEAD
(CENTER CONDUCTOR)

CDNTRAST
CHANNEL
BFOGHTNESS
ATTACH WIRE TO GRID (PIN I)
SELECTOR
OF 6AG5 TUBE.

TO SIGNAL GEN.,
I2AT7 6C4 MARKER OR
OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR
NC
SWEEP .005 MF
° NOTE
TO PIN I
E.
ERNE MODELS ViILL HAVE A MATT
11 OF 6AG5
OSCILLATOR TUBE. OTHERS WILL
NAVE A 6C8 OSCILLATOR TUBE. COAX. TUBE
6AG5
MODULATOR
0
0.
0
6AR5
AUDIO OUTPUT
6BH6

SE

.
0.75
6AG5 6S07 TO CHASSIS
T
1ST I.F AMP. 00 .3. AUDIO AMPLIFIER
(CONVERTER
C 86
SHIELD CASE)
08

NC
6AG5
BRO. I. AMP. 00

100
6AL5
SOUND
DETECTOR

0
-4 THICK XH 6AG5
6AG5 NC

Om LE AMP.

6AL5
VIDEO DETECTOR
6AU6
SOUND 1 F.
3"
8 -1-
AMPLIFIER

0 100
32
6AU6
VIDEO AMPLIFIER
, FIG. 1

TAP
6AU6
SYNC SEPARATOR
Channel Channel Picture Carrier Sound Carrier
Number Freq. (Mc) Freq. (Mc) Freq. (Mc)
1 44-50 45.25 49.75
ALL VOLTAGES EXCEPT HEATERS NOD 11536T-8016 HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIER TUBE ARE
MEASURED FROM SOCKET TERMINALS TO CHASSIS MTH A 20000 OHM PER VOLT VOLTMETER.
2 54-60 55.25 59.75
3 60-66 61.25 65.75
4 66-72 67.25 71.75
5 76-82 77.25 81.75
PICTURE PIP 6 82-88 83.25 87.75
6DB 7 174-180 175.25 179.75
50% DOWN SOUND PIP 8 180-186 181.25 185.75
26DB 9 186-192 187.25 191.75
95% DOWN 10 192-198 193.25 197.75
11 198-204 199.25 203.75
12 204-210 205.25 209.75
PICTURE OVERALL RESPONSE CURVE 13 210-216 211.25 215.75
WITH PICTURE AND SOUND CARRIER
MARKER PIPS.
FIG. 3
FIG. 2 167
A 4 4
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
STEWART-WARNER
TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODELS [RE A] [ AVC1 AVC2 [
LCODE 9054-B J L CODE 9054-C J

SEQUENCE OF ALIGNMENT: These procedures should preferably which incorporate a separate crystal controlled oscillator and
be applied in the order in which they are presented, however, heterodyne circuit are self calibrating and therefore capable
alignment of the Sound Channel or IF Channel may be accom- of providing the accuracy of frequency calibration required
plished individually if desired. for television circuit alignment.
When undertaking alignment of the RF tuner circuits it is vitally a. IF Frequencies:
important to first check the IF Channel alignment and obtain the 4.5 Mc. Sound Channel
proper IF band pass characteristic as results of RF circuit tuning 22.25 Mc. Sound IF marker
are observed by means of an oscilloscope connected to the output 23.2 Mc. 1st and 3rd IF stages
of the detector stage. 24.7 Mc. 4th IF stage
26.3 Mc. Converter and 2nd IF stages
REMOVAL OF CHASSIS: The receiver chassis must be removed 26.75 Mc. Picture IF marker
from the cabinet in order to accomplish alignment of all tuned
circuits as there are eight adjustment points located on the under- b. RF Frequencies:
side of the unit. PICTURE SOUND
CHANNEL NO. CARRIER FREQ. CARRIER FREQ.
On table models the chassis should be removed from the cabinet 2 55.25 Mc. 59.75 Mc.
without disturbing the picture tube or speaker. Inter -connection 3 61.25 Mc. 65.75 Mc.
of focus coil, yoke, picture tube, speaker and chassis may be 4 67.25 Mc. 71.75 Mc.
conveniently achieved by using special extension cables which 5 77.25 Mc. 81.75 Mc.
are available for service purposes. These cables can be ob- 6 83.25 Mc. 87.75 Mc.
tained through the nearest Stewart -Warner distributor by order- 7 175.25 Mc. 179.75 Mc.
ing as follows: 8 181.25 Mc. 185.75 Mc.
9 187.25 Mc. 191.75 Mc.
507443 High Voltage Ext. Cable & Plugs. 10 193.25 Mc. 197.75 Mc.
507444 Deflection Yoke Ext. Cable & Plugs. 11 199.25 Mc. 203.75 Mc.
507445 Picture Tube Ext. Cable & Plugs. 12 205.25 Mc. 209.75 Mc.
507446 Focus Coil Ext. Cable & Plugs. 13 211.25 Mc.
507447 Speaker Ext. Cable & Plugs. 215.75 Mc.

On console models the picture tube must be removed from the
cabinet before the chassis can be taken out. The picture tube,
yoke, focus coil and support frame can be removed as a com-
plete assembly by taking off the wing nuts which hold the frame
to top panel of cabinet. Allow speaker to remain in the cabinet.
After picture tube and chassis have been removed it will be
convenient to inter -connect all units by means of the special
extension cables listed above.
CAUTION
The picture tube is highly evacuated and if
broken, glass fragments will be violently ex-
pelled. Handle with care, using safety gog-
gles and gloves. Avoid contact with high
voltage terminal at side of tube even after it
has been disconnected from the receiver -
this precaution is necessary as inner and
outer coatings on the tube form a capacitor
which may carry a high voltage.
The metal shield which covers the bottom side of the RF tuner
assembly must be left in position throughout the alignment pro-
cedure. Injection of generator signals for IF Channel alignment is
accomplished through an opening in the bottom of this shield
(see Fig. 3).
INSTRUMENTS: The following instruments will be required as
signal sources and output indicators during the alignment process.
Since accurate alignment of a television receiver is heavily de-
pendent upon the performance of your instruments, it is imperative
that they meet the essential specifications described here.
1. STANDARD SIGNAL GENERATOR to provide unmodulated
(pure RF) signals at the following frequencies. Maximum out-
put on all ranges should be at least .1 volt with provision for
attenuation as desired. This instrument must have good fre-
quency stability and be accurately calibrated. Generators
2. RF SWEEP GENERATOR to provide frequency modulated sig-
nals at the following frequencies:
4.5 Mc. with 500 Kc. sweep width.
20 to 30 Mc. with 10 Mc. sweep width.
54 to 88 Mc. with 10 Mc. sweep width.
174 to 216 Mc. with 10 Mc. sweep width.
Output adjustable with at least .1 volt maximum.
Output should be "flat" (no amplitude variation) for all set-
tings of the sweep width control.
Provision for connection of generator sweep modulating volt-
age to horizontal deflection system of an oscilloscope.
Provision for blanking the output signal on each return
sweep so that oscillogram will not show retrace.
3. CATHODE RAY OSCILLOSCOPE, preferably a unit with verti-
cal amplifier having wide range frequency response and low
capacity pick-up probe.
4. VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER. The lowest voltage range of this
instrument should preferably permit a 1.0 volt reading to be
indicated at not less than one third of full scale deflection.
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS: This chassis has its B- system con-
nected directly to one side of the AC power line. Therefore the
following precautions must be observed before making connections
to test instruments during service operations. Failure to do so may
result in severe shock if contact is made between test equipment
and "earth" ground, or a short circuit might occur if ground termi-
nal of test equipment is connected to "earth" ground.
1. Connect an AC voltmeter between B- of receiver chassis and
an "earth" ground (radiator, water pipe, etc.). If meter reading
is not zero, reverse receiver power cord plug at wall receptacle.
2. Connect an AC voltmeter between ground terminal of test
instrument and an "earth" ground (radiator, water pipe, etc.).
If meter reads FULL LINE VOLTAGE, reverse instrument power
169
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
cord plug at wall outlet. If meter reads 60 volts or less, do not IMPORTANT
disturb instrument power cord plug.
When observing the receiver band pass char-
3. Ground terminal of test instrument may now be connected to acteristic on an oscilloscope, it is exceedingly
B- system of receiver. important to avoid distortion of that char-
These instrument connection precautions can be avoided if an iso- acteristic which would occur when using a
lation transformer is connected between receiver power cord and large input signal from the sweep generator
power supply outlet. or standard generator (marker signal). Al-
The circuit arrangement, including details of matching and coupling ways set attenuator on sweep generator so
networks, for instruments used in this alignment procedure is that the reading on a vacuum tube voltmeter,
given in Figs. 1 to 4 inclusive. Specific instructions for each instru- connected across 8200 ohm diode load re-
ment application will be found in various sections of the alignment
charts. sistor (symbol 242 on schematic) does not
exceed one volt. Standard generator output
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS: When aligning IF and RF circuits it is should also be attenuated so that marker sig-
necessary to apply a fixed bias voltage to the AGC system of the nal does not pull or tear the band pass
receiver. This fixed bias is obtained by using a 11/2 volt battery and
connecting it as described in Fig. 6. characteristic as shown on the 'scope.

STANDARD STANDARD
SIGNAL GEN. SIGNAL GEN.
(SUPPLIES (SUPPLIES COUPLE LOOSELY-DO NOT MAKE
MARKER SIGNAL) MARKER ELECTRICAL CONTACT-MERELY TWIST
INSULATED WIRES TO FORM TWO TURNS.
SIGNAL)T
GROUND TO
TO CHASSIS TUNER FRAME

/UNDER SIDE OF
SWEEP '250$ R.F. TUNER ASSEMBLY
SWEEP
GENERATOR 1111E0 AMP.
GENERATOR

00 0000
TO CHASSIS GROUND TO
TUNER FRAME

FIG. 1 FIG. 3

10K

.4--Wil10:170 OSCILLOSCOPE
STANDARD
SIGNAL GEN.
(SUPPLIES
MARKER

SIGNAL)i
TO CHASSIS
/ COUPLE LOOSELY-DO NOT MAKE
ELECTRICAL CONTACT-MERELY TWIST
INSULATED WIRES TO FORM TWO TURNS.

120.n.

MME.
SWEEP GENERATOR
TO WITH 50 OHM ANTENNA
50.n. TERMINALS
UNBALANCED
120.n.
OUTPUT CABLE

FIG. 2 FIG. 4

EWE TUTING ADS

FOR EACH CHANEL
SCREWS

ACTUATING RATE ,111.11

LOW BAND
OSCILLATOR CRT. TRIMMER
tt2
HIGH BAND
OSCILLATOR CRT. TRIMMER T
LOW BAND TUNER SLUGS
MIXER GRID CH,. TRIMMER Sot to dernonNons shown
NV OSC. TRIMMER on Fit 7 by um, Min-
HIGH BAND Adjusted IN 9000 Ott ot.. Tool Ka P.507475,
MIXER GRID CAT. TRIMMER ALA wiloyo %fowl of
lunescodo.
L
R.F. PLATE BCIll.NCTRIMMER

HIGH BAND
R.E. PLATE CAT. TRIMMER

AGC CONNECTION POINT

Canned neyebve term. of Ili JAR
buery to Mu pew for IS. ntl W.
deprnentl posebbe battgy ternshal
mewls b 8-.
SO ND 4.5 CS SOUND
SLUG FOR HARD. SYNC. COIL
0 SCR...J.70R MC. MC. Adjust fa pct. bordontai
ECO DART DISDISCRIMINATORPRIRAYTOR
VAd9codatton yob Kenyon's! 1.5 MC
4.5 MC. Ifeld control set le <nor ito
"""'

TOP VIEW OF CHASSIS BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS

170 FIG. 5 FIG. 6

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
IF CHANNEL ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
1. Turn receiver Channel Selector to television channel #13 and
short antenna terminals together with a jumper wire.
2. Connect a 11/2 volt battery to the receiver AGC system so that
negative terminal of battery connects to the AGC line and
positive terminal of battery connects to B-. See Fig. 6 for
convenient point of connection.
3. Note location of IF Trap Coil #10 by referring to Fig. 6. Before
undertaking the alignment of any of the IF stages, Trap Coil
#10 must be detuned so that it does not resonate in the IF
pass band. Detuning is accomplished by merely compressing
the windings so that they are closely spaced. Failure to detune
the Trap Coil can cause the IF system to become regenerative
thereby preventing alignment.
4. If the IF channel is badly misaligned and two or more immedi-
ately adjoining IF stages are tuned to the same frequency,
oscillation may occur. Such oscillation shows up as a voltage
across the 8200 ohm diode load resistor and is indicated by the
VTVM that is connected to this point during a ignment. It should
STANDARD SIGNAL
GENERATOR SWEEP GENERATOR
VTVM
CONNEC- CONNECTIONS
CONNED
TIONS FREQUENCY FREQ.
TIONS
be noted that voltage due to IF oscillation is unaffected by
strength of signal from the generator.
Where IF oscillation is encountered, it is generally possible to
correct the condition by detuning the IF coils in different direc-
tions. If that does not have the desired effect, increase fixed
bias on AGC line by using a 3 or 41/2 volt battery instead of the
11/2 volt battery referred to in instruction #2. After stopping
the oscillation in this manner it will then be possible to align
all IF stages using the following procedure, however, the AGC
bias battery must be changed back to 11/2 volts when using
the oscilloscope to observe band pass characteristic. Once all
stages have been aligned using the 3 to 41/2 volt bias, the IF
channel should be stable with reduced bias.
5. A special aligning tool, designed to fit the stems on adjustable
cores of the IF coils (see points 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 in Fig. 5), is avail-
able and may be obtained from Stewart -Warner by requesting
Alignment Tool Kit #507475. This kit also contains three tools
required to position the slugs in the RF tuner assembly.
TYPE OF ADJUST-
OSCILLOSCOPE MISCELLANEOUS TRIMMER
MENT AND OUTPUT
CONNECTIONS INSTRUCTIONS OR SLUG INDICATION

Connect a 15K ohm

resistor to probe
Connect as
lead of meter and
then connect open
#5
Converter Adjust for maximum
shown in Connect as end of this resistor plate reading on VTVM.
Fig. 3. The shown in to junction of .05 coil
position of Fig. 3 but Mfd. condenser
terminal 26.3 MC. keep power (#243) and 8.2K ohm
"A" on un-
derside of
switch
turned off
resistor (#2 4 2 ) lo-
sated in the detector
Not used.
tuner is al- during this plate circuit of the
so illustrat- step. 12AL5 tube. "Com-
ed in Fig. 6. mon" or "ground"
lead of VTVM must
be connected to B- #6
2nd I.F.
Adjust for maximum
reading on VTVM.
line in receiver
chassis.

Same as 24.7 MC. Same as Same as

above. above..
Not used. #7
4th I.F.
Adjust for maximum
reading on VTVM.

Same as Same as Same as

#8
1st I.F.
Adjust for maximum
reading on VTVM.
above.- 23.2 MC. above. above. Not used.
#9
3rd I.F.
Adjust for maximum
reading on VTVM.

IMPORTANT:
I. Adjust output
attenuator on
Use coupling sweep generator The IF band pass characteristic, riow
network shown so that reading displayed on the 'scope, should be
in Fig. 2. Con- on VTVM is one compared with the curve shown in
nett vertical am- volt. Fig. 9. If top of curve is not prop -
With con- plifier "high" erly shaped, make a slight readjust-
nections lead in series 2.Se t attenuator ment of slug #7. Should that adjust -
made as with the 10K on st'd. signal ment fail to yield the desired result,
shown in ohm resistor to generator so that then note whether the curve has a
Fig. 3, turn
on this g en -
25 ma Same as junction of .05 22.25 Mc. mark- Peak on the high or low frequency
er signal does side. Slugs #5 and #6 control high
Same as 22.25 MC. erator and s
Sweeping Mfd. condenser
above. above. (#243) and 8.2K not distort the frequency response (26.3 Mc.) and
set controls ± 5 Mc. ohm resistor pattern on the slugs #8 and #9 affect the low
for opera- (#242) located in oscilloscope. frequency response (23.2 Mc.); by
lion as spec- the detector making a small change in the set-
ified in plate circuit of 3. Be sure that a lingo of the high or low frequency
next col- the 12AL5 tube. 11/2 volt battery slugs, it will be possible to obtain
umn. Connect 'scope is connected to correct band pass curve.
ground lead to AGC line as Sound "plateau" on low frequency
B- line in re- specified in in-
struction #2 at side of curve is formed by adjusting
ceiver chassis.
the head of this trap coil as described in the last
chart. Do not use Paragragh of this chart.
a battery of any
other voltage.

Set standard signal generator to 26.75 Mc. (picture 11 carrier tre-
.1uency) and this marker signal should now appear at the 50%
amplitude position on the side of the band pass characteristic.
Attenuated area ("plateau") on sound carrier side of IF band pass
characteristic (Fig. 9) is obtained by adjusting the spacing of the
winding of Trap Coil #10 (see Fig. 6 for location of this coil).
By spreading the coil winding a small amount, and observing
It the position of the marker appears too high or too low, slight
readjustment of slugs #5, 6 and 7 is required. Be sure to use a
weak marker signal, otherwise it may distort the curve.
the response curve on the 'scope, it will be possible to form a
"plateau" in the vicinity of 22 to 22.5 Mc, The marker signal for
22.25 Mc. should now appear at a position approximately 20%
out on the plateau from the steep side of the characteristic.

172
 z
li,214:.90
0.*:m2"' ge
'4D-2.1gW
i>.A11,1015 tiORP 111441/Wl
t1-0.000. V,M°g«'"lb2P
(1)
F.o lAgglogg 11881y8a
0
zz Th,yg04wE. :hieo'llt 04igw:Ellii0
Vai!0>'::42d ItaAg2;' AA155;u0
gagu'm 112.5188.8z qt8z7is 1540 WE8; m16
6 '' &41g, .7,,a4.'-'2.!tr!
u2
z 00g -ii :E-ctz2e47: 2xt8=-54-g BPWngq:
osa.. 4.4..., ,=-1, '416181 .n=26 1m2
Vt:" 211'Meltv
0 E' " ge,°
Wf0A0°...../0 ',`,'47P0.71.10 4*,'1128E'l° °Mciii4
0.00
05 04280t21- h5...000.,, .7400
4,40 -242 w,03 .-.°4441bli
s"2.0,40 OuF,-.6,,r,0° ...
ne41,e,,,,..,°-,-,,o
0 Vii."0e -o42 2-d22
°"ego ow nO"w".0.8 q'°8.0
8 ° rci
.4400
g4.5.1
14a..1" 00-1400- .0°000ggv
. LA 0.50t1 gw°40'.6"2%
7;t6"8"''
00g 4 .05mo
Hz wg.9.81r3.8 ti0G-0-68 0.80;5U0:E1-8
.5--,ag12:ig l''F1015018P' h.71..§,0;.82 Cgig2pol741
O
Ziitt3A0PRV, 4.808.g-gtts. .4,,,,....4 -_ A
ma
H IS
f41;4g
0..00 g 0 ...001 W421
,,
0 7.0t1
8111
0w0 -0 r01g§'r08.
;5mr,n g08-01
0tPA8t
.5825 g
0go2.48.84
-60
080 0,-. 0.:00,0 L0;g8"f.8-4804
800 .fivEf-..a 8; Eaw01 rq.PsrAiii
4,82 csi
P4Z
avelp48482*,
00 71. 1
E- F81,=E2101
v.pri.tE..94-y1
pU LII:g=i1g80!44.4t gO
1 "° a R
triZ O 1.04e:..01h1g,IgAwg°,0
0U ;22 fli'aw 312.24-101..t.2 Q..V.0 e
2 VA 42 g -g. IN lu: ra tj'll
-.....1.4-
1106012,134!
P t7G'LM F*.
linri444,14a.
0
I...
0
i'.F41 4,.,
0 too
d:0,7: i :344..!
:
°XIt id0. o-mui
A
8fg g g6
M
;2AFAI5,14,0ol' et,
5., g4
z: ig 41 1 1 1111 4 7,, -Ai a -.'w 9o. :114 40510u;°"srl
17q8,0-vg:4N-gr:,0
M°
° g gam 22gi; 8 Mal' w si::.$0.70.4.,,i. 0.0,480x4g8-4g0,s20-8
eg coH
'5,210p
11.2
MOR2t
t4
7c:1 11 2w117)a -a I i:E:, th.P.
gp..21c6q.,.,E.43 8
80 ,4,0,-...
'0:0 mEc4803,1,5 °,
2 ga,N, 15o hio
.s,a

61.°742.
000g ti -1 - °
,-,.=.G.,
::. .8 -6 2

01.06.00
cDEIrAl2roei
2 :.4,,, 8 -40 Au
0 CS
-.15P-50.1tP;V,01. g1108 8-021g.gg-s Um "4673Ake
8 a 1 .:a. 111,,,, Eri .5 144 1 .5.; -g m -P ill A i "8 ig 010.0.ABsi.
I o
ct
-§
'02 .i.49gt6'768 .g... -1.° --.-No.
OF
;.0 0E -P -Eva. 8 . 2 %el ?. .2 13 il 0 .1..R Tg
.."62-z " *eita?-1'sgiz -'5"220)." °,2 -'°.'
73-.15 ° AI! g'0,u,'10 .-9.) u°- mg's 20.:1:8'
10
..-,"e' o 0
27,i to griv84tp..-s
"-97.7
14t9' I :11771..?. .cl.g 4 V, T -9- g Ti, Tu% T, ,"g u 7,
+.0tVtp0:.4".V.48.6,6
-.
0 fe,
02. 8 gru '0 ., .5 i , cu g - ow00tia20E
..5 1 0 m -5 Ii;
%.9.ii r:,., ,2: us
tgl.g_
'a-,-,20:A °-1.5lig-g-o C t'..,2 8 2 g g2 `°
g.g..t.irg,g,..0 .0 0,-.E.T.g 0 , t;

4`41
07 Id
411,2:4.809.)..6'25730g0.Ron-42§^,
a)
g en 0 .5 r6
O `P' a 43-4082.56).9.71,-.5.8..go23-.8g.087.1.1.p.:.6...-48, Ng
u2
OF
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
STANDARD SIGNAL SWEEP GENERATOR
GENERATOR VTVM OSCILLOSCOPE MISCELLANEOUS TYPE OF ADJUSTMENT
CONNEC- CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS INSTRUCTIONS AND OUTPUT INDICATION
CONNEC- FEE
TIONS :FREQUENCY TIONS I

(Continued from preceding page

IMPORTANT: When adjusting trimmers #15 and #16 it will be as that would result in a loss of sensitivity. Band width specified
noted that the band pass characteristic can be broadened by sacri- in Fig. 10 must not be exceeded if proper sensitivity is to be
ficing amplitude. It is undesirable to overly broaden the curve achieved.
The band pass characteristics of channels #7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 13 of these channels should conform to the curves shown in Fig. 10.
should now be checked successively without disturbing the settings If one or two channels have a slightly peaked response, it is desira-
ble to have the peak fall on the sound carrier side rather than the
of the high band trimmers. Adjust the RF sweep generator and picture carrier side. A compromise on the magnitude of the peak
marker generator for operation on each of these channels with can be obtained by returning to channel #12 and lowering the
marker set at picture carrier frequency (see table on first page for response on the side of the characteristic which tends to rise when
pix. carrier frequency of each channel). Band pass characteristic the tuner was previously set to lower channels.

LOW BAND ALIGNMENT

After the tuning slugs have been positioned as described in step #3 Tura this screw clockwise until tuner actuating plate (shown in
at the head of this chart, lea4e Channel Selector set to channel #6. 5) has moved back as far as it will go andpresses against
its mechanical stop-do not force screw beyond this point. Then.
The fine tuning screw in the Channel Selector Mechanism (see Fig. back off the fine tuning screw by rotating it counter -clockwise 1
5) must now be correctly positioned. full turn.
Adjust Low Band Oscillator Trimmer
#20 so that band pass characteristic
appears on the 'scope and marker
signal is located at approximately
the 50% amplitude position on the
low frequency side of the curve. Do
Receiver Channel not attempt to shape the curve with
Selector Knob set this trimmer-that must be accom-
plished with the RF trimmers as de-
to Channel #6. scribed in the next step.
IMPORTANT
Use coupling Before proceeding with the alignment
Connect a 15K ohm network shown During this step of channel #6 it is necessary to turn
resistor to probe in Fig. 2. Con-
and thruout all the Channel Selector Knob to channel
Connect as lead of meter and nect vertical am- succeeding s tops #2 and determine whether that chan-
shown in then connect open plifier "high" of the RF align- nel can be received when the sweep
Fig. 4 and end of this resistor lead in series ment procedure it generator is set for operation on
set controls to junction of .05 with the 10K
is necessary to: channel #2; marker generator should
for a sweep CHANNEL Mfd. condenser ohm resistor to 1. Keep output of be set to indicate position of pix.
width of 10 (#243) and 8.2K ohm junction of .05 carrier at 55.25 Mc.
Connect as Mc. on tele- 82 #6
to 88 resistor ( # 24 2 ) lo- Mfd. condenser sweep generator
at a level that
shown in 83.25 MC. vision chan- Mc. cated in the detector (#243) and 8.2K does not allow Adjust channel #2 fine tuning screw
Fig. 4. nel speci- plate circuit of the ohm resistor reading on VTVM
(in Channel Selector Mechanism; see
fied in the 12AL5 tube. "Com- (#242) located in to exceed
Fig. 5) and note whether band pass
one curve can be centered on horizontal
next col- mon" or "ground" the detector volt. trace line of 'scope. If channel #2
umn. lead of VTVM must plate circuit of
be connected to S- the 12AE5 tube. 2. Keep output of curve can be tuned in, then return
tine in receiver Connect 'scope st'd. signal gen- the Channel Selector Knob to channel
#6 and proceed with next step.
chassis. ground lead to erator at a level
B- line in re- that provides a If channel #2 cannot be tuned in,
ceiver chassis. readable marker
but does not dis-
then return Channel Selector Knob to
tort the curve
channel #6 and repeat the operation
that is being ob- described above under the heading
served on the "Low Band Alignment," however,
back off the fine tuning screw 3/4
'scope. turn instead of 1 turn as originally
specified. Then set oscillator trim-
mer #20 as described in this step
and also recheck to see that chan-
nel #2 signal comes in when selector
is set to that channel.

Adjust Low Band RF Trimmers #21

and #22 for properly shaped over-
CHANNEL all band pass characteristic as illus-
Same as Same as #6 Same as Same as Receiver Channel trated in Fig. 10. If marker signal
above. 83.25 MC. above. 82 to 88 above. above. Selector Knob set for picture carrier is not located at
Mc. to Channel #6. the 50% amplitude position, change
setting of oscillator trimmer #20 so
that pattern shifts in desired direction.

IMPORTANT: When ad'usting trimmers #21 and #22 it will be
noted that the band pass characteristic can be broadened by sacri-
ficing amplitude. It is undesirable to overly broaden the curve
The band pass characteristic of channels #2, 3, 4 and 5 should
now be checked successively without disturbing the settings of the
low band trimmers. Adjust the RF sweep generator and marker
generator for operation on each of these channels with marker set
at picture carrier frequency (see table on first page for pix. carrier
frequency of each channel). Band pass characteristic of these chan-
nels should conform to the curves shown in Fig. 10.
as that would result in a loss o sensitivity. Band width specified
in Fig. 10 must not be exceeded if proper sensitivity is to be
achieved.
If one or two channels have a slightly peaked response, it is
desirable to have the peak fall on the sound carrier side rather
than the picture carrier side. A compromise on the magnitude of
the peak can be obtained by returning to channel #6 and lowering
the response on the side of the characteristic which tends to rise
when the tuner was previously set to lower channels.

174
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
TUBE LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

HORIZONTAL VOLUME
BAND CONIHAST BRIGHTNESS HOLD OFF -ON
SELECTOR

II

FOCUS HEIGHT VERT. WIDTH

HOLD

1111
PICTURE TUBE
10BP4
MODEL AVTI
10FP4
MODELS AVCI d AVC2 SOCKET
FOR FOP
A.C. OPERATION D.C. OPERATION
INSERT SELENIUM INSERT SPECIAL
RECTIFIER ASSY. RELAY AS Y.
.50/302.

-
.503553.

V2 63
e"--
(610 1,12AU6) iy ,

MIXER-OSC. 1st I.F. AMP. ',SOCKET;

94

Vi 12'U6) 621 625

2nd I.F. AMP.
519
(6BH6)
R.F.AMP (5016CT) 35Z5GT
V5
SUPPLY ri V22 /4, V23
(35Z5GT)
SCAN. BOOSTER HORIZ 35L6GT: 3516GT ;'

/
)2AU6 OUTPUT RECTIFIER DAMPING HIGH VOLTAGE 05C.
3rd I.F AMP
611 626 1

V6 616
(12AU6)
SOUND I.F. AMR-LIMITER 62SN1G1)
2AU6
Atn I.F AMP VERT SCAN.
524 i
V14 MULTIVIBRATOR
V8
V12
A 11B3GTA
12AU6 8016 L
12AU6
19T8 SYNC. HIGH VOLTAGE
VIDEO AMP
DYN. LIMITER CLIPPER HORIZ. SCAN RECTIFIER
SOUND DISCRIM. 67 OUTPUT L-1
SOUND AMP. 69

12AL5
12AU1 DETECTOR
D.C. RESTORER A.G.0
513 HORIZ. SCAN. 515
MULTIVIB.
AUDIO
50L6GT SOCKET 23111G
SOUND HORIZ. SCAN MULTIVIB
OUTPUT NOT USED
HORIZ SCAN AMP
IN THIS MODEL

CP CO
ANTENNA VERTICAL LINEARITY
TERMINAL STRIP
SPEAKER FOCUS COIL
SOCKET SOCKET

CAUTION
This chassis has its B- system connected directly to one side of the AC power line. Therefore
the following precautions must be observed before making connections to test instruments
NAaK
during service operations. Failure to do so may result in severe shock if contact is made
WARNER between test equipment and "earth" ground or, a short circuit might occur if grourd terminal
of test equipment is connected to "earth" ground.
1. Connect an AC voltmeter between B- of receiver chassis and an "earth" grourd (radiator,
water pipe, etc.). If meter reading is not zero, reverse receiver power cord plug at wall
receptacle.
2. Connect an AC voltmeter between ground terminal of test instrument and an "earth"
ground (radiator, water pipe, etc.). If meter reads FULL LINE VOLTAGE, reverse instru-
ment power cord plug at wall outlet. If meter reads 60 volts or less, do not disturb
instrument power cord plug.
3. Ground terminal of test instrument may now be connected to B- system of receiver.
The foregoing precautions could be avoided if an isolation transformer is connected between
receiver power cord and power supply outlet.

176 *If receiver is to be used for operation from a DC power supply, remove selenium rectifier assembly (see
288 and 289 on circuit diagram) and insert DC polarizing relay 507302 by plugging it into the same socket.
 STEWART-WARNER TELEVISION RECEIVER MODELS AVT1. AVC1 & AVC2
0 r

1111
1113/8016
NIGH VOLTAGE
%12SN7GT %12SN7GT
SOL6GT RECTIFIER
VERT. SCAN NU NUL VIBRATOR VERT. SCANNING OUTPUT
PRODUCTION CHANGES
Tbs. Mal. lebalat. luestaSes coplete cletotlt oo Menges v.. mewed tlerly
ass changes min... by revel.. motet alpludemleal res.c0t.l.
'WARM T. "JOIN, we. elapse ea heels salvos a e.sals. Mnelose.
al .11:116231/...ls mauld ba lates lype Mae a -311311123,
should
6E11133 tOt I. Cemmellem Irom I- la pin 2 al delleel. yob. mat Me dam. ems
moos. Pis 3 a. 5 ol MIs socket srms Men eon.. amolher.
JnL
Thus dm. gam venmel dellechae call at ma CC pew. ea 35L661
Tb Omit Own, es V. pew am. -112160 Vr. .2s.al alma. cal WM mop. as ehasa 111011 VOLTAGE
3. Condamer IN 45 WWI mas removed hem Me ma& This past ems OTC.
Immarly erase. from pla We II awe. 52A M1M to chassis
CHANGE
DESIGNATION Draund. 12AU6
STAMPED ON DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
1 Mum near am.. 241 pod 120 ems am. Erom the dm.. SYNC. CLIPPER
CHASSIS inm on Ger. Noel. AVCI a. AV= and 101111441 en o mama
plan ea. la all.. to the cease lammed. A 12100 -aping
OttICODITO TMITIAL PROMMITOM
=Pas lo e.mi ea elumM.

Coe.2.32 In M. VO1msa posmMIPM Rag. fla M

34014.1.
am panel M. aCo*. 2411 MOW
Ner. cireelt aTWO AM.. tune OS MAIM. ems
?Mem s
1111 ,.
50115
111 NORM SCANNING MPS
dam. tram a Marls gmeed.
Caudee.12 050 lals added le panel .1. mass 1110012
M V. ..11 Mod.. Om. ea... n6

"MED w Nara 311 11m eh., added le par..l enib eel IR . F.r., WS A re r
else. al Ma4 03:52110T1 ans. Na
%12SN7GT 35ZSGT
Trap soil bacoolosy sud. al lad I/. 7nonsIntnm 10 removed % 17AU7 %12SN7GT x

4. DesIslas 2.5 le mrld Rah ol le. VIM 1131117031 slanged 5. 12076 4 ... cif m et gm D.. Am.. condams n. ill Moe; NORM SCANNING MI TIVIBRATOR NORM SCANNING AMPLIFIER
NOW. DAMPING

olus 3206 eha

.. IV) rommarl atm remosed. Mona ,l..1.1 MA 5, 1..0
S. Parallel montanahros a/ trap eml 323 tied eons.. 221 4210 Mad.,
5. Coma, 06 .s grid Rm. el halm V15111 11112111747 elms. Wm
13 16.1.7 ed. to mho. Rau of V2 112A06... i.r. Amp rage.
lam 470t
oe euewt a v.. 12A00.
&Weer TT m eke. at teho V2611 033117011
Gas 5102 ahem
Nad LE Amp, dsaannosma Irom ACC bum and mama. In 1,-.
R5
AosiMer 13 Ls suke .3112A1271....rd Ism 151 low assal N. al Nola 203 . gad dre. ol V5. ILAIM
1.
2. F.r. Aum.1 Mmosemal lam AGC bus and mosam.d Iv II-. 35ZSGT
222
"B" SUPPLY
.1. lab Mal dau al ma. V0112A1175.19. hoer 312 Mom Comma Ir. Coen. at. ill lo mama 3M .4 331 mu
BOOSTER
511.6
fleam 136 110 oh. ma.. 130 v. 1 i supply la Comas RECTIFIER
1. Coll 10 a. Cam.. 77 IMOD MmAIL ems.. M parallel are
added In M. Malt al telm V15 11241111. emmed is so lam, rambed

10. Caleum TM la aulpul elscs/1 se. .haw. Inas 1000 L Low sIdo of malor 11M MT ohaul. 41 whole camel al V7. 12A13.
Medd M 5000 Mo. aoss comm. to II-. umng . 2 ol VA 113A1M-Vslaa am) la
IS mewl. ;MIR.
II. Cho. cod 171 le mr..th Wa iv amplar sod
& as sr. al rasa 244 .1 maaphml. 19r camel d VII 112A111,
%doe Amp, d.onnea. horn embed, mon al Mis rubs eed see.
13. Choha cod 170 added i mar sollh Mama ANSI, t laps VII owed lo .- .." .pp...., N... P. 2. m a a... ww.
113A01, sad V1513565021.
.o. cemposmIs mem is em. and mous. le me mama
13. Ca.... 223 1320 P.M added lame 2 al Mho Vs. 112AU61 dield one II. an.. re los, surface al elm. ell elear.d am
rem. unchelad
It Deem. 11 19.M dI of ha ws 11231170T1 Isom first
abeam 3102 Row llormanhal .5mte. .1 MO,. s.o. Seri
co.senso 1771 3321 P.a.
15. Mesa. arm of NM polonnumeler coma*. I, Indeed al
le CaMode Mal V20 1123117GO Coadsnper C12. 56 M.M.
Mesa. MI 56. ekes

% 12AUT
O.C. RESTORER

NUN 6.18 12A116 12A16 12A16 12A116 12ALS 12AU6 CATHODE

I.F. AMP. MIXES-OSC. id I.F. AMP. hi I.F. AMP. 3r1 I.F. AMP. lth I.F. AMP. BETECTOR-A.G.C. VIDEO AMP. FOLLOWER
ant

PICTURE TORE
260 62
10BP4

10FP4
Avc, V4 ;

261
TONE COIL ASS R.

1-119°.

227

OSCILLOGRAMS 12AUS 1978

SOUND I.F. HIP. DM. LIMITER
LIMITER SOUND DISCRIM.-SOUND AMP
All oscillograrns taken with ground lead of 'mope con- 111

nected to B- (unless otherwise indicated) and with re

controls set for normal reception of a station trans -
, 302 SOL6GT
SONO OUTPUT
317
mining its standard test pattern.
264

88 Igo
Number appearing below asterisk specifies selling of T171'it
horizontal sweep frequency control on 'scope. 316
se% poa3, 12'et.

2
*- This symbol on illustration indicates that
wave form was 1°,7 Ta3.
observed on a 'scope whose vertical amplifier hod very R.F. RATE 14111261 GRID OSCILLATOR
COIL ASS, COIL ASS, COIL ASS,
limited high frequency response (50 to 100 Kc). SWAM 557495 30206
265A

tide.- This symbol indicates that wave form was observed on a

scope whose vertical amplifier frequency response was
flat to within 20% up to 2 Mc.
TENSION SPRING AND.ISACKLASI4 SKIING
a fur
507493 507294
77_ R.F.
TONER UNIT
TENSION CLIP
.;1 SOURS

SLOG
501286
GREEN OR RED
END

0000 A GE J L NIP
TRWNER CONDENSERS:
R.F. PLATE CIRCUIT
SOMIS
TROANER CONDENSERS;
/4/11264 ORO CIRCUS
TRAINER CONDENSERS:
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
607363 SOTS45
T S R BOTTOM VIEW OF R.E. TINIER UNIT
R.F. PLATE CIRCUIT COILS MIRES GMD CIRCUIT COILS OSCILLA OR COILS d.
STOUNTINO BAR
SON" 50 08
(IX)
SLUG SLUG
507 67

M01)
BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS SHOWING
CONNECTIONS TO R.F. TUNER UNIT
MGR VOLTAGE
OSCILLATOR COIL
509285
6 SWITCH ASSEMBLY
SOMA
6 SWITCH ASSEMBLY
507498
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
507199
177A
TOP VIEW OF R.F. TUNER UNIT
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ZENITH RADIO CORP.
TELEVISION RECEIVERS
MODELS 287925 28T960 287961 287962 28T963
CHASSIS 28F20 28F20Z 28F21 28F22
REG. U. S. PAT. OFF.

Zenith 28 -tube direct view television receivers have many outstanding features.
These include gated automatic gain control, turret tuning with replaceable channel
strips and main chassis break down into easily interchangeable sub -chassis. Chassis
28F20, 28F21 and 28F22 are identical electrically. The primary differences are in
the size and the method of mounting the picture tube. An "A" .screen (10FP4, 10BP4)
is used in the 28F21 and 28F22 chassis while a "B" screen (12KP4,12LP4) is used in
the 28F20 and 28F20Z chassis. Because the 28F22 chassis is used in table model
receivers, a specially shielded power transformer is used in the low voltage power
supply to prevent magnetic interaction with the receiver sweep circuits.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS FOCUS CONTROL. Regulates the magnitude of DC current flow
Fig. 2 indicates the various receiver controls. After the re- through the focus coil to effect proper focusing of the electron
ceiver has been properly adjusted, the service man should re- beam on the screen of the picture tube.
move the fine tuning, vertical hold, brightness and horizontal hold VERTICAL CENTERING CONTROL.
control knobs. These knobs have a white dot stamped on their and polarity of DC current flow through Regulates the mag nitude
the vertical deflection
periphery and should be re-inserted with the dot facing upward coils for proper vertical centering of the raster
(See fig. 2 ). This will aid the customer in determining the pro- on the picture
per position of the controls should they be accidently moved out
tube screen.
of position.
HORIZONTAL CENTERING CONTROL. Regulates the magni-
CHANNEL SELECTOR SWITCH. Switches into operating posi- tude and polarity of DC current flow through the horizontal de-
flection coils for proper horizontal centering of the raster on
tion the R. F. strip which tunes the particular channel selected. the picture tube screen.
FINE TUNING CONTROL. Provides a means of varying the VERTICAL HEIGHT CONTROL. Effects the vertical sweep
frequency of the local oscillator to compensate for any frequen- amplitude by regulating the plate voltage to the vertical block-
cy changes which may result from tube and circuit variations.
When tuning the receiver, three distinct and closely related ing oscillator. This control is used to adjust the vertical size
sound response positions will be found. Adjust the receiver to of the raster.
the center response. Power Consumption -325 Watts
VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL. Provides a means of changing
the R. C. time constant in the rrid circuit of the vertical block- Antenna Impedance
ing oscillator to synchronize the vertical sweep with the trans- Balanced 300 ohms.
mitted sync pulses. Improper adjustment of this control will
cause the picture to roll in the vertical direction. Power Supply -110V 60 Cycles AC

KNOB POSITION/NS MARKS

CHANNEL VOLUME a
SELECTOR
SWITCH CONTRAST

HOR. DRIVE
FINE
TUNING
0 BRIGHTNESS

VERT. HOLD
HOR. HOLD

1,41C1 -I )"I VERT. LIN.

HOR. PHASE

Fig. 2 Front Panel Controls.

177
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
TV SOUND If. CHANNEL

--
VIDEO AND SOUND
RF UNIT
V/I V IN V1.9

---
V9
6,41/6 61.4 6AU6 6T8 6V6
1 sr LAC LIMITER DISC DET AUDIO
WINO LE SO4/HD LE Isr OUTPUT

SPKR.%

PIX IF CHANNEL ABC

V V6 VS V6 V /di
GAGS RF SAU6 6AU6 AH6 I1,10 7 PeISAT7 ABC OUT
EM6SA ND.
AMP.
/sr VIDEO
tIf
PAO VIDEO -Go- 3ffloVIDEO
IF.
VIDEO
DE T
r VIDEO
AMP
-14P- folotA.'4:40
AMP. AMP

4_

AGO VOLTAGE
VP
GAGS
CONVERTER

Vs
6AC7
VERTICAL SWEEP PAD VIDEO
V30 VIA
LOW FRED NI FRED. AMP
/ OSC.
4 ZU i6.16
, VI4B VI6 VISA vs, VA,
*MAT? 6A7
U6 6SH7 :peso 46.56,7 6V6
SYNC. VERTICAL
°UPPER
p° AMP CLIPPER SEP LOCKING ourpur
OSC

TO ALL CIRCUITS

HORIZONTAL SWEEP

LOW VOLTAGE POWER

SUPPLY ;ea VEO
ism", gh,
VIHA
66 V23 YES
/83k81071f
10 KV
DETECTOR DISCHARGE AMP VOLTAGE
VP? VE6 OSC
SUN 504
LOW LOW
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
RECT RECT

V/9 V14
6AC? 5V4
REVOCE
MCP

Fig. 16 Block Diagram of Zenith Television Receiver.

THE R. F. SHELF allows easy replacement of channel strips. When a strip is re-
placed it should be mechanically aligned with the adjacent strip.
The three stages of the R. F. shelf consist of a 6AG5 R. F. ampli- If several strips are replaced, the strip positioning guide (See
fier V1, 6AG5 converter V2, and a 616 R. F. oscillator V3. The/ fig. 46), should be adjusted so that it comes in contact with a
616 twin triode tube functions as two separate oscillators. V3A properly centered strip. This will serve as a guide for any
tunes channels 7 to 13 and V3B channels 2 to 6. The oscillator other strip which may be installed. After adjustment, the strip
frequency can be changed approximately 1 Mc by the off -set tun- positioning guide must be backed out so that it does not interfere
ing slugs which are attached to the fine tuning shaft. Both the high with strip movement.
and the low channel oscillators are pre-set at the factory and ad-
justment should not be attempted unless a defective part is replac- THE SOUND L F. CHANNEL
ed or the unit has been tampered with. If adjustment becomes nec-
essary, slug L11 trims the low frequency oscillator. The high fre- The local oscillator beats against the incoming R. F. signal and
quency oscillator trimmer L10 is a slotted disc type control. Ad- produces a sound intermediate frequency of 21.3 megacycles. This
justment is made by inserting a pointed tool into one of the slots signal is coupled through a 21.3 Mc series resonant trap L15, into
and turning the disc clockwise or counter clockwise (See fig.45 ). the sound L F. amplifier. The small inductance between lugs 2 and
The serviceman is cautioned against making these adjustments 5 of T2 offers a common coupling between the series trap and the
unless the oscillator trimmers on the various channel strips can- sound input coil. The series resonant trap has a very low impe-
dance at the 21.3 Mc frequency, but offers a high impedance to the
not be made to resonate at the sound channel frequencies or if the
high and low channels cannot be made to fall at the same settingpicture I. F. It thereby serves a dual purpose in that it passes the
of the fine tuning control. sound and rejects the picture L F. The sound I. F. is amplified by
the 6AU6 first sound I. F. amplifier V9 and the 6AU6 second sound
THE TURRET TUNER I. F. amplifier V10. The output from the third L F. transformer is
coupled to the grid of the limiter tube V11 where amplitude varia-
The turret tuner provides a superior method of obtaining posi- tions and noise are removed by driving the tube into plate current
tive contact between the various channel strips and the R. F. saturation so that the input to the discriminator is free from amp-
shelf. The stationary contacts are a part of the R. F. shelf. litude variations and noise. The discriminator converts the fre-
Guides are provided which properly position the strip contacts quency changes into audio, the audio being removed from the full
prior to their entry into the stationary assembly. The design discriminator load, amplified by the 6V6 power amplifier and re
producedby the speaker.

178
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Because the television sound channel is frequency modulated, the voltage and reduce the sensitivity of the receiver. Weak signals
intermediate frequency amplifier must be aligned with a FM sig- feed very little voltage to the grids and the sensitivity of the
nal generator to obtain proper band pass with gain. R. F. and I. F. stages is at maximum.
THE PICTURE I. F. With ordinary A.V.C. circuits, as used in broadcast receivers,
the average of the rectified signal voltage is taken from the de-
The picture I. F. sub -chassis consists of a 6AU6 1st picture I. F., tector and fed back to the R. F. - I. F. grids. With a television
6AU6 2nd picture I. F., 6A116 3rd picture I. F. and a 12AT7 video receiver it is impossible to use the average signal because the
detector, 1st video amplifier and noise clipper. Fig.I7 indicates amplitude is constantly changing with picture content. The com-
the method of coupling the converter to the 1st picture I. F. It ponents in the video signal which have a relatively constant amp-
litude are the sync pulses. These are maintained at a level ap-
0010,12,
proximately 20 to 25% above the blanking and video level (See
fig.19 ). Because the amplitude of the sync pulses is relative-
ly constant, they are used to control the gain of a television re-
ceiver.
Ordinary methods of A.G.C. have certain disadvantages which
have been overcome by using the gated system. If the automatic
gain control is not gated, it remains open to noise impulses which
can have an amplitude as great, and in some cases, greater than
the sync pulses. The average voltage developed by the noise
pulses creates a false A.G.C. voltage where the noise rather than
the signal can be the controlling factor.
The superior A.G.C. circuit in this receiver consists of a cathode
follower V14A, and a cathode coupled grounded grid amplifier
V15B, which obtains its plate voltage (15.75 Kc sine wave) from
the horizontal oscillator. The sync pulses which are applied to
the grid of V14A are negative with respect to its cathode. As the
Fig. 17 Converter Coupling into the Picture I. F. Channel. sync pulse amplitude increases, with an increase in signal input,
the grid is driven more negative resulting in less plate current
can be seen that the cable capacity is common to the converter flow and consequently less voltage drop across the cathode resis-
plate and 1st I. F. grid by virtue of the inherent inter -electrode tor R40. Since the bias of V15B is developed across this resis-
tor, the reduction of the voltage drop causes V15B to conduct
and stray capacities.
more current which in turn leads to the development of addi-
C28 tional negative feedback voltage for application to the R.F.
and I. F. grids. The application of the 15.75 Kc sine wave volt-
age to the plate of V15B, allows the tube to conduct during the
positive half cycles. This is an 'open gate' condition and exists
at any time that the combined sine wave and sync pulse ampli-
tude makes the plate of V15B positive with respect to its cathode.
During this conduction period (open gate period) A.G.C. volt-
age is developed across C53. The brief period of time that the
gate is open is slightly longer than the 5 microseconds dura-
C29 tion of the horizontal pulse. However, during the comparative-
ly long interval of time between pulses, the gate is closed and
noise pulses can have no effect on the A.G.C.
The primary advantage of the gated A.G.C. system is its rela-
Fig. 18 3rd I. F. Transformer Coupling. tive immunity to noise. Another advantage is the fact that short
time constants are used which enable the A.G.C. to follow much
The degree of coupling between the primary and secondary of the faster changes in amplitude such as those developed by airplane
3rd picture I. F. transformer depends on the setting of C29. It reflections. The long time constants in conventional A.G.C.
can be seen that the I. F. voltage at the plate of V6 is divided systems cannot follow such rapid changes in amplitude and un-
across C28 and C29 and the L F. voltage applied to the grid of the desirable effects such as picture 'breathing" result.
video detector depends on the reactance ratio of the two capaci- THE SYNC SEPARATOR
tors. An increase in the capacity of C29 lowers the applied volt-
age to the grid. While a decrease in capacity increases this volt
age. The purpose of the sync separator circuit, which consists of V1413
Ln ro 23* 02
NIX C21100,22
The 4.5 Mc difference between picture and sound I. F.'s may pro-
duce an undesirable voltage into the video amplifier creating a
condition where sound could appear in the picture. The 4.5 Mc
trap in the cathode circuit of the 1st video amplifier eliminates -T-
this possibility. loo*
NOW
AND
GATED A.G.C. 422720. GREY

The purpose of the automatic gain control is to feed back a neg- fEL
ative voltage to the grids of the R. F. and L F. amplifier tubes 0
to automatically control their gain. Strong signals do not over-
load the receiver because they develop considerable feedback Fig. 19 The Composite Video Signal.
179
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
picture clipper, V17 sync amplifier, V16 sync clipper and V15A Both the horizontal and vertical pulses enter the integrating and
sync separator, is to remove the picture element from the 60 filter network which consist of three 8,200 ohm resistors R5 and
cycle vertical and 15.75 Kc horizontal sync pulses. The pulses three .0047 MFD capacitors C65. Because of the long time con-
must be free from noise and picture before they are applied to the stant in the integrating circuit, the short duration horizontal sync
integrating and differentiating circuits. Since the sync pulses are and vertical equalizing pulses have very little effect on develop-
20 to 25 per cent higher in amplitude than the blanking -video sig- ing a charge across the integrating capacitors (See fig. 23 ). The
nal (See fig.19 ), the tubes are sufficiently biased so that the lower slight charge that does develop leaks off during the interval of
amplitude picture signal cannot produce a plate current change and time between pulses and for all practical purposes, has no effect.
consequently does not appear in the output. The higher amplitude The serrated vertical pulse, on the other hand, has a time dura-
sync pulses, however, overcome the bias, produce a change in the tion of approximately 190 microseconds and very little time inter-
plate current and appear in the output. The picture clipper V14B val between pulses. Each pulse charges the integrating
removes the greatest portion of picture signal from the sync capacitor to a higher potential until the voltage becomes high
pulses. The sync amplifier V17 amplifies and inverts the output enough, and properly shaped, to trigger the blocking oscillator.
from the picture clipper. Some picture and noise is still present
in the output, the noise being removed by the 47 MMF high cut cap-
acitor (C61) from plate to cathode of V17. The low frequency
boost circuit, which consists of the 10,000 ohm resistor R53 and
the .1 MFD capacitor C58 in the plate circuit, raises the plate
impedance at the vertical sync frequency in order to clip the ver-
tical sync pulses at a more noise -free level. The input of the sync
clipper V16, contains a relatively small amount of picture com-
ponent. A combination of fixed and self bias causes complete re -

Fig. 21 Grid Voltage and Plate Current

Wave Forms of Blocking Oscillator.

The blocking oscillator V21B is designed so that its natural fre-

quency corresponds to the approximate vertical frequency of 60
cycles. Its frequency of oscillation is determined by the RC time
constant of the .01 MFD capacitor C66 and the resistance in the
Fig. 20 Stripping Sync Pulses from grid circuit which consists of the VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL
Picture and Blanking Component. R60 and the 1 megohm resistor R59. The VERTICAL HOLD CON-
TROL is adjusted to fire the blocking oscillator earlier than at its
natural frequency, the time being determined by the vertical sync
jection of the picture signal which remains and only the sync pulses from the transmitter. The circuits must be arranged so
pulses appear in the output. The polarity of the output voltage is that the oscillator is triggered solely by the vertical synchroniz-
negative. Because of the reversal through the sync separator ing pulses and not from any other source such as noise, etc. When,
tube V15A, the required positive pulses appear at the plate for the positive sync pulse from the integrating and filter circuits
triggering the blocking oscillator. The horizontal sync input is appears at the grid of the blocking oscillator, the tube conducts
fed into the phase detector through the 150MMF capacitor (C77) heavily and its plate voltage is induced into the grid by trans-
and the vertical input to the integrating circuit through the 10,000 former action through T7. This makes the grid more positive
ohm resistor R53. and causes grid current flow which develops a bias voltage across
THE VERTICAL SWEEP the grid resistor, charging the .01 MFD capacitor to the value of
The purpose of the vertical sweep is to gradually move the elec- the bias voltage. When the bias voltage becomes sufficiently
tron beam from the top to the bottom of the picture tube as it is high, plate current cut-off occurs. The charge on the .01 capa-
swept from left to right by the horizontal sweep. It requires ap- citor gradually diminishes but because of the Re time constant
proximately 15,500 microseconds for the beam to move from the the tube remains cut-off until the next positive pulse starts con-
top of the picture tube to the bottom and approximately 1,166 mi- duction and the next cycle.
croseconds to again return to the top for the next field. This
period of time is the retrace and is blanked out. The frequency The vertical saw -tooth voltage is developed across the .047 MFD
of the vertical sweep is 60 cycles. Because the 15.75 Kc hori- vertical charge discharge capacitor C60. When plate current cut-
zontal triggering must never stop, even during the vertical re- off occurs, there is no appreciable voltage drop across the plate
trace, the vertical pulses are serrated so that they continue trig- load resistor, which consists of the VERTICAL SIZE CONTROL
gering the horizontal oscillator. Since the horizontal sweep con- R62 and 470,000 ohm series resistor R59. Because there is no
tinues, the beam does not go directly from the bottom of the pic- voltage drop the capacitor charges to nearly full plate potential
ture tube to the top during the retrace. It is zig-zagged back to in approximately 15,500 microseconds. This is the sweep por-
the top by action of the horizontal sweep. The retrace can be ob- tion of the saw -tooth voltage. When the vertical sync pulse
served by reducing the contrast and advancing the brilliance con- causes the blocking oscillator to conduct again, the capacitor dis-
trol. Six equalizing pulses precede and follow the serrated verti- charges through the internal resistance of V21B. This is the re-
cal pulse to stabilize the circuits before and after the vertical sync trace and occurs in approximately 1,166 microseconds. The
pulse. 8,200 ohm resistor R47, in series with the charge discharge cap-
acitor, shapes the voltage so that it will have a combination of
180 saw -tooth and pulse which is necessary to produce a saw -tooth
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

Fig. 22 Development of the Sweep Voltage by the Blocking Oscillator.

current through the deflection coils (See fig.25). The 6V6GT-G 6SN7GT horizontal discharge tube V21A. The horizontal dis-
vertical amplifier develops the relatively high current for de- charge tube could be triggered by noise as well as sync pulses.
flecting the beam. This very undesirable factor is overcome by designing the sweep
so that the frequency and not the amplitude of the transmitted
The 5,000 ohm VERTICAL LINEARITY CONTROL R67, shifts sync pulses control it. The frequency control circuit consists of
the operating point of the tube so that the sweep is amplified a 6K6GT 15.75 Kc horizontal oscillator V20, a 6AL5 phase detec-
along that portion of the plate current curve which results in tor V18 and a 6AC7 reactance tube V19. The reactance tube,
a linear output. which is in parallel with the 15.75 Kc horizontal oscillator reson-
ant circuit, acts as a shunt reactance and affects the frequency of
oscillation. The amount of shunt reactance depends on the mutual
Because the impedance of the vertical deflection coils is high conductance of the tube, which in turn, is dependent on the grid
at the 15.75 Kc horizontal frequency, two 560 ohm damping re- voltage. A change of .5 volts on the oscillator grid produces a
sistors R38, are shunted with the windings to prevent inter- corresponding frequency change of approximately 100 cycles.
action between the two sweep voltages. Normally the reactance tube is biased at -2.4 volts. Study of the
THE HORIZONTAL SWEEP circuit indicates that this bias is in series with the DC output
from the phase detector V18, and that the phase detector output
The purpose of the combined horizontal sweep circuits is to dev- voltage affects the reactance tube grid voltage,
elop a saw -tooth current through the horizontal deflection coils
which produces a magnetic field that moves the electron beam ine sync pulses from the sync separator V15A are applied
horizontally across the picture tube. The horizontal synchron- through the 75 MMFi) capacitor C73 to the center tap of the phase
izing pulses from the transmitter must solely control the sweep. detector winding. Fig. 24 indicates how the sync pulses are sup-
Noise pulses must be discriminated against so they are unable to er -imposed on the 15.75 Kc sine wave. Although the amplitude of
produce triggering, and cause erratic operation and instability. each individual sine wave and sync pulse remains the same, the
The saw -tooth voltage originates in the plate circuit of the combined pulse and sine wave amplitude changes with difference
LAST EQUALIZINS 0 EQUALIZING HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL PULSES VERTICAL PULSES PULSES
PULSE PULSES

J. 4 S R

--sorra, or Norm'

0-WAN\,-,---0 C
VERTICAL /IMPARTED
PULSES IN C PULSE OUT

I 0- 0

VOLTAGE NECESSARY TO VOLTAGE SUILO-UP

TRIGGER ILOOKINI OSCILLATOR ACROSS INTEGRATING
CAPACITOR C

Fig. 23 The Effect of Vertical Synchronizing Pulses on the Integrating Capacitor.

181
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
a

\./
VOLTAGE CURRENT

IS
VOLTAGE CURRENT

Fig. 24 Voltage at the Plates of the Phase Detector.

in phase. At resonance, tne horizontal oscillator is properly Fig. 25 Voltage Wave Forms Necessary to Produce Saw -Tooth
phased with the sync pulses and the amplitude at A and B is Current Through a Resistance, Inductance and Combination
equal (reference broken line.) Each diode conducts equally and of Resistance and Inductance.
the DC voltages across the two load resistors are the same but THE HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
opposite in polarity. The resultant voltage across the full load
(cathode to cathode) is zero. Since the output is zero, no change The 10,000 volt DC supply for the second anode of the picture tube
in grid voltage occurs and results in no oscillator frequency is developed by the 6BG6 horizontal sweep amplifier V23, and
change. Under 'frequency high' condition, the horizontal os- its associated output transformer and high voltage rectifier.
and
cillator frequency is above that of the incoming sync pulses The power supply is the kick back type in which the high voltage
the plate of the upper diode has a higher combined sine wave is developed during the 7 microsecond retrace of the horizontal
sync pulse amplitude than the lower diode. This results in more sweep when the deflection coil current suddenly collapses. The
current flow in the upper diode circuit and a resultant positive saw -tooth current which produces the sweep, flows for approxi-
difference voltage across the phase detector load. The positive mately 53 microseconds. This is the approximate time required
voltage adds to the -2.4 V fixed bias and makes the grid more to move the beam from the left to the right side of the picture
negative causing the shunt reactance to increase by the amount tube. After the sweep reaches the right side of the picture tube,
necessary to lower the frequency of the horizontal oscillator. the tube is blanked out and the current suddenly collapses. This
Under 'frequency low' condition, the lower diode conducts more sudden collapse of current through the deflection coils generates a
current and the difference voltage is negative. This voltage sub- 15.75 Kc voltage which is greatly stepped up by auto -trans-
tracts from the -2.4 bias and makes the grid of the reactance tube former action. A low voltage winding supplies filament current
less negative. A reduction in the shunt reactance occurs causing for the 1B3GT high voltage rectifier V25, where rectification
an increase in the frequency to correspond with the incoming sync develops the 10,000 volts DC for the second anode of the picture
pulses. tube. Because of the high ripple frequency, very little filter-
ing is necessary. The 500 Mmfd 15 Kv capacitor, which is also
The HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL R73, which is connected used to mount the 1B3GT socket, the 470,000 ohm resistor and the
from the grid of the horizontal oscillator to chassis, has a slight capacity formed by the inner and outer coating on the picture tube
effect on the natural frequency of the oscillator. It is used to ad- adequately filter the high voltage.
just the oscillator frequency to approximately that of the sync
pulses after which the phase detector and the reactance tube as- When servicing the high voltage power supply, extreme care must
sume control. be exercised to avoid contact with the second anode high potential.
A well insulated vacuum tube voltmeter, which has a 10 Kv range,
The output from the plate of the horizontal oscillator is a flat may be used to measure the high potential. Failure in any sec-
topped wave which is differentiated for triggering the discharge tion of the 15.75 Kc horizontal sweep circuit may cause the supply
tube. A saw -tooth voltage is developed by charging and discharg- to be inoperative. If the difficulty is not obvious, circuit tracing
ing the 600 MMFD capacitor C79. The capacitor charges when should begin at the 6K6 horizontal oscillator, through the 6SN7
the grid of the V21A becomes highly negative, due to the charge horizontal discharge tube and the 6BG6 horizontal amplifier.
accumulated by the grid capacitor C83, and cuts off plate current The 6BG6 plate voltage must be measured at terminal 4 on T 11.
flow. Since the tube does not draw plate current when cut off, Do not measure the voltage at the plate of the tube because the
there is no appreciable voltage drop across the 680,000 ohm plate voltage at this point is extrem ely high due to the inductive
load resistor R20 and the capacitor charges to approximately full build-up through the transformer. The 5V4 damping tube V 24,
plate potential. It is the linear charge of this capacitor that pro- adds an additional 80 volts to the plate voltage of the 6BG6 hori-
duces the trace portion of the saw -tooth voltage. When the posi- zontal amplifier. Failure of this tube will greatly reduce the high
tive half of the pulse appears at the grid, V21A conducts heavily voltage output.
and C79 discharges through it. The charge of the capacitor is
the trace, and the discharge is the retrace. Study of fig. 25 indi-
cates the type of pulses necessary to produce a saw -tooth current THE DAMPING TUBE
through an inductance. The voltage and current through a resis-
tance is in phase and a saw -tooth voltage is necessary to produce The linear rise of current through the horizontal deflection coils
a saw -tooth current. Since an inductance has inherent resistance, moves the electron beam from the left to
the right side of the
the voltage wave form must be a combination of saw -tooth and picture tube in approximately 53 microseconds. The current must
microseconds
pulse to produce a saw -tooth current through the deflection coils. then return to its starting value in approximately 7current through
This wave is formed by the 8,200 ohm resistor R47 which is in to produce the retrace. This sudden collapse of
series with the charge discharge capacitor C79 and the 25,000 an inductance, produces an oscillatory condition (See fig. 26 )
ohm HORIZONTAL DRIVE CONTROL R77. which would destroy the linearity of the sweep and must be re-
moved by the damping tube V24. When the plate of the damping
tube becomes more positive than the cathode, conduction occurs
182 which heavily loads the circuit and prevents the undesirable os-
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
ciliation. As a result of the conduction, a DC potential of approx- high velocity electrons penetrate the backing and strike the fluor-
imately 80 volts is developed and stored in the .25 MFD capaci- escent screen. Low velocity ions cannot penetrate the backing and
tor. This voltage is added to the plate voltage of the 6BG6 hori- do not reach the fluorescent screen where damage could occur.
zontal amplifier and raises its potential from 400 to 480 volts
for greater output and better performance. Picture tubes, such as the 10BP4 and 12LP4 do not have a metal
backing behind the fluorescent screen and if the ions were allow-
THE VIDEO AMPLIFIER ed to bombard the screen, a brown burn spot would result. To
prevent this condition, the electron gun of these tubes is slightly
The output from the video detector ranges in frequency from 30 bent so that the ion and electron stream is directed at the neck
cycles to approximately 4 Mc. Since the output is very low, it rather than at the screen of the tube. The beam bender, which
must be amplified by the video amplifier without appreciable loss is a permanent magnet fitted around the neck of the tube, bends
to the higher video frequencies. The high frequency response of the electrons back into their proper axis so that they strike the
a video amplifier is limited by the impedance which the inter - screen. The heavier ions are not affected by the magnetic field
electrode and stray capacities of tubes and circuits produce. and do not reach the screen.
Since the capacitive.reactance decreases as the frequency in-
creases, the higher frequencies could be relatively 'shorted out' The beam bender has an identifying arrow stamped on it. When
unless the effect of the undesirable capacities is removed. This it is installed, the arrow must point towards the face of the pic-
is accomplished by inserting series and shunt perking coils L21. ture tube. To make the adjustment, move and slightly rotate the
L22, L68, L69 and L7G, to cancel the effect of the distributed cap- beam bender along the neck of the tube until the brightest picture
acities. The peaking coils form a series resonant circuit in which appears. It may be necessary to readjust the focus and intensity
the capacitive reactance is cancelled by the inductive reactance. controls during the adjustment.
In addition to the peaking coils, the plate load resistors are of low
value so that their impedance at the highest video frequencies is
approximately that introduced by the stray capacities. Use of THE FOCUS COIL
peaking coils and low plate load resistors allows the video ampli-
fier to have a reasonably flat frequency response to 4 Mc. DC current flow through the focus coil develops a magnetic field
which is parallel to the electron beam in the picture tube. As long
The 1st video amplifier V7B also acts as a noise clipper. The as the parallel condition exists, the magnetic field remains uncut
tube is biased so that noise pulses do not produce a plate current by the electrons and has little effect. If the electrons diverge from
change and, consequently, do not appear in the output. The video the parallel path, the magnetic field is cut and counters to force
signal, which appears at the grid of the 2nd video amplifier V8, them back into their proper axis. An improperly adjusted focus
has an AC component (See fig.27 ). It must be restored to its coil causes the electron beam to hit the neck rather than the face
DC component before being applied to the picture tube grid. DC of the picture tube, causing the corners of the raster to be shad-
restoration is made possible by operating the 2nd video ampli- owed. Adjustment of the focus coil is as follows:
fier at zero bias, allowing the video signal to produce proportion- When interchanging picture tubes, it may be necessary to change
al grid current flow and develop an automatic bias which allows the position of the focus switch (See fig. 1) to affect proper focus-
only the DC component to appear at the output (See fig.27). In or- ing.
der to maintain the DC component, the plate of the 2nd video amp-
lifier is directly coupled to the grid of the picture tube. 1. Check the vertical and horizontal centering to see that the ras-
ter is properly centered.
The CONTRAST CONTROL R46, in the plate circuit of the 12AT7
1st video amplifier, regulates the magnitude of the signal applied 2. Loosen the focus coil wing nuts (See fig. I ) and turn the coil
to the grid of the picture tube. The BRIGHTNESS CONTROL R50, until the full raster, free from corner shadows, appears on the pic-
regulates the grid bias of the picture tube. The CONTRAST and ture tube.
BRIGHTNESS controls must be varied simultaneously to obtain
the greatest contrast between black and white components of the 3. Tighten wing nuts after adjustment.
picture.
THE BEAM BENDER
VERTICAL CENTERING CONTROL
The electron gun of a picture tube emits both electrons and ions.
The ions are much heavier than the electrons and if allowed to The vertical centering control R68 changes the polarity and mag-
bombard the picture tube fluorescent screen, damage in the form nitude of DC current flow through the vertical deflection coils.
of a burn could occur. Current flow develops a magnetic field which shifts the raster in
a vertical plane. Since the 20 ohm centering control is in series
Picture tubes, such as the 10FP4 and 12KP4, are constructed with the 400 volt supply, current flow through the various circuits
with a metal backing directly behind the fluorescent screen. The in the receiver produces the necessary voltage drop across it.
HOW
AMPLIFIER

Mb -TOW 96441. AC FORM

DC wesnomArrox
OCCURS CORE
Fig. 26 Oscillation Removed
by Damping Tube.
C.

Fig. 27 DC Restoration.
183
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Because the centering voltage is obtained from the center tap HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY AND PHASE ADJUSTMENTS
and arm of the control, voltage to the deflection coils can be posi-
tive, negative or zero, depending on the position of the arm. The HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY adjustment L74 (See fig.2
resonates the horizontal oscillator at lb.'10 KC. When proper-
THE HORIZONTAL CENTERING CONTROL ly adjusted, loss of horizontal sync should not occur regardless
of the HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL setting. To make the ad-
The horizontal centering control R81 regulates the polarity and justment, see that the picture is locked vertically and proceed
magnitude of DC current flow through the horizontal deflection as follows:
coils. The current flow develops a magnetic field which shifts 1. Turn the HORIZONTAL HOLD fully counter clockwise.
the electron beam for proper horizontal centering of the picture.
Two voltages which are in opposition, produce the current flow. 2. Adjust HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY until the picture "locks"
Voltage #1 is developed by the damper tube V24 and voltage #2 in sync.
results from the drop across the 100 ohm centering control.
Since the voltages are in opposition, current flow can be revers- 3. Turn the HORIZONTAL HOLD fully clockwise and observe
ed by adjusting the centering control so that the difference volt- that the picture remains 'locked". If loss of sync occurs when
age is either negative or positive. the selector switch is turned to another channel and returned, a
slight readjustment is necessary.
THE WIDTH CONTROL The HORIZONTAL PHASE CONTROL adjusts the phase detector
input and affects the position of the picture on the raster. When
The horizontal output voltage appears between terminals 1 and 3 turning the adjustment screw L73, the picture moves to the left
on the output transformer T11. A portion of the secondary wind- or right side of the raster. Proper adjustment is indicated when
ing is shunted by a variable inductance L71 which is the width con- the picture is moved farthest to the right. A broad peak is noted
trol. Varying the position of the slug changes the shunt inductance at this point.
and results in changing the magnitude of sweep voltage across the
horizontal deflection coils. As the shunt inductance increases, the
output voltage increases and the pattern widens horizontally. When
the slug is removed from the coil, the shunt inductance is at min-
ALIGNMENT
imum and the voltage and pattern width is minimum. SPECIAL ALIGNMENT FIXTURES

S-15369 BALANCE TRANSFORMER - Used to match the 50 ohm

ADJUSTMENTS Mega -Sweep unbalanced output to a 300 ohm receiver an-
A.G.C. ADJUSTMENT tenna input. Can also be used for matching a coaxial
type antenna transmission line to a 300 ohm receiver in-
The performance of the A.G.C. circuit is checked or adjusted by put.
applying a known value of voltage into the video detector output
jack "S" and observing the corresponding voltage at the A.G.C. S-15370 BIAS TEST FIXTURE - (Plugs into test jacks at rear
output jack "C". To make the adjustment proceed as follows. of receiver chassis), provides an adjustable bias vari-
able from 0 to 3.0 volts for use during alignment and
A.G.C. adjustment.
A.O.C. DE T

S-15371 CONVERTER COUPLING RING - Made to fit around

converter tube for the purpose of injecting an I. F. sig-
nal into the grid during alignment.

S-15372 R. F. ALIGNMENT FIXTURE - Used for the separate

alignment of turret tuner R. F. strips.

Fig.28 Connections for A.G.C. Adjustment

1. Turn the station selector switch to an unused (numbered)
channel, disconnect the antenna leads and short circuit the antenna CONVERTER CM/PLINY
terminals. RINE , AVM NO SLUM

2. Plug the negative lead of the S-15370 alignment fixture into

jack "S" and the positive lead to chassis. The fixture connections
remain in this position for the remaining steps.
3. Adjust the fixture control for -1.5V indication at jack "V.
4. Adjust AGC delay control R40 (See fig. 31) for a -3.8V V.T.
V.M. indication at jack "C".
5. Readjust fixture voltage at jack "S" to -1V. The correspond- 500 MMFO MICA -
ing voltage at jack "C" should be -0.5 to -2.
6. Readjust fixture voltage at jack "5" to -2V. The correspond-
ing voltage at jack "C" should be- 5 to -7 . 5V
Fig. 30 Connectors.
184
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
Fig. 29 Test Equipment.

%FN. Ard.

OW IV MO.. U
auanE
a
a

over 11101MILIMP
"AD

IOIRRIOW
/WK'S= ERASED? 10 maw A/MAMMY
MOD MOW, MTh MIN 1111130 amen.

A.C.LINE CONNECTOR
& INTERLOCK

\ FOCUS COIL ADJUSTMENT

LI

V24 SOUNT
D 2INPUT COIL
21.3 MC.
5V4G
DAUB
C18
R. F. PLATE TUNING
L2 PRI.-TOP
T3
2ND I. F.TRANS.
L9 21.3 MC.
CONV. PLATE I .F. L3 SEC. -BOTTOM
TUNING 6 U6

DEFLECTION COIL ADJ.

L4 PRI rTOP
FOCUS CURRENT
RANGE SWITCH -.6 IB3GT T4
8016 3RD I.F. TRANS.
I
1; /CHANNEL OSC.TRIM. 21.3 MC.
',Or L5 SEC. -BOTTOM

L6 PR 1. -BOTTOM
LI3 PARALLEL TUNED V15 V 21 V22
SOUND TRAP L ID T5
ERIES TH=r-luNEV16 6SL7GT
SOUND TRAP 65N7 EVE GT DISC.I.F.TRANS.
LI4 VIDEO I.F.CPLG.COIL GT 21.3 MC.

LIE 1ST VIDEO LF. INTERSTAGE

0) J3E
WOUND TRAP
6 U6
L7 SEC. -TOP

LIB 2ND VIDEO I . F. INTERSTAGE

6K6GT
40 A.G.C.DELAY CONT.
PHONEVISION SOUND
CONNECTOR
2ND ANODE 10 KV
--HIGH VOLTAGE V3
6V6GT
01___5.
24 VIDEO CATHODE TRAP
V 28
V6 )'-6AH6 12 K P41
OR >28F20
L 19 3RD VIDEO I.F. COILCPRID
I 2 L.P4

28E21
C29 CPLG. AOJUSTMEN 10FRP4
O
10 BP 4 28E22
L 20 3RD VIDEO I. F.COIL (SEC.) NOTE:
TYPES 1 2LP4 S IOBP4 REQUIRE BEAM
BENDER (NOT SHOWN HERE) ON NECK
OF TUBE.
- -r

NOR. FRED.
CHANNEL SELECTOR FOCUS L HOR. CENT. WIDTH OR. PHASE
HEIGHT HOR.HOLD ,CONTRAST
FINE TUNING VERT. HOLD -V ERT.CENT.
Fig. 31 Tube and Trimmer Layout.
VERT. LIN.
HOR.DRIVE
BRIGHTNESS -
ON -OFF SWITCH
& VOL. CO N T. 185
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
PICTURE I. F. ALIGNMENT
Set up the equipment as indicated in fig.29 . Connect output #1 4
to point F (picture I.F. strip) and chassis. Remove the AGC tube
V14 and connect the negative side of a 1.5 volt bias battery to jack
"C" and the positive side to chassis. See fig. 37 for bias and scope
connections. If the S15370 alignment fixture is available it should
be adjusted to 1.5 volts and substituted for the battery. Connect
the oscilloscope between jack "S" and chassis.
2/.6 259
POWER SUPPLY
SOCKET
Fig.32 3rd Picture I. F. Response.
PHONEVISION SOCKET

2. Connect output #1 between point G and chassis. Reduce the

Mega -Sweep gain until the pattern on oscilloscope is the same
amplitude as in Step 1. Set the Mega -Marker to 25.3 Mc and ad-
just L18 until the I. F. peak corresponds to the 25.3 Mc marker.
Adjust the Mega -Sweep for maximum output and turn the coarse
frequency adjustment control until pattern is centered on the os-
cilloscope screen. It is possible to get two modes of operation
from the Mega -Sweep. Select the mode which sweeps from low
to high frequency. When the proper mode is selected the low fre-
quency portion of the I.F. response curve will appear on the left
side of the scope screen. Adjust the vertical gain on the scope
and the Mega -Sweep sweep amplitude control, until a sizeable pat-
tern is obtained on the oscilloscope screen (See fig.32 ). The
scope vertical gain is now the reference point and must not be
changed for the remaining adjustments. The horizontal gain con-
trol must be adjusted so that both ends of the sweep are visible 25.3
on the scope. After these initial adjustments have been made,
proceed as follows: Fig.33 2nd Picture I. F. Response.
3. Connect output #1 between point H and chassis. Reduce the
1. Set the Mega -Marker to 21.6 Mc and adjust L19 and L20 un- Mega -Sweep gain as in Step 2. Set the Mega -Marker to 22.2 Mc
til the two over -coupled response curves are equal in amplitude and adjust L16 until the low frequency peak corresponds to
with the low frequency peak corresponding to the 21.6 Mc marker. 22.2 Mc. The high frequency peak falls at approximately 25.1
To avoid distortion, always use minimum marker amplitude. Set Mc. Set the Mega -Marker to 27.3 Mc and adjust trap, L17 for
the Mega -Marker to 25.9 Mc and adjust C29 until the high fre- minimum marker indication. Always use maximum marker amp-
quency peak corresponds to 25.9 Mc. Check the 21.6 Mc peak litude for trap adjustments.
and repeat operation if necessary.

L24 L17
Ath
L/5
273 MC 2/.31.1C
TRAP
TRAP

L201

41M

C29 L/9 L/8 L/6

Fig. 35 Picture I. F. Sub -Chassis.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS

22.2 25./
Fig.34 1st Picture L F. Response. 0
4. Connect output #1 to the converter coupling ring, Part #S15371 ACC OUTPUT $
and fit the ring over the 6AG5 converter tube. Because of the low OSCILLOSCOPE CONNECTION

coupling capacity, it will be necessary to increase the Mega -Sweep

output in order to obtain a sizeable pattern on the scope. Set the Fig. 37 Test Jacks.
Mega -Marker to 21.3 Mc and adjust traps L13 and L15 for mini-
mum indication on the scope. Adjust L14 and L9 (on RF shelf)
alternately until the response curve has a reasonably flat top.
CHANNEL
Set the Mega -Marker to 25.8 Mc and check the half -way and other CHANNEL CHANNEL
6 MC
points indicated by the over-all response curve.
11.311I6 ASSOC/ATE
501/110 TRAP
ETENG AA/AGENT
SOUND TRAP
213 273

PICTURE CARRIER 25.81/C PICTURE

25.8 CARRIER

222

22.2 25/
Fig.36 Over -All Picture I. F. Response.
71.75 6725
21.3 25.8
SOUND I. F. ALIGNMENT 93.05 93.05

The 21.3 Mc, sound I. F. transformers are of the type indicated

in fig.40. A special adjustment wrench, Part No. 68-7 is avail-
able for alignment work. Extreme care must be exercised when
aligning these transformers to keep the adjustment slugs in the
approximate relationship to the coils as in fig. 40. If care is not 9305 LOCAL OSCILLATOR

exercised, it is possible to advance the top slug beyond and the CHANNEL 4

bottom slug above its associated coil. This would result in an

Fig. 38 Converter and I. F. Frequencies.

V5 V 12 AT 7
VIDEO DET. a
6AU6
lu PIX IF.
6AU6
20I2 PI1 I.E.3'K' PI6AH6
X I.F.
11n VIDEO AMP.

--(4)

V191.0 I. VOLTAGES 55550

WITH HNC SIGNAL 11111.vi

Fig 39 Schematic Diagram Picture I. F. Channel. 187

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
incorrect coefficient of coupling, unstable and improper align-
ment. Always keep the alignment tool in a vertical plane when 2/.1 MC
adjustments are being made. If this is not done the undesirable
situation may arise where both slugs are turned simultaneously.
To align the sound I. F. channel, set up the equipment as indica-
ted in fig.29 and proceed as follows:
1. Connect the oscilloscope point "A' to chassis (full discrim- 21.3 MC
inator load.) Connect output #1 to point "C' and chassis (limiter
grid.) Adjust the Mega -Sweep coarse frequency and sweep amp-
litude controls for a sizeable pattern, (See fig.41 ) on the scope.
Set the Mega -Marker to 21.3 Mc. Always use as little marker
amplitude and R. F. input as necessary to obtain a satisfactory
indication on the scope. Adjust L6 and L7 to obtain a symmetri- 2/. 5MC
cal discriminator response curve with the 21.3 Mc marker fall- Fig.41 Output From Discriminator
ing at the center reference line. The peak to peak discriminator
width should be approximately 450 Kc.
2. Connect the scope to point "B" and chassis (limiter grid.)
Connect output #1 to point "D' (grid, 2nd I. F.) to chassis. Ad-
just L4 and L5 for symmetry and gain with the 21.3 Mc marker
falling at the center of the response curve (See fig.42).
3. The scope connection remains at point "B". Connect output
#1 to point E' (1st I. F. grid) and chassis and adjust L2 and L3
as in Step 2.
4. The scope connection remains at point "B'. Connect output
#1 to the S-15371 L F. coupler ring and place coupler over the
converter tube. Advance Mega -Sweep gain and adjust Ll as in 21.3 MC
Step 2.
Fig..te Sound I. F. Response
R. F. OSCILLATOR AND ANTENNA ALIGNMENT
1. Set the receiver channel selector switch and the Mega -Marker
The various oscillator circuits are adjusted by connecting out- Sr. to channel 10. Turn the receiver fine tuning control for zero
put #2 (See fig.29 ) to the antenna terminals of the receiver. A indication on the meter. It will be noted that the meter indicates
vacuum tube voltmeter is connected across the full discrimina- aresonance.
positive or negative voltage as the oscillator is tuned through
Proper adjustment is the zero point between the two
tor load Point "A" (fig.43 ) to chassis. If the chassis is in the
cabinet, the meter can be connected to the phonevision connector peaks.
on the sound chassis or the white lead on the volume control Normally it will be unnecessary to adjust the high frequency os-
(rear section of dual control). After the equipment is set up, pro- cillator trimmer L10 (See fig.45 )- However, if it is impossible
ceed as follows: to resonate channel 10, with the fine tuning control, a slight ad-
justment may be necessary. To make this adjustment, turn the
receiver fine tuning control until the eccentric tuning slug hold-
ing screw faces upward. Insert a pointed tool into one of the ad-
justing slots and move the disc until resonance is obtained. Af-
ter channel 10 is adjusted,the position of the fine tuning control
must remain unchanged during the remaining adjustments.
ALIGNMENT 2. Set the channel selector and the Mega -Marker Sr. to channel 7.
WRENCH
Adjust the strip oscillator trimmer (See fig. 46) for zero indica-
tion on the meter. This procedure is followed on channels 8, 9, 11,
12 and 13.

TUNING I.F.WINDINGS
SLUGS

Fig. 40 Sound I. F. Transfomer.

188 Fig. 43 Sound I. F. Sub -Chassis.

 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
3. Set the channel selector and the Mega -Marker Sr. to channel 4.
Adjust the oscillator trimmer for zero indication on the meter as
in Step 2. If resonance does not occur, it may be necessary to re-
adjust L11 (the low frequency oscillator trimmer) until resonance
is obtained. Channels 2, 3, 5 and 6 are then adjusted. If the above
adjustments have been properly made it will be unnecessary to ad-
just the fine tuning control on any channel.
If the television stations are on the air, the same procedure is fol-
lowed as outlined above except that the transmitted signal is sub-
stituted for the Mega -Marker Sr.
After the oscillator adjustments have been made, proceed to align
the antenna trimmer of each channel as follows:
3. Connect the scope input from tip jack "5' to chassis and ad-
just the Mega -Sweep coarse frequency and sweep amplitude con-
trols to obtain a pattern similar to fig.47 . Always keep the
Mega -Sweep output low enough so that the peak to peak voltage,
as indicated by the oscilloscope, does not exceed 3 volts. If the
oscilloscope is not calibrated, connect a vacuum tube voltmeter
to tip jack 'V and chassis. Adjust the Mega -Sweep attenuator
for a 1.5 to 2 volt indication on the meter.
4. Adjust the antenna trimmer (fig. 46) for symmetry and gain.
This procedure is followed on all channels, the Mega -Sweep
coarse frequency control being re -set for each individual channel.
If it is impossible to obtain a reasonably flat R. F. characteristic

\I
curve on any particular channel, the fault may be in the converter
input tuned circuits and replacement of the strip is necessary.
1. Remove the A.G.C. tube V14 and connect the negative side of
a 1.5 volt battery to tip jack "C" and the positive side to chassis.
If the S-15370 alignment fixture is available, it should be adjust -
ed to 1.5 volts and substituted for the battery.

2. Connect output #1 (See fig.29 ) through the S-15369 impedance

m atching transformer to the antenna terminals of the receiver.

Fig. 44 Sound I. F. Schematic Diagram.

Fig. 47 R. F. Response Curve.
.V.rem9C:""'
vz
6 Al 6 6AU6 6AU6 6TB 6 \/ gGT -R4A1.;
1ST SOUND 2ND SOUND LIMITER DISC PET POWER AMP.
IF IF 1ST AUDIO

SP

VI V2 V3
6AG5 6AG5 6J6
RF CONY. OSC

CI6 L9
HIGH FREQ.
TUNING SLUG

LOW FREQ.
TUNING SLUG
1
TUNING SHAFT

ANTENNA
CONECTIONS 1\-

L10
HIGH FREQ.
OSC.-
L II
Fig. 45 R. F. Shelf Adjustments.
LOW FREQ.
OSC.
 MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1949 TELEVISION RECEIVERS
SERVICE HINTS
TROUBLE SHOOTING
V1 No picture - No sound. V17 Picture cannot be synced
Observation of the picture tube during operation of the receiver V2 Weak picture - Weak round. horizontally or vertically
can often be of value in determining the particular circuit in which V3 No picture - No sound. - Sound OK.
the trouble exists. Subsequent procedure will be the measure- V4 No picture - Sound OK. V18 Picture cannot be synced
ment of voltages and observation of wave forms. The receiver V5 No picture - Sound OK. horizontally - Sound OK.
wave form and voltage measurement chart, fig. 49 , lists the cor- V6 No picture - Sound OK. V19 Picture cannot be synced
rect readings obtained from a normal receiver. Departure from V7 No picture - Sound OK. horizontally - Sound OK.
these normal values will lead to the location of defective com- V8 No picture - Sound OK. V20 No raster - Sound OK.
ponents. V9 No sound - Picture OK. V21 No raster - Sound OK.
V10 No sound - Picture OK. V22 Raster reduced to thin hor-
The A.G.C. circuit is critical to tube changes, and the replace- V11 No sound - Picture OK. izontal line - Sound OK.
ment of the 12AT7 A.G.C. amplifier will necessitate readjustment V12 No sound - Picture OK. V23 No raster - Sound OK.
of the sensitivity control. V13 No sound - Picture OK. V24 No raster - Sound OK.
V14 No picture - Weak sound. V25 No raster - Sound OK.
The service man is cautioned against interchanging tubes in this V15 Picture cannot be synced V26 Undersized picture -
R. F. and I. F. stages of the receiver. When these tubes are test- horizontally or vertically Sound OK.
ed, care should be exercised so that they are re-inserted into - Sound OK. V27 Undersized picture canmt
their original sockets. V16 Picture cannot be synced be synced horizontally -
horizontally or vertically Sound OK.
Effects noted when various receiver stages are disabled by re- - Sound OK.
moving the tube:

STRIP POSITIONING GUIDE STRIP OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT

MOMS ,z4

I larcqr- trar c -41'9

kcin 0 r r -r noirrA r11110111r8131- 1110
or r tr-tr, 01317P'n-Airr-r"..5-***

B
intIg
.111

CONTACT
GUIDES

ANTENNA OSCILLATOR
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT

Fig. 46 Adjustment of the Channel Strips. 190

 +en
a; largo luatuaJnsvaw aRelioA put sulioa aikeht 6 143
,4 ocd 07011 71r1MOZIMON
R.
.
;15 SS3NIM911111
t-,
-4
a) 4 .4
ASYMI .r/0/1
cq 0Weall130 3A1110 7KLACIIA0N
-, '8 070M 7W4.1.413A
311116011V30 AlW3M7
co
V > a.)4
...,
51700d 71.01.1.83A 7VANOZIKW 11101AI 7VOLL10A
VON
6 -6., -4 o
a) 141913
SNPILL
74,01IVIS VOL 031171 Si 604130311 31#/M AGNICI 3 V 011.110ION1 Salt201M11
0
1 0:
P. td
E
"8 Ea
2 cti o g.. .9
-. , .8
sr 0.
gc.) 4 rs; .2
4
a)
699.1 6 W6a)IN°
..
c) --,
, .. C.1 a)
TO a
a) 0. 0 rn
Ts
g cd5 g .1 ..2 47 0,
C.) g C.) .4 : *4 2
.4. C.i MY ' S0
$: 4
2 gi
....,
4
, -6
00 0 "
a>
o En
t. 0 En
47sIdl75 M3I101
3912701 A07
U a v WI 0 to
1 4.+U % V. 4
2EE
; En
go 2
..a. Z. $..
g 5.
;-.. i., N -
i
lt, si
C
Lo E
0 L.
'E
0 4.,
cd
0 1'4
..,
11)
ed g4
° .:1 2. A::2 116
x41 g E Cg . .LN3Nr7/.1
E -t
0 o. ,*.-5 En 99.991;116,9 filgrf19
0.J --.
(.) ''A
E9,
4.9
LI 2ci
y 0 9 ....co
ot .o6 tau, nn
3 gi c
.-. 9 CU .C) of co
4g k P
'''a. 15 t
0 0M
4 4)
a) 47ddlIS 113/110d
.4 .b4 L.
61) E OS VI Q 0.
.4 tn
AM. a+
Col
ti., $.,c u ua ) ; r:! ia. : t It
g [la OW ti 54
.ts
rnr
inClf=,
000 ,,,,[1.
000301 000
CCOCE
000
pOCI 00 0
0o0 MOM
TOT 000
TOT
0o0
POO 000
00 ClIZIO
POO0 000
000 COO
000
COT
000 COT
MOO 000
000
000
OTT
000 OTT
000
TV'i1 MOO
000
88.
00 0 MOO
000
0 0000 COO
CEP UM OD
000
LtDalIC
00 00 0
potE0(40o
m®039
COO
000
 C8
FROM TUNER I

7
iettisrol.:tik
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM CHASSIS 28F10 and 28F20 Z Al .1

;41340 CI-Zr
(Chassis 28FZI and Z8FZZ same as Z8F20 except VZ8 is 10FP4 or 10BP4) . TO RF CHASSIS
--I
vp_squtco. F. A. I. G. OUT
TO SF CHSS1S ,TQ,Sg1Ap1F

. TO SpMD CHAS; S II+ TO P1; IF

,
#1:Yr." A

RED

Lau
4,0 04. VIDEO IF CHASSIS Pi UT
WH /TEL

- _J
0V
r-

;111
vcNF
my >
57 En -I

RI. 1.10 N
LE MEG z 41 N
P><
2.2 0
cm G)
0c-
Cf)

r. G.)
X, -4
O D<
.
'T co'
-.
;:
c Of
O
R35
. ,a'1T" T,

-
r.:-.

080 rO ?cfraQ
fNP - -c
z
`,7DR
Pw< .4--F.
+7;0 on 220 10% - o ; lit
si *1 5112V . )1W! `=,
----VVV".----,H,017C''C'
.82
mk0.
21

<7.
1.1: Po:
v.

-c ORANGE D.* 150v TO VIDEO I.F.CHASSIS El+ 130v ORANGE :gTL. )7E II
r GA

CD 5_
riC
RT3
m
r
cD (.1) <
1
8 ;":
75 > L,
"1 C
0 cr,
ma) t 3n 10%
00 :0
57
X R2
nee'" 0 :2%9 P 80Z
F41g 5200
10% =
"A.t.
00
c1)
w
OE zro
23

5;13 G m

<
I.
a><
0
0; 13 CAT
01

53s Iv
e
i r
..At=
4
^vv.
Iri <
-1
I Lao
8 2r. L_

0 -4 va
0.30

"f3 VI; 30

8 .240v
vN
R.3 RE12 150 np
FIXUS '8 BLOC TO 1ST 500E0 PLATE LOAD

SEA
a_
-4N<
' :3 0.2 E7
Tm
PI
NH 05111. -2.4v
i0

1- '" 4
mx
m
lig"
m room CHASSIS
re
RF SHELF GR ID A G G ADP
(190_,-
OR
LT1
" FIL.TO VIDEO IF N

193A
 1.6 `"?,DAY..?11',,,,a,M4C.WPA.(10P4V,TITAMPIPAIMIrWitM11. _Ve.P.6_VJMIMIVINMAY,04.!PAV ^P M`

...Another

,.
Supreme uUicationd .-

...52ervice Manual ...

.3, F
...

Supreme Publication.- are Available at All Leading Radio Jobbers